JP2024052864A - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] To provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the interest of the game. [Solution] In the first special symbol jackpot type "Time-saving A" and "Latent Probability Variation B" and the second special symbol jackpot type "Time-saving C", the effective pattern "A" of each probability variable area 73, 74 is set such that in the second round, the right-side probability variable area 73 is set as effective, while the left-side probability variable area 74 is set as ineffective. In the fifth round, the effective pattern "A" is set such that the left-side probability variable area 74 is set as effective, while the right-side probability variable area 73 is set as ineffective. In the other rounds (i.e., the first round, the third round, the fourth round, the sixth round, and the seventh round and onward), both probability variable areas 73, 74 are set as ineffective. [Selected Figure] Fig. 12

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines are configured to launch gaming media such as gaming balls into a gaming area provided on a gaming board, and a win/lose lottery is held based on whether the gaming ball enters one of multiple ball entry ports provided in the gaming area, and if the lottery results in a favorable state such as a win, a variable ball entry means that is normally closed is opened, and a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2017-148264 A

However, there is still room for improvement in this area, and it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above-mentioned circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine described in claim 1 comprises a launching means for launching gaming balls, a ball entry means into which the gaming ball launched by the launching means can enter, an information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information resulting from the entry of the gaming ball into the ball entry means, a judgment means for judging the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, a variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which it is difficult or impossible for the gaming ball to enter and a second state in which the gaming ball can enter, an advantageous state means for changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state by using the judgment result by the judgment means, a special area through which the gaming ball that has flowed into the variable ball entry means can pass, and the advantageous state means for changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state. The game device includes a second advantageous state means capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state, the advantageous state means including a special area switching means for switching whether or not the special area is enabled, the second advantageous state means being configured to generate the second advantageous state when the game ball passes through the special area that is enabled by the special area switching means, and not to generate the second advantageous state when the game ball passes through the special area that is not enabled by the special area switching means, and including a multiple timing inflow means for inflowing the game ball into the enabled special area at multiple timings during the advantageous state when the second advantageous state is generated.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, there is provided a launching means for launching a gaming ball, a ball entry means into which the gaming ball launched by the launching means can enter, an information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information resulting from the entry of the gaming ball into the ball entry means, a judgment means for judging the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, a variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which it is difficult or impossible for the gaming ball to enter and a second state in which the gaming ball can enter, an advantageous state means for changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state by using the judgment result by the judgment means, a special area through which the gaming ball that has flowed into the variable ball entry means can pass, and the advantageous state by the advantageous state means. and a second advantageous state means capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state, the advantageous state means including a special area switching means for switching whether or not the special area is enabled, the second advantageous state means being configured to generate the second advantageous state when the game ball passes through the special area that is enabled by the special area switching means, and not to generate the second advantageous state when the game ball passes through the special area that is not enabled by the special area switching means, and including a multiple timing inflow means for inflowing the game ball into the enabled special area at multiple timings during the advantageous state when the second advantageous state is generated. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. A rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. This is an enlarged front view showing a schematic front view of the variable winning device. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of a variable winning device for explaining the behavior of a ball that flows into the large winning opening when the right special probability area opening/closing plate is in the open state and the left special probability area opening/closing plate 74a is in the closed state; (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of a variable winning device for explaining the behavior of a ball that flows into the large winning opening when the left special probability area opening/closing plate is in the open state and the right special probability area opening/closing plate is in the closed state; and (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of a variable winning device for explaining the behavior of a ball that flows into the large winning opening when the right special probability area opening/closing plate and the left special probability area opening/closing plate are both in the closed state. 1A is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of area division settings and effective line settings on a display screen, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. This is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of various counters, a counter buffer, a first reserved ball storage area, a second reserved ball storage area, a reserved ball execution area, a regular reserved ball storage area, and a regular reserved ball execution area. 1A is a diagram showing a schematic example of a jackpot random number table. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing a schematic example of a jackpot type table for special chart 1, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a schematic example of a jackpot type table for special chart 2. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a schematic example of a probability change area opening and closing table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a probability change area effective table. FIG. This is a timing chart that shows the activation timing of the large prize opening solenoid, right special probability area solenoid and left special probability area solenoid in each round of the first special pattern jackpot type ``Time-saving A'', the ball detection timing at the large prize opening switch, right special probability area switch and left special probability area switch, and the setting timing of the right special probability area valid flag, left special probability area valid flag and special probability transition flag. This is a timing chart that shows the timing of operation of the large prize opening solenoid, right special probability area solenoid and left special probability area solenoid in the first and second rounds of the jackpot type ``Time-saving A'' for the first special pattern, the timing of ball detection at the large prize opening switch, right special probability area switch and left special probability area switch, and the timing of setting the right special probability area valid flag, left special probability area valid flag and special probability transition flag. This is a timing chart that shows the activation timing of the large prize opening solenoid, right special probability area solenoid and left special probability area solenoid in each round of the first special pattern jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", the ball detection timing at the large prize opening switch, right special probability area switch and left special probability area switch, and the setting timing of the right special probability area valid flag, left special probability area valid flag and special probability transition flag. This is a timing chart which shows the timing of operation of the large prize opening solenoid, the right special probability area solenoid and the left special probability area solenoid in the first to third rounds of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A" of the first special pattern, the timing of ball detection at the large prize opening switch, the right special probability area switch and the left special probability area switch, and the timing of setting the right special probability area valid flag, the left special probability area valid flag and the special probability transition flag. This is a timing chart that shows the activation timing of the large prize opening solenoid, right special probability area solenoid and left special probability area solenoid in each round of the first special pattern jackpot type ``Time-saving B'', the ball detection timing at the large prize opening switch, right special probability area switch and left special probability area switch, and the setting timing of the right special probability area valid flag, left special probability area valid flag and special probability transition flag. This is a timing chart that shows the activation timing of the large prize opening solenoid, right special probability area solenoid and left special probability area solenoid in each round of the first special pattern jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B", the ball detection timing at the large prize opening switch, right special probability area switch and left special probability area switch, and the setting timing of the right special probability area valid flag, left special probability area valid flag and special probability transition flag. This is a timing chart that shows the activation timing of the large prize opening solenoid, right special probability area solenoid and left special probability area solenoid in each round of the first special pattern jackpot type "Probability Fluctuation A", the ball detection timing at the large prize opening switch, right special probability area switch and left special probability area switch, and the setting timing of the right special probability area valid flag, left special probability area valid flag and special probability transition flag. This is a timing chart that shows the activation timing of the large prize opening solenoid, right special probability area solenoid and left special probability area solenoid in each round of the second special pattern jackpot type ``Time-saving C'', the ball detection timing at the large prize opening switch, right special probability area switch and left special probability area switch, and the setting timing of the right special probability area valid flag, left special probability area valid flag and special probability transition flag. This is a timing chart that shows the activation timing of the large prize opening solenoid, right special probability area solenoid and left special probability area solenoid in each round of the second special pattern jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C", the ball detection timing at the large prize opening switch, right special probability area switch and left special probability area switch, and the setting timing of the right special probability area valid flag, left special probability area valid flag and special probability transition flag. 5 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. A flowchart showing the start winning processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. 13 is a flowchart showing the special chart change processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. 13 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. 13 is a flowchart showing the large prize opening/closing control process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. 11 is a flowchart showing an open setting process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 11 is a flowchart showing an open process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. 5 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by an MPU in a main control device. 5 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. A schematic cross-sectional view of the variable winning device and the second variable winning device of the second embodiment when viewed from the front. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine of a second embodiment. A diagram showing a schematic example of a large prize opening and closing table in the second embodiment. This is a timing chart which shows the timing of operation of the large prize opening solenoid, the second large prize opening solenoid, the right special probability area solenoid and the left special probability area solenoid in the first to third rounds of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C" of the second special pattern in the second embodiment, the timing of ball detection at the large prize opening switch, the second prize opening switch, the right special probability area switch and the left special probability area switch, and the timing of setting the right special probability area valid flag, the left special probability area valid flag and the special probability transition flag. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot processing executed by the MPU in the main control device of the second embodiment. A schematic cross-sectional view of the variable winning device and the second variable winning device of the third embodiment when viewed from the front. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine of a third embodiment. A diagram showing a schematic example of a large prize opening and closing table of the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot processing executed by the MPU in the main control device of the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an open setting process executed by an MPU in a main control device according to a third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an open process executed by an MPU in the main control device of the third embodiment. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable winning device of the fourth embodiment when viewed from the front, (b) is a schematic enlarged cross-sectional view for explaining the behavior of a ball flowing down the guide passage when the special variable area opening/closing plate is slid downstream, the right-side special variable area is open, and the left-side special variable area is closed, (c) is a schematic enlarged cross-sectional view for explaining the behavior of a ball flowing down the guide passage when the special variable area opening/closing plate is slid upstream, the left-side special variable area is open, and the right-side special variable area is closed, and (b) is a schematic enlarged cross-sectional view for explaining the behavior of a ball flowing down the guide passage when the special variable area opening/closing plate is in the initial state, and the right-side special variable area and the left-side special variable area are both closed. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine of a fourth embodiment. A diagram showing a schematic example of a probability change area opening and closing table of the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an open setting process executed by an MPU in a main control device according to a fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an open process executed by an MPU in a main control device of the fourth embodiment. This is a timing chart that shows the activation timing of the large prize opening solenoid, the right special probability area solenoid and the left special probability area solenoid in the first and second rounds of the jackpot type "time-saving A" of the first special pattern in the fifth embodiment, the ball detection timing at the large prize opening switch, the right special probability area switch and the left special probability area switch, and the setting timing of the right special probability area valid flag, the left special probability area valid flag and the special probability transition flag. This is a timing chart which shows the timing of operation of the large prize opening solenoid, the right special probability area solenoid and the left special probability area solenoid in the first to third rounds of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A" of the first special pattern in the fifth embodiment, the timing of ball detection at the large prize opening switch, the right special probability area switch and the left special probability area switch, and the timing of setting the right special probability area valid flag, the left special probability area valid flag and the special probability transition flag. 13 is a flowchart showing an open setting process executed by an MPU in a main control device of the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an open process executed by an MPU in a main control device of the fifth embodiment. This is a timing chart which shows the timing of operation of the large prize opening solenoid, the right special probability area solenoid and the left special probability area solenoid in the first to third rounds of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A" of the first special pattern in the sixth embodiment, the timing of ball detection at the large prize opening switch, the right special probability area switch and the left special probability area switch, and the timing of setting the right special probability area valid flag, the left special probability area valid flag and the special probability transition flag. A figure showing the configuration of the variable winning device of the seventh embodiment, (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable winning device of the seventh embodiment when viewed from the front, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view (cross-sectional top view) of the variable winning device along line A-A in (a).

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described with reference to Figs. 1 to 36. Fig. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, Fig. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and Fig. 3 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in Figure 1, the pachinko machine 10 comprises an outer frame 11, the outer shell of which is formed by wooden frames assembled into a roughly rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12, which is formed to roughly the same external shape as the outer frame 11 and is supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), in order to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable towards the front, with the side where the hinges 18 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 3) having numerous nails and winning holes (ball entry holes) 63, 64b, 64c, 65a, etc. is detachably attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. A pinball game is played by balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 is also fitted with a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 7) that launches balls into the front area of the game board 13, and a launch rail (not shown) that guides the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Details of the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG. 3.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, there is a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front, and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side. Metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so that they can be opened and closed toward the front, with the side where the hinges 19 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing. The locks on the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be released by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation.

The front frame 14 is fitted with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and has a window 14c formed in a roughly elliptical shape at approximately the center. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls that juts out forward and is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top, and prize balls and loan balls are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed with a downward slope to the right when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), and this slope guides balls dropped into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 7). In addition, a frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the top surface of the upper tray 17 when viewed from the front.

The frame button 22 is a button that is pressed by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later. The frame button 22 is also used as an operation button for allowing the player to select the content of the effect in the preview display executed in the variable display of the third pattern (hereinafter, the variable display of the third pattern is referred to as the "variable effect") that corresponds to the first special pattern used in the first lottery game or the second special pattern used in the second lottery game.

The first lottery game is a lottery game resulting from a ball entering the special chart 1 winning hole 64b (see FIG. 3) provided in the alternating distribution unit 64 (see FIG. 3) described later (hereinafter, the ball entering may be referred to as a "winning"), and the second lottery game is a lottery game resulting from a ball entering the special chart 2 winning hole 64c (see FIG. 3) also provided in the alternating distribution unit 64 (see FIG. 3) (hereinafter, the first lottery game and the second lottery game may be collectively referred to simply as "lottery game").

The variable presentation is a presentation displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 3) described below, and as described below, is executed when a ball fired into the front area of the game board 13 enters a specific winning hole (for example, special pattern 1 winning hole 64b or special pattern 2 winning hole 64c described below; see Figure 3). After the pattern (the third pattern described below) changes for a predetermined period of time, the combination of patterns displayed on the frozen screen indicates to the player the result of a lottery held for that winning hole (whether it is a jackpot or not). In the first embodiment, the third pattern display device 81 is configured to be able to execute only one lottery game, and is configured to display either the lottery result based on the first lottery game or the lottery result based on the second lottery game by using the third pattern in common for the first special pattern based on the first lottery game and the second special pattern based on the second lottery game (hereinafter, the first special pattern and the second special pattern may be collectively referred to simply as the "special pattern").

Furthermore, a stage refers to a presentation mode that provides uniformity to the various presentations displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described below, and this pachinko machine 10 has three stages: "town stage," "sky stage," and "island stage." The above-mentioned variable presentations and various presentations such as the "reach display" executed during the variable presentations are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage.

The "reach display" refers to the display just before the "jackpot display" indicating that a jackpot will occur in the variable presentation executed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described below. Specifically, it refers to the state in which the third symbols in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 6) described below stop at the same symbol, and the center symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 6) has not yet stopped and continues to vary.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the "reach display" is roughly divided into a single element that constitutes the "normal reach" presentation (hereinafter, a single element that constitutes the presentation is referred to as a "variable element"), a variable element of a "super reach" that is developed and executed from the variable element of the "normal reach" and has a higher chance of winning a jackpot than the variable element of the "normal reach", and a variable element of a "special reach" that is similarly developed and executed from the variable element of the "normal reach" and has a higher chance of winning a jackpot than the variable element of the "super reach".

The stage changes when the player presses the frame button 22 during a period when no variable performance is taking place (i.e., during a demo display) or during a "high-speed variable" element in which the third symbol changes so quickly that it is invisible to the player. Each time the frame button 22 is operated, the stage is repeatedly changed in the following order: "town stage" → "empty stage" → "island stage" → "town stage" → ... Also, immediately after the power is turned on, the "town stage" is set as the initial stage.

In addition, when a variable element of a "normal reach" is started in the variable performance performed by the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later, if the variable element of the "normal reach" develops into a variable element of a "super reach" or a variable element of a "special reach", a selection screen for the variable element of the "super reach" or the variable element of the "special reach" may be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 during the variable element of the "normal reach".

Specifically, the selection screen displays multiple candidates that can be selected as the variable elements of the "Super Reach" or the "Special Reach", and the selected candidate is changed when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player while the selection screen is displayed. Then, the variable elements of the "Super Reach" or the "Special Reach" are determined based on the performance candidate that was selected when the variable elements of the "Super Reach" or the "Special Reach" developed, and the variable elements of the "Super Reach" or the "Special Reach" are executed by the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with the determination.

In the first embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button to be pressed, but instead of the frame button 22, it may be configured as an operation lever that can be tilted by the player in a predetermined direction relative to the pachinko machine 10 (for example, forward, backward, right, or left relative to the pachinko machine 10). Then, based on the direction in which the operation lever is tilted, the performance stage may be selected or changed, or the variable elements of the "Super Reach" or the variable elements of the "Special Reach" may be determined.

In addition, the frame button 22 is configured to be positioned on the front side of the upper tray 17 when viewed from the side, but the position of the frame button 22 may be any position that allows the player to press it. For example, it may be positioned on the top side of the upper tray 17, or it may be positioned near (on the top or side of) the lower tray 50 described below.

The front frame 14 is provided with various light-emitting means such as lamps around its periphery (e.g., corners). These light-emitting means change and control the light emission mode by turning on or blinking in response to changes in the game state, such as when a jackpot is hit or a specified "reach display" is activated, and serve to enhance the presentation effect during play. The periphery of the window portion 14c is provided with illumination sections 29-33 incorporating light-emitting means such as light-emitting diodes (Light Emitting Diodes, hereafter abbreviated as "LEDs").

In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29-33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and when a jackpot is hit or a "reach display" is activated, the built-in LEDs of the illumination units 29-33 light up or flash to indicate that a jackpot is being hit or that a "reach display" is being displayed, which is one step away from a jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided at the top left of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front, which has a built-in light-emitting means such as an LED and can indicate when prize balls are being paid out and when an error has occurred.

A small window 35 is formed under the right-side illumination section 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the certificate stamps and the like affixed to the attachment space K1 (see FIG. 3) on the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of chrome-plated acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (hereinafter abbreviated as "ABS") resin is attached to the area around the illumination sections 29-33 to create a more dazzling appearance.

The ball lending operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a number display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit, not shown) located on the side of the pachinko machine 10, balls are lent out according to the operation. Specifically, the number display unit 41 is an area where the remaining balance information of the card, etc. is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain loan balls based on the information recorded on the card, etc. (recording medium), and loan balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card, etc. inserted into the card unit.

In pachinko machines where balls are directly dispensed from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., so-called cash machines, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary. In this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation area of the ball dispensing operation unit 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines that use a card unit and cash machines.

The lower tray unit 15, located below the upper tray 17, has a lower tray 50 in the center, which is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top, for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17. On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is arranged, which is operated by the player to shoot balls into the front of the game board 13. Inside the operating handle 51, there is built-in a touch sensor 51a for permitting the operation of the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 7), a push-button type shooting stop switch 51b that stops the shooting of balls while it is being pressed, and a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by changes in electrical resistance.

When the control handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in response to the amount of rotation, and the ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, which changes according to the amount of rotation of the control handle 51, and the ball is shot into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Also, when the control handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the shot stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided on the lower front part of the lower tray 50 to be operated when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against this bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are discharged. This ball removal lever 52 is usually operated with a box (commonly called a "dollar box") that receives the balls discharged from the lower tray 50 placed below the lower tray 50. As mentioned above, the operating handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

Next, as shown in FIG. 2, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly equipped with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is unitized with a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit formed by the back pack 92, which forms the protective cover, and the payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is equipped with a micro-processing unit (hereinafter abbreviated as "MPU") as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each part, ports for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. as necessary.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are each stored in the board boxes 100-104. The board boxes 100-104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to store the respective control devices and boards.

The board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected to the box base and box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened (connected by a crimping structure). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the sealing seal to open the board box 100, 102 or forcefully open the board box 100, 102, it will be cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing seal, you can know whether the board box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 is equipped with a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently sloping toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132, which pays out balls using a specified electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see Figure 7). The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 is attached to the tank rail 131 to impart vibration to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is also provided with a state recovery switch 120, the firing control device 112 with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 with a RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jamming in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 7). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 3, the game board 13 is constructed by assembling a number of nails, windmills, and rails 61, 62 for guiding balls, a general winning hole 63 through which a predetermined number of prize balls can be obtained by the ball entering the hole, an alternating distribution unit 64 having a special winning hole 64b for the first lottery game and a special winning hole 64c for the second lottery game and a normal electric device 67a, a variable winning device 65 that opens when a jackpot occurs in the first lottery game or the second lottery game, a normal pattern gate 67 for driving the normal electric device 67a, a variable display unit 80 having a third pattern display device 81, and the like, on a wooden base plate 60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, and the peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12.

The general winning opening 63, alternating distribution unit 64, variable winning device 65, normal symbol gate 67, and variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like. In addition, the front center part of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see Figure 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be explained below, mainly with reference to Figure 3.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into an approximately arc shape is set up on the front of the game board 13, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed from a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62 is set up inside the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and outer rail 62 surround the front periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and glass unit 16 (see Figure 1) surround the front and back, forming a game area on the front of the game board 13 where games are played based on the behavior of the ball. The game area is an approximately circular area (an area where winning holes and the like are arranged and where shot balls flow down) on the front of the game board 13, partitioned by the two rails 61, 62 and the arc member 70.

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 7) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in FIG. 3), which prevents the ball once guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning back into the ball guide passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 3) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and a ball launched with a certain amount of force or more hits the return rubber 69 and bounces back toward the center while its force is attenuated (hereinafter, the act of launching a ball with force such as hitting the return rubber 69 and passing the right side of the variable display unit 80 as viewed from the front is referred to as a "right hit", while the act of the launched ball passing the left side of the variable display unit 80 as viewed from the front is referred to as a "left hit"). In the first embodiment, in a left-handed game, the ball can enter the distribution ball entry port of the alternating distribution unit 64, but is configured so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the variable winning device 65. Also, in a right-handed game, the ball can enter the variable winning device 65, but is configured so that it is difficult (impossible) for the ball to enter the distribution ball entry port of the alternating distribution unit 64. The specific configuration will be described later.

In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 is fixed by being driven into the base plate 60. The arc member 70 is formed on the inner surface of the base plate 60 to connect the rails.

At the upper right side of the play area when viewed from the front (upper right side of Figure 3), a special symbol display device 37 is provided, which is provided with a first LED group 37a and a second LED group 37b, each of which is made up of a plurality of LEDs that serve as light-emitting means. The special symbol display device 37 displays the changes in each special symbol (hereinafter, the change in the display of special symbols is referred to as "dynamic display") in response to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see Figure 7), which will be described later, and also displays the play status of the pachinko machine 10.

The first LED group 37a indicates, by its lighting state, the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not yet been displayed in the variable display among the balls that have won (entered) the special chart 1 winning slot 64b or the special chart 2 winning slot 64c described below. The number of jackpot rounds and error display are also indicated by the lighting state of the first LED group 37a corresponding to that state. The first LED group 37a is configured so that each LED has a different light emission color (e.g., red, green, blue), and the combination of light emission colors can indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

Note that a "round" in a jackpot refers to the time from when the large prize opening 65a, which will be described later in this section, opens to when it closes in order to determine the number of winning balls in a jackpot. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, one "round" is executed when "30 seconds" have elapsed since the large prize opening 65a began to open, or when 10 balls enter the large prize opening 65a while it is open.

The second LED group 37b is made up of a total of 16 LEDs, consisting of an upper LED group made up of 8 LEDs and a lower LED group also made up of 8 LEDs. The upper LED group displays a first special symbol (hereinafter, the first special symbol may be abbreviated as "special symbol 1") that indicates the result of the first lottery game. The lower LED group displays a second special symbol (hereinafter, the second special symbol may be abbreviated as "special symbol 2") that indicates the result of the second lottery game.

Specifically, the upper LED group displays a variable display (in the first embodiment, the LEDs in the upper LED group are lit up one by one in sequence, starting from the leftmost LED in the upper LED group to the right, and this lighting pattern is displayed repeatedly) until a variable time (dynamic display time) has elapsed that is determined based on the winning of the special winning slot 64b provided in the alternating distribution unit 64 described below, and then displays a stopped pattern indicating the judgment result (in the first embodiment, one of a total of 256 types of stopped patterns depending on the combination of the lighting patterns of the eight LEDs).

The lower LED group also displays a variable display (in the first embodiment, the LEDs in the lower LED group are lit up one by one in sequence, starting from the leftmost LED in the lower LED group to the right, and this lighting pattern is displayed repeatedly) until the variable display time (dynamic display time) determined based on the winning of the special winning slot 64c provided in the alternating distribution unit 64 described below has elapsed, and then displays a stopped pattern indicating the judgment result (in the first embodiment, one of a total of 256 types of stopping patterns depending on the combination of the lighting patterns of the eight LEDs).

For any LED group, if the result is a miss, only the leftmost LED is displayed, and if the result is a jackpot, each LED group is displayed with a lighting pattern corresponding to the jackpot. Details of the stop patterns of each LED group will be described later.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a jackpot determination (jackpot lottery) is performed to determine whether or not a ball that enters the special prize slot 1 64b or the special prize slot 2 64c is a jackpot, and if a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot, the type of jackpot is also determined based on the prize slot 64b, 64c that the ball entered.

The types of jackpots that are determined here are "Probability Change A" corresponding to a "15-round (hereinafter, "round" may simply be referred to as "R") sure-win jackpot," "latent probability change A" and "latent probability change B" corresponding to a "7R latent sure-win jackpot," and "time-saving A" and "time-saving B" corresponding to a "7R time-saving jackpot" (see FIG. 10(a)). In addition, based on winning in the special chart 2 winning slot 64c, "Probability Change A" corresponding to a "15R sure-win jackpot," "latent probability change C" corresponding to a "15R latent sure-win jackpot," and "time-saving C" corresponding to a "15R time-saving jackpot" (see FIG. 10(b)).

Here, a "15R sure-change jackpot" refers to a jackpot that transitions to a "probability-changing state" after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, a "15R latent sure-change jackpot" refers to a jackpot that transitions to a "probability-changing state" after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, but does not notify the player that the "probability-changing state" has been granted, and a "15R time-saving jackpot" refers to a jackpot that transitions to a "time-saving state" after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15. Also, a "7R latent sure-change jackpot" refers to a jackpot that transitions to a "probability-changing state" after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 7, but does not notify the player that the "probability-changing state" has been granted, and a "7R time-saving jackpot" refers to a jackpot that transitions to a "time-saving state" after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 7.

Here, "normal game state" refers to a low probability state that is not a "probability changing state" or a "time shortening state", and refers to a state in which the probability of winning a jackpot with a special symbol and the probability of winning a normal symbol are normal. In other words, the "normal game state" is a state in which the probability of winning a jackpot with a special symbol is lower than in the "probability changing state", and the probability of winning a normal symbol is lower than in the "probability changing state" and "time shortening state", and is not a game state in which it is easy for the ball to win the special symbol 2 winning hole 64c (hereinafter, the state in which it is easy for the ball to win the special symbol 2 winning hole 64c may be referred to as the "winning assistance state"), and is the most unfavorable game state for the player.

Next, the "time-saving state" refers to a state in which the probability of winning a special symbol is low, just like in the "normal game state," but the so-called "time-saving function" is added, increasing the probability of winning a normal symbol. In other words, the "time-saving state" makes it easier for the normal electric device 67a, which is provided on the right side of the alternating distribution unit 64, to be described later, to be opened, resulting in a game state in which it is easier for the ball to enter the special symbol 2 winning hole 64c in the alternating distribution unit 64, i.e., a winning assistance state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "time-shortened state" is maintained after a jackpot of the jackpot type "time-shortened A," "time-shortened B," or "time-shortened C" (see FIG. 10) described below, until a specified number of special symbol variable effects (50 or 100 in the first embodiment) are executed for each jackpot. After the specified number of dynamic special symbol displays have been executed, the machine is configured to transition from the "time-shortened state" to the "normal game state."

Next, the "probability-changing state" refers to a high-probability state in which the probability of winning a special symbol after a jackpot has ended is increased as an added value. In other words, the "probability-changing state" refers to the time when a special jackpot is in a high probability state, or in other words, a gaming state in which it is easy to transition to a special gaming state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after a jackpot of the jackpot type "Probability Fluctuation A", "Latent Probability Fluctuation A", "Latent Probability Fluctuation B" or "Latent Probability Fluctuation C" (see FIG. 10) described below, the probability of a jackpot with a special symbol remains high until the special symbol fluctuation performance is executed 50 or 100 times (the so-called special time, hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as "ST" for the initial letters of Special Time).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as the "probability change state", there are a "time-saving probability change state" in which the above-mentioned "time-saving function" is provided, and a "time-saving probability change state" in which the "time-saving function" is not provided. That is, in the "time-saving probability change state", the probability of a jackpot with a special symbol is high, and the normal electric device 67a described below is more likely to be in an open state, resulting in a winning assistance state in which the ball is more likely to enter the special symbol 2 winning hole 64c in the alternating distribution unit 64. On the other hand, in the "time-saving probability change state" in which the probability of a jackpot with a special symbol is high, but the normal electric device 67a is less likely (not more likely) to be in an open state, it is a non-winning assistance state that is not a winning assistance state for the special symbol 2 winning hole 64c, like the "normal game state".

The "probability variable state with time reduction" is maintained after a jackpot of the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", "latent probability fluctuation A", "latent probability fluctuation B" or "latent probability fluctuation C" (see FIG. 10) described later, until the special symbol variation effect is executed a predetermined number of times (50 or 100 times in the first embodiment) for each jackpot. On the other hand, after the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed the specified number of times, if the "probability variable state with time reduction" is based on a jackpot type of "latent probability fluctuation A" or "latent probability fluctuation B" (see FIG. 10) described later, the game is configured to transition to a "probability variable state without time reduction", and if the "probability variable state with time reduction" is based on a jackpot type of "probability fluctuation A" or "latent probability fluctuation C" (see FIG. 10) described later, the game is configured to transition to a "normal game state".

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as the presentation mode of the "probability changing state", there are provided a "probability change notification presentation mode" that notifies the player that the jackpot probability of the special symbol is in a high probability state where the probability has increased, and a "latent probability change presentation mode" that does not notify the player that the jackpot probability is in a high probability state where the probability has increased.

The "probability change notification presentation mode" is configured to notify the player that the probability of winning a special symbol is increased and a high probability state is in effect during the "probability change notification presentation mode" by the third symbol display device 81, which will be described later, etc. In the first embodiment, if a jackpot type "probability change A" (see FIG. 10), which will be described later, is won, the "probability change notification presentation mode" is executed after the jackpot ends.

On the other hand, the "latent probability change presentation mode" is configured so that the third symbol display device 81, which will be described later, etc., does not notify the player that the probability of winning the jackpot with the special symbol is increased during the "latent probability change presentation mode". In other words, the "latent probability change presentation mode" is configured to perform a presentation equivalent to the presentation corresponding to the "time-saving notification presentation mode" or "normal notification mode", which will be described later, and to provide the player with a gameplay that allows them to guess which game state they are in by making it impossible (difficult) for them to distinguish whether they are in the "probability changing state", the "time-saving state", or the "normal game state".

In the first embodiment, if the player wins the jackpot type "latent probability change A," "latent probability change B," or "latent probability change C" (see FIG. 10), which will be described later, the "latent probability change presentation mode" is executed after the jackpot ends.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a "time-saving notification presentation mode" is provided as a presentation mode for the "time-saving state" to notify the player that the above-mentioned "time-saving function" has been granted. This "time-saving notification presentation mode" is configured to notify the player by the third symbol display device 81, which will be described later, that the probability of winning a normal symbol is increased during the "time-saving notification presentation mode". In the first embodiment, if a jackpot type "time-saving A", "time-saving B", or "time-saving C" (see FIG. 10), which will be described later, is won, the "time-saving notification presentation mode" is executed after the jackpot ends.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a "normal presentation mode" different from the "time-saving notification presentation mode (latent probability change presentation mode)" and the "probability change notification presentation mode" is provided as a presentation mode of the "normal game state". This "normal presentation mode" is configured to notify the player by the third symbol display device 81 described later, etc., that the state is not transitioning to a state advantageous to the player during the "normal presentation mode". In the first embodiment, the "normal presentation mode" is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, when the "probability change state" or the "time-saving state" ends, or when 50 special symbol change presentations have been completed after the end of a jackpot type "latent probability change A" or "latent probability change B" (see FIG. 10).

In other words, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that the "latent probability change presentation mode" executes a presentation equivalent to the "time-saving notification presentation mode" or the "normal presentation mode". By configuring it in this way, the player cannot clearly recognize which game state he is in, as it is impossible (difficult) for him to distinguish whether the current game state is the "probability changing state" or the "time-saving state", or whether it is the "probability changing state" or the "normal game state". By configuring it in this way, a gameplay that allows the player to guess which game state he is in while the "latent probability change presentation mode" is being executed is created, and the excitement of the game can be increased.

In addition, after the end of a jackpot of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A" or "latent probability fluctuation B" (see FIG. 10) described below, if the special symbol fluctuation presentation has been completed 50 times, the game state thereafter will be an internal "probability fluctuation state" that is advantageous to the player until the next special symbol fluctuation presentation is executed 50 times, but the presentation will be in a state in which the "normal presentation mode" is being executed. On the other hand, after the end of a jackpot type "time-saving A" or "time-saving B" (see FIG. 10), if the special symbol fluctuation presentation has been completed 50 times, the game state thereafter will be an internal "normal game state" that is executed in terms of presentation. For this reason, even after the special pattern change presentation following the end of a jackpot of type "Time-saving A" or "Time-saving B" is performed 50 times and the "time-saving state" ends, the player cannot distinguish whether the jackpot is based on the jackpot type "Time-saving A" or "Time-saving B" or whether it is based on the jackpot type "Latent probability change A" or "Latent probability change B."

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player guess that the game may be in a "probability fluctuating state" internally and continue playing even when the "normal presentation mode" indicating the "normal game state" is being executed, by not making the player aware of whether the game is in a "probability fluctuating state" or a "normal game state". This makes it possible to increase the player's desire to continue playing even after the "time-shortening state" has ended, and promotes the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the display mode of the second LED group 37b for each jackpot type will be described. As the stop display (lighting display) of the upper LED group for the first special pattern, there is one display pattern corresponding to a miss, 63 display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "time-saving A", 63 display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "time-saving B", 64 display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "latency probability fluctuation A", 64 display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "latency probability fluctuation B", and one display pattern corresponding to the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", for a total of 256 display patterns. And, each display pattern does not have a specific regularity for each jackpot type, and a random display pattern is assigned in advance. Therefore, when a player looks at the display pattern of the upper LED group, he can recognize the stop display of a miss and the stop display of the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", but it is configured to be difficult to distinguish which of the jackpot types "time-saving A", "time-saving B", "latency probability fluctuation A", or "latency probability fluctuation B" is the stop display.

In addition, the lower LED group for the second special symbol has a total of 256 display patterns, including one display pattern corresponding to a miss, 127 display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "time-saving C", 127 display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C", and one display pattern corresponding to the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A". As with the upper LED group, each display pattern does not have a specific regularity for each jackpot type, and random display patterns are assigned in advance. Therefore, when a player looks at the display patterns of the lower LED group, he or she can recognize the stop display of a miss and the stop display of the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", but it is configured to be difficult to distinguish whether the stop display is for the jackpot type "time-saving C" or "latent probability fluctuation C".

By configuring it in this way, even if each jackpot type is displayed in the stop display of the second LED group 37b of the special pattern display device 37, it will be difficult for the player to recognize the type of jackpot that has been won unless he or she is familiar with all of the jackpot types that correspond to each stop display. This creates a gameplay feature that allows the player to guess which game state they are in while the "latent probability change presentation mode" is being executed, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

Returning to FIG. 3 for further explanation, the game area of the game board 13 is provided with one or more general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins.

In addition, an alternating distribution unit 64 is provided at the bottom center of the play area, into which balls flowing down the play area can enter. This alternating distribution unit 64 is mainly composed of a distribution ball inlet into which balls flowing down the play area can enter, a distribution device 64a that alternately distributes balls that enter the distribution ball inlet to the left or right path within the alternating distribution unit 64, a special prize winning port 64b into which balls distributed to the left path by the distribution device 64a can enter, and a special prize winning port 64c into which balls distributed to the right path by the distribution device 64a can enter.

When a ball enters the special symbol 1 winning hole 64b provided in this alternating distribution unit 64, a special symbol 1 winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 (see FIG. 13) draws a lottery for a jackpot of the first special symbol (i.e., a first lottery game) due to the special symbol 1 winning hole switch being turned on. Then, a dynamic display of the special symbol according to the lottery result is shown by the upper LED group in the second LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and a variable performance of the third symbol is executed by the third symbol display device 81.

When a ball enters the special symbol 2 winning hole 64c provided in the alternating distribution unit 64, a special symbol 2 winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 (see FIG. 13) draws a lottery for a jackpot of the second special symbol (i.e., a second lottery game) due to the special symbol 2 winning hole switch being turned on. Then, a dynamic display of the special symbol according to the lottery result is shown by the lower LED group in the second LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and a variable performance of the third symbol is executed by the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the special drawing 1 winning hole 64b and the special drawing 2 winning hole 64c are also winning holes from which two balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins.

Here, we will explain how the balls that enter the alternating distribution unit 64 are alternately distributed to the left path or the right path by the distribution device 64a. The balls that enter the alternating distribution unit 64 and flow down from the distribution ball inlet are accommodated in the space formed by the center plate and the right side receiving plate of the distribution device 64a. Then, the right side receiving plate is pushed down by the weight of the ball, causing the distribution device 64a to rotate, and the tip side of the right side receiving plate abuts against the wall below the distribution device 64a of the alternating distribution unit 64, so that the entire right side receiving plate is below the rotating shaft and the left side receiving plate is above the rotating shaft. Therefore, the distribution device 64a is in a state where the balls can flow down to the right path, and in this state, the balls are guided to the right path by rolling on the upper surface of the right side receiving plate. At this time, the force pushing down the right-side receiving plate (rotating the sorting device 64a) due to the weight of the balls is greater than the repulsive force between the sorting side magnet (not shown) and the unit side magnet (not shown), so the sorting device 64a rotates against the repulsive force of the magnets. Then, again, the repulsive force of the magnets maintains the state in which the left-side receiving plate is above the rotating shaft and the right-side receiving plate is below the rotating shaft, i.e., the left-side guide position.

Then, the balls that enter the alternating distribution unit 64 and flow down from the distribution ball inlet are accommodated in the space formed by the central plate and the left side receiving plate of the distribution device 64a. The weight of the balls pushes down the left side receiving plate, causing the distribution device 64a to rotate, and the tip side of the left side receiving plate abuts against the wall of the alternating distribution unit 64, so that the entire left side receiving plate is below the rotating shaft and the right side receiving plate is above the rotating shaft. Therefore, the distribution device 64a is in a state where the balls can flow down to the left side path, and in this state, the balls roll on the upper surface of the left side receiving plate to be guided to the left side path. At this time, too, the force pushing down the left side receiving plate (rotating the distribution device 64a) by the weight of the balls is greater than the repulsive force between the distribution side magnet (not shown) and the unit side magnet (not shown), so the distribution device 64a rotates against the repulsive force of the magnets. Then, again, the repulsive force of the magnets maintains the state in which the left receiving plate is below the rotating shaft and the right receiving plate is above the rotating shaft, i.e., the right guide position. By alternating between these movements, balls that enter the alternating distribution unit 64 are alternately distributed between the left and right paths.

The left side path of the alternating distribution unit 64 is a path along which balls guided to the left side of the alternating distribution unit 64 by the distribution device 64a flow. A left side exit is provided below the left side of this left side path, through which balls flowing down the left side path exit, and a special prize winning port 64b is provided below the left side exit. Therefore, the balls guided to the left side path are configured to flow down the left side path and then enter the special prize winning port 64b.

The right-side path of the alternating distribution unit 64 is a path along which balls guided to the right side of the alternating distribution unit 64 by the distribution device 64a flow. A right-side exit is provided below the right side of this right-side path, through which balls flowing down the right-side path exit, and a special prize-winning port 64c is provided below the right-side exit. Therefore, the balls guided to the right-side path are configured to flow down the right-side path and then enter the special prize-winning port 64c.

The variable prize-winning device 65 is located on the right side of the alternating distribution unit 64 when viewed from the front, and a large prize-winning opening 65a in the shape of a horizontal rectangle is provided in the approximate center.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the first or second special symbol is selected by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 7) and a jackpot is obtained, the second LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37 is lit to show the jackpot stop symbol after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, indicating that a jackpot has occurred. After that, the opening and closing plate 65b (see FIG. 4) provided on the variable winning device 65 is opened, and the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to enter the jackpot opening 65a. In this special game state, the jackpot opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed, or until 10 balls have entered).

This big prize opening 65a closes after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after this closure, the big prize opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of this big prize opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is taking place is one form of a special game state (big win state) that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual as an addition of game value (game value).

In addition, the large prize opening 65a of the variable prize device 65 is provided with a right side probability change area 73 (see FIG. 4), a left side probability change area 74 (see FIG. 4), and a discharge passage 75 (see FIG. 4) through which balls that flow into the large prize opening 65a can flow down. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the special game state (big win state), the right side probability change area 73 and the left side probability change area 74 are switched between enabled and disabled, and a ball that flows into the large prize opening 65a passes through the right side probability change area 73 or the left side probability change area 74 that is set to enabled, so that a "probability change state" occurs after the special game state ends.

Here, referring to FIG. 4, the variable winning device 65 will be described in detail. FIG. 4 is a front enlarged view showing the variable winning device 65 in a schematic front view. As shown in FIG. 4, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally elongated rectangular opening and closing plate 65b that covers the large winning opening 65a, a large winning opening solenoid 65c (see FIG. 7) for driving the opening and closing plate 65b to open and close forward with the lower side of the opening and closing plate 65b as an axis, a large winning opening switch 71 that detects a ball that has entered the large winning opening 65a, a guide passage 72 through which the ball detected by the large winning opening switch 71 flows down, a right-side special variable area 73 provided downstream (left side) of the guide passage 72, a left-side special variable area 74 provided downstream (left side) of the right-side special variable area 73, and a discharge passage 75 provided downstream (left side) of the left-side special variable area 74.

The large prize opening switch 71 is embedded in the passageway near the large prize opening 65a, and 15 prize balls are paid out when the large prize opening switch 71 detects a ball. In addition, when the opening/closing plate 65b is opened and 10 balls are detected by the large prize opening switch 71, the opening/closing plate 65b is closed, and one round ends.

The guide passage 72 is a passage through which balls that flow into the large prize opening 65a flow down, and a right-side special probability area 73 and a left-side special probability area 74, which will be described later, are provided at predetermined positions in the guide passage 72, and a discharge passage 75, which will be described later, is provided downstream of the right-side special probability area 73 and the left-side special probability area 74. Therefore, balls that flow into the large prize opening 65a and flow down the guide passage 72 will pass through the right-side special probability area 73, the left-side special probability area 74, or the discharge passage 75.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after a ball that has flowed into the large prize opening 65a is detected by the large prize opening switch 71, it is configured to take approximately "1.5 seconds" to travel through the guide passage 72 and reach above the right-side special probability area 73 described later, and after a ball that has flowed into the large prize opening 65a is detected by the large prize opening switch 71, it is configured to take approximately "1.6 seconds" to travel through the guide passage 72 and reach above the left-side special probability area 74 described later. Therefore, a ball detected by the large prize opening switch 71 is configured to be able to flow into the right-side special probability area 73 or the left-side special probability area 74 within "2 seconds".

The right-side variable probability area 73 is arranged so that its top surface is flush with the bottom surface (ball rolling surface) of the guide passage 72 when in the closed state (protruding state) and is configured to be displaceable from the closed state to the open state (retracted state). It is composed of a right variable probability area opening/closing plate 73a, a right variable probability area solenoid 73b (see Figure 7) that can drive the right variable probability area opening/closing plate 73a to open and close, a right variable probability area passage 73c that is provided downstream of the right variable probability area opening/closing plate 73a and through which the ball can flow, and a right variable probability area switch 73d that is embedded in the right variable probability area passage 73c and can detect balls passing through the right variable probability area passage 73c.

The left special rate area 74 is composed of a left special rate area opening/closing plate 74a, the top of which is flush with the bottom of the guide passage 72 when in the closed state (protruding state) and is configured to be displaceable from the closed state to the open state (retracted state), a left special rate area solenoid 74b (see Figure 7) that can drive the left special rate area opening/closing plate 74a to open and close, a left special rate area passage 74c that is provided downstream of the left special rate area opening/closing plate 74a and through which the ball can flow, and a left special rate area switch 74d that is embedded in the left special rate area passage 74c and can detect balls passing through the left special rate area passage 74c.

The discharge passage 75 is a passage for discharging the ball outside the variable winning device 65 (to the back side of the game board 13) if the ball that flows into the large winning opening 65a does not flow into either the right-side special probability area 73 or the left-side special probability area 74.

The right side probability change area opening/closing plate 73a and the left side probability change area opening/closing plate 74a are made of transparent or nearly transparent resin. Therefore, by making it difficult for the player to recognize the position (driving mode) of each probability change area opening/closing plate 73a, 74a, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to tell whether each probability change area opening/closing plate 73a, 74a opens or closes the probability change area 73, 74. The right side probability change area opening/closing plate 73a and the left side probability change area opening/closing plate 74a may also be made of colored resin.

Now, referring to FIG. 5, the inflow pattern of the balls flowing into the large prize opening 65a of the variable prize device 65 will be described. FIG. 5(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable prize device 65 for explaining the behavior of the balls flowing into the large prize opening 65a when the right variable prize area opening/closing plate 73a is in an open state (submerged state) and the left variable prize area opening/closing plate 74a is in a closed state (protruding state). FIG. 5(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable prize device 65 for explaining the behavior of the balls flowing into the large prize opening 65a when the left variable prize area opening/closing plate 74a is in an open state (submerged state) and the right variable prize area opening/closing plate 73a is in a closed state (protruding state). FIG. 5(c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable prize device 65 for explaining the behavior of the balls flowing into the large prize opening 65a when both the right variable prize area opening/closing plate 73a and the left variable prize area opening/closing plate 74a are in a closed state (protruding state).

As shown in FIG. 5(a), when a special game state occurs due to a big win, the opening and closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 is opened, allowing the ball to flow into the big winning port 65a. When the right special winning area opening and closing plate 73a is in an open state (submerged state) and the left special winning area opening and closing plate 74a is in a closed state (protruding state), the ball that flows into the big winning port 65a is first detected by the big winning port switch 71, and then flows down the guide passage 72. Then, since the right special winning area opening and closing plate 73a is opened (submerged) by the right special winning area solenoid 73b (see FIG. 7), the ball flows into the right special winning area passage 73c. Then, the ball is detected by the right special winning area switch 73d embedded in the right special winning area passage 73c. In addition, the ball detected by the right variable probability area switch 73d is discharged outside the variable winning device 65 (to the back side of the game board 13) through a discharge path (not shown).

Next, as shown in FIG. 5(b), when the right variable probability area opening/closing plate 73a is in a closed state (protruding state) and the left variable probability area opening/closing plate 74a is in an open state (recessed state), the ball that has flowed into the large prize opening 65a is first detected by the large prize opening switch 71, and then flows down the guide passage 72. Then, the ball rolls on the upper surface of the right variable probability area opening/closing plate 73a in the closed state (protruding state), and since the left variable probability area opening/closing plate 74a provided downstream of the right variable probability area opening/closing plate 73a is opened (recessed) by the left variable probability area solenoid 74b (see FIG. 7), the ball flows into the left variable probability area passage 74c. Then, the ball is detected by the left variable probability area switch 74d embedded in the left variable probability area passage 74c. In addition, the ball detected by the left variable area switch 74d is discharged outside the variable winning device 65 (to the back side of the game board 13) via a discharge path (not shown).

Next, as shown in FIG. 5(c), when the right variable probability area opening/closing plate 73a and the left variable probability area opening/closing plate 74a are both in the closed state (protruding state), the ball that has flowed into the large prize opening 65a is first detected by the large prize opening switch 71, and then flows down the guide passage 72. Then, the ball rolls over the top surface of the right variable probability area opening/closing plate 73a and the top surface of the left variable probability area opening/closing plate 74a, both in the closed state (protruding state), and is discharged from the discharge passage 75 provided downstream to the outside of the variable prize winning device 65 (to the back side of the game board 13).

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening (not shown) that opens and closes separately from the large prize opening 65a may be provided in the game area, and when the second LED group 37b corresponding to a big win is lit in the special pattern display device 37, the large prize opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and while the large prize opening 65a is open, a ball enters the large prize opening 65a, triggering the large opening provided separately from the large prize opening 65a to be opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, forming a special game state (see the second embodiment and onwards).

Returning to FIG. 3, the explanation continues. Above the variable winning device 65 as viewed from the front, and to the right of the variable display unit 80 as viewed from the front, there is a normal symbol gate 67. This normal symbol gate 67 has a through hole (not shown) in the vertical direction for the ball to pass through. When a ball passes through this normal symbol gate 67, a normal symbol switch (not shown) provided in the through hole turns on, and when this is turned on, a lottery for a winning normal symbol is held by the main control device 110. Note that this normal symbol gate 67 only triggers the lottery for the variable display of normal symbols, and is configured so that no prize balls or the like are paid out even if a ball passes through it.

A normal electric device 67a is disposed downstream of the variable winning device 65, to the right side of the alternating distribution unit 64. This normal electric device 67a is mainly composed of a rotating plate and a rotating solenoid (not shown) that drives the rotating plate to open and close.

In the first embodiment, the main control device 110 normally keeps the rotating plate of the normal electric device 67a in an upright state and covers the right side of the alternating distribution unit 64 to prevent balls from flowing into the special winning port 64c from the right side of the alternating distribution unit 64. When a winning is won with the variable display of the normal pattern, the rotating solenoid (not shown) is driven for a predetermined time, and the rotating plate of the normal electric device 67a is driven for the predetermined time from the upright state to an open state (tilted state) tilted to the right by a predetermined angle (for example, 45 degrees), allowing balls to flow into the special winning port 64c from the right side of the alternating distribution unit 64, so that the balls flowing down the right side of the alternating distribution unit 64 are easily able to win the special winning port 64c, i.e., the winning assistance state is established.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that the probability of winning a normal symbol in the variable display changes depending on the game state. Specifically, in the "normal game state" or "probability change state without time reduction", the probability of winning a normal symbol is set to a low probability state (e.g., 1/10), making it difficult to win a normal symbol in the variable display, making it difficult to open the rotating plate of the normal electric device 67a (tilted state), and making it difficult to win the special symbol 2 winning hole 64c. On the other hand, in the "probability change state with time reduction" or "time reduction state", the probability of winning a normal symbol is set to a high probability state (e.g., 9/10), making it easy to win a normal symbol in the variable display, making it easy to open the rotating plate of the normal electric device 67a (tilted state), and making it easy to win the special symbol 2 winning hole 64c.

In addition, instead of changing the probability of winning a normal symbol from the "normal game state" or the "probability state without time reduction" as in the "probability state with time reduction" or "time reduction state", the time for which the rotating plate of the normal electric device 67a rotates or the number of times the rotating plate of the normal electric device 67a rotates per hit may be changed according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, in the "probability state with time reduction" or "time reduction state", the time for which the rotating plate of the normal electric device 67a rotates may be made longer than in the "normal game state" or the "probability state without time reduction", or the number of times the rotating plate of the normal electric device 67a rotates per hit may be made more than in the "normal game state" or the "probability state without time reduction". Also, in the "time-saving guaranteed bonus state" or "time-saving state," at least two of the following may be done simultaneously: increasing the probability of winning a normal symbol, lengthening the time for which the rotating plate of the normal electric device 67a rotates, and increasing the number of times the rotating plate of the normal electric device 67a rotates.

The variable display unit 80 is disposed from the center to the right side of the play area. The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 consisting of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs a variable performance of the third pattern in synchronization with the dynamic display in the special pattern display device 37, triggered by the ball entering the special pattern 1 winning port 64b or the special pattern 2 winning port 64c (initial winning), and a normal pattern display device 83 consisting of an LED that variably displays the normal pattern, triggered by the ball passing through the normal pattern gate 67. In addition, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 17-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see Figure 7) described later, so that, for example, three pattern columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 6), left, center, and right, are displayed.

Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6) is composed of multiple symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row Z1 to Z3, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 of the first embodiment is used in common for the first lottery game of the first special symbol and the second lottery game of the second special symbol, and while the display of the game state associated with the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the special symbol display device 37, a decorative display corresponding to the display of the special symbol display device 37 is performed using the third symbol of the third symbol display device 81. Note that instead of a display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like.

Now, referring to Figure 6, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be explained. Figure 6 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, where Figure 6(a) is a diagram that shows a schematic diagram of the area division settings and the effective line settings of the display screen, and Figure 6(b) is a diagram that shows an example of the actual display screen.

The third design is made up of 10 main designs numbered "0" through "9." Each main design is made up of a rear design of a wooden box with the numbers "0" through "9" added above it. The main designs with odd numbers ("1," "3," "5," "7," and "9") have large numbers added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. In contrast, the main designs with even numbers ("0," "2," "4," "6," and "8") have additional designs imitating characters such as planes, furoshiki cloths, and helmets added to almost the entire front of the wooden box, and even numbers are added in small green to the lower right of the additional designs so that they are displayed in front of the additional designs.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if the result of the lottery for any of the special symbols by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 7) described later is a jackpot, a variation effect is performed in which the same main symbols are aligned, and a jackpot occurs after the variation effect is completed. If the jackpot type of "probability variation A" described later is won, a variation effect is performed in which the main symbols with the number "7" (corresponding to the "probability variation notification symbol") are aligned. On the other hand, if the jackpot type other than "probability variation A" described later, that is, "time reduction A", "time reduction B", "time reduction C", "latent probability variation A", "latent probability variation B", or "latent probability variation C", is won, a variation effect is performed in which the main symbols with numbers other than "7", that is, the main symbols with numbers "1" to "6", "8", or "9" (corresponding to the "non-probability variation notification symbol") are aligned. By configuring it this way, players cannot identify the type of jackpot that will occur just by checking the main symbols that line up during the variable presentation (excluding the main symbols with the number "7" attached).

As shown in FIG. 6(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into three parts vertically, with the lower two-thirds being made up of a main display area Dm which displays the third pattern in a variable manner and a cockpit display area Db which displays the number of reserved balls, etc., and the remaining upper one-third being a secondary display area Ds which displays preview effects, characters, etc.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3: left, center, and right. The left pattern row Z1 is displayed in the display area Dm1, the center pattern row Z2 is displayed in the display area Dm2, and the right pattern row Z3 is displayed in the display area Dm3.

The third patterns described above are displayed in a specified order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main patterns are arranged in ascending (or descending) numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable performance is performed by scrolling from top to bottom periodically for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Note that the arrangement of the numbers may be different in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. For example, the numbers of the main patterns may be arranged in descending order in the left symbol row Z1, while the numbers of the main patterns may be arranged in ascending order in the center symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3.

In addition, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three rows, top, middle, and bottom, for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle section of this main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and with each variable performance, the third symbols are stopped and displayed on the active line L1 in the order of left symbol column Z1 → right symbol column Z3 → center symbol column Z2. If the third symbols stop on the active line L1 to form a jackpot symbol combination (a combination of the same main symbols; hereafter referred to as a "jackpot display"), a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, if a ball enters the special symbol 1 winning hole 64b while the third symbol corresponding to the first or second special symbol is being displayed (dynamic display) on the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37), the number of times the ball enters (number of reserved balls) is reserved up to four times. The number of reserved balls is displayed by the special symbol display device 37 and is also displayed in the special symbol 1 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d of the first reserved symbol display area Db1 corresponding to the first special symbol in the cockpit display area Db. In the special symbol 1 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, one reserved symbol (in the normal display mode, a "○" symbol (white circle symbol)) is displayed for each reserved ball of the first special symbol (one reserved ball number), and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of reserved symbols displayed in the special symbol 1 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d.

That is, in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db1a to Db1d of Special Chart 1, if one reserved pattern is displayed in the first reserved pattern display area Db1a of Special Chart 1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern is one, if two reserved patterns, one each in the first and second reserved pattern display areas Db1a and Db1b of Special Chart 1, are displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern is two, if three reserved patterns, one each in the first to third reserved pattern display areas Db1a to Db1c of Special Chart 1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern is three, and if four reserved patterns, one each in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db1a to Db1d of Special Chart 1, are displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern is four. In addition, if no reserved patterns are displayed in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db1a to Db1d of Special Chart 1, this indicates that the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern is 0 and there are no reserved variable effects.

In addition, if a ball enters the special symbol 2 winning hole 64c while the third symbol corresponding to the first or second special symbol is being displayed (dynamic display) on the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37), the number of times the ball has entered (number of reserved balls) is reserved up to a maximum of four times. The number of reserved balls is displayed by the special symbol display device 37, and is also displayed in the special symbol 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d of the second reserved symbol display area Db2 corresponding to the second special symbol in the cockpit display area Db. In the special symbol 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d, one reserved symbol (in the normal display mode, a "○" symbol (white circle symbol)) is displayed for each reserved ball of the second special symbol (one reserved ball number), and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of reserved symbols displayed in the special symbol 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d.

That is, in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db2a to Db2d of Special Chart 2, if one reserved pattern is displayed in the first reserved pattern display area Db2a of Special Chart 2, it indicates that the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is one, if two reserved patterns, one each in the first and second reserved pattern display areas Db2a and Db2b of Special Chart 2, are displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is two, if three reserved patterns, one each in the first to third reserved pattern display areas Db2a to Db2c of Special Chart 2, it indicates that the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is three, and if four reserved patterns, one each in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db2a to Db2d of Special Chart 2, are displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is four. Additionally, if no reserved patterns are displayed in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db2a to Db2d of Special Chart 2, this indicates that the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern is 0 and there are no reserved variable effects.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the first lottery game for the first special symbol and the second lottery game for the second special symbol are not executed simultaneously, but only one of the lottery games is executed. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when one of the lottery games being executed ends and reserved balls for the first special symbol and reserved balls for the second special symbol are stored, the second lottery game for the second special symbol is executed preferentially over the first lottery game for the first special symbol (so-called special symbol 2 priority change). In addition, the lottery games may be executed in the order of winning, or the first lottery game for the first special symbol and the second lottery game for the second special symbol may be executed simultaneously.

The central part of the cockpit display area Db is provided with an execution pattern display area Db0, which displays an execution pattern indicating that a variable performance is being performed in the main display area Dm. This execution pattern display area Db0 is provided in the central part of the cockpit display area Db, that is, to the right of the special chart 1 first reserved pattern display area Db1a and to the left of the special chart 2 first reserved pattern display area Db2a, and is configured to display an execution pattern larger than each reserved pattern displayed in each reserved pattern display area Db1a to Db1d, Db2a to Db2d. In addition, in this execution pattern display area Db0, the reserved pattern displayed in the special chart 1 first reserved pattern display area Db1a or the special chart 2 first reserved pattern display area Db2a is shifted (shifted) and displayed as the execution pattern.

The execution pattern displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 is erased when the variable performance ends, and with the erasure of the execution pattern, the displayed reserved pattern is moved and displayed as a reserved pattern on the lower side (the right side if it is the first special pattern, and the left side if it is the second special pattern). Specifically, for example, in a situation where there is no reserved pattern of the second special pattern and there are four reserved patterns of the first special pattern, if the execution pattern displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 is erased with the end of the variable performance of the first special pattern or the second special pattern, when the reserved pattern was displayed in the special pattern 1 first reserved pattern display area Db1a, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the execution pattern in the execution pattern display area Db0. Also, if the reserved pattern was displayed in the special pattern 1 second reserved pattern display area Db1b, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved pattern in the special pattern 1 first reserved pattern display area Db1a. Furthermore, if a reserved pattern is displayed in the third reserved pattern display area Db1c of the special chart 1, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved pattern in the second reserved pattern display area Db1b of the special chart 1. Also, if a reserved pattern is displayed in the fourth reserved pattern display area Db1d of the special chart 1, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved pattern in the third reserved pattern display area Db1c of the special chart 1.

In addition, for example, in a situation where there are four reserved patterns of the second special pattern, when the execution pattern displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 is erased with the end of the variable performance of the first special pattern or the second special pattern, if a reserved pattern was displayed in the special pattern 2 first reserved pattern display area Db2a, it will be moved (shifted) and displayed as the execution pattern in the execution pattern display area Db0. Also, if a reserved pattern was displayed in the special pattern 2 second reserved pattern display area Db2b, it will be moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved pattern in the special pattern 2 first reserved pattern display area Db2a. Furthermore, if a reserved pattern was displayed in the special pattern 2 third reserved pattern display area Db2c, it will be moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved pattern in the special pattern 2 second reserved pattern display area Db2b. In addition, if a reserved pattern is displayed in the special chart 2 fourth reserved pattern display area Db2d, it will be moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved pattern in the special chart 2 third reserved pattern display area Db2c.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the execution pattern continues to be displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 while a variable performance is being executed in the main display area Dm (except during the variable elements of "Super Reach" or "Special Reach"). On the other hand, when the variable performance ends, or when the variable elements of "Super Reach" or "Special Reach" are being executed, the execution pattern is erased. In other words, when the execution pattern is displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0, it indicates that a variable performance is being executed (continued) in the main display area Dm, and when the execution pattern is not displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0, it indicates that a variable performance is not being executed (not continued) in the main display area Dm, or that a variable element of "Super Reach" or a variable element of "Special Reach" is being executed.

The cockpit display area Db is also configured to be able to execute a "reserved change notice" using the reserved symbols and execution symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db. This "reserved change notice" is a notice that indicates the likelihood of a jackpot in the variable performance executed in the main display area Dm by changing the display color of the reserved symbols and execution symbols in multiple stages from before the variable performance is executed until the performance is executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the display color of the reserved and executed symbols can be changed from the normal display mode of "white" to a blue display mode of "blue", a red display mode of "red", or a rainbow display mode of "rainbow" as a "reserved change notice". In this pachinko machine 10, when a "jackpot display" or a "reach display" occurs in the variable performance, the selection ratio of the display color of the reserved and executed symbols is configured to be different, so that the display color of the reserved and executed symbols changes from the normal display mode ("white") to another display mode (for example, "blue"), and the possibility of a "reach display" or a "jackpot display" occurring in the variable performance indicated by the reserved and executed symbols can be suggested to the player for each display color.

Specifically, in the "reserved change notice", the reserved and executed symbols are more likely to show a "reach" or "jackpot" in the variable presentation shown by the reserved and executed symbols when they are displayed in "blue" rather than the normal display form ("white"). Also, the reserved and executed symbols are more likely to show a "reach" or "jackpot" in the variable presentation shown by the reserved and executed symbols when they are displayed in "red" rather than "blue". Furthermore, the reserved and executed symbols are more likely to show a "reach" or "jackpot" in the variable presentation shown by the reserved and executed symbols when they are displayed in "rainbow" rather than "red".

In addition, when the display mode of the reserved pattern and the execution pattern is "red", the variable performance indicated by the "red" reserved pattern or the execution pattern is set to confirm the execution of a "Super Reach"-based performance mode (the main performance mode is referred to as the "performance mode") or a "Special Reach" performance mode (hereinafter, the "Super Reach" performance mode or the "Special Reach" performance mode may be collectively referred to as the "Super Reach or higher" performance mode). In addition, when the display mode of the reserved pattern and the execution pattern is "rainbow", the appearance of a "jackpot display" is set to be confirmed in the variable performance indicated by the "rainbow" reserved pattern or the execution pattern. Therefore, in this embodiment, the display mode of the reserved pattern and the execution pattern is set so that the expectation of the appearance of a "reach display" or a "jackpot display" increases stepwise in the order of normal ("white") → "blue" → "red" → "rainbow".

The "rainbow" display mode of the "reserved change notice" is set so that it does not appear on reserved symbols, but only on executed symbols. This is because if the reserved symbol is not executed due to some abnormality (e.g., a power outage) after the "rainbow" display mode that confirms the occurrence of a jackpot is displayed on the reserved symbol, the player will become dissatisfied because they did not get the jackpot that they should have. Therefore, by configuring the reserved symbols so that the "rainbow" display mode that confirms the occurrence of a jackpot does not appear in advance, it is possible to prevent the above dissatisfaction from occurring.

In addition, when the display mode of the reserved pattern has changed due to this "reserved change notice," if the reserved pattern shifts with the execution (consumption) of a variable performance, the display mode of the changed reserved pattern is inherited (taken over) and reflected in the shifted reserved pattern or executed pattern. In other words, when the display mode of the reserved pattern has changed, even when the changed reserved pattern shifts to another reserved pattern display area Db1-Db3 or executed pattern display area Db0 with the execution of a variable performance, the display mode before the shift is maintained as the display mode of the shifted reserved pattern or executed pattern.

Therefore, for example, if the display color of the reserved pattern in the Special Chart 1 Fourth Reserved Pattern Display Area Db1d changes to "red", as the reserved pattern shifts from the Special Chart 1 Third Reserved Pattern Display Area Db1c → the Special Chart 1 Second Reserved Pattern Display Area Db1b → the Special Chart 1 First Reserved Pattern Display Area Db1a → the Execution Pattern Display Area Db0, the "red" reserved pattern or execution pattern is configured to continue to be displayed.

In the first embodiment, the number of reserved balls for the variable performance based on the balls entering the special winning hole 64b or the special winning hole 64c is configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). In addition, instead of displaying the reserved pattern in the cockpit display area Db, the number of reserved balls may be displayed in a part of the third pattern display device 81 as numbers, or the four divided areas may be displayed in a different form (e.g., color or lighting pattern) according to the number of reserved balls. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special pattern display device 37, the number of reserved balls does not need to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In addition, if information regarding the number of reserved balls (reserved pattern, etc.) is not displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the "reserved change notice" cannot be executed by the reserved pattern, so it may be configured to execute a pre-reading notice similar to the "reserved change notice" by additionally appearing other character patterns, etc.

Furthermore, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with four reserved lamps indicating the number of reserved balls, the number corresponding to the maximum number of reserved balls for the first special pattern and the second special pattern, and the number of reserved balls may be displayed according to the number of reserved lamps that are lit. Note that, if the reserved lamps are configured to display the number of reserved balls, it is of course possible to perform a pre-reading notice similar to the "reserved change notice" of the first embodiment by providing multiple display colors for the reserved lamps.

The sub-display area Ds is elongated and positioned above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. The small areas Ds1 to Ds3 are areas that display characters and preview performance images, respectively. The images displayed in each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 give the player a sense of anticipation that a big win will result from the variable performance performed in the main display area Dm. The cockpit display area Db is an area that displays a reserved pattern indicating the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have entered the special chart 1 winning port 64b or special chart 2 winning port 64c and have not yet executed the variable performance, and an execution pattern related to the variable performance currently being executed.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 6(b), a total of nine main symbols of the third pattern are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, the left small area Ds1 displays a video in which a preview symbol appears, suggesting to the player that the variable presentation taking place in the main display area Dm is in a state where it is easier than usual to transition to a jackpot.

In the sub-display area Ds, in the small central area Ds2, a specific character (in the first embodiment, a boy wearing a headband) usually performs a specific action, and based on the change effect being performed in the main display area Dm, a special action different from the specific action is performed, the color of the boy's hair, which is usually black, or the color of his headband, which is usually white, changes, or another character appears, and a preview effect is performed.

Furthermore, in the sub-display area Ds, a level meter (not shown) appears in the right small area Ds3, indicating in stages whether or not a jackpot will occur in the variable performance being performed in the main display area Dm. This level meter increases (adds) each time the expected probability of a "reach display" occurring or the expected probability of a jackpot increases in the variable performance being performed based on the appearance of a preview pattern or the like in the variable performance, and is configured to indicate that a jackpot will be confirmed when the level meter reaches its display limit (MAX display). Thus, the sub-display area Ds has the function of indicating the occurrence of a "reach display" in the main display area Dm.

Returning to FIG. 3, the explanation will continue. The normal symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by alternating between a "circle" and an "x" as display symbols (normal symbols) each time the ball passes through the normal symbol gate 67. The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that when the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (the "circle" symbol in the first embodiment), the normal electric device 67a goes into an operating state corresponding to the game state (the rotating plate is rotated).

The number of reserved balls in the normal pattern gate 67 can be reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation lamp 84. There are four normal pattern reservation lamps 84, the maximum number of reserved balls, and they are disposed above the third pattern display device 81. The number of reserved balls is displayed by the number of lit normal pattern reservation lamps 84.

The variable display of the normal pattern may be performed by switching on and off a plurality of lamps in the normal pattern display device 83 as in the first embodiment, or may be performed using a part of the special pattern display device 37 or the third pattern display device 81. Similarly, the normal pattern reserve lamp 84 may be lit by a part of the third pattern display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls passing through the normal pattern gate 67 is not limited to four times, as in the special pattern 1 winning port 64b or the special pattern 2 winning port 64c, but may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, when the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special pattern display device 37, the normal pattern reserve lamp 84 may not be lit.

The left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13 are provided with attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching stamps, identification labels, etc., and the stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 can be seen through a small window 35 in the front frame 14 (see Figure 1).

The game board 13 is further provided with an outlet 66. Any balls that do not enter any of the winning holes (ball entry holes) 63, 64, 65a are guided through the outlet 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The game board 13 is provided with numerous nails to appropriately disperse and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and various components (gimmicks) such as windmills are also provided.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, which is a one-chip microcomputer that is a calculation device. The MPU 201 contains a read-only memory (ROM) 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a random access memory (RAM) 203 that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit.

In addition, in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are sent from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are sent only in one direction, from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

The main control device 110 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing the jackpot lottery, setting the dynamic display and variable effects on the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and drawing the display results of the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer 203c that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

The ROM 202 also stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a reserved number table 202c, a stop pattern table 202d, a fluctuation pattern table 202e, a high probability region opening/closing table 202f, and a high probability region effective table 202g. The main control device 110 executes the above-mentioned main controls using various counters stored in the RAM 203 and various tables stored in the ROM 202.

Now, referring to FIG. 8, we will explain the counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform the jackpot lottery, the setting of the dynamic display of the special pattern display device 37, the setting of the variable performance of the third pattern display device 81, the lottery of the display result of the variable display on the normal pattern display device 83, and the like. In addition, in the explanation of the various counters, we will also explain the various tables stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 with reference to FIG. 9 to FIG. 12.

The jackpot random number counter C1 used to select the jackpot lottery, the dynamic display setting of the special pattern display device 37, and the variable presentation setting of the third pattern display device 81 use the following: the jackpot random number counter C1 used to select the jackpot pattern stop type, the jackpot type counter C2 used to select the presentation mode of the variable presentation, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the variable type counter CS1 used to select the variable pattern.

The normal symbol random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used to set the initial value of the normal symbol random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of "4 milliseconds", which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main process (see FIG. 33), and the updated values are appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203c set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Details will be described later, but the RAM 203 is provided with a first reserved ball storage area 203d consisting of four reserved areas (first reserved areas 1 to 4) related to the first special pattern, and a second reserved ball storage area 203e consisting of four reserved areas (second reserved areas 1 to 4) related to the second special pattern, and the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and change type counter CS1 are stored in each of these areas in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the special pattern 1 winning hole 64b or the special pattern 2 winning hole 64c.

Each counter will be explained in detail. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within a predetermined range (e.g., "0 to 899") and return to "0" after reaching a maximum value (e.g., "899" for a counter that can take values from "0 to 899"). In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 has completed one cycle of updating, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated from that initial value.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the jackpot random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the jackpot random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take on values of "0 to 899", the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter with a range of "0 to 899". This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 33).

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22)). Then, when the ball enters the special winning port 64b (start winning), it is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first reserved area of any one of the first reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided in correspondence with the special winning port 64b (first special pattern). Also, when the ball enters the special winning port 64c (start winning), it is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second reserved area of any one of the second reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided in correspondence with the special winning port 64c (second special pattern).

The random number value at which the jackpot random number counter C1 becomes a jackpot is set by the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, and a jackpot is determined when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage areas 203d1, 203e1 in the reserved area matches the random number value at which a jackpot is set by the jackpot random number table 202a.

Now, referring to FIG. 9, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be described. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202. The jackpot random number table 202a is divided into two types: a low probability state table used when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state (period not in a "probability variable state") of a special symbol, which is a "normal game state" or a "time-shortened state", and a high probability state table used when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a "probability variable state (during a probability variable)", which is a high probability state of a special symbol with a higher probability of winning than in a low probability state. The number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot included in each of the low probability state and the high probability state is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot different, the probability of winning a jackpot is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the number of values (jackpot random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that result in a jackpot in a low probability state is three, and the value "7,307,582" is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability of a special symbol in a low probability state (i.e., "normal game state" and "time-saving state") is set to 3/900 = 1/300.

On the other hand, the number of random number values (jackpot random number values) that will result in a jackpot in the high probability state is nine, and the values "28, 122, 298, 390, 486, 567, 656, 750, 866" are stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability of a special symbol in the high probability state (i.e., the "variable probability state") is set to 9/900 = 1/100.

In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number values for the low probability state and the high probability state stored in the jackpot random number table 202a are set so that they do not overlap. If a value exists that will be a jackpot random number regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, this value will be easier to predict from the outside, which may increase the possibility of winning a jackpot illegally. In contrast, by changing the value of the random number that will be a jackpot depending on the state (i.e., whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state or a low probability state) as in the first embodiment, the value of the random number that will be a jackpot can be made harder to predict, which can help to prevent fraud.

Returning to FIG. 8, the explanation will be continued. The jackpot type counter C2 determines the jackpot type in the event of a jackpot, and is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 99") and return to "0" after reaching a maximum value (for example, "99" in the case of a counter that can take values of "0 to 99"). The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment). Then, at the timing when the ball enters the special winning hole 64b (start winning), the value is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the first reserved area, which is the same as the first reserved area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, among the first reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the special winning hole 64b (first special pattern). In addition, when the ball enters the special winning hole 64c (initial winning), it is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the second reserved area, which is the same as the second reserved area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, among the second reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided in correspondence with the special winning hole 64c (second special pattern).

Here, for example, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one of the reserved areas in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e is not a random number that results in a jackpot, that is, if it is a random number that results in a miss, the variation pattern in the variation presentation and the type of stop pattern (hereinafter referred to as the "stop type") will be those for a miss. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one of the reserved areas in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e is a random number that results in a jackpot, the variation pattern in the variation presentation and the stop type will be those for a jackpot. In this case, the variation pattern and stop type for that jackpot are determined in accordance with the jackpot type indicated by the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the same reserved area.

The value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured as a loop counter with a range of "0 to 99". The jackpot type is determined based on this jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b stored in the ROM 202. This jackpot type table 202b includes a jackpot type table 202b1 for special symbol 1, which is referenced in the first lottery game of the first special symbol, and a jackpot type table 202b2 for special symbol 2, which is referenced in the second lottery game of the second special symbol.

Now, referring to FIG. 10(a) and FIG. 10(b), the special symbol 1 jackpot type table 202b1 and the special symbol 2 jackpot type table 202b2 will be described. FIG. 10(a) is a diagram showing an example of the special symbol 1 jackpot type table 202b1 corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the ROM 202, and FIG. 10(b) is a diagram showing an example of the special symbol 2 jackpot type table 202b2 corresponding to the second special symbol stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 10(a) and FIG. 10(b), the jackpot type table 202b is a table that associates the type of special symbol, the jackpot type according to the type of special symbol, and the value of the jackpot type counter C2.

As for the types of jackpots, as mentioned above, there are "Probability Fluctuation A" which is a "15R sure-variable jackpot" in which the probability of winning a special symbol and the probability of winning a normal symbol are both in a high probability state (so-called ST100 times and time reduction 100 times) and notifies the player that the "probability fluctuation state" is in place after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, until the special symbol fluctuation presentation is executed 100 times; "Latent Probability Fluctuation C" which is a "15R latent sure-variable jackpot" in which the probability of winning a special symbol and the probability of winning a normal symbol are both in a high probability state (so-called ST100 times and time reduction 100 times) after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, until the special symbol fluctuation presentation is executed 100 times, but does not notify the player that the "probability fluctuation state" is in place; and "Latent Probability Fluctuation C" which is a "15R latent sure-variable jackpot" in which the probability of winning a normal symbol is in a high probability state (so-called ST100 times and time reduction 100 times) after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, until the special symbol fluctuation presentation is executed 100 times, but does not notify the player that the "probability fluctuation state" is in place after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, until the special symbol fluctuation presentation is executed 100 times. "Time-saving C" is a "15R time-saving jackpot" in which the probability of winning changes to a "time-saving state" where the probability of winning is low (so-called time-saving 100 times), and "Time-saving C" is a "15R time-saving jackpot" in which the probability of winning changes to a "time-saving state" where ... There are "Latent Probability Change A" and "Latent Probability Change B" which are "7R Latent Probability Change Jackpots" that do not notify you that you are in a "Probability Change State", and "Time-Saving A" and "Time-Saving B" which are "7R Time-Saving Jackpots" in which, after a jackpot with a maximum of 7 rounds, the probability of a normal symbol winning is in a high probability state until the special symbol variable performance is executed 50 times, but the probability of a special symbol winning is in a low probability state (so-called time-saving 50 times), and then transition to a "time-saving state".

In the special chart 1 jackpot type table 202b1 and the special chart 2 jackpot type table 202b2, each jackpot type is associated with a possible value of the jackpot type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type.

In the example of the jackpot type table 202b1 for special chart 1 in FIG. 10(a), the jackpot type counter C2 value "0-19" is associated with "time-saving A" which is a "7R time-saving jackpot", the jackpot type counter C2 value "20-39" is associated with "time-saving B" which is a "7R time-saving jackpot", the jackpot type counter C2 value "40-59" is associated with "latent probability fluctuation A" which is a "7R latent probability variable jackpot", the jackpot type counter C2 value "60-79" is associated with "latent probability fluctuation B" which is a "7R latent probability variable jackpot", and the jackpot type counter C2 value "80-99" is associated with "probability fluctuation A" which is a "15R probability variable jackpot".

In the first embodiment, in the lottery for determining whether the first special symbol will be won or lost, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of any of the first reserved areas of the first reserved ball storage area 203d is a value that results in a jackpot, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first reserved area is determined from the jackpot type table 202b1 for special symbol 1.

For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "15", the jackpot type is determined to be "Time-saving A" corresponding to the "7R time-saving jackpot", if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "35", the jackpot type is determined to be "Time-saving B" corresponding to the "7R time-saving jackpot", if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "48", the jackpot type is determined to be "Latent probability fluctuation A" corresponding to the "7R latent probability variable jackpot", if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "77", the jackpot type is determined to be "Latent probability fluctuation B" corresponding to the "7R latent probability variable jackpot", if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "95", the jackpot type is determined to be "Probability fluctuation A" corresponding to the "15R probability variable jackpot".

In other words, when a jackpot is won in the first lottery game of the first special symbol (i.e., the lottery based on the ball entering the special symbol 1 winning port 64b), each of the jackpot types "Time-saving A", "Time-saving B", "Latent probability fluctuation A", "Latent probability fluctuation B" and "Probability fluctuation A" are selected equally at a rate of 20% each.

In the example of the jackpot type table 202b2 for special chart 2 in FIG. 10(b), the jackpot type counter C2 value "0 to 39" is associated with "time-saving C" which is a "15R time-saving jackpot", the jackpot type counter C2 value "40 to 59" is associated with "latent probability fluctuation C" which is a "15R latent certain variable jackpot", and the jackpot type counter C2 value "60 to 99" is associated with "probability fluctuation A" which is a "15R certain variable jackpot".

In the first embodiment, in the lottery for the second special symbol, similar to the lottery for the first special symbol, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of any of the reserved areas of the second reserved ball storage area 203e is a value that results in a jackpot, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the same reserved area is determined from the jackpot type table 202b2 for special symbol 2.

For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "10", then "Time-saving C" corresponding to a "15R time-saving jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "55", then "Latent probability fluctuation C" corresponding to a "15R latent certain variable jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "80", then "Probability fluctuation A" corresponding to a "15R certain variable jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type.

In other words, if a jackpot is won in the second lottery game of the second special symbol (i.e., the lottery based on the ball entering the special symbol 2 winning port 64c), the jackpot type "Time-saving C" is selected 40% of the time, the jackpot type "Latent Probability Fluctuation C" is selected 20% of the time, and the jackpot type "Probability Fluctuation A" is selected 40% of the time.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the lottery game with the second special symbol has a higher gaming value for the player than the lottery game with the first special symbol, so the player has to decide how to win the lottery with the second special symbol, that is, how to get the ball to enter the special symbol 2 winning hole 64c rather than the special symbol 1 winning hole 64b, which provides variety to the game and increases the interest of the game.

Here, the opening patterns and valid patterns of the right-side probability change area 73 and the left-side probability change area 74 for each type of jackpot will be explained. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a jackpot with a special symbol is won, the opening pattern (the driving pattern of the right-side probability change area opening/closing plate 73a and the left-side probability change area opening/closing plate 74a) of the right-side probability change area 73 or the left-side probability change area 74 for each round (1 round to 7 rounds, or 1 round to 15 rounds; the same applies below) during the jackpot is set based on the type of the jackpot, and the valid pattern of the right-side probability change area 73 or the left-side probability change area 74 for each round is set.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a jackpot occurs, a "probability change state" is granted (occurs) after the jackpot ends when the ball passes through the right side probability change area 73 or the left side probability change area 74 that is set to active (hereinafter, the right side probability change area 73 and the left side probability change area 74 may be collectively referred to as "probability change areas 73, 74"), and the "probability change state" is not granted (occurs) even if the ball passes through each probability change area 73, 74 that is set to inactive.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine in which a probability variable area through which a ball can pass is provided in the large prize opening 65a of the variable prize device 65, which opens when a jackpot is won, and the probability variable area is controlled to open and close with an opening/closing lever or the like, and when a ball that has flowed into the large prize opening 65a passes through the probability variable area, a "probability variable state" is generated (given) after the jackpot ends.

In such pachinko machines, when a jackpot occurs, the player is not notified whether a "probability-varying state" will occur, but instead a "latent probability-varying presentation mode (i.e., "time-shortening notification presentation mode" or "normal notification presentation mode"; the same applies below) is performed, for example by displaying a jackpot pattern corresponding to a "time-shortening state" or a "normal game state" on the third pattern display device 81, and a presentation is performed as if the player had entered a "time-shortening state" or a "normal game state" rather than a "probability-varying state". Then, during the jackpot, the opening lever is controlled to open and close at a predetermined timing based on the type of jackpot.

Specifically, for example, in the case of a jackpot type that generates a "probability fluctuating state", the opening/closing lever is controlled to open/close so that the ball that has flowed into the large prize opening 65a passes through the probability fluctuating region, and a "probability fluctuating state" is generated after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot type that does not generate a "probability fluctuating state", the opening/closing lever is controlled to open/close so that the ball that has flowed into the large prize opening 65a does not pass through the probability fluctuating region, and a "time-shortened state" or a "normal game state" is generated after the jackpot ends.

By configuring it in this way, it is difficult (impossible) for the player to recognize whether the game state after the end of the jackpot is the "probability variable state", the "time-saving state", or the "normal game state", creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess which game state they are playing in, and increasing the interest of the game. Also, even if it is the "time-saving state" or "normal game state", the player is made to guess (internally) that it may be the "probability variable state" despite the presentation mode, and is allowed to continue playing, thereby improving the operating rate of the pachinko machine.

However, in the above pachinko machine, even if the "latent probability change presentation mode" is being executed, the "probability change state" is always generated when the ball passes through the probability change area, so the player continues to focus on whether the ball will pass through the probability change area in the large prize opening 65a, and when the player visually confirms that the ball has passed through the probability change area, the player recognizes that a "probability change state" has occurred, destroying the expected playability. Furthermore, if the "latent probability change presentation mode" is continually executed after the player recognizes the occurrence of the "probability change state," it will not provide the player with any interest in the game, and there is a risk that the player will lose interest in the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, two probability change areas (right probability change area 73 and left probability change area 74) are provided within the jackpot opening 65a, and depending on the type of jackpot, one of the opening and closing plates 73a, 74a provided for each probability change area 73, 74 is driven and controlled to open for each round of the jackpot, and the setting of each probability change area 73, 74 is controlled to be switched (internally) between valid and invalid in a state that cannot be recognized by the player. Then, if a ball passes through a probability change area 73, 74 that is set to valid during a jackpot, a "probability change state" is generated after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, even if a ball passes through a probability change area 73, 74 that is set to invalid, a "probability change state" is not generated after the jackpot ends.

That is, for example, when the right special probability area opening/closing plate 73a is open and balls can flow into the right special probability area 73, if the right special probability area 73 is set to be active, when a ball passes through the right special probability area 73, a "probability fluctuation state" is generated after the end of the jackpot. On the other hand, when the right special probability area opening/closing plate 73a is open and balls can flow into the right special probability area 73, if the right special probability area 73 is set to be inactive, a "probability fluctuation state" is not generated after the end of the jackpot, even if a ball passes through the right special probability area 73.

For example, when the left special probability area opening/closing plate 74a is open and balls can flow into the left special probability area 74, if the left special probability area 74 is set to be active, a "probability fluctuation state" is generated after the end of the jackpot when a ball passes through the left special probability area 74. On the other hand, when the left special probability area opening/closing plate 74a is open and balls can flow into the left special probability area 74, if the left special probability area 74 is set to be inactive, a "probability fluctuation state" is not generated after the end of the jackpot even if a ball passes through the left special probability area 74.

By configuring it in this way, even if the ball passes through each probability change area 73, 74, if that probability change area 73, 74 is not internally set to be valid, a "probability change state" will not occur after the end of the jackpot, so even if the player sees the ball passing through each probability change area 73, 74, it is possible to configure it so that the occurrence of a "probability change state" after the end of the jackpot is not confirmed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess in which game state they are playing, even when a "latent probability change performance mode" is being executed, and it is possible to increase the excitement of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the opening and closing patterns of each probability change area 73, 74 corresponding to the jackpot type of the first special symbol are set so that the opening and closing pattern is "X1" in "time reduction A", the opening and closing pattern is "X2" in "time reduction B", the opening and closing pattern is "X1" in "latent probability change A" as in "time reduction A", the opening and closing pattern is "X2" in "latent probability change B" as in "time reduction B", and the opening and closing pattern is "Y1" in "probability change A" (see FIG. 10(a)). Also, the opening and closing patterns of each probability change area 73, 74 corresponding to each jackpot type of the second special symbol are set so that the opening and closing pattern is "Y2" in "time reduction C", the opening and closing pattern is "Y2" in "latent probability change C" as in "time reduction C", and the opening and closing pattern is "Y1" in "probability change A" (see FIG. 10(b)).

Now, referring to FIG. 11, the opening and closing patterns of each of the variable probability areas 73, 74 for each type of jackpot will be described. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a variable probability area opening and closing table 202f. In the variable probability area opening and closing table 202f shown in FIG. 11, the variable probability area 73, 74 that is opened for each round for each type of jackpot for each special pattern is shown, and when the right variable probability area 73 is opened for each round, it is expressed as "right", and when the left variable probability area 74 is opened, it is expressed as "left". In the first embodiment, when one variable probability area 73, 74 (for example, the right variable probability area 73) is opened, the other variable probability area 74, 73 (for example, the left variable probability area 74) is configured to be closed.

As shown in FIG. 11, the opening and closing pattern "X1" of each probability variable area 73, 74 corresponding to the jackpot types "Time-saving A" and "Latent Probability Fluctuation A," which are jackpots of up to 7 rounds for the first special pattern, is such that in odd-numbered rounds (i.e., 1st round, 3rd round, 5th round, and 7th round), the right probability variable area opening and closing plate 73a is opened, allowing the ball to pass through the right probability variable area 73, and the left probability variable area opening and closing plate 74a is closed, preventing the ball from passing through the left probability variable area 74.

In addition, in the opening and closing pattern "X1", in even rounds (i.e., rounds 2, 4, and 6), the left special probability area opening and closing plate 74a is opened, allowing the ball to pass through the left special probability area 74, and the right special probability area opening and closing plate 73a is closed, preventing the ball from passing through the right special probability area 73.

In other words, in the opening and closing pattern "X1", the ball can pass through the right side special probability area 73 in the first round of the jackpot, and the ball can pass through the left side special probability area 74 in the next round (i.e., the second round), and thereafter, the ball can pass through either the right side special probability area 73 or the left side special probability area 74 alternately each round until the end of the jackpot (i.e., the end of the seventh round). Therefore, the number of rounds that can be passed through to the right side special probability area 73 is "4", and the number of rounds that can be passed through to the left side special probability area 74 is "3".

Next, as shown in FIG. 11, the opening and closing pattern "X2" of each probability variable area 73, 74 corresponding to the jackpot types "Time-saving B" and "Latent Probability Fluctuation B", which are jackpots of up to 7 rounds of the first special pattern, is such that in odd-numbered rounds (i.e., 1st round, 3rd round, 5th round, and 7th round), the left probability variable area opening and closing plate 74a is opened, allowing the ball to pass through the left probability variable area 74, and the right probability variable area opening and closing plate 73a is closed, preventing the ball from passing through the right probability variable area 73.

In addition, in the opening and closing pattern "X2", in even rounds (i.e., rounds 2, 4, and 6), the right special probability area opening and closing plate 73a is opened, allowing the ball to pass through the right special probability area 73, and the left special probability area opening and closing plate 74a is closed, preventing the ball from passing through the left special probability area 74.

In other words, in the opening and closing pattern "X2", the ball can pass through the left side special probability area 74 in the first round of the jackpot, and the ball can pass through the right side special probability area 73 in the next round (i.e., the second round), and thereafter, the ball can pass through either the left side special probability area 74 or the right side special probability area 73 alternately each round until the end of the jackpot (i.e., the end of the seventh round). Therefore, the number of rounds that can be passed through to the left side special probability area 74 is "4", and the number of rounds that can be passed through to the right side special probability area 73 is "3".

Next, as shown in FIG. 11, the opening and closing pattern "Y1" of each probability variable area 73, 74 corresponding to the jackpot type "Probability Variation A", which is a maximum of 15 rounds of jackpots for the first and second special symbols, is such that in odd rounds (i.e., 1st round, 3rd round, 5th round, 7th round, 9th round, 11th round, 13th round, and 15th round), the left probability variable area opening and closing plate 74a is opened, allowing the ball to pass through the left probability variable area 74, and the right probability variable area opening and closing plate 73a is closed, preventing the ball from passing through the right probability variable area 73.

In addition, in the opening and closing pattern "Y1", in even rounds (i.e., 2nd round, 4th round, 6th round, 8th round, 10th round, 12th round, and 14th round), the right special probability area opening and closing plate 73a is opened, allowing the ball to pass through the right special probability area 73, and the left special probability area opening and closing plate 74a is closed, preventing the ball from passing through the left special probability area 74.

In other words, in the opening and closing pattern "Y1", the ball can pass through the left side special probability area 74 in the first round of the jackpot, and the ball can pass through the right side special probability area 73 in the next round (i.e., the second round), and thereafter, the ball can pass through the left side special probability area 74 or the right side special probability area 73 alternately each round until the end of the jackpot (i.e., the end of the 15th round). Therefore, the number of rounds that can be passed through to the left side special probability area 74 is "8", and the number of rounds that can be passed through to the right side special probability area 73 is "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 11, the opening and closing pattern "Y2" of each probability variable area 73, 74 corresponding to the jackpot types "Time-saving C" and "Latent Probability Fluctuation C," which are jackpots of up to 15 rounds of the second special pattern, is such that in odd-numbered rounds (i.e., 1st round, 3rd round, 5th round, 7th round, 9th round, 11th round, 13th round, and 15th round), the right probability variable area opening and closing plate 73a is opened, allowing the ball to pass through the right probability variable area 73, and the left probability variable area opening and closing plate 74a is closed, preventing the ball from passing through the left probability variable area 74.

In addition, in the opening and closing pattern "Y2", in even rounds (i.e., 2nd round, 4th round, 6th round, 8th round, 10th round, 12th round, and 14th round), the left special probability area opening and closing plate 74a is opened, allowing the ball to pass through the left special probability area 74, and the right special probability area opening and closing plate 73a is closed, preventing the ball from passing through the right special probability area 73.

In other words, in the opening and closing pattern "Y2", the ball can pass through the right-side special probability area 73 in the first round of the jackpot, and the ball can pass through the left-side special probability area 74 in the next round (i.e., the second round), and thereafter, the ball can pass through either the right-side special probability area 73 or the left-side special probability area 74 alternately each round until the end of the jackpot (i.e., the end of the 15th round). Therefore, the number of rounds that can be passed through to the right-side special probability area 73 is "8", and the number of rounds that can be passed through to the left-side special probability area 74 is "7".

In this way, by providing jackpot types with equivalent opening and closing patterns (i.e., jackpot types "Time-saving A" and "Latent Probability Variation A", jackpot types "Time-saving B" and "Latent Probability Variation B", and jackpot types "Time-saving C" and "Latent Probability Variation C") and making it impossible to determine the jackpot type based on the opening and closing pattern of each probability variation area 73, 74 alone, it is made difficult (impossible) for the player to recognize which jackpot type he has won, creating a gameplay experience that allows the player to guess in which game state he is playing, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

Returning to FIG. 10 for further explanation, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the valid patterns of each probability change area 73, 74 corresponding to the jackpot type of the first special symbol are set so that the valid pattern is "A" in "time-saving A" and "latent probability change B", the valid pattern is "B" in "time-saving B" and "latent probability change A", and the valid pattern is "C" in "probability change A" (see FIG. 10(a)).

In addition, the valid patterns for each probability change area 73, 74 corresponding to the jackpot type of the second special symbol are set so that in "Time Reduction C" the valid pattern is "A", in "Latent Probability Change C" the valid pattern is "B", and in "Probability Change A" the valid pattern is "C" (see FIG. 10(b)).

Now, referring to FIG. 12, the effective patterns of each special probability area 73, 74 for each jackpot type will be described. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a schematic example of a special probability area effective table 202g. The special probability area effective table 202g shown in FIG. 12 shows the special probability area 73, 74 that is set to be effective for each round for each jackpot type for each special pattern, and when the right special probability area 73 is set to be effective, it is expressed as "right", and when the left special probability area 74 is set to be effective, it is expressed as "left".

In addition, in each round, when neither of the probability change areas 73, 74 is set to be valid, i.e., when both probability change areas 73, 74 are set to be invalid, the corresponding column is represented by a diagonal ruled line. Also, in the first embodiment, when one probability change area 73, 74 (for example, the right probability change area 73) is set to be valid, the other probability change area 74, 73 (for example, the left probability change area 74) is set to be invalid.

As shown in FIG. 12, for the valid pattern "A" of each probability change area 73, 74 in the first special symbol jackpot type "Time-saving A" and "Latent Probability Change B" and the second special symbol jackpot type "Time-saving C", the right-side probability change area 73 is set to be valid while the left-side probability change area 74 is set to be invalid in the second round. Also, for the valid pattern "A", the left-side probability change area 74 is set to be valid while the right-side probability change area 73 is set to be invalid in the fifth round. Note that for the valid pattern "A", both probability change areas 73, 74 are set to be invalid in other rounds (i.e., the first, third, fourth, sixth, and seventh rounds and onward).

In other words, in the case of the effective pattern "A" in each probability change area 73, 74, if the ball passes through the right probability change area 73 in the second round, or the ball passes through the left probability change area 74 in the fifth round, a "probability change state" is granted after the end of the jackpot.

Here, the opening patterns of the jackpot types "Time-saving A" and "Time-saving C" are such that in the second round, the left-side variable probability area 74 is open, while the right-side variable probability area 73 is closed. Also, in the fifth round, the right-side variable probability area 73 is open, while the left-side variable probability area 74 is closed. Therefore, in any round, the ball does not pass through the variable probability areas 73, 74 that are set to be valid. Therefore, in the jackpot types "Time-saving A" and "Time-saving C", the ball does not pass through the variable probability areas 73, 74 that are set to be valid during the jackpot, so that a "probability fluctuation state" does not occur after the jackpot ends.

On the other hand, the opening pattern of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B" is such that in the second round, the right-side probability fluctuation area 73 is open, while the left-side probability fluctuation area 74 is closed. Also, in the fifth round, the left-side probability fluctuation area 74 is open, while the right-side probability fluctuation area 73 is closed. Thus, the ball passes through the probability fluctuation areas 73, 74 in multiple rounds in which each probability fluctuation area 73, 74 is set to be valid. Therefore, in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B", the ball passes through the probability fluctuation areas 73, 74 that are set to be valid during the jackpot, so that a "probability fluctuation state" occurs after the jackpot ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12, for the first special symbol jackpot type "Time-saving B" and "Latent Probability Change A" and the second special symbol jackpot type "Latent Probability Change C", the effective pattern "B" of each probability change area 73, 74 is set such that in the third round, the right-side probability change area 73 is set as effective, while the left-side probability change area 74 is set as ineffective. Also, for the effective pattern "B", in the sixth round, the left-side probability change area 74 is set as effective, while the right-side probability change area 73 is set as ineffective. Note that for the effective pattern "B", both probability change areas 73, 74 are set as ineffective in other rounds (i.e., the first, second, fourth, fifth, seventh and subsequent rounds).

In other words, in the case of the effective pattern "B" in each probability change area 73, 74, the "probability change state" is given after the end of the jackpot by the ball passing through the right probability change area 73 in the third round or the ball passing through the left probability change area 74 in the sixth round.

Here, the opening pattern of the jackpot type "Time-saving B" is that in the third round, the left-side probability change area 74 is open, while the right-side probability change area 73 is closed. Also, in the sixth round, the right-side probability change area 73 is open, while the left-side probability change area 74 is closed. Therefore, in any round, the ball does not pass through the probability change areas 73, 74 that are set to be valid. Therefore, in the jackpot type "Time-saving B", the ball does not pass through the probability change areas 73, 74 that are set to be valid during the jackpot, so that a "probability fluctuation state" does not occur after the jackpot ends.

Meanwhile, in the opening patterns of the jackpot types "latent probability fluctuation A" and "latent probability fluctuation C", the right-side probability fluctuation area 73 is open in the third round, while the left-side probability fluctuation area 74 is closed. Also, in the sixth round, the left-side probability fluctuation area 74 is open, while the right-side probability fluctuation area 73 is closed. Thus, the ball passes through each probability fluctuation area 73, 74 in multiple rounds in which the probability fluctuation areas 73, 74 are set to be valid. Therefore, in the jackpot types "latent probability fluctuation A" and "latent probability fluctuation C", the ball passes through the probability fluctuation areas 73, 74 that are set to be valid during the jackpot, so that a "probability fluctuation state" occurs after the jackpot ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12, in the valid pattern "C" of each probability change area 73, 74 in the jackpot type "probability change A" of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the right-side probability change area 73 is set to be valid while the left-side probability change area 74 is set to be invalid in the fourth round. Also, in the valid pattern "C", the left-side probability change area 74 is set to be valid while the right-side probability change area 73 is set to be invalid in the ninth round. Note that, in the valid pattern "C", both probability change areas 73, 74 are set to be invalid in the other rounds (i.e., rounds 1 to 3, rounds 5 to 8, and rounds 10 to 15).

In other words, in the case of the effective pattern "C" in each probability change area 73, 74, the "probability change state" is given after the jackpot ends when the ball passes through the right probability change area 73 in the fourth round or the left probability change area 74 in the ninth round.

Here, the opening pattern of the jackpot type "Probability Fluctuation A" is such that in the fourth round, the right-side probability fluctuation area 73 is open, while the left-side probability fluctuation area 74 is closed. Also, in the ninth round, the left-side probability fluctuation area 74 is open, while the right-side probability fluctuation area 73 is closed. Thus, the ball passes through the probability fluctuation areas 73, 74 in multiple rounds in which each probability fluctuation area 73, 74 is set to be valid. Therefore, in the jackpot type "Probability Fluctuation A", the ball passes through the probability fluctuation areas 73, 74 that are set to be valid during the jackpot, so that a "probability fluctuation state" occurs after the jackpot ends.

In this way, for each type of jackpot, the probability change areas 73, 74 that can be passed through are set for each round, and the probability change areas 73, 74 are set as valid or invalid in accordance with the round. By making it impossible to determine the type of jackpot just by the ball passing through each probability change area 73, 74, it is made difficult (impossible) for the player to know which type of jackpot he has won, creating a gameplay experience that allows the player to guess in which game state he is playing, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when a jackpot type that generates a "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot is won, the ball is configured to be able to pass through the variable probability areas 73, 74 that are set validly in multiple rounds of the jackpot. Therefore, even if the ball cannot pass through the variable probability areas 73, 74 that are set validly in one of the rounds in which the variable probability areas 73, 74 are set validly, it is possible to pass the ball through the variable probability areas 73, 74 that are set validly in the other round. Therefore, even if a sudden trouble (for example, a game abnormality such as a firing abnormality or a player's poor physical condition) prevents the ball from passing through the variable probability areas 73, 74 in one of the rounds that are set validly, by providing the possibility of passing the ball through the variable probability areas 73, 74 that are set validly in the other round that is set valid, the player can enjoy a comfortable game without suffering any disadvantage due to an unforeseen situation, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, when a jackpot type that generates a "probability fluctuation state" after the end of a jackpot is won, different probability fluctuation areas 73, 74 are enabled in multiple rounds of the jackpot, allowing the ball to pass through. By configuring it in this way, even if an abnormality occurs in one of the probability fluctuation areas 73, 74, a "probability fluctuation state" can be generated when the ball passes through the other probability fluctuation area 74, 73. Therefore, a comfortable game can be played without the player suffering any disadvantage due to unforeseen circumstances, and the interest of the game can be increased.

The probability that each jackpot type will be selected in the event of a jackpot is set appropriately for each machine type. Then, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is specified in the jackpot type table 202b according to the set probability.

The probability of a jackpot type being selected may be changed depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, a jackpot type table 202b corresponding to each game state may be prepared, and the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type may be changed in each jackpot type table 202b.

Returning to FIG. 8, we will continue to explain the various counters. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to increment by "1" in sequence within the range of "0 to 99", for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (i.e. "99").

In the first embodiment, the general presentation mode of the variable presentation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of a big win or a miss is selected based on the number of reserved variable presentations and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. Specifically, five presentation modes are selected: a "non-reach (shortened)" presentation mode or a "non-reach (normal)" presentation mode in which no "reach display" occurs, a "normal reach" presentation mode in which only the variable elements of a "normal reach" are executed as a "reach display", a "super reach" presentation mode in which the variable elements of the "normal reach" are developed to execute the variable elements of a "super reach", and a "special reach" presentation mode in which the variable elements of a "normal reach" are developed to execute the variable elements of a "special reach".

Here, each presentation mode will be explained in detail. Among the presentation modes, the "non-reach (shortened)" presentation mode and the "non-reach (normal)" presentation mode are presentation modes in which, after a "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is performed in each of the display areas Dm1 to Dm3 (see FIG. 6(a)) of the main display area Dm, the same third pattern does not stop in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3, and a "reach display" does not occur.

The "high-speed fluctuation" variable element refers to a variable element in which the third symbols displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6(a)) are scrolled vertically downward on the display screen at high speed in the variable presentation performed in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 6) of the third symbol display device 81. In this "high-speed fluctuation," the third symbol is fluctuated so that the player cannot clearly recognize the display content of the third symbol, and the stopped results of the previously stopped and displayed variable presentation are randomly mixed (shuffled).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after a "high-speed change" variable element is performed, a "low-speed change" variable element is performed except for a specific presentation mode (a "non-reach (shortened)" presentation mode). A "low-speed change" variable element refers to a variable element that scrolls the third pattern slowly at a speed that is visible to the player after the above-mentioned "high-speed change" variable element in a variable presentation performed in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 6(a)) of the third pattern display device 81. In this "slow-speed change" variable element, the third pattern is displayed in a stopped manner in the order of left pattern row Z1 → right pattern row Z3 → center pattern row Z2 (see FIG. 6(a)), while allowing the player to recognize the display content of the third pattern. If the same third symbol stops in the left symbol column Z1 and the right symbol column Z3, it is determined that a "reach display" has occurred, and the game progresses to a "normal reach" variable element. On the other hand, if different third symbols stop in the left symbol column Z1 and the right symbol column Z3, the middle symbol column Z2 is displayed as stopped, and the variable effect ends (except when it progresses to a "pseudo consecutive" as described below).

Therefore, in the "non-reach (normal)" presentation mode, the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is performed, and then the "slow-speed fluctuation" variable element is performed, and each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6(a)) stops in order, and one variable presentation ends. On the other hand, in the "non-reach (shortened)" presentation mode, the "slow-speed fluctuation" variable element is not performed after the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is performed, and after the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element ends, each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 stops simultaneously, and one variable presentation ends.

Among the presentation modes, the "normal reach" presentation mode is one of the presentation modes of the "reach display" in which the variable elements of the "normal reach" are executed immediately after the same third symbol stops in the left symbol column Z1 and the right symbol column Z3 in the variable presentation of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6(a)) of the main display area Dm, and the "reach display" does not develop into other "reach displays", that is, the variable elements of the "super reach" or the variable elements of the "special reach". In this "normal reach" variable element, as described above, the third symbol displayed stopped in the left symbol column Z1 (left display area Dm1) and the right symbol column Z3 (right display area Dm3) of the main display area Dm is displayed larger than usual. In addition, the third symbol in the middle symbol column Z2 (middle display area Dm2) scrolls vertically downward on the display screen at a low speed, and the third symbol in the middle display area Dm2 is displayed in a state where it can be seen by the player. Furthermore, in this "normal reach" variable, the secondary display area Ds is erased (not shown) as the primary display area Dm is enlarged.

Among the presentation modes, the "Super Reach" presentation mode is one of the presentation modes of the "Reach Display" in which the variable elements of the "Normal Reach" are developed and the variable elements of the "Super Reach" are executed. In this "Super Reach" presentation mode, while the variable elements of the "Super Reach" are being executed, the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6(a)) is erased from the display state of the variable elements of the "Normal Reach", and the reach formation pattern of the third pattern that was the cause of the occurrence of this "Reach Display" is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left of the display area of the display screen. Then, the background display of the main display area Dm changes from the variable elements of the "Normal Reach", and multiple character patterns are made to appear, performing a "battle presentation (e.g., kickboxing)" (not shown).

In the first embodiment, the display is configured to suggest whether the variable performance will be a success or failure based on the result (win or loss) of the "battle performance." Specifically, for example, in the above-mentioned "battle performance," if the character design on the player's side wins against the character design on the enemy's side, the display is configured to suggest that the variable performance will be a "jackpot display," and if the character design on the player's side loses to the character design on the enemy's side, the display is configured to suggest that the variable performance will be a "loss display."

Among the presentation modes, the "Special Reach" presentation mode is one of the presentation modes of the "Reach Display" in which the variable elements of the "Normal Reach" are developed and the variable elements of the "Special Reach" are executed. In this "Special Reach" presentation mode, while the variable elements of the "Special Reach" are being executed, the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6(a)) is erased from the display state of the variable elements of the "Normal Reach" as in the variable elements of the "Super Reach" described above, and the reach formation pattern of the third pattern that was the cause of the occurrence of this "Reach Display" is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left of the display area of the display screen. Then, the background display of the main display area Dm (see FIG. 6(a)) changes from the variable elements of the "Normal Reach", and multiple characters different from the variable elements of the "Super Reach" are made to appear and a "race presentation (e.g., a car race)" is performed (not shown).

In the first embodiment, the display is configured to suggest whether the variable presentation will be a success or failure based on the result (win or loss) of the "competition presentation." Specifically, for example, in the above-mentioned "competition presentation," if the character design on the player's side wins against the character design on the opponent's side, the display is configured to suggest that the variable presentation will be a "jackpot display," and if the character design on the player's side loses to the character design on the opponent's side, the display is configured to suggest that the variable presentation will be a "loss display."

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22)). Then, when the ball enters the special winning port 64b (start winning), the value is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first reserved area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, among the first reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the special winning port 64b (first special pattern). Also, when the ball enters the special winning port 64c (start winning), the value is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second reserved area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, among the second reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the special winning port 64c (second special pattern).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d that references the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to differ depending on whether the variable performance is successful, the current game state, and the number of variable performances currently on hold (number of reserved balls). In other words, multiple types of stop pattern tables 202d are provided, and are configured to be selected depending on the number of waiting variable performances (number of reserved balls), etc.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when determining the detailed variation pattern of the variable presentation, first, based on the reserved number table 202c provided in the ROM 202, one of the stop pattern tables 202d corresponding to the success or failure of the variable presentation, the current game state, and the current number of variable presentations (number of reserved balls) is selected. Then, based on the selected stop pattern table 202d and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, a rough presentation mode of the variable presentation is selected. After that, based on the selected presentation mode and the value of the variation type counter CS1 described later, a detailed variation pattern (variation time) of the variable presentation is determined.

These multiple stop pattern tables 202d are set so that the range of random numbers of the stop pattern selection counter C3 from which the presentation mode is selected differs for each stop pattern table 202d. The reason for providing multiple stop pattern tables 202d is to change the selection ratio of the presentation mode of the variable presentation depending on whether the variable presentation is a hit or miss, the game status, and the number of reserved balls. That is, the selection ratio of the presentation mode is changed depending on (1) whether a jackpot occurs in the variable presentation of the acquired third pattern, (2) whether the current game status of the pachinko machine 10 is the "probability variable state," "time shortening state," or "normal game status," and (3) how many reserved balls there are for the reserved variable presentation.

The first reason is to change the expectation of a jackpot for each presentation mode. That is, by configuring the ratio of selection of the "non-reach" presentation mode, the "normal reach" presentation mode, the "super reach" presentation mode, and the "special reach" presentation mode to be different between when the jackpot lottery is won and when it is lost, the expectation of a jackpot is changed for each presentation mode. Specifically, for example, when the jackpot lottery is won, the "super reach" presentation mode or the "special reach" presentation mode is configured to be easily selected, and when the jackpot lottery is not won, the "non-reach" presentation mode or the "normal reach" presentation mode is configured to be easily selected. By configuring in this way, the "super reach" presentation mode and the "special reach" presentation mode can be made to be a presentation that is easy to win a jackpot, and the "normal reach" presentation mode and the "non-reach" presentation mode can be made to be a presentation that is difficult to win or does not win a jackpot, and the expectation of a jackpot for each presentation mode can be differentiated. Therefore, when a performance that is likely to result in a jackpot appears in the variable performance, the player is informed that there is a high possibility of a jackpot occurring while that performance is occurring, increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the lottery result obtained is a jackpot, the presentation mode of the variable presentation is selected based on the stop pattern table 202d that makes it easy to select a presentation that is likely to result in a jackpot and difficult to select a presentation that is unlikely to result in a jackpot. On the other hand, when the lottery result obtained is a miss, the stop pattern table 202d is configured to make it difficult to select a presentation that is likely to result in a jackpot and difficult to select a presentation that is unlikely to result in a jackpot. As a result, when the lottery result of the third symbol is notified to the player in the variable presentation, if a presentation that is likely to result in a jackpot is being executed, the variable presentation makes it easy to generate a jackpot, and if a presentation that is unlikely to result in a jackpot is being executed, the variable presentation makes it difficult to generate a jackpot. By setting a difference in the expected value of a jackpot for each presentation mode, the interest in the game can be increased during the execution of the variable presentation.

The second reason is to minimize the number of wasted balls (so-called no lottery due to overflow winning) due to balls entering the special symbol 1 winning hole 64b when the number of waiting times for the first special symbol variable performance has reached the upper limit, or balls entering the special symbol 2 winning hole 64c when the number of waiting times for the second special symbol variable performance has reached the upper limit. To be more specific, the number of waiting times for the first special symbol and the second special symbol variable performance are each limited to a maximum of four times, and the variable performance is executed for at least a certain time, so that in a game state in which a ball is likely to enter the special symbol 2 winning hole 64c in the "probability variable state", the maximum number of reserved balls for the second special symbol is likely to be reached. In these game states, if a variable performance with a long variable time is selected, balls will frequently enter the special symbol 2 winning hole 64c when the maximum number of reserved balls for the second special symbol has been reached, and even if a ball enters the special symbol 2 winning hole 64c, the chance to select the second special symbol cannot be obtained. Also, even in the "normal game state," if a long-time variable effect is selected when the maximum number of reserved balls for the first special symbol has been reached, the reserved balls for the first special symbol are not consumed during the variable effect, and even if a ball enters the special symbol 1 winning port 64b during that time, the player cannot obtain a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol. In this state, the player decides that he or she cannot obtain game value by letting the ball enter the special symbol 1 winning port 64b, and stops firing balls and suspends play until the variable effect is consumed and the reserved balls can be obtained again. If play is suspended, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 decreases, which has an impact on the management of the game arcade.

The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to select the presentation mode of the variable presentation based on the stop pattern table 202d, which tends to select a relatively short variable time, in a game state in which the maximum number of reserved balls for the third pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) is likely to be reached, or in a number of reserved balls close to (or equal to) the maximum number of reserved balls. This makes it possible to prevent balls from entering the special pattern 1 winning hole 64b or the special pattern 2 winning hole 64c when the maximum number of reserved balls for the third pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) has been reached.

Furthermore, the third reason is that the execution time is set long and the end of the variable performance is delayed to maintain the state in which the variable performance is being executed for a long time. To be more specific, when the number of reserved balls for the variable performance is small (none), if a ball is not inserted into either the special chart 1 winning port 64b or the special chart 2 winning port 64c within the variable time of the variable performance being executed, the next variable performance cannot be started, and a demo screen or the like must be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. If the third pattern display device 81 does not perform a variable performance even though the player is playing by firing a ball, the player cannot get the interest related to the lottery for the big win that the player is looking for, and loses interest in the game. In addition, the player may recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is one in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the special chart 1 winning port 64b or the special chart 2 winning port 64c because the variable performance is not being performed on the third pattern display device 81, and may judge that it is a machine in which it is difficult to obtain game value, and may stop playing with the pachinko machine 10.

The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to select the presentation mode of the variable presentation based on the stop pattern table 202d, which is likely to select a relatively long variable time when the number of reserved balls for the variable presentation is small. This makes it difficult for a situation to occur in which the variable presentation is not being performed in the third pattern display device 81, and makes it possible to maintain the execution state of the variable presentation in the third pattern display device 81 for a long time.

The variable type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by "1" in sequence within the range of "0 to 199", for example, and to return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (i.e. "199"). The value of the variable type counter CS1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) described later is executed once, and is also repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 33). Then, at the timing when the ball enters the special winning hole 64b (start winning), it is stored in the variable type counter storage area 203d4 of the first reserved area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, among the first reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the special winning hole 64b (first special pattern). In addition, when the ball enters the special winning hole 64c (initial winning), it is stored in the variable type counter storage area 203e4 of the second reserved area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, among the second reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided in correspondence with the special winning hole 64c (second special pattern).

The variation type counter CS1 is used to determine the detailed variation pattern of the variation performance. That is, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the detailed variation pattern based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table 202e stored in the ROM 202 in the performance mode selected by the stop pattern table 202d and the stop pattern selection counter C3. Specifically, the determination of the variation pattern is the determination of the variation time of the variation performance. The sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and detailed pattern variation mode of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, and also determine whether or not to execute the advance notice performance and the execution mode of the advance notice performance.

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a rough variation pattern of the variation presentation and determines only the variation time. By configuring it in this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 does not need to perform detailed control such as advance lottery required to execute the variation presentation, so the processing of the MPU 201 related to the variation presentation can be reduced. In addition, the main control device 110 does not need to prepare commands for all variation patterns of the variation presentation, so the ROM capacity of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 can increase the freedom to select the variable presentation by determining the detailed pattern of the variable presentation based on the variable time (rough variable pattern) determined by the main control device 110. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine 10 in which the game state changes from moment to moment, it becomes possible to select or change the content of the variable presentation at any time in response to the changes, and an appropriate presentation can be executed according to the game state.

Here, we will explain each variable element that makes up the variable pattern. A variable element is a part of one variable performance, and one variable performance is composed by combining each variable element. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variable elements provided are a "high-speed fluctuation" variable element, a "low-speed fluctuation" variable element, a "pseudo consecutive" variable element, a "normal reach" variable element, a "super reach" variable element, a "special reach" variable element, and a "re-fluctuation" variable element.

The "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is a variable element that scrolls and fluctuates at such a high speed that the player cannot clearly recognize the contents of the third symbol. This "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is performed for "3 seconds" at the beginning of the variable performance if the "non-reach (shortened)" presentation mode is selected, and is performed for "7 seconds" at the beginning of the variable performance if a presentation mode other than "non-reach (shortened)" (for example, "non-reach (normal)") is selected. When this "high-speed fluctuation" variable element ends, the "low-speed fluctuation" variable element described below is started (executed), or the variable performance ends as it is.

The "low-speed fluctuation" variable element is a variable element that starts after the execution of the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element for "7 seconds" and scrolls the third symbol so that it can be seen, showing whether or not a "reach display" will occur. This "low-speed fluctuation" variable element is not executed when the "non-reach (shortened)" presentation mode is selected, and is executed "3 seconds" after the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element when a presentation mode other than the "non-reach (shortened)" presentation mode (for example, the "non-reach (normal)" presentation mode) is selected. That is, in the "non-reach (shortened)" presentation mode, after the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is executed, each pattern row Z1 to Z3 in the main display area Dm is rapidly stopped (so-called a perfect stop) without passing through the "low-speed fluctuation" variable element. Note that, when this "low-speed fluctuation" variable element ends, the "pseudo consecutive" variable element described later is started (executed), the "normal reach" variable element described later is started (executed), or the variable performance ends as it is.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "non-reach (normal)" presentation mode is configured with a variation pattern that includes a "7-second" "high-speed variation" variable element and a "3-second" "low-speed variation" variable element. Also, the "non-reach (shortened)" presentation mode is configured with a variation pattern that includes only a "3-second" "high-speed variation" variable element.

The "pseudo consecutive" variable element is a variable element in which the start of a variable effect occurs multiple times (one pseudo stop) during one variable effect. Specifically, it is a variable element in which a "high-speed variable" variable element starts in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 of the third pattern display device 81, then switches to a "low-speed variable" variable element, after which the variable effect in all of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 ends and a predetermined stop result (for example, the pseudo consecutive chance eye "677") is displayed. This "pseudo consecutive" variable element is a variable element in which the above-mentioned predetermined stop result stops after the "slow-speed variable" variable element, and the "high-speed variable" variable element starts again from that stop result, and an effect is executed as if the variable effect had started once more.

The "pseudo consecutive" variable element is a variable element that develops into a "normal reach" variable element after a predetermined stop result (so-called pseudo consecutive chance eye) appears after the execution of a "slow fluctuation" variable element, a second "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is executed again, and then develops into a "normal reach" variable element. In other words, the "pseudo consecutive" variable element is a variable element that performs a pseudo-variable stop (hereinafter referred to as a "pseudo stop") in which a pseudo consecutive chance eye is displayed once, and then a predetermined stop result appears in that pseudo stop, and a "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is started again. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the end of this "pseudo consecutive" variable element, it is configured to always develop into at least a "normal reach" variable element. This "pseudo consecutive" variable element is performed "10 seconds" after the "slow fluctuation" variable element.

In the first embodiment, the number of pseudo stops in the "pseudo consecutive" variable element is one, but the "pseudo consecutive" variable element may be configured to be executed so that the number of pseudo stops is two or more. Also, before the occurrence of the "pseudo consecutive" variable element, a variable element (so-called "pseudo fake" variable element) that performs a performance of whether or not the pseudo consecutive chance eye stops may be performed. In this "pseudo fake" variable element, a performance of whether or not a predetermined stop result appears after the execution of the "slow fluctuation" variable element (for example, a performance of whether or not the pattern that forms the above-mentioned predetermined stop result fluctuates back and forth on the effective line L1 (see FIG. 6(a)) and stops. Hereinafter, referred to as "pseudo fluctuation") may be performed, and the above-mentioned predetermined stop result does not appear in the "pseudo fluctuation", and it may be configured not to develop into the "pseudo consecutive" variable element. By providing this "pseudo-fake" variable element, it is possible to add gameplay in which, after the "pseudo-fake" variable element ends, it develops into a "normal reach" variable element, or a "miss display" appears (for example, "687") and the variable presentation ends.

The "normal reach" variable element is a variable element that indicates whether or not a jackpot will occur based on the result of the fluctuation of the middle pattern column Z2 when a reach-forming symbol is displayed stationary in the left pattern column Z1 and right pattern column Z3 in the "slow fluctuation" variable element or the "pseudo consecutive" variable element (hereinafter, "'slow fluctuation' variable element or 'pseudo consecutive' variable element" may be collectively referred to as "slow fluctuation, etc." variable element). This "normal reach" variable element occurs "10 seconds" after the "slow fluctuation, etc." variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of the "normal reach" is executed, the following patterns are available: a pattern in which the "miss display" is directly displayed, a pattern in which the "jackpot display" is directly displayed, a pattern in which the variable element evolves into a "super reach", a pattern in which the variable element evolves into a "special reach", and a pattern in which a temporary "miss display" is displayed first and then a "re-variation" variable element is executed.

The "Super Reach" variable element is developed and executed when the "miss display" in the "Normal Reach" variable element does not stop and the middle symbol row Z2 continues to change, and a "battle performance" is performed in the main display area Dm to show whether or not a jackpot will occur. This "Super Reach" variable element is executed "10 seconds" after the execution of the "Normal Reach" variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of "Super Reach" is executed, the following patterns are available: a pattern in which the "miss display" is directly displayed, a pattern in which the "jackpot display" is directly displayed, and a pattern in which a temporary "miss display" is first displayed and then the variable element of "re-variation" is executed.

The "Special Reach" variable element is developed and executed when the "miss display" in the "Normal Reach" variable element does not stop and the middle symbol row Z2 continues to change, and a "race presentation" is performed in the main display area Dm to show whether or not a jackpot will occur. This "Special Reach" variable element is performed "20 seconds" after the execution of the "Normal Reach" variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of the "special reach" is executed, the following patterns are available: a pattern in which the "miss display" is directly displayed, a pattern in which the "jackpot display" is directly displayed, and a pattern in which a temporary "miss display" is displayed and then "varies again."

It is configured so that after the variable elements of the "normal reach" are executed, they develop into the variable elements of the "super reach" or the variable elements of the "special reach". However, instead of this configuration, when the reach forming symbol stops after "slow fluctuation", it may be configured so that it develops straight into the variable elements of the "super reach" or the variable elements of the "special reach" without going through the variable elements of the "normal reach". It may also be configured so that the variable elements of the "special reach" are executed after the variable elements of the "super reach" are executed.

The "re-change" variable element is a variable element that develops and is executed after a "miss display" appears once in any of the "reach displays", causing a "jackpot display" to appear. This "re-change" variable element is performed "10 seconds" after any of the "reach displays".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a pattern is prepared in which a "jackpot display" appears after the execution of the "re-variation" variable element.

In addition, this "re-change" variable element is configured to occur only when a jackpot is won. In other words, in the case of a "miss display", the "re-change" variable element is configured not to be executed. This is because the "re-change" variable element is a variable element that changes a temporarily stopped "miss display" to one of the "jackpot displays", and if it is executed in the case of a "miss display" where a jackpot has not been won, a discrepancy in the presentation will occur. Therefore, this "re-change" variable element is configured to be selected only in the jackpot variable pattern table 202e, and not selected in the miss variable pattern table 202e.

The random number counter C4 for a normal map is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within the range of "0 to 99", and returns to "0" after it reaches a maximum value (i.e., "99"). When the random number counter C4 for a normal map goes around once, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the random number counter C4 for the normal map.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the normal random number counter C4 (value = "0 to 99"), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see Figure 22) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see Figure 33).

The value of the regular winning random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22)), and when it is detected that the ball has passed through the regular pattern gate 67, it is stored in one of the regular reserve areas 1 to 4 provided in the regular reserve ball storage area 203j of the RAM 203. Then, the data is shifted to the regular reserve ball execution area 203k in the order in which it was stored in the regular reserve ball storage area 203j, and a win determination is made for the value of the regular winning random number counter C4 stored in the regular reserve ball execution area 203k.

The random number value for a normal symbol winning is set by a normal symbol winning random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 for each game state (for example, "1/10" in a low probability state and "9/10" in a high probability state), and a win is determined when the value of the normal symbol winning counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserve ball execution area 203k matches the random number value for a winning set by the normal symbol winning random number table. Then, a normal symbol variable time table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is referenced according to the game state, and the variable display time of the normal symbol (for example, "3 seconds" or "0.5 seconds") is set, and after the variable display time has elapsed on the normal symbol display device 83, a "○" symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol (normal symbol). Then, depending on the game status, a normal electric control table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is referenced to set the opening time of the rotating plate of the normal electric device 67a (for example, "0.5 seconds" or "5 seconds"). During this opening time, the rotating plate rotates, during which time the ball can roll on the upper surface of the rotating plate.

On the other hand, if the value of the normal winning counter C4 stored in the normal reserved ball execution area 203k does not match the value of the random number that results in a win set by the normal winning random number table (not shown), it is determined to be a miss. Then, a normal variable time table (not shown) is referenced depending on the game status to set a variable display time (for example, "3 seconds" or "0.5 seconds"), and after the variable display time has elapsed on the normal pattern display device 83, an "X" pattern is lit and displayed as the stopping pattern (normal pattern).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variation in the probability of winning or losing the normal symbol, the variable display time of the normal symbol, and the opening time of the rotating plate of the normal electric device 67a is configured to be different depending on each game state. Specifically, for example, in a "normal game state" without a "time-saving function", the probability of winning or losing the normal symbol is low, the variable display time of the normal symbol is long, and the opening time of the rotating plate is short. Also, in a "probability-changing state" or "time-saving state" with a "time function", the probability of winning or losing the normal symbol is high, the variable display time of the normal symbol is short, and the opening time of the rotating plate is long.

In this way, various counters and the like are provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, and various tables are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. The main control device 110 can execute the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing jackpots, setting dynamic displays and variable effects in the special pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results in the normal pattern display device 83, according to the values of these counters and the like and the above-mentioned tables 202a to 202g.

Returning to FIG. 7, the explanation will continue. In addition to the counter buffer 203c shown in FIG. 8, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and a work area (working region) in which various flags, counters, input/output (I/O) values, etc. are stored. The RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power turned on due to the recovery from a power outage; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is performed by the main processing (see FIG. 33) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is performed during the start-up processing (see FIG. 32) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the non-maskable interrupt (NMI) terminal of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) is immediately executed as a processing during a power outage.

The RAM 203 further includes at least a first reserved ball count counter 203a, a second reserved ball count counter 203b, a first reserved ball storage area 203d, a second reserved ball storage area 203e, a reserved ball execution area 203f, a right special chance activation flag 203g, a left special chance activation flag 203h, and a special chance transition flag 203i.

The first reserved ball counter 203a is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) for the dynamic display of the first special pattern (the variable performance of the third pattern corresponding to the first special pattern performed by the third pattern display device 81) performed by the special pattern display device 37 up to a maximum of four times, based on the entry of a ball into the first winning port 64b of the special pattern 1 (hereinafter, the entry of a ball into the special pattern 1 winning port 64b or the special pattern 2 winning port 64c may be referred to as the "initial winning") detected during a timer interrupt process (see Figure 22) that is periodically executed every "4 milliseconds".

This first reserved ball number counter 203a is set to an initial value of "0" by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power is turned on (S913 in FIG. 32). Then, each time a start winning is detected in the special symbol 1 winning slot 64b and the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display (variable performance) of the first special symbol increases, one is added up to the maximum value of "4" (see S203 in FIG. 23). Meanwhile, the first reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by one each time the dynamic display (variable performance) of the first special symbol is executed (see S308 in FIG. 24).

The second reserved ball counter 203b, like the first reserved ball counter 203a, is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the dynamic display of the second special pattern (the variable performance of the third pattern corresponding to the second special pattern performed by the third pattern display device 81) up to a maximum of four times based on the initial winning into the special pattern 2 winning port 64c detected in the timer interrupt process (see Figure 22) that is executed periodically every "4 milliseconds".

Like the first reserved ball counter 203a, the second reserved ball counter 203b is set to an initial value of "0" by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power is turned on (S913 in FIG. 32). Then, each time a start winning is detected in the special symbol 2 winning slot 64c and the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display (variable performance) of the second special symbol increases, the counter is incremented by 1 up to the maximum value of "4" (see S207 in FIG. 23). On the other hand, the second reserved ball counter 203b is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display (variable performance) of the second special symbol is executed (see S305 in FIG. 24).

The value of the first reserved ball counter 203a (i.e., the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern) or the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b (i.e., the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (see S210 in FIG. 23). The reserved ball number command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time a start winning is detected and the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b is incremented by one.

The voice lamp control device 113 can obtain the value of the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display (variable performance) of the first special pattern or the second special pattern reserved in the main control device 110 by using the reserved ball number command. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to manage the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display (variable performance) of each special pattern without accessing the main control device 110. In addition, by sending a reserved ball number command from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time a start winning is detected, even if the reserved ball number of the dynamic display (variable performance) of each special pattern managed by the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the reserved ball number of the actual dynamic display (variable performance) reserved in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the deviation can be corrected by the reserved ball number command received next.

The voice lamp control device 113 sends a display reserved ball number command to notify the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number each time the number of reserved balls managed internally changes. The display control device 114 displays the reserved patterns in the cockpit display area Db of the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by this display reserved ball number command.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when the main control device 110 sends a reserved ball count command to the voice lamp control device 113, the reserved ball count command includes not only the value of the first reserved ball count counter 203a or the second reserved ball count counter 203b that has been incremented by 1, but also the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c (see Figure 8) in response to the start winning that triggered the increment of the first reserved ball count counter 203a or the second reserved ball count counter 203b.

In other words, when a start win occurs, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c by the main control unit 110 are transmitted to the audio lamp control unit 113 by the reserved ball number command.

The audio lamp control device 113 reads ahead the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and change type counter CS1 transmitted by the reserved ball count command before the change performance based on each value is executed, and determines what the change performance will be (whether it will be a jackpot or not, what the change time will be, etc.) before the change performance is executed. Then, based on the results of this read-ahead judgment, it is possible to decide whether to execute various performances, and to determine the content and execution time (timing) of the "reserved change notice" performance.

It may be configured to transmit the reserved ball count command indicating the reserved ball count for the variable performance and the command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, etc., separately. As a command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, etc., separate from the reserved ball count command, a reserved ball count command may be generated at the timing of the ball entering the special chart 1 winning port 64b or the special chart 2 winning port 64c, and commands similar to the variable pattern command and stop type command based on the ball (pre-variation pattern command and pre-stop type command) may be generated and transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In this case, the program for generating the pre-variation pattern command and pre-stop type command may be reused to facilitate program creation.

As described above, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is a memory for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c upon detection of a start winning into any of the special symbol 1 winning holes 64b. When the MPU 201 detects that a ball has won (start winning) into the special symbol 1 winning hole 64b during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), it obtains the values of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 from the counter buffer 203c and stores them in the first reserved ball storage area 203d. The first reserved ball storage area 203d has four reserved areas (first reserved areas 1 to 4) so that data corresponding to one start winning of the first special symbol (counter values C1 to C3, CS1) can be stored (reserved) up to four times (see FIG. 8).

As described above, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is a memory for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c upon detection of the start winning into the special symbol 2 winning hole 64c. When the MPU 201 detects that a ball has won (start winning) into the special symbol 2 winning hole 64c during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), it obtains the values of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 from the counter buffer 203c and stores them in the second reserved ball storage area 203e. The second reserved ball storage area 203e has four reserved areas (second reserved areas 1 to 4) so that data corresponding to one start winning of the second special symbol (counter values C1 to C3, CS1) can be stored (reserved) up to four times (see FIG. 8).

As described above, the reserved ball execution area 203f is a memory for storing data (the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) to be referenced when starting an execution, or when performing a jackpot lottery for the first or second special symbol during execution, or when setting the dynamic display and variable effects of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start the execution of the variable performance of the first or second special symbol, in order to execute the processing such as the lottery for the big win of the first or second special symbol, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the setting of the variable performance, among the data corresponding to each start winning stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e described above (counter C1 to C3, CS1 values), if data corresponding to the start winning of the second special symbol is stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the data corresponding to the first start winning of the data is shifted to this reserved ball execution area 203f. On the other hand, if data corresponding to the start winning of the second special symbol is not stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e and data corresponding to the start winning of the first special symbol is stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the data corresponding to the first start winning of the data is shifted to this reserved ball execution area 203f. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the dynamic display (variable performance) of the second special symbol is executed preferentially, and the dynamic display (variable performance) of the first special symbol is executed on the condition that the dynamic display (variable performance) of the second special symbol is not on hold. Note that, in the first embodiment, shifting refers to moving data stored in one area to another area.

Now, referring again to FIG. 8, the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the reserved ball execution area 203f will be described in detail. The first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the reserved ball execution area 203f are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform the jackpot lottery for the first or second special symbol, and to set the dynamic display and variable presentation of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, the jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, the stop pattern selection counter C3 used for determining the presentation mode of the variable presentation, and the variable type counter CS1 used for determining the variable pattern are used for setting the jackpot lottery for the first or second special symbol, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the variable presentation setting. The first reserved ball storage area 203d stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained by the MPU 201 from the counter buffer 203c when the ball enters the special symbol 1 winning hole 64b (start winning), and the second reserved ball storage area 203e stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained by the MPU 201 from the counter buffer 203c when the ball enters the special symbol 2 winning hole 64c (start winning).

The first reserved ball storage area 203d is made up of four reserved areas (first reserved areas 1 to 4). Each of the four reserved areas (first reserved areas 1 to 4) has a jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 that stores the value of the jackpot type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 that stores the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 203d4 that stores the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

The second reserved ball storage area 203e is composed of four reserved areas (second reserved areas 1 to 4) similar to the first reserved ball storage area 203d. Each of the four reserved areas (second reserved areas 1 to 4) is provided with a jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 that stores the value of the jackpot type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 that stores the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 203e4 that stores the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, similar to the first reserved ball storage area 203d.

In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number counter storage areas 203d1, 203e1, the jackpot type counter storage areas 203d2, 203e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage areas 203d3, 203e3, and the variable type counter storage areas 203d4, 203e4 are all stored together in a single reserved ball storage area 203d, 203e, but multiple reserved ball storage areas may be provided for each counter C1 to C3, CS1.

As described above, the first reserved ball storage area 203d stores up to four pieces of data (the values of each counter C1-C3, CS1) acquired when a ball enters any of the special chart 1 winning ports 64b (initial winning), and in this case, data is stored in the empty areas of the four reserved areas (first reserved areas 1-4) in order starting from the area with the smallest area number (1-4). In other words, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to an earlier initial winning entry into the special chart 1 winning port 64b is stored, and the first reserved area 1 stores data corresponding to the oldest initial winning entry into the special chart 1 winning port 64b.

The second reserved ball storage area 203e also stores up to four pieces of data (counter values C1-C3, CS1) acquired when a ball enters the special chart 2 winning hole 64c (initial winning), and in this case, data is stored in the free areas of the four reserved areas (second reserved areas 1-4) in order from the area with the smallest area number (1-4). In other words, the smaller the area number, the older the data corresponding to the initial winning at the special chart 2 winning hole 64c that is stored, and the second reserved area 1 stores data corresponding to the oldest initial winning at the special chart 2 winning hole 64c.

On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203f is composed of only one area. Like the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e, this reserved ball execution area 203f is provided with a jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter storage area 203f2 that stores the value of the jackpot type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3 that stores the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 203f4 that stores the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable performance, if data (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the data stored in the second reserved first area is shifted to each of the areas 203f1 to 203f4 of the reserved ball execution area 203f. On the other hand, when it is time to start executing the variable performance and no data is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e and data is stored in the first reserved first area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the MPU 201 shifts the data stored in the first reserved first area to each of the areas 203f1 to 203f4 of the reserved ball execution area 203f.

Then, the data shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f is referenced in the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 25), and a jackpot lottery is held based on the reference data and the game status, and a fluctuation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the special symbol display device 37, dynamic display is performed based on the determined fluctuation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

The variation pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by a variation pattern command and a stop type command. Then, under the control of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 performs a variation performance based on the variation pattern and stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The details of the data shift will be explained. When the MPU 201 determines that the timing for starting execution of the variable performance has arrived, it determines whether data is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. If it is determined that data is stored in the second reserved first area as a result of the determination, the random number value in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second reserved first area is shifted to the jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 of the reserved ball execution area 203f. Similarly, the random number value in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the second reserved first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, the random number value in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second reserved first area is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3, and the random number value in the variable type counter storage area 203e4 of the second reserved first area is shifted to the variable type counter storage area 203f4.

When the shifting of data to the reserved ball execution area 203f is completed, the second reserved area 1 becomes empty, and a shift process is performed to move the data stored (reserved) in each area (2nd to 4th) of the second reserved ball storage area 203e to the area (1st to 3rd) with the area number one smaller. Note that in the first embodiment, data shifting is performed only for the second reserved areas (1st to 4th) in the second reserved ball storage area 203e where data is stored (reserved).

Here, we will explain the data shifting performed for each reserved area in the second reserved ball storage area 203e. For example, assume that the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b is "4" when the start decision of the variable performance is made, and data is stored in all areas (1st to 4th) of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. In this state, when the data of the second reserved 1st area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f and the second reserved 1st area becomes empty, the MPU 201 shifts the data of the other areas (2nd to 4th) to the areas (1st to 3rd) with area numbers one less. In other words, the data of the second reserved 2nd area is shifted to the second reserved 1st area, the data of the second reserved 3rd area is shifted to the second reserved 2nd area, and the data of the second reserved 4th area is shifted to the second reserved 3rd area.

For example, if the value of the second reserved ball count counter 203b is "2" when the decision to start the variable performance is made, the MPU 201 shifts only the data in the second reserved area 2 to the second reserved area 1, and ends the data shifting. As described above, in the first embodiment, data shifting is not performed for the second reserved areas (3rd to 4th) in which no data is stored (reserved), so the number of data shifts can be reduced, and the control burden can be reduced.

In addition, each data in the second holding area (2nd to 4th) may be configured to be shifted to an area with an area number one smaller, regardless of whether or not data is present. In this case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not data is stored (held) in the second holding area (2nd to 4th), which makes it easier to create a program.

On the other hand, when the MPU 201 determines that no data is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e when the execution start timing of the variable performance is reached, it then determines whether data is stored in the first reserved first area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. If the result of the determination is that data is stored in the first reserved first area, the random number value in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first reserved first area is shifted to the jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 of the reserved ball execution area 203f. Similarly, the random number value in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the first reserved first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, the random number value in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first reserved first area is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3, and the random number value in the variable type counter storage area 203d4 of the first reserved first area is shifted to the variable type counter storage area 203f4.

When the shifting of data to the reserved ball execution area 203f is completed, the first reserved area 1 becomes empty, and a shift process is performed to move the data stored (reserved) in each area (2nd to 4th) of the first reserved ball storage area 203d to the area (1st to 3rd) with the area number 1 smaller. Note that in the first embodiment, data shifting is performed only for the first reserved areas (1st to 4th) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d where data is stored (reserved).

Here, the data shifting performed for each reserved area in the first reserved ball storage area 203d will be explained. For example, assume that the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a is "4" when the start decision of the variable performance is made, and data is stored in all areas (1st to 4th) of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. In this state, when the data of the first reserved 1st area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f and the first reserved 1st area becomes empty, the MPU 201 shifts the data of the other areas (2nd to 4th) to the areas (1st to 3rd) with area numbers one smaller. In other words, the data of the first reserved 2nd area is shifted to the first reserved 1st area, the data of the first reserved 3rd area is shifted to the first reserved 2nd area, and the data of the first reserved 4th area is shifted to the first reserved 3rd area.

For example, if the value of the first reserved ball count counter 203a is "2" when the decision to start the variable performance is made, the MPU 201 shifts only the data in the first reserved second area to the first reserved first area, and ends the data shifting. As described above, in the first embodiment, data shifting is not performed for the first reserved areas (third to fourth) in which no data is stored (reserved), so the number of data shifts can be reduced, and the control burden can be reduced.

In addition, each data in the first holding area (second to fourth) may be configured to be shifted to an area with an area number one smaller, regardless of whether or not data is present. In this case, it is not necessary to determine whether data is stored (held) in the first holding area (second to fourth), making it easier to create a program.

Here, we will explain the details of the regular reserved ball storage area 203j and the regular reserved ball execution area 203k. The regular reserved ball storage area 203j and the regular reserved ball execution area 203k are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform the lottery for winning regular symbols and to set the variable display of the regular symbol display device 83.

The regular reserved ball storage area 203j is a memory for storing the regular winning counter C4 obtained from the counter buffer 203c when the passage of the ball through the regular pattern gate 67 is detected. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has passed through the regular pattern gate 67 during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), it obtains the value of the regular winning counter C4 from the counter buffer 203c and stores it in the regular reserved ball storage area 203j. The regular reserved ball storage area 203j has four reserve areas (regular reserved areas 1 to 4) so that data corresponding to one reserved ball of a regular pattern (value of the regular winning counter C4) can be stored (reserved) up to four times (see FIG. 8).

The regular symbol reserved ball execution area 203k is a memory for storing data (the value of the regular symbol winning random number counter C4) to be referenced when starting execution or when processing the winning lottery and variable display of regular symbols during execution.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is time to start executing the variable display of the normal symbol, it shifts one of the data (the value of the normal winning random number counter C4) stored in the above-mentioned normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203j to this normal symbol reserved ball execution area 203k in order to execute processes such as the winning lottery for the normal symbol and the setting of the variable display of the normal symbol display device 83. Note that in the first embodiment, shifting refers to moving data stored in one area to another area.

As described above, the normal symbol winning random number counter C4 used for the normal symbol winning lottery is used for the normal symbol winning lottery and for setting the variable display of the normal symbol display device 83. The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203j stores the value of the normal symbol winning random number counter C4 obtained from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when a ball passes through the normal symbol gate 67.

As mentioned above, the regular reserved ball storage area 203j stores up to four pieces of data (the value of the regular random number counter C4) obtained when the ball passes through the regular pattern gate 67. In this case, the data is stored in the empty areas of the four reserved areas (regular reserved areas 1 to 4) in order from the area with the smallest area number (1 to 4). In other words, the smaller the area number, the older the data corresponding to the ball passing through the regular pattern gate 67 will be, and the regular reserved area 1 will store data corresponding to the oldest ball passing through the regular pattern gate 67.

On the other hand, the regular reserved ball execution area 203k is composed of only one area. This regular reserved ball execution area 203k is provided with a regular random number counter storage area (not shown) that stores the value of the regular random number counter C4, just like the regular reserved ball storage area 203j.

When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to execute the variable display of the normal symbol, it shifts the data stored in the first normal symbol reserve area of the normal symbol reserve ball storage area 203j to this normal symbol reserve ball execution area 203k.

Then, the data shifted to the normal symbol reserved ball execution area 203k is referenced in the normal symbol variation process (see S111 in FIG. 22), and based on the reference data and the game status, a winning lottery is performed and the content of the variable display is determined. In the normal symbol display device 83, variable display is performed based on the determined content under the control of the main control device 110.

The details of the data shift will be explained. When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable display of the normal symbol, it shifts the random number value in the normal symbol hit random number counter storage area (not shown) in the normal symbol first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203j to the normal symbol hit random number counter storage area (not shown) in the normal symbol reserved ball execution area 203k.

When the shifting of data to the regular map reserved ball execution area 203k is completed, the regular map reserved area 1 becomes empty, so a shift process is performed to move the data stored (reserved) in each area (2nd to 4th) of the regular map reserved ball storage area 203j to the area (1st to 3rd) with the area number 1 smaller. Note that in the first embodiment, data is shifted only for the regular map reserved areas (1st to 4th) in which data is stored (reserved) in the regular map reserved ball storage area 203j.

Here, we will explain the data shifting performed for each reserved area in the regular reserved ball storage area 203j. For example, when a decision is made to start the variable display of regular patterns, the number of reserved regular patterns is four, and data is stored in all areas (1st to 4th) of the regular reserved ball storage area 203j. In this state, when the data in the regular reserved first area is shifted to the regular reserved ball execution area 203k and the regular reserved first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 shifts the data in the other areas (2nd to 4th) to the areas (1st to 3rd) with area numbers one number smaller. In other words, the data in the regular reserved second area is shifted to the regular reserved first area, the data in the regular reserved third area is shifted to the regular reserved second area, and the data in the regular reserved fourth area is shifted to the regular reserved third area.

For example, if the number of reserved normal symbols is two when a decision is made to start variable display of normal symbols, the MPU 201 shifts only the data in the second normal symbol reservation area to the first normal symbol reservation area, and ends the data shift. As described above, in the first embodiment, data shifting is not performed for the normal symbol reservation areas (third to fourth) in which no data is stored (reserved), so the number of data shifts can be reduced, and the control burden can be reduced.

In addition, regardless of whether data is present or not, each data in the general map reservation areas (2nd to 4th) may be configured to be shifted to an area with an area number one smaller. In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether data is stored (reserved) in the general map reservation areas (2nd to 4th), which makes it easier to create programs.

Returning to FIG. 7, the explanation will continue. The right high probability activation flag 203g provided in the RAM 203 is a flag for indicating, when on, that the right high probability activation area 73 is set to active. In the first embodiment, when the right high probability activation flag 203g is set to on and a ball is detected by the right high probability activation area switch 73d, the high probability transition flag 203i, which will be described later, is set to on, and a "probability fluctuation state" is generated after the end of the jackpot.

This right high probability activation flag 203g is set to OFF as an initial value when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Then, when a special symbol jackpot is won, the high probability activation table 202g (see FIG. 12) is set based on the type of jackpot of the jackpot (see S410 in FIG. 26), and at the start of each round during the jackpot, the right high probability activation flag 203g is set to ON or OFF based on the high probability activation table 202g set for the jackpot (see S435 in FIG. 28).

Specifically, the right probability change active flag 203g is set to ON in two rounds of the jackpot types "Time-saving A", "Latent probability change B" and "Time-saving C", set to ON in three rounds of the jackpot types "Time-saving B", "Latent probability change A" and "Latent probability change C", set to ON in four rounds of the jackpot type "Probability change A", and set to OFF in all rounds other than the above-mentioned rounds.

The left special probability activation flag 203h is a flag that indicates that the left special probability activation area 74 is set to active when it is on. In the first embodiment, when the left special probability activation flag 203h is set to on and a ball is detected by the left special probability activation area switch 74d, the special probability transition flag 203i, which will be described later, is set to on, and a "probability fluctuation state" occurs after the end of the jackpot.

This left high probability activation flag 203h is set to OFF as an initial value when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Then, when a special symbol jackpot is won, the high probability activation table 202g (see FIG. 12) is set based on the type of jackpot of the jackpot (see S410 in FIG. 26), and at the start of each round during the jackpot, the left high probability activation flag 203h is set to ON or OFF based on the high probability activation table 202g set for the jackpot (see S435 in FIG. 28).

Specifically, the left probability variation active flag 203h is set to ON in 5 rounds of the jackpot types "Time-saving A", "Latent probability variation B" and "Time-saving C", set to ON in 6 rounds of the jackpot types "Time-saving B", "Latent probability variation A" and "Latent probability variation C", set to ON in 9 rounds of the jackpot type "Probability variation A", and set to OFF in all rounds other than the above-mentioned rounds.

The probability change transition flag 203i is a flag for indicating that a "probability change state" occurs when it is in the ON state. This probability change transition flag 203i is set to OFF as an initial value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Then, during a jackpot, if the right probability change effective flag 203g is set to ON and a ball is detected by the right probability change area switch 73d (see S441: Yes to S442: Yes in FIG. 28), or if the left probability change effective flag 203h is set to ON and a ball is detected by the left probability change area switch 74d (see S444: Yes to S445: Yes in FIG. 28), the OFF state probability change transition flag 203i is set to ON (see S443 in FIG. 29). After that, in the jackpot end process (see FIG. 30), if the "probability fluctuation state" is set because this probability change transition flag 203i is on, that is, if the value of the ST counter described below is set to "100" (see S472 in FIG. 30), the probability change transition flag 203i is set to off (see S473 in FIG. 30).

The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is connected to an input/output port 205 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the special symbol display device 37, the normal symbol display device 83, the normal symbol reservation lamp 84, the large prize opening solenoid 65c provided in the variable prize device 65 for driving the large prize opening 65a to open and close forward around the lower side of the opening/closing plate 65b, the right special variable area solenoid 73b for driving the right special variable area opening/closing plate 73a of the right special variable area 73, the left special variable area solenoid 74b for driving the left special variable area opening/closing plate 74a of the left special variable area 74, and other solenoids 209 for driving other driving devices (not shown), and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

The input/output port 205 is also connected to a large prize opening switch 71 that is provided in the large prize opening 65a and detects balls that have entered the large prize opening 65a, a right special prize area switch 73d that is provided in the right special prize area 73 and detects balls that pass through the right special prize area 73, a left special prize area switch 74d that is provided in the left special prize area 74 and detects balls that pass through the left special prize area 74, other switches 208 consisting of a group of switches and sensors not shown, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described below) that is provided in the power supply unit 115.The MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

Now, with reference to Figures 13 to 21, the ball detection state in each round for each jackpot type, the opening or closing status of each probability change area 73, 74 (i.e., the opening or closing of the right probability change area opening/closing plate 73a and the left probability change area opening/closing plate 74a, and the on or off of the right probability change area solenoid 73b and the left probability change area solenoid 74b), the valid or invalid setting status of each probability change area 73, 74 (i.e., the on or off of the right probability change effective flag 203g and the left probability change effective flag 203h), and the transition status to the "probability change state" (i.e., the on or off of the probability change transition flag 203i) will be described.

First, the ball detection state and the like in each round of the jackpot type "time-saving A" will be described with reference to Figures 13 and 14. Figure 13 is a timing chart that shows the operation timing of the jackpot opening solenoid 65c, the right special probability area solenoid 73b, and the left special probability area solenoid 74b in each round of the jackpot type "time-saving A" of the first special pattern, the ball detection timing in the jackpot opening switch 71, the right special probability area switch 73d, and the left special probability area switch 74d, and the setting timing of the right special probability area valid flag 203g, the left special probability area valid flag 203h, and the special probability area transition flag 203i. FIG. 14 is a timing chart showing the timing of operation of the large prize opening solenoid 65c, the right special probability area solenoid 73b, and the left special probability area solenoid 74b in the first and second rounds of the large prize type "time-saving A", the timing of ball detection in the large prize opening switch 71, the right special probability area switch 73d, and the left special probability area switch 74d, and the timing of setting the right special probability area valid flag 203g, the left special probability area valid flag 203h, and the special probability area transition flag 203i. Below, the timing will be explained in FIG. 13, and the detailed times will be explained with reference to FIG. 14 as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the jackpot type "Time-saving A", a total of seven rounds of jackpot play are played, and at the start of each round, the jackpot opening solenoid 65c is turned on and the opening/closing plate 65b is opened. Then, when a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, either a maximum of "30 seconds" has elapsed since opening (see Max t1 in FIG. 14; Max t1 < "30,000 milliseconds (hereinafter, milliseconds may be abbreviated as "ms")), or 10 balls have been detected by the jackpot opening switch 71) is met, the jackpot opening solenoid 65c is turned off and the opening/closing plate 65b is closed, and one round ends.

In addition, in the jackpot type "Time-saving A", the opening and closing pattern of the right-side probability change area 73 and the left-side probability change area 74 is "X1". Therefore, in the first round, when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot opening switch 71, both the right probability change area solenoid 73b and the left probability change area solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms" (see t2 in FIG. 14. t2 = "60 ms"). This makes it possible to recognize whether the right probability change area solenoid 73b and the left probability change area solenoid 74b can be operated normally.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, even if the right special probability area solenoid 73b and the left special probability area solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms", the opening time of the right special probability area opening/closing plate 73a and the left special probability area opening/closing plate 74a is extremely short, making it difficult for the ball to flow into the right special probability area 73 and the left special probability area 74 (the same applies below for the first count ball of each round).

In addition, if the right probability variable area opening/closing plate 73a or the left probability variable area opening/closing plate 74a is determined not to operate normally when the first count ball is detected by the large prize opening switch 71, the right probability variable area 73 or the left probability variable area 74 will not open normally, and there is a risk that the appropriate game value will not be awarded to the player, so a specified error notification (for example, displaying an error message such as "Variable prize device 65 operation abnormality has occurred") is configured. In addition, in response to the specified error notification, the current game state is backed up and the game progress is stopped. In this way, by stopping the game progress due to an error, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player is disadvantaged, such as not being awarded the "probability variable state".

When the third count ball is detected by the special prize opening switch 71, only the right special prize area solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000 ms" (see t3 in FIG. 14. t3 = "2000 ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the right special prize area 73 after being detected by the special prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the first embodiment, "1.5 seconds." See t4 in FIG. 14. t4 < "2000 ms"). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open right special prize area 73, and is detected by the right special prize area switch 73d.

At this time, the valid pattern for the special probability areas 73, 74 of the jackpot type "Time-saving A" is "A", and the right special probability area 73 in the second round and the left special probability area 74 in the fifth round are set to valid. Therefore, in the first round, both special probability areas 73, 74 are invalid, and the right special probability area valid flag 203g and the left special probability area valid flag 203h are set to off. Therefore, even if the ball passes through the right special probability area 73 in the first round and is detected by the right special probability area switch 73d, the right special probability area 73 is not set to valid, so the special probability transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off.

In addition, in the odd rounds (i.e., 3rd, 5th, and 7th rounds) of the jackpot type "Time-saving A," the drive mode of the right variable probability area solenoid 73b and the left variable probability area solenoid 74b is the same as in the first round.

Next, in the second round of the jackpot type "Time-saving A", when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot entry switch 71, the right special probability area solenoid 73b and the left special probability area solenoid 74b are both turned on for "60 ms" (see t5 in FIG. 14. t5 = "60 ms"), just like in the first round, and it is configured to recognize whether the right special probability area solenoid 73b and the left special probability area solenoid 74b can be operated normally.

When the third count ball is detected by the special prize opening switch 71, only the left special prize area solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000 ms" (see t6 in FIG. 14. t6 = "2000 ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the left special prize area 74 after being detected by the special prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (i.e., "1.6 seconds." See t7 in FIG. 14. t7 < "2000 ms"). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open left special prize area 74, and is detected by the left special prize area switch 74d.

At this time, the valid pattern for the special probability areas 73, 74 of the jackpot type "Time-saving A" is "A", and only the right special probability area 73 is valid in the second round, with the right special probability area valid flag 203g set to on and the left special probability area valid flag 203h set to off. Therefore, even if the ball passes through the left special probability area 74 in the second round and is detected by the left special probability area switch 74d, the left special probability area 74 is not set to valid, so the special probability transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off.

In addition, in the even rounds (i.e., rounds 4 and 6) of the jackpot type "Time-saving A," the drive mode of the right variable probability area solenoid 73b and the left variable probability area solenoid 74b is the same as in the second round.

In the third round and onward of the jackpot type "time-saving A", the open special-variable regions 73 and 74 are invalid, and the special-variable effective flags 203g and 203h corresponding to the special-variable region switches 73d and 74d in which the ball is detected are set to off. In particular, in the fifth round of the jackpot type "time-saving A", only the left special-variable region 74 is valid, and the left special-variable effective flag 203h is set to on and the right special-variable effective flag 203g is set to off, but the ball is configured to flow into the right special-variable region 73. Therefore, even if the ball passes through the right special-variable region 73 in the fifth round and is detected by the right special-variable region switch 73d, the right special-variable region 73 is not set to valid, so the special-variable transition flag 203i remains off without being turned on.

Therefore, in the case of the jackpot type "Time-saving A," even if the ball passes through the special probability area 73, 74 and is detected by the special probability area switch 73d, 74d, the special probability area 73, 74 corresponding to the special probability area switch 73d, 74d that detected the ball is not set to active, so the special probability transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off.

Next, the ball detection state and the like in each round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A" will be described with reference to Figures 15 and 16. Figure 15 is a timing chart that shows the operation timing of the large prize opening solenoid 65c, the right special probability area solenoid 73b, and the left special probability area solenoid 74b in each round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A" of the first special symbol, the ball detection timing in the large prize opening switch 71, the right special probability area switch 73d, and the left special probability area switch 74d, and the setting timing of the right special probability area valid flag 203g, the left special probability area valid flag 203h, and the special probability area transition flag 203i. FIG. 16 is a timing chart showing the timing of operation of the large prize opening solenoid 65c, the right special probability area solenoid 73b, and the left special probability area solenoid 74b in the first to third rounds of the large prize type "latent probability fluctuation A", the timing of ball detection in the large prize opening switch 71, the right special probability area switch 73d, and the left special probability area switch 74d, and the timing of setting the right special probability area valid flag 203g, the left special probability area valid flag 203h, and the special probability area transition flag 203i. Below, the timing will be explained in FIG. 15, and the detailed times will be explained with reference to FIG. 16 as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 15, in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", a total of seven rounds of jackpot play are played, and at the start of each round, the jackpot opening solenoid 65c is turned on and the opening/closing plate 65b is opened. Then, when a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, either a maximum of "30 seconds" has elapsed since opening (see Max t1 in FIG. 16. Max t1 < "30,000 ms") or 10 balls have been detected by the jackpot opening switch 71) is met, the jackpot opening solenoid 65c is turned off and the opening/closing plate 65b is closed, and one round ends.

In the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", the opening and closing pattern of the right side probability change area 73 and the left side probability change area 74 is "X1", the same as the jackpot type "time-saving A". Therefore, in the first round, when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot entry switch 71, both the right probability change area solenoid 73b and the left probability change area solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms" (see t2 in FIG. 16. t2 = "60 ms"). It is configured to recognize whether the right probability change area solenoid 73b and the left probability change area solenoid 74b can be operated normally.

When the third count ball is detected by the special prize opening switch 71, only the right special prize area solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000 ms" (see t3 in FIG. 16. t3 = "2000 ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the right special prize area 73 after being detected by the special prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the first embodiment, "1.5 seconds." See t4 in FIG. 16. t4 < "2000 ms"). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open right special prize area 73, and is detected by the right special prize area switch 73d.

At this time, the valid pattern for the special probability areas 73, 74 of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A" is "B", and the right special probability area 73 in the third round and the left special probability area 74 in the sixth round are set to valid. Therefore, in the first round, both special probability areas 73, 74 are invalid, and the right special probability area valid flag 203g and the left special probability area valid flag 203h are set to OFF. Therefore, even if the ball passes through the right special probability area 73 in the first round and is detected by the right special probability area switch 73d, the right special probability area 73 is not set to valid, so the special probability transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains OFF.

In addition, in the odd rounds (i.e., rounds 3, 5, and 7) of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A," the drive mode of the right probability fluctuation area solenoid 73b and the left probability fluctuation area solenoid 74b is the same as in the first round.

Next, in the second round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot entry switch 71, the right probability change area solenoid 73b and the left probability change area solenoid 74b are both turned on for "60 ms" (see t5 in FIG. 16. t5 = "60 ms"), just like in the first round, and it is configured to recognize whether the right probability change area solenoid 73b and the left probability change area solenoid 74b can be operated normally.

When the third count ball is detected by the special prize opening switch 71, only the left special prize area solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000 ms" (see t6 in FIG. 16. t6 = "2000 ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the left special prize area 74 after being detected by the special prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (i.e., "1.6 seconds." See t7 in FIG. 16. t7 < "2000 ms"). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open left special prize area 74, and is detected by the left special prize area switch 74d.

At this time, the valid pattern for the special probability areas 73, 74 of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A" is "B", and in the second round, both special probability areas 73, 74 are invalid, and the right special probability area valid flag 203g and the left special probability area valid flag 203h are set to OFF. Therefore, even if the ball passes through the left special probability area 74 in the second round and is detected by the left special probability area switch 74d, the left special probability area 74 is not set to valid, so the special probability transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains OFF.

In addition, in the even rounds (i.e., rounds 4 and 6) of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A," the drive mode of the right probability fluctuation area solenoid 73b and the left probability fluctuation area solenoid 74b is the same as in the second round.

Next, in the third round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot entry switch 71, the right probability change area solenoid 73b and the left probability change area solenoid 74b are both turned on for "60 ms" (see t8 in Figure 16. t8 = "60 ms"), just like in the first and second rounds, and it is configured to be possible to recognize whether the right probability change area solenoid 73b and the left probability change area solenoid 74b can be operated normally.

In the third round, when the third count ball is detected by the special prize opening switch 71, only the right special prize area solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000 ms" (see t9 in FIG. 16. t9 = "2000 ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the right special prize area 73 after being detected by the special prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (i.e., "1.5 seconds". See t10 in FIG. 16. t10 < "2000 ms"). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open right special prize area 73, and is detected by the right special prize area switch 73d.

At this time, the valid pattern for the probability change areas 73, 74 of the jackpot type "latent probability change A" is "B", and only the right-side probability change area 73 is valid in the third round, with the right probability change valid flag 203g set to ON and the left probability change valid flag 203h set to OFF. Therefore, in the third round, when the ball passes through the right-side probability change area 73 and is detected by the right probability change area switch 73d, the right-side probability change area 73 is set to valid, and therefore the probability change transition flag 203i is set to ON.

In addition, in the sixth round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", only the left side probability variable area 74 is active, the left probability variable active flag 203h is set to on, and the right probability variable active flag 203g is set to off. Therefore, even if the probability variable transition flag 203i is not on in the third round, the ball passes through the left side probability variable area 74 located downstream of the right side probability variable area 73 in the sixth round and is detected by the left probability variable area switch 74d, so that the probability variable transition flag 203i is set to on.

Therefore, in the case of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", the probability fluctuation areas 73, 74 corresponding to the probability fluctuation area switches 73d, 74d that detected the ball in the third and sixth rounds are set to active, and the probability fluctuation transition flag 203i is set to ON. Then, at the end of the jackpot, the "probability fluctuation state" is set by referring to this probability fluctuation transition flag 203i.

By configuring in this way, even if the ball passes through each probability change area 73, 74, if the probability change area 73, 74 is not internally set to be valid, the "probability change state" will not occur after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, even if the player sees the ball passing through each probability change area 73, 74, the occurrence of the "probability change state" after the end of the jackpot can be determined. In addition, the "latent probability change performance mode" and the "time-saving notification performance mode" or "normal notification mode" are configured to be equivalent performances. By configuring in this way, even when the "latent probability change performance mode" is being executed, it is made difficult for the player to recognize whether it is a "probability change state", a "time-saving state", or a "normal game state", and it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, if a jackpot type that generates a "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot is won, the ball is configured to be able to pass through the variable probability areas 73, 74 that are set validly in multiple rounds of the jackpot. Therefore, even if the ball cannot pass through the variable probability areas 73, 74 that are set validly in one of the rounds in which the variable probability areas 73, 74 are set validly, it is possible to pass the ball through the variable probability areas 73, 74 that are set validly in the other round. Therefore, even if a sudden trouble (for example, a game abnormality such as a firing abnormality or a player's poor physical condition) prevents the ball from passing through the variable probability areas 73, 74 in one of the rounds that are set validly, by providing the possibility of passing the ball through the variable probability areas 73, 74 that are set validly in the other round that is set valid, the player can enjoy a comfortable game without suffering any disadvantage due to an unforeseen situation.

In addition, at the first count of each round, the right special probability area solenoid 73b and the left special probability area solenoid 74b are driven to the extent that balls do not flow in, making it possible to check whether the right special probability area opening/closing plate 73a and the left special probability area opening/closing plate 74a can be opened or not, making it possible to quickly identify situations in which the special probability areas 73, 74 cannot be opened due to an abnormality, etc.

In addition, when a jackpot type that generates a "probability change state" after the end of a jackpot is won, the right side probability change area 73 located upstream in the large prize opening 65a is set to be effective in the round in which the probability change areas 73, 74 are set to be effective, in relation to the multiple rounds in which the probability change areas 73, 74 are set to be effective. By configuring it in this way, even if an abnormality such as ball clogging occurs in the large prize opening 65a, particularly if an abnormality such as ball clogging occurs downstream of the right side probability change area 73 and upstream of the left side probability change area 74, the right side probability change area 73 located upstream of the large prize opening 65a is set to be effective first, and balls can flow into the right side probability change area 73, making it easier to grant the right to the "probability change state" to the player.

Next, the ball detection state and the like in each round of the jackpot type "Time-saving B" will be described with reference to Figure 17. Figure 17 is a timing chart that shows the operation timing of the jackpot opening solenoid 65c, the right special probability area solenoid 73b, and the left special probability area solenoid 74b in each round of the jackpot type "Time-saving B" of the first special symbol, the ball detection timing in the jackpot opening switch 71, the right special probability area switch 73d, and the left special probability area switch 74d, and the setting timing of the right special probability area valid flag 203g, the left special probability area valid flag 203h, and the special probability area transition flag 203i.

As shown in FIG. 17, in the "Time-saving B" jackpot type, a total of seven rounds of jackpot play are played, and at the start of each round, the jackpot opening solenoid 65c is turned on and the opening/closing plate 65b is opened. Then, when a predetermined condition is met (in the first embodiment, either "30 seconds" have elapsed since opening or 10 balls have been detected by the jackpot opening switch 71), the jackpot opening solenoid 65c is turned off and the opening/closing plate 65b is closed, ending one round.

In addition, in the jackpot type "Time-saving B," the opening and closing pattern of the right-side probability change area 73 and the left-side probability change area 74 is "X2," so when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot opening switch 71 in the first round, both the right probability change area solenoid 73b and the left probability change area solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms," and it is configured to recognize whether the right probability change area solenoid 73b and the left probability change area solenoid 74b can be operated normally.

When the third count ball is detected by the special prize opening switch 71, only the left special prize area solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000 ms". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the left special prize area 74 after being detected by the special prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the first embodiment, "1.6 seconds"). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open left special prize area 74, and is detected by the left special prize area switch 74d.

At this time, the valid pattern for the special probability areas 73, 74 of the jackpot type "Time-saving B" is "B", and the right special probability area 73 in the third round and the left special probability area 74 in the sixth round are set to valid. Therefore, in the first round, both special probability areas 73, 74 are invalid, and the right special probability area valid flag 203g and the left special probability area valid flag 203h are set to off. Therefore, even if the ball passes through the left special probability area 74 in the first round and is detected by the left special probability area switch 74d, the left special probability area 74 is not set to valid, so the special probability transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off.

In addition, in the odd rounds (i.e., 3rd, 5th, and 7th rounds) of the jackpot type "Time-saving B," the drive mode of the right variable probability area solenoid 73b and the left variable probability area solenoid 74b is the same as in the first round.

Next, in the second round of the jackpot type "Time-saving B", when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot entry switch 71, the right special probability area solenoid 73b and the left special probability area solenoid 74b are both turned on for "60 ms" in the same way as in the first round, and it is configured to recognize whether the right special probability area solenoid 73b and the left special probability area solenoid 74b can be operated normally.

When the third count ball is detected by the special prize opening switch 71, only the right special prize area solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000 ms". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the right special prize area 73 after being detected by the special prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the first embodiment, "1.5 seconds"). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open right special prize area 73, and is detected by the right special prize area switch 73d.

At this time, the valid pattern for the special probability areas 73, 74 of the jackpot type "Time-saving B" is "B", and in the second round, both special probability areas 73, 74 are invalid, and the right special probability area valid flag 203g and the left special probability area valid flag 203h are set to OFF. Therefore, even if the ball passes through the right special probability area 73 in the second round and is detected by the right special probability area switch 73d, the right special probability area 73 is not set to valid, so the special probability transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains OFF.

In addition, in the even rounds (i.e., rounds 4 and 6) of the jackpot type "Time-saving B," the drive mode of the right variable probability area solenoid 73b and the left variable probability area solenoid 74b is the same as in the second round.

Next, in the third round of the jackpot type "Time-saving B," when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot entry switch 71, the right special probability area solenoid 73b and the left special probability area solenoid 74b are both turned on for "60 ms," just like in the first and second rounds, and it is configured to recognize whether the right special probability area solenoid 73b and the left special probability area solenoid 74b can be operated normally.

When the third count ball is detected by the special prize opening switch 71, only the left special prize area solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000 ms". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the left special prize area 74 after being detected by the special prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (i.e., "1.6 seconds"). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open left special prize area 74, and is detected by the left special prize area switch 74d.

At this time, the valid pattern for the special probability areas 73, 74 of the jackpot type "Time-saving B" is "B", and only the right special probability area 73 is valid in the third round, with the right special probability area valid flag 203g set to on and the left special probability area valid flag 203h set to off. Therefore, even if the ball passes through the left special probability area 74 in the third round and is detected by the left special probability area switch 74d, the left special probability area 74 is not set to valid, so the special probability transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off.

In the fourth round and onward of the jackpot type "time-saving B", the open special-variable regions 73 and 74 are invalid, and the special-variable effective flags 203g and 203h corresponding to the special-variable region switches 73d and 74d in which the ball is detected are set to off. In particular, in the sixth round of the jackpot type "time-saving B", only the left special-variable region 74 is valid, and the left special-variable effective flag 203h is set to on and the right special-variable effective flag 203g is set to off, but the ball is configured to flow into the right special-variable region 73. Therefore, even if the ball passes through the right special-variable region 73 in the sixth round and is detected by the right special-variable region switch 73d, the right special-variable region 73 is not set to valid, so the special-variable transition flag 203i remains off without being turned on.

Therefore, in the case of the jackpot type "Time-saving B," even if the ball passes through the special probability area 73, 74 and is detected by the special probability area switch 73d, 74d, the special probability area 73, 74 corresponding to the special probability area switch 73d, 74d that detected the ball is not set to active, so the special probability transition flag 203i will not be turned on and will remain off, just like the jackpot type "Time-saving A."

Next, referring to Figure 18, the ball detection state in each round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B" will be described. Figure 18 is a timing chart that shows the operation timing of the jackpot opening solenoid 65c, the right special probability area solenoid 73b, and the left special probability area solenoid 74b in each round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B" of the first special symbol, the ball detection timing of the jackpot opening switch 71, the right special probability area switch 73d, and the left special probability area switch 74d, and the setting timing of the right special probability area valid flag 203g, the left special probability area valid flag 203h, and the special probability area transition flag 203i.

As shown in FIG. 18, in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B", a total of seven rounds of jackpot play are played, and at the start of each round, the jackpot opening solenoid 65c is turned on and the opening/closing plate 65b is opened. Then, when a predetermined condition is met (in the first embodiment, either "30 seconds" have elapsed since opening or 10 balls have been detected by the jackpot opening switch 71), the jackpot opening solenoid 65c is turned off and the opening/closing plate 65b is closed, ending one round.

In addition, in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B," the opening and closing pattern of the right side probability change area 73 and the left side probability change area 74 is "X2," so when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot opening switch 71 in the first round, both the right probability change area solenoid 73b and the left probability change area solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms," and it is configured to recognize whether the right probability change area solenoid 73b and the left probability change area solenoid 74b can be operated normally.

When the third count ball is detected by the special prize opening switch 71, only the left special prize area solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000 ms". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the left special prize area 74 after being detected by the special prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the first embodiment, "1.6 seconds"). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open left special prize area 74, and is detected by the left special prize area switch 74d.

At this time, the valid pattern for the special probability areas 73, 74 of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B" is "A", and the right special probability area 73 in the second round and the left special probability area 74 in the fifth round are set to valid. Therefore, in the first round, both special probability areas 73, 74 are invalid, and the right special probability area valid flag 203g and the left special probability area valid flag 203h are set to off. Therefore, even if the ball passes through the left special probability area 74 in the first round and is detected by the left special probability area switch 74d, the left special probability area 74 is not set to valid, so the special probability transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off.

In addition, in the odd rounds (i.e., rounds 3, 5, and 7) of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B," the drive mode of the right probability fluctuation area solenoid 73b and the left probability fluctuation area solenoid 74b is the same as in the first round.

Next, in the second round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B", when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot entry switch 71, the right probability fluctuation area solenoid 73b and the left probability fluctuation area solenoid 74b are both turned on for "60 ms" in the same way as in the first round, and it is configured to be possible to recognize whether the right probability fluctuation area solenoid 73b and the left probability fluctuation area solenoid 74b can be operated normally.

When the third count ball is detected by the special prize opening switch 71, only the right special prize area solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000 ms". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the right special prize area 73 after being detected by the special prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the first embodiment, "1.5 seconds"). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open right special prize area 73, and is detected by the right special prize area switch 73d.

At this time, the valid pattern for the probability change areas 73, 74 of the jackpot type "latent probability change B" is "A", and only the right-side probability change area 73 is valid in the second round, with the right probability change valid flag 203g set to ON and the left probability change valid flag 203h set to OFF. Therefore, in the second round, when the ball passes through the right-side probability change area 73 and is detected by the right probability change area switch 73d, the right-side probability change area 73 is set to valid, and therefore the probability change transition flag 203i is set to ON.

In addition, in the fifth round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B", only the left side probability variable area 74 is active, the left probability variable active flag 203h is set to on, and the right probability variable active flag 203g is set to off. Therefore, even if the probability variable transition flag 203i is not on in the second round, the ball passes through the left side probability variable area 74 in the fifth round and is detected by the left probability variable area switch 74d, so that the probability variable transition flag 203i is set to on.

Therefore, in the case of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B", when the ball passes through the probability fluctuation area 73, 74 and is detected by the probability fluctuation area switch 73d, 74d, the probability fluctuation area 73, 74 corresponding to the probability fluctuation area switch 73d, 74d that detected the ball in the second and fifth rounds is set to active, so the probability fluctuation transition flag 203i is set to ON, just like the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A". Then, at the end of the jackpot, the "probability fluctuation state" is set by referring to this probability fluctuation transition flag 203i.

Next, referring to Figure 19, the ball detection state in each round of the jackpot type "Probability Fluctuation A" will be described. Figure 19 is a timing chart that shows the operation timing of the jackpot opening solenoid 65c, the right probability fluctuation area solenoid 73b, and the left probability fluctuation area solenoid 74b in each round of the jackpot type "Probability Fluctuation A" of the first special pattern and the second special pattern, the ball detection timing of the jackpot opening switch 71, the right probability fluctuation area switch 73d, and the left probability fluctuation area switch 74d, and the setting timing of the right probability fluctuation effective flag 203g, the left probability fluctuation effective flag 203h, and the probability fluctuation transition flag 203i.

As shown in FIG. 19, in the jackpot type "Probability Variation A", a total of 15 rounds of jackpot play are played, and at the start of each round, the jackpot opening solenoid 65c is turned on and the opening/closing plate 65b is opened. Then, when a predetermined condition is met (in the first embodiment, either "30 seconds" have elapsed since opening or 10 balls have been detected by the jackpot opening switch 71), the jackpot opening solenoid 65c is turned off and the opening/closing plate 65b is closed, ending one round.

In addition, in the jackpot type "Probability Variation A," the opening and closing pattern of the right-side probability variation area 73 and the left-side probability variation area 74 is "Y1," so that in the first round, when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot opening switch 71, both the right-side probability variation area solenoid 73b and the left-side probability variation area solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms," and it is possible to recognize whether the right-side probability variation area solenoid 73b and the left-side probability variation area solenoid 74b can be operated normally.

When the third count ball is detected by the special prize opening switch 71, only the left special prize area solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000 ms". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the left special prize area 74 after being detected by the special prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the first embodiment, "1.6 seconds"). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open left special prize area 74, and is detected by the left special prize area switch 74d.

At this time, the valid pattern for the probability change areas 73, 74 of the jackpot type "probability change A" is "C", and the right-side probability change area 73 in the 4th round and the left-side probability change area 74 in the 9th round are set to valid. Therefore, in the first round, both probability change areas 73, 74 are invalid, and the right probability change valid flag 203g and the left probability change valid flag 203h are set to off. Therefore, even if the ball passes through the left probability change area 74 in the first round and is detected by the left probability change area switch 74d, the left probability change area 74 is not set to valid, so the probability change transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off.

In addition, in the odd rounds of the jackpot type "Probability Variation A" (i.e., 3rd, 5th, 7th, 9th, 11th, 13th, and 15th rounds), the drive mode of the right probability variation area solenoid 73b and the left probability variation area solenoid 74b is the same as in the first round.

Next, in the second round of the jackpot type "Probability Variation A", when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot entry switch 71, the right probability variation area solenoid 73b and the left probability variation area solenoid 74b are both turned on for "60 ms" in the same way as in the first round, and it is possible to recognize whether the right probability variation area solenoid 73b and the left probability variation area solenoid 74b can be operated normally.

When the third count ball is detected by the special prize opening switch 71, only the right special prize area solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000 ms". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the right special prize area 73 after being detected by the special prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (i.e., "1.5 seconds"). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open right special prize area 73, and is detected by the right special prize area switch 73d.

At this time, the valid pattern for the probability change areas 73, 74 of the jackpot type "probability change A" is "C", and in the second round, both probability change areas 73, 74 are invalid, and the right probability change valid flag 203g and the left probability change valid flag 203h are set to off. Therefore, even if the ball passes through the right probability change area 73 in the second round and is detected by the right probability change area switch 73d, the right probability change area 73 is not set to valid, so the probability change transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off.

In addition, in the even rounds of the jackpot type "Probability Variation A" (i.e., 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, 12th, and 14th rounds), the drive mode of the right probability variation area solenoid 73b and the left probability variation area solenoid 74b is the same as in the second round.

Next, in the third round of the jackpot type "Probability Variation A", when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot entry switch 71, the right probability variation area solenoid 73b and the left probability variation area solenoid 74b are both turned on for "60 ms", just like in the first and second rounds, and it is possible to recognize whether the right probability variation area solenoid 73b and the left probability variation area solenoid 74b can be operated normally.

When the third count ball is detected by the special prize opening switch 71, only the left special prize area solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000 ms". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the left special prize area 74 after being detected by the special prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (i.e., "1.6 seconds"). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open left special prize area 74, and is detected by the left special prize area switch 74d.

At this time, the valid pattern for the probability change areas 73, 74 of the jackpot type "probability change A" is "C", and in the third round, both probability change areas 73, 74 are invalid, and the right probability change valid flag 203g and the left probability change valid flag 203h are set to off. Therefore, even if the ball passes through the left probability change area 74 in the third round and is detected by the left probability change area switch 74d, the left probability change area 74 is not set to valid, so the probability change transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off.

Next, in the fourth round of the jackpot type "Probability Variation A", when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot entry switch 71, the right probability variation area solenoid 73b and the left probability variation area solenoid 74b are both turned on for "60 ms" in the same way as in the first to third rounds, and it is configured to be possible to recognize whether the right probability variation area solenoid 73b and the left probability variation area solenoid 74b can be operated normally.

Then, in the fourth round, when the third count ball is detected by the special prize opening switch 71, only the right special prize area solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000 ms". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the right special prize area 73 after being detected by the special prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (i.e., "1.6 seconds"). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open right special prize area 73, and is detected by the right special prize area switch 73d.

At this time, the valid pattern for the probability change areas 73, 74 of the jackpot type "probability change A" is "C", and only the right-side probability change area 73 is valid in the fourth round, with the right probability change valid flag 203g set to ON and the left probability change valid flag 203h set to OFF. Therefore, in the fourth round, when the ball passes through the right-side probability change area 73 and is detected by the right probability change area switch 73d, the right-side probability change area 73 is set to valid, and therefore the probability change transition flag 203i is set to ON.

In addition, in the ninth round of the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", only the left side probability variable area 74 is active, the left probability variable active flag 203h is set to on, and the right probability variable active flag 203g is set to off. Therefore, even if the probability variable transition flag 203i is not on in the fourth round, the ball passes through the left side probability variable area 74 in the ninth round and is detected by the left probability variable area switch 74d, so that the probability variable transition flag 203i is set to on.

Therefore, in the case of the jackpot type "probability change A", when the ball passes through the probability change area 73, 74 and is detected by the probability change area switch 73d, 74d in the 4th and 9th rounds, the probability change area 73, 74 corresponding to the probability change area switch 73d, 74d that detected the ball is set to active, and the probability change transition flag 203i is set to ON. Then, at the end of the jackpot, the "probability change state" is set by referring to this probability change transition flag 203i.

Next, referring to Figure 20, the ball detection state in each round of the jackpot type "Time-saving C" will be described. Figure 20 is a timing chart that shows the operation timing of the jackpot opening solenoid 65c, the right special probability area solenoid 73b, and the left special probability area solenoid 74b in each round of the jackpot type "Time-saving C" of the second special symbol, the ball detection timing of the jackpot opening switch 71, the right special probability area switch 73d, and the left special probability area switch 74d, and the setting timing of the right special probability area valid flag 203g, the left special probability area valid flag 203h, and the special probability area transition flag 203i.

As shown in FIG. 20, in the "Time-saving C" jackpot type, a total of 15 rounds of jackpot play are played, and at the start of each round, the jackpot opening solenoid 65c is turned on and the opening/closing plate 65b is opened. Then, when a predetermined condition is met (in the first embodiment, either "30 seconds" have elapsed since opening or 10 balls have been detected by the jackpot opening switch 71), the jackpot opening solenoid 65c is turned off and the opening/closing plate 65b is closed, ending one round.

In addition, in the jackpot type "Time-saving C," the opening and closing pattern of the right-side probability change area 73 and the left-side probability change area 74 is "Y2," so when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot opening switch 71 in the first round, both the right probability change area solenoid 73b and the left probability change area solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms," and it is configured to recognize whether the right probability change area solenoid 73b and the left probability change area solenoid 74b can be operated normally.

When the third count ball is detected by the special prize opening switch 71, only the right special prize area solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000 ms". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the right special prize area 73 after being detected by the special prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the first embodiment, "1.5 seconds"). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open right special prize area 73, and is detected by the right special prize area switch 73d.

At this time, the valid pattern for the special probability areas 73, 74 of the jackpot type "Time-saving C" is "A", and the right special probability area 73 in the second round and the left special probability area 74 in the fifth round are set to valid. Therefore, in the first round, both special probability areas 73, 74 are invalid, and the right special probability area valid flag 203g and the left special probability area valid flag 203h are set to off. Therefore, even if the ball passes through the right special probability area 73 in the first round and is detected by the right special probability area switch 73d, the right special probability area 73 is not set to valid, so the special probability transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off.

In addition, in the odd rounds of the jackpot type "Time-saving C" (i.e., 3rd, 5th, 7th, 9th, 11th, 13th, and 15th rounds), the drive mode of the right special probability area solenoid 73b and the left special probability area solenoid 74b is the same as in the first round.

Next, in the second round of the jackpot type "Time-saving C," when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot entry switch 71, the right special probability area solenoid 73b and the left special probability area solenoid 74b are both turned on for "60 ms," just like in the first round, and it is configured to recognize whether the right special probability area solenoid 73b and the left special probability area solenoid 74b can be operated normally.

When the third count ball is detected by the special prize opening switch 71, only the left special prize area solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000 ms". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the left special prize area 74 after being detected by the special prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (i.e., "1.6 seconds"). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open left special prize area 74, and is detected by the left special prize area switch 74d.

At this time, the valid pattern for the special probability areas 73, 74 of the jackpot type "Time-saving C" is "A", and only the right special probability area 73 is valid in the second round, with the right special probability area valid flag 203g set to on and the left special probability area valid flag 203h set to off. Therefore, even if the ball passes through the left special probability area 74 in the second round and is detected by the left special probability area switch 74d, the left special probability area 74 is not set to valid, so the special probability transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off.

In addition, in the even rounds of the jackpot type "Time-saving C" (i.e., 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, 12th, and 14th rounds), the drive mode of the right special probability area solenoid 73b and the left special probability area solenoid 74b is the same as in the 2nd round.

In the third round and onward of the jackpot type "time-saving C", the open special-variable regions 73 and 74 are invalid, and the special-variable effective flags 203g and 203h corresponding to the special-variable region switches 73d and 74d in which the ball is detected are set to off. In particular, in the fifth round of the jackpot type "time-saving C", only the left special-variable region 74 is valid, and the left special-variable effective flag 203h is set to on and the right special-variable effective flag 203g is set to off, but the ball is configured to flow into the right special-variable region 73. Therefore, even if the ball passes through the right special-variable region 73 in the fifth round and is detected by the right special-variable region switch 73d, the right special-variable region 73 is not set to valid, so the special-variable transition flag 203i remains off without being turned on.

Therefore, in the case of the jackpot type "Time-saving C," even if the ball passes through the special probability area 73, 74 and is detected by the special probability area switch 73d, 74d, the special probability area 73, 74 corresponding to the special probability area switch 73d, 74d that detected the ball is not set to active, so the special probability transition flag 203i will not be turned on and will remain off, just like the jackpot types "Time-saving A" and "Time-saving B."

Next, referring to Figure 21, the ball detection state in each round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C" will be described. Figure 21 is a timing chart that shows the operation timing of the jackpot opening solenoid 65c, the right special probability area solenoid 73b, and the left special probability area solenoid 74b in each round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C" of the second special symbol, the ball detection timing of the jackpot opening switch 71, the right special probability area switch 73d, and the left special probability area switch 74d, and the setting timing of the right special probability area valid flag 203g, the left special probability area valid flag 203h, and the special probability area transition flag 203i.

As shown in FIG. 21, in the jackpot type "latent probability variation C", a total of 15 rounds of jackpot play are played, and at the start of each round, the jackpot opening solenoid 65c is turned on and the opening/closing plate 65b is opened. Then, when a predetermined condition is met (in the first embodiment, either "30 seconds" have elapsed since opening or 10 balls have been detected by the jackpot opening switch 71), the jackpot opening solenoid 65c is turned off and the opening/closing plate 65b is closed, ending one round.

In addition, in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C", the opening and closing pattern of the right side probability change area 73 and the left side probability change area 74 is "Y2", the same as in the jackpot type "time-saving C", so when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot entry switch 71 in the first round, both the right probability change area solenoid 73b and the left probability change area solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms", and it is configured to recognize whether the right probability change area solenoid 73b and the left probability change area solenoid 74b can be operated normally.

When the third count ball is detected by the special prize opening switch 71, only the right special prize area solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000 ms". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the right special prize area 73 after being detected by the special prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the first embodiment, "1.5 seconds"). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open right special prize area 73, and is detected by the right special prize area switch 73d.

At this time, the valid pattern for the special probability areas 73, 74 of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C" is "B", and the right special probability area 73 in the third round and the left special probability area 74 in the sixth round are set to valid. Therefore, in the first round, both special probability areas 73, 74 are invalid, and the right special probability area valid flag 203g and the left special probability area valid flag 203h are set to off. Therefore, even if the ball passes through the right special probability area 73 in the first round and is detected by the right special probability area switch 73d, the right special probability area 73 is not set to valid, so the special probability transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off.

In addition, in the odd rounds of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C" (i.e., rounds 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, and 15), the drive mode of the right probability fluctuation area solenoid 73b and the left probability fluctuation area solenoid 74b is the same as in the first round.

Next, in the second round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C", when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot entry switch 71, the right probability fluctuation area solenoid 73b and the left probability fluctuation area solenoid 74b are both turned on for "60 ms" in the same way as in the first round, and it is configured to be possible to recognize whether the right probability fluctuation area solenoid 73b and the left probability fluctuation area solenoid 74b can be operated normally.

When the third count ball is detected by the special prize opening switch 71, only the left special prize area solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000 ms". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the left special prize area 74 after being detected by the special prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (i.e., "1.6 seconds"). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open left special prize area 74, and is detected by the left special prize area switch 74d.

At this time, the valid pattern for the special probability areas 73, 74 of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C" is "B", and in the second round, both special probability areas 73, 74 are invalid, and the right special probability area valid flag 203g and the left special probability area valid flag 203h are set to OFF. Therefore, even if the ball passes through the left special probability area 74 in the second round and is detected by the left special probability area switch 74d, the left special probability area 74 is not set to valid, so the special probability transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains OFF.

In addition, in the even rounds of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C" (i.e., rounds 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, and 14), the drive mode of the right probability fluctuation area solenoid 73b and the left probability fluctuation area solenoid 74b is the same as in the second round.

Next, in the third round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C," when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot entry switch 71, the right probability fluctuation area solenoid 73b and the left probability fluctuation area solenoid 74b are both turned on for "60 ms," just like in the first and second rounds, and it is configured to recognize whether the right probability fluctuation area solenoid 73b and the left probability fluctuation area solenoid 74b can be operated normally.

In the third round, when the third count ball is detected by the special prize opening switch 71, only the right special prize area solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000 ms". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the right special prize area 73 after being detected by the special prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (i.e., "1.5 seconds"). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open right special prize area 73, and is detected by the right special prize area switch 73d.

At this time, the valid pattern for the probability change areas 73, 74 of the jackpot type "latent probability change C" is "B", and only the right-side probability change area 73 is valid in the third round, with the right probability change valid flag 203g set to ON and the left probability change valid flag 203h set to OFF. Therefore, in the third round, when the ball passes through the right-side probability change area 73 and is detected by the right probability change area switch 73d, the right-side probability change area 73 is set to valid, and therefore the probability change transition flag 203i is set to ON.

In addition, in the sixth round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C", only the left side probability variable area 74 is active, the left probability variable active flag 203h is set to on, and the right probability variable active flag 203g is set to off. Therefore, even if the probability variable transition flag 203i is not on in the third round, the ball passes through the left side probability variable area 74 in the sixth round and is detected by the left probability variable area switch 74d, so that the probability variable transition flag 203i is set to on.

Therefore, in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C", when the ball passes through the probability fluctuation area 73, 74 and is detected by the probability fluctuation area switch 73d, 74d, the probability fluctuation area 73, 74 corresponding to the probability fluctuation area switch 73d, 74d that detected the ball in the third and sixth rounds is set to active, so the probability fluctuation transition flag 203i is set to ON. Then, at the end of the jackpot, the "probability fluctuation state" is set by referring to this probability fluctuation transition flag 203i.

In this way, by providing jackpot types with equivalent opening and closing patterns (i.e., jackpot types "Time-saving A" and "Latent Probability Variation A", jackpot types "Time-saving B" and "Latent Probability Variation B", and jackpot types "Time-saving C" and "Latent Probability Variation C") and making it impossible to determine the jackpot type based on the opening and closing pattern of each probability variation area 73, 74 alone, it is made difficult (impossible) for the player to recognize which jackpot type he has won, creating a gameplay experience that allows the player to guess in which game state he is playing, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

On the other hand, the jackpot type "Probability Change A", which indicates a "probability change state", controls the opening and closing of the right-side probability change area 73 and the left-side probability change area 74 with a unique opening and closing pattern (i.e., "Y1") that is different from other jackpot types. Therefore, the player can recognize that a "probability change state" has been granted by recognizing the opening and closing pattern of the right-side probability change area 73 and the left-side probability change area 74.

Returning to Figure 7 for further explanation, the payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (working area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. In addition, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 31) is immediately executed as a process during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, etc. Also, a prize ball detection switch 217 for detecting the paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch 217 is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

When the main control unit 110 issues an instruction to launch a ball, the launch control unit 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the ball is launched with a strength that corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and on condition that the shot stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated), the launch solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength that corresponds to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the audio output of the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off the lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the settings of the display mode of the effects performed by the third pattern display device 81, such as the variable effects and continuous preview effects.

The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory, etc.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the voice output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are each connected to the input/output port 225. In the first embodiment, the configuration is such that commands are sent in only one direction from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and that commands cannot be sent from the voice lamp control device 113 to the main control device 110. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured to be able to send and receive commands to each other.

The audio and lamp control device 113 also monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, it controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 to change the stage of the performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or to change the back image of the "Super Reach" performance mode, etc., and instructs the display control device 114 to have the third pattern display device 81 display a display based on the pressing of the frame button 22.

The power supply unit 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 2). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc. through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in an externally supplied 24-volt AC voltage, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control unit 111 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power cut) has occurred and outputs the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminals of the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power failure signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 31). The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt process, even after the voltage of 24 volts DC becomes less than 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing normally.

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 to the main control device 110 to clear the backup data when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 2) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111.

Next, the control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 22 to 33. The processes of the MPU 201 can be broadly divided into start-up process (see Figure 32) that is started when the power is turned on, main process (see Figure 33) that is executed after the start-up process, timer interrupt process (see Figure 22) that is started periodically (in the first embodiment, at a "4 millisecond" cycle), and NMI interrupt process (see Figure 31) that is started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For ease of explanation, the timer interrupt process (see Figure 22) and NMI interrupt process (see Figure 31) will be described first, followed by the start-up process (see Figure 32) and main process (see Figure 33).

Figure 22 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Timer interrupt processing is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed every "4 milliseconds", for example. By executing this timer interrupt processing by the MPU 201, various processes that should be executed periodically are performed.

In this timer interrupt process, first, external output processing is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt process and main processing, commands to be sent to the dispensing control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, etc. are generated based on various processes, and temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 203. In the external output process of S101, output data of commands, etc. stored in this command transmission ring buffer is sent to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device).

For example, the reserved ball count command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 23) described below is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the change pattern command, stop type command, confirmation command, etc. set in the special chart change process (see FIG. 24) and the change start process (FIG. 25), which is one process of the special chart change process, are sent to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the ball launch signal set when launching a ball in the launch control process of S112 described below is sent to the launch control device 112.

Next, the prize ball count signal and payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then a jackpot process is executed to execute processing at the time of a jackpot based on the first special symbol or the second special symbol (S103). Details of this jackpot process (S103) will be described later with reference to FIG. 26.

Next, a normal electric role control process is executed to execute drive control process of the rotating plate of the normal electric role device 67a (S104). In simple terms, on the condition that the ball has passed through the normal symbol gate 67, a variable display of the normal symbol is executed on the normal symbol display device 83, and as a result of the variable display of the normal symbol, when a winning symbol of the normal symbol (for example, a "○" symbol) appears and a winning state is reached, the rotating plate of the normal electric role device 67a is driven to open for a predetermined time.

Next, the process of reading the various winning switches is executed (S105). That is, the state of the large winning port switch 71, the right variable probability area switch 73d, the left variable probability area switch 74d, and the various switches 208 connected to the main control unit 110 is read, and the state of the switch 208 is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. In addition, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls to be sent to the payout control unit 111 based on the winning detection information is set in a command sending ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. As a result, the prize ball command is sent to the payout control unit 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process that is executed next.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S106). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (in the first embodiment, "899"), it is cleared to "0". The updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is then stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (in the first embodiment, "99"), it is cleared to "0", and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203.

Furthermore, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the normal random number counter C4 are updated (S107). Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the normal random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values (in the first embodiment, "899", "99", "99", "199", and "99", respectively), they are each cleared to "0". In addition, when the jackpot random number counter C1 or the normal random number counter C4 has completed one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the normal random number counter C4, and the initial value is set to the jackpot random number counter C1 or the normal random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of RAM 203.

Next, a start winning process is executed in response to a win in the special winning slot 64b or the special winning slot 64c (S108), and then a gate passing process is executed to determine whether the normal pattern is a hit or miss and the contents of the variable display as the ball passes through the normal pattern gate 67 (S109). Details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 23.

After the gate passing process (S109) is executed, a process for dynamically displaying the special pattern by the special pattern display device 37 and a special pattern change process for setting the change pattern of the third pattern by the third pattern display device 81 are executed based on the process contents of the start winning process (S108) (S110). Details of the special pattern change process (S110) will be described later with reference to FIG. 24.

Next, a normal symbol variation process is executed (S111) to execute a process for variably displaying the normal symbol by the normal symbol display device 83 based on the processing contents of the gate passing process (S109). In the normal symbol variation process (S111), the probability of drawing the normal symbol is set to either a high probability (for example, 9/10) or a low probability (1/10) depending on the value of the time-saving counter described below.

After executing the normal game fluctuation process (S111), the launch control process is executed (S112), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S113), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The launch control process (S112) is a process that determines whether the ball launch is on or off, on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the shot stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. Then, when the ball launch is on, the ball launch signal information is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 in order to send the ball launch signal to the launch control device 112. As a result, the ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process that is executed next.

Next, referring to the flowchart in FIG. 23, the start winning process (S108), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S108). The start winning process determines whether or not a ball has won the special drawing 1 second winning port 64b or the special drawing 2 winning port 64c, and if a winning has occurred, executes a process to store (reserve) the values of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e corresponding to the winning winning port 64b, 64c. In addition, a process is executed to transmit the reserved values of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 together with the number of reserved balls to the audio lamp control device 113.

In this initial winning process (S108), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not a ball has won (initial winning) the special winning hole 64b (S201). Here, based on the output signal of the special winning hole switch (not shown) that detects the ball winning (winning) into the special winning hole 64b of the special winning hole 1, which was read in the switch reading process (see S105 in FIG. 22), the ball is detected to have won the special winning hole 64b over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 22).

When it is determined that a ball has entered the special symbol 1 winning port 64b (there has been an initial winning) (S201: Yes), it is then determined whether the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of reserved balls N1 in operation for the dynamic display (variable performance) of the first special symbol reserved in the main control unit 110) is less than the upper limit value (in the first embodiment, "4") (S202). Then, if there has been a winning in the special symbol 1 winning port 64b but the number of reserved balls in operation N1 is not less than 4 (S202: No), this initial winning process (S108) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

On the other hand, if the number of activated reserved balls N1 is less than 4 (S202: Yes), the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a (number of activated reserved balls N1) is incremented by 1 (S203). Then, since the winning ball this time is the special symbol 1 winning hole 64b corresponding to the first special symbol, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination for each of the random number values C1 to C3 and CS1 (S204), and the process proceeds to S209.

If it is determined in the process of S201 that the ball has not entered the special drawing 1 winning hole 64b (S201: No), then it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the special drawing 2 winning hole 64c (initial winning) (S205). Here, as with the special drawing 1 winning hole 64b, the ball's entry into the special drawing 2 winning hole 64c is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 22) based on the output signal of the special drawing 2 ball entry switch (not shown) that detects the ball's entry (winning) into the special drawing 2 winning hole 64c, which is read in the switch reading process (see S105 in FIG. 22).

When it is determined that a ball has entered the special symbol 2 winning hole 64c (there has been a start winning) (S205: Yes), it is then determined whether the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the number of reserved balls N2 for the dynamic display (variable performance) of the second special symbol reserved in the main control unit 110) is less than the upper limit value (in the first embodiment, "4") (S206). Then, if there is no winning in the special symbol 2 winning hole 64c (S205: No), or if there is a winning in the special symbol 2 winning hole 64c but the number of reserved balls N2 is not less than 4 (S206: No), this start winning process (S108) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

On the other hand, if the number of activated reserved balls N2 is less than 4 (S206: Yes), the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b (number of activated reserved balls N2) is incremented by 1 (S207). Then, since the winning ball this time is the special symbol 2 winning hole 64c, which corresponds to the second special symbol, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination for each of the random number values C1 to C3 and CS1 (S208), and the process proceeds to S209.

In the processing of S209, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 are read out from the counter buffer 203c (see Figure 8), and among the first reserved areas 1 to 4 or the second reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e set as the storage destination in S204 or S208, if the first reserved ball storage area 203d is specified as the storage destination, the values are respectively reserved (stored) in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1, the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 and the variation type counter storage area 203d4 of the areas corresponding to the value indicated by the first reserved ball number counter 203a (S209). In addition, if the second reserved ball storage area 203e is specified as the storage destination, the balls are reserved (stored) in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1, the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3, and the variable type counter storage area 203e4, which are areas corresponding to the value indicated by the second reserved ball count counter 203b (S209).

Specifically, for example, based on the winning of the special drawing 1 winning hole 64b, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination in the processing of S204, and if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a after the addition in the processing of S203 is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the first reserved area 1. Also, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a after the addition is "2", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the first reserved area 2, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a after the addition is "3", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the first reserved area 3, and if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a after the addition is "4", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the first reserved area 4.

For example, in the process of S208, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination based on the winning of the special drawing 2 winning hole 64c, and if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after the addition in the process of S207 is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the second reserved first area. Also, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after the addition is "2", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the second reserved second area, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after the addition is "3", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the second reserved third area, and if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after the addition is "4", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the second reserved fourth area.

Next, the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a or the second reserved ball counter 203b after the addition by the processing of S203 or S207 (operated reserved ball number N1 or operated reserved ball number N2) and the reserved ball number command including the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 stored (reserved) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e by the processing of S209 are set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S210) in order to send the reserved ball number command to the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, the reserved ball number command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) executed next. When the processing of S210 is completed, the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22).

The values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the reserved ball count command in the processing of S210 may be the values read from the counter buffer 203c in the processing of S209, or the values stored (reserved) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e in the processing of S209 may be read.

Next, referring to FIG. 24, the special pattern change processing (S110), which is one process of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this special pattern change processing (S110). This special pattern change processing (S110) controls the dynamic display in the special pattern display device 37 and the change performance performed in the third pattern display device 81.

In this special symbol change process (S110), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot is currently being played (S301). The jackpot period includes the period during the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the special symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot, and the period during a specified time after the jackpot game ends. If the determination results in a jackpot (S301: Yes), the special symbol change process (S110) ends and returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

If a jackpot is not being won (S301: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the special pattern display device 37 is in a dynamic display mode (S302), and if the display mode of the special pattern display device 37 is not in a dynamic display mode (S302: No), it is then determined whether a predetermined time has passed since the dynamic display on the special pattern display device 37 stopped (S303). As a result, if the predetermined time has not passed since the dynamic display stopped (S303: No), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). This causes the stopped patterns in the dynamic display (variable performance) to be displayed on the special pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 for only the predetermined time, allowing the player to visually recognize the stopped patterns.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S303, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display was stopped (S303: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the number of activated reserved balls N2 of the dynamic display (variable performance) related to the second special pattern reserved in the main control unit 110) is greater than "0" (S304). As a result, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the number of activated reserved balls N2) is not "0" (S304: Yes), it is determined that it is time to start executing the dynamic display (variable performance) related to the second special pattern, and first, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the number of activated reserved balls N2) is decremented by 1 (S305). This is because the execution of one of the reserved dynamic displays (variable performance) related to the second special pattern is started by the variable start processing (S310) described later, and the number of reserved balls related to the second special pattern is reduced by one.

Then, the data stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e is shifted (S306). This data shift process shifts the data stored in the second reserved areas 1 to 4 of the second reserved ball storage area 203e in sequence toward the reserved ball execution area 203f, and the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second reserved area 1 → reserved ball execution area 203f, second reserved area 2 → second reserved area 1, second reserved area 3 → second reserved area 2, second reserved area 4 → second reserved area 3, and so on.

On the other hand, in the process of S304, if it is determined that the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (number of activated reserved balls N2) is "0" (S304: No), then it is determined whether the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (number of activated reserved balls N1 of the dynamic display (variable performance) related to the first special pattern reserved in the main control unit 110) is greater than "0" (S307). As a result, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (number of activated reserved balls N1) is not "0" (S307: Yes), it is determined that it is the timing to start the execution of the dynamic display (variable performance) related to the first special pattern, and first, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (number of activated reserved balls N1) is decremented by one (S308). This is because the execution of one of the dynamic displays (variable performance) related to the reserved first special pattern is started by the later-described variable start process (S310), and the number of reserved balls is reduced by one.

Then, the data stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d is shifted (S309). This data shift process shifts the data stored in the first reserved areas 1 to 4 of the first reserved ball storage area 203d sequentially toward the reserved ball execution area 203f, and the data in each area is shifted in the following order: first reserved area 1 → reserved ball execution area 203f, first reserved area 2 → first reserved area 1, first reserved area 3 → first reserved area 2, first reserved area 4 → first reserved area 3, and so on.

After the data shift process of S306 or S309, a change start process is executed for the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of the various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f by the data shift process (S310), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). The change start process (S310) will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

In the process of S307, if it is determined that the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a (operating reserved ball count N1) is "0" (S307: No), it is determined whether or not a demo performance is being performed in the third pattern display device 81, i.e., whether or not a demo is in progress (S311). In this determination process, after a demo command is sent to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113, it is determined that a demo is in progress until it is determined that either the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a or the second reserved ball counter 203b (operating reserved ball count N1 or operating reserved ball count N2) is greater than "0".

If it is determined that a demo is not in progress (S311: No), a demo command to be sent to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S312), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). On the other hand, if it is determined that a demo is in progress (S311: Yes), the process returns directly to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). The demo command set in the process of S312 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (see S101 in FIG. 22) of the timer interrupt process that is executed next.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the demo command, it transmits a display demo command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display a demo performance based on the reception of the display demo command.

As described above, the demo command is set when there are no reserved balls when a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation has stopped. Therefore, if the fluctuation performance does not start even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation has stopped, a demo performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

If it is determined in the process of S311 that the demo is not in progress (S311: No), a process may be further executed to determine whether or not a second predetermined time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation has stopped, and if the second predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation has stopped, the process of S312 may be executed to set a demo command. In this way, if there are no reserved balls after the fluctuation has stopped, the stopped symbols of the stopped fluctuation performance can be shown to the player for a relatively long time without immediately starting the demo performance.

In the process of S302, if it is determined that the display mode of the special pattern display device 37 is in dynamic display (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the dynamic display time (variation time) has elapsed (S313). The display time during dynamic display of the special pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and if this dynamic display time (variation time) has not elapsed (S313: No), the display of the special pattern display device 37 is updated (S314) and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

In the first embodiment, for example, the display mode of the second LED group 37b of the special pattern display device 37 is set from the start of dynamic display until the change time has elapsed.

On the other hand, if the dynamic display time (variation time) of the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S313: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stopping symbol is set for the special symbol display device 37 (S315). The stopping symbol is set in advance by a variation start process (S310) described later with reference to FIG. 25. In the variation start process, whether or not there is a jackpot is determined according to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f by the process of S306 or S309, and if there is a jackpot, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot and the game state after the jackpot are determined according to the value of the jackpot type counter C2.

When the display mode of the special pattern display device 37 corresponding to the stopping pattern is set in the processing of S315, a confirmation command is set (S316) to confirm and display the stopping pattern of the variable performance in the third pattern display device 81 in synchronization with the display of the second LED group 37b in the special pattern display device 37, and processing proceeds to S317. The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variable performance being performed in the third pattern display device 81. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives this confirmation command, it transmits a display confirmation command to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display confirmation command, the display control device 114 is configured to stop the variable performance of the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81 and confirm and display the stopping pattern.

In the process of S317, in order to determine whether or not the "probability fluctuation state" is in progress, it is determined whether or not the value of an ST counter (not shown) provided in RAM 203 is greater than "0" (S317). This ST counter is configured to be set to "100" when the "probability fluctuation state" is initiated because the probability fluctuation transition flag 203i is set to ON during the jackpot end process (see S415 in FIG. 26) in the jackpot process described below (see S472 in FIG. 30).

In the process of S317, if the value of the ST counter is not "0" (S317: Yes), the state is "probability fluctuation state", and one dynamic display (fluctuation performance) of one of the special symbols has been completed, so the value of the ST counter is decremented by 1 (S318) and the process proceeds to S319. On the other hand, in the process of S317, if the value of the ST counter is "0" (S317: No), the state is "normal game state" or "time reduction state", so the process of S318 is skipped and the process proceeds to S319.

In the process of S319, in order to determine whether or not the game state is one in which the "time-saving function" is added, it is determined whether or not the value of a time-saving counter (not shown) provided in RAM 203 is greater than "0" (S319). This time-saving counter is configured to be set to "100" (see S475 in FIG. 30) when the jackpot type is determined to be "Probability Fluctuation A", "Time-saving C", or "Latent Probability Fluctuation C" in the jackpot end process (see S415 in FIG. 26) in the jackpot process described later, and to be set to "50" when the jackpot type is determined to be "Time-saving A", "Time-saving B", "Latent Probability Fluctuation A", or "Latent Probability Fluctuation B" (see S476 in FIG. 30).

In the process of S319, if the value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (S319: Yes), the game state is one in which the "time-saving function" has been added, and one dynamic display (changing performance) of one of the special symbols has been completed, so the value of the time-saving counter is decremented by 1 (S320), this special symbol changing process (S110) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17). On the other hand, in the process of S319, if the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (S319: No), the "time-saving function" has not been added, so the process of S320 is skipped, this special symbol changing process (S110) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17).

Next, referring to FIG. 25, the change start process (S310), which is one process of the special symbol change process (S110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S310). This change start process (S310) draws a lottery for a jackpot or a miss (jackpot lottery) based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f according to the game status, and determines the dynamic display and dynamic pattern (change pattern and stop type) of the change presentation performed by the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the variation start process (S310), first, in order to determine the game state, it is determined whether the value of the ST counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is greater than "0" (S321). If the result of the determination is that the value of the ST counter is "0" (S321: No), the game state is the "normal game state" or the "time-shortened state", and the jackpot probability of the special symbol is in a low probability state, so the jackpot random number table 202a for the low probability state is set (S322), and the process proceeds to S324. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the ST counter is greater than "0" (S323: Yes), the game state is the "probability variation state", and the jackpot probability of the special symbol is in a high probability state, so the jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability state is set (S323), and the process proceeds to S324.

In the process of S324, a jackpot lottery (win/lose determination) process is performed to determine whether or not there is a jackpot based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the jackpot random number table 202a (see Figure 9 (a)) set in S322 or S323 (S324).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, whether or not there is a jackpot is determined based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and its relationship to the game state (mode) at that time. As described above, in the jackpot random number table 202a, when the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in a normal low probability state ("normal game state" or "time-shortened state"), "7,307,582" is specified as the jackpot random number value. Also, when the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in a high probability state ("probability-varying state"), "28,122,298,390,486,567,656,750,866" is specified as the jackpot random number value.

In the process of S324, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is compared with the jackpot random number value specified in the jackpot random number table 202a, and if they match, it is determined that there is a jackpot. If the result of the process of S324 is that there is a jackpot (S324: Yes), the display mode at the time of the jackpot is set based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the jackpot type table for special symbol 1 202b1 (see FIG. 10(a)) corresponding to the first special symbol or the jackpot type table for special symbol 2 202b2 (see FIG. 10(b)) corresponding to the second special symbol (S325).

In this process, the jackpot type table 202b determines the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f, i.e., "Probability Fluctuation A" corresponding to a "15R certain variable jackpot" in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a "probability fluctuation state" after a jackpot with 15 rounds, "latent probability fluctuation C" corresponding to a "15R latent certain variable jackpot" in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a "probability fluctuation state" after a jackpot with 15 rounds, "time reduction C" corresponding to a "15R time-saving jackpot" in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a "time-saving state" after a jackpot with 15 rounds, "latent probability fluctuation A" or "latent probability fluctuation B" corresponding to a "7R latent certain variable jackpot" in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a "probability fluctuation state" after a jackpot with 7 rounds, or "time reduction A" or "time reduction B" corresponding to a "7R time-saving jackpot" in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a "time-saving state" after a jackpot with 7 rounds. Then, based on the determined type of jackpot, the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot (the display mode of the second LED group 37b) is set.

Specifically, if the data stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is data shifted from the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the jackpot type is determined based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the special jackpot type table 202b1 (see FIG. 10(a)). Also, if the data stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is data shifted from the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the jackpot type is determined based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the special jackpot type table 202b2 (see FIG. 10(b)).

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot is determined (S326), and the process proceeds to S329. Specifically, a rough presentation mode is selected based on the jackpot type (display mode) determined in S325 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f, and the dynamic time (fluctuation time) of the specific dynamic display (fluctuation presentation) is determined from the selected rough presentation mode based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of this jackpot, first, the stop pattern table 202d to be used is selected according to the jackpot type (display mode).

Specifically, when "probability fluctuation A" corresponding to "15R certain jackpot" is set as the jackpot type in the processing of S325, the performance mode corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is selected in the stop pattern table 202d (e.g., the stop pattern table for probability fluctuation A) provided for "probability fluctuation A". Also, when "latent probability fluctuation C" corresponding to "15R latent certain jackpot" is set as the jackpot type, the performance mode corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is selected in the stop pattern table 202d (e.g., the stop pattern table for latent probability fluctuation C) provided for "latent probability fluctuation C". Also, when "time reduction C" corresponding to "15R time reduction jackpot" is set as the jackpot type, the performance mode corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is selected in the stop pattern table 202d (e.g., the stop pattern table for time reduction C) provided for "time reduction C". In addition, when "latent probability fluctuation A" or "latent probability fluctuation B" corresponding to the "7R latent probability variable jackpot" is set as the jackpot type, the performance mode corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is selected in the stop pattern table 202d (e.g., the stop pattern table for latent probability fluctuation A and B) provided for "latent probability fluctuation A and B". In addition, when "time reduction A" or "time reduction B" corresponding to the "7R time reduction jackpot" is set as the jackpot type, the performance mode corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is selected in the stop pattern table 202d (e.g., the stop pattern table for time reduction A and B) provided for "time reduction A and B".

Then, in the group of the fluctuation pattern table 202e provided for each presentation mode set in the processing of S326, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time.

On the other hand, if the process of S324 determines that the winning combination is not a jackpot (S324: No), the display mode for a losing combination is set (S327). In the process of S327, the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to a losing symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a or (and) the second reserved ball number counter 203b, and the current game state, the third symbol display device 81 is set to display one of the following performance modes: "non-reach (shortened)" performance mode, "non-reach (normal)" performance mode, "normal reach" performance mode, "super reach" performance mode, and "special reach" performance mode. In the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d is set so that the range of the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each performance mode is different depending on whether the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is a "probability variable state", a "time shortened state", or a "normal game state".

Next, the fluctuation pattern in the event of a loss is determined (S328), and the process proceeds to S329. In the process of S328, the fluctuation time until the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 stop and display a losing symbol is determined. Specifically, in the group of the fluctuation pattern table 202e provided for each display mode (presentation mode) in the event of a loss determined in the process of S327, the fluctuation pattern associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time.

In this way, the process for setting the presentation mode and variation pattern when a jackpot occurs and the process for setting the presentation mode and variation pattern when a miss occur are determined by the same judgment program using the same random number values C3 and CS1, making it possible to standardize the programs and reduce development man-hours.

In the process of S329, a variation pattern command is set that notifies the display control device 114 of the variation time according to the variation pattern determined by the processes of S326 and S328 via the voice lamp control device 113 (S329). Specifically, for example, if the jackpot lottery is won and the jackpot is "Probability Variation A" corresponding to a "15R Probability Variation Jackpot", and further, the variation pattern of "Super Reach" of "25 seconds" is selected, a variation pattern command indicating jackpot, "Probability Variation A", and "Super Reach" of "25 seconds" is set. Also, if the jackpot lottery is lost and further, the variation pattern of "Super Reach" of "25 seconds" is selected, a variation pattern command indicating loss and "Super Reach" of "25 seconds" is set. In this way, even if the variable performance has the same variation time, by setting the correct or incorrect performance and the general details of the variation pattern in the variation pattern command, the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the details of the performance mode, including whether it is correct or not, and the variation time, and can determine the details of the variable performance variation pattern based on this information.

Also, a stop type command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S325 or S327 via the voice lamp control device 113 (S330), and the process returns to the special symbol change process (see FIG. 24). Specifically, for example, if a jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is "Probability Change A" which is a "15R sure-change jackpot", a stop type command indicating "Probability Change A" is set without specifying the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "7" symbol, etc.). Also, if a jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is "Latent Probability Change A" which is a "7R latent sure-change jackpot", a stop type command indicating "Latent Probability Change A" is set without specifying the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "3" symbol, etc.).

On the other hand, if a jackpot is not won and the "Super Reach" presentation mode is selected, a stop type command is set indicating that the "Super Reach" presentation mode will occur when a miss occurs, without specifying the specific stop mode of the third symbol (e.g., "787" etc.). Also, if a jackpot is not won and the "Normal Reach" presentation mode is selected, a stop type command is set indicating that the "Normal Reach" presentation mode will occur when a miss occurs, without specifying the specific stop mode of the third symbol (e.g., "737" etc.). Also, if a jackpot is not won and the "Non-Reach" presentation mode is selected, a stop type command is set indicating that the "Non-Reach" presentation mode will occur when a miss occurs, without specifying the specific stop mode of the third symbol (e.g., "258" etc.).

In this way, by setting a rough stop type based on whether the variable performance is successful or not in the stop type command, the voice lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) can grasp the stop type based on whether it is successful or not, and based on that information, can determine the detailed stop result of the variable performance.

These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in RAM 203, and in the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) that is executed next, these commands are sent to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command or stop type command, it generates a display fluctuation pattern command or display type command based on the command and sends it to the display control device 114.

Next, referring to FIG. 26, we will explain the jackpot process (S103), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the jackpot process (S103).

As described above, when a jackpot with a special symbol occurs, this jackpot process (S103) sets the number of times the jackpot opening (number of rounds) of the jackpot opening port 65a is set according to the type of jackpot, and sets the opening time of the jackpot opening 65a. In addition, based on the type of jackpot, a special jackpot opening/closing table 202f (see FIG. 11) is set to set the right special jackpot area 73 and the left special jackpot area 74 that are opened or closed for each round, and a special jackpot area validity table 202g (see FIG. 12) is set to set the right special jackpot area 73 and the left special jackpot area 74 that are enabled or disabled for each round.

In addition, in the jackpot process (S103), when a jackpot state occurs, a jackpot opening/closing control process (see FIG. 27) is executed to open or close the jackpot opening 65a. That is, the jackpot opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and the closing condition is determined as to whether the maximum opening time of the jackpot opening 65a (in the first embodiment, "30 seconds") has elapsed or whether a prescribed number of balls (in the first embodiment, 10 balls) have entered the jackpot opening 65a. Then, when either of these closing conditions is met, the jackpot opening 65a is closed. This control regarding the opening and closing of the jackpot opening 65a is executed repeatedly for a predetermined number of rounds.

In addition, within this big prize opening and closing process, a process is executed to open or close the right-side special rate area 73 and the left-side special rate area 74 based on the set special rate area opening and closing table 202f (see FIG. 11), and the right-side special rate area 73 and the left-side special rate area 74 are set to be valid or invalid based on the set special rate area validity table 202g (see FIG. 12). That is, for each round of the big prize state, the right special rate area opening and closing plate 73a of the right-side special rate area 73 and the left special rate area opening and closing plate 74a of the left-side special rate area 74 are driven and controlled according to the set special rate area opening and closing table 202f (see FIG. 11). Furthermore, for each round of the big prize state, the right special rate area validity flag 203g corresponding to the right-side special rate area 73 and the left special rate area validity flag 203h corresponding to the left-side special rate area 74 are set to be on or off according to the set special rate area validity table 202g (see FIG. 12).

In this jackpot process (S103), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot is occurring (S401). If the result of the determination is that a jackpot is not occurring (S401: No), it is then determined whether or not the dynamic display (variable presentation) of the special pattern has ended (S402).

As a result of the determination in S402, if the dynamic display (variable presentation) of the special pattern has not ended (S402: No), the jackpot process (S103) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). On the other hand, if the dynamic display (variable presentation) of the special pattern has ended (S402: Yes), it is then determined whether or not a jackpot has been won in the dynamic display (variable presentation) (S403).

If it is determined in S403 that the jackpot has not been won in the dynamic display (variable presentation) (S403: No), the jackpot process (S103) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot has been won in the dynamic display (variable presentation) (S403: Yes), in order to execute control related to the jackpot that has been won, it is first determined whether the number of rounds of the jackpot that has been won is 15R or not, that is, whether the "probability variation A" corresponding to the "15R certain variable jackpot", the "latent probability variation C" corresponding to the "15R latent certain variable jackpot", or the "time reduction C" corresponding to the "15R time reduction jackpot" has been won (S404).

If the result of the determination in S404 is that the number of rounds of the winning jackpot is 15R (S404: Yes), the round counter is set to "15" (S405) in order to perform 15 times of opening control of the large prize winning port 65a in this jackpot, and the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if the number of rounds of the winning jackpot is not 15R, that is, if the winning jackpot has won "latent probability fluctuation A" or "latent probability fluctuation B" corresponding to the "7R latent probability variable jackpot", or "time reduction A" or "time reduction B" corresponding to the "7R time reduction jackpot" (S404: No), the round counter is set to "7" (S406) in order to perform 7 times of opening control of the large prize winning port 65a in this jackpot, and the process proceeds to S407. The MPU 201 checks the value of the round counter, and if a value is set in the round counter (i.e., "1" or more), it subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter while controlling the opening of the big prize opening 65a. Then, when the value of the round counter becomes "0", it is configured to end the big prize that is currently being executed.

In the process of S407, in order to send the opening command to the voice lamp control device 113, the opening command is set in a command sending ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S407). Next, the opening time of the jackpot (e.g., "10 seconds") is set (S408), and the process proceeds to S409. The opening command set in the process of S407 is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process of the timer interrupt process that is executed next (see S101 in FIG. 22).

When the audio and lamp control device 113 receives the opening command, it outputs audio and controls the lamps to indicate that the jackpot has started, and sends a display opening command to the display control device 114. Then, based on the reception of the display opening command, the display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an opening effect (for example, announcing the total number of rounds, etc.).

In the process of S409, the probability change area opening and closing table 202f (see FIG. 11) is set according to the type of jackpot (jackpot type) (S409), and the process proceeds to S410. Specifically, if the jackpot type is "time-saving A" or "latent probability change A", the opening and closing pattern of the right-side probability change area 73 and the left-side probability change area 74 is set to "X1", if the jackpot type is "time-saving B" or "latent probability change B", the opening and closing pattern of the right-side probability change area 73 and the left-side probability change area 74 is set to "X2", if the jackpot type is "probability change A", the opening and closing pattern of the right-side probability change area 73 and the left-side probability change area 74 is set to "Y1", and if the jackpot type is "time-saving C" or "latent probability change C", the opening and closing pattern of the right-side probability change area 73 and the left-side probability change area 74 is set to "Y2".

In the process of S410, the probability change area effective table 202g (see FIG. 12) is set according to the type of jackpot (jackpot type) (S410), and the process proceeds to S411. Specifically, if the jackpot type is "time-saving A", "time-saving C", or "latent probability change B", the effective pattern of the right-side probability change area 73 and the left-side probability change area 74 is set to "A", if the jackpot type is "time-saving B", "latent probability change A", or "latent probability change C", the effective pattern of the right-side probability change area 73 and the left-side probability change area 74 is set to "B", and if the jackpot type is "probability change A", the effective pattern of the right-side probability change area 73 and the left-side probability change area 74 is set to "C".

In the process of S411, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the current jackpot is "probability fluctuation A" or not (S411). If it is determined to be "probability fluctuation A" as a result of the determination (S411: Yes), a probability fluctuation notification command is set to notify the player that the jackpot is in a "probability fluctuation state" (S412), the jackpot process (S103) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

The probability change notification command set in the processing of S412 is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the timer interrupt processing that is executed next (see S101 in FIG. 22). When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the probability change notification command, it is configured to execute a "probability change notification presentation mode" to notify the player that the probability change state is in progress.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S411 that the status is not "Probability Fluctuation A" (S411: No), the game status is not clearly notified, so the process of S412 is skipped so that the probability fluctuation notification command is not set, the jackpot process (S103) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

In the pachinko machine of the first embodiment, when the audio lamp control device 113 does not receive the probability change notification command, when the ongoing jackpot ends, the post-jackpot performance is executed in a "time-saving notification performance mode" without fail, and it is configured so that it is difficult (or impossible) for the player to recognize whether the "probability change state" or the "time-saving state" is in place.

If it is determined in the process of S401 that a jackpot has already been hit (S401: Yes), the large prize opening opening/closing control process (S413) is executed to control the opening and closing of the large prize opening 65a.

Now, referring to FIG. 27, we will explain the large prize opening opening control process (S413), which is one process of the large prize opening processing (S103) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the large prize opening opening control process (S413). As described above, in this large prize opening opening control process (S413), based on the number of times the large prize opening 65a is opened set in the large prize opening processing (S103), the opening and closing control of the large prize opening 65a, the opening and closing control of the right side special rate area 73 and the left side special rate area 74, and the valid setting process or invalid setting process of the right side special rate area 73 and the left side special rate area 74 are executed.

In this special prize opening opening control process (S413), first, it is determined whether the opening time for the current special prize opening or the interval time between rounds (e.g., 1 second) has elapsed (S421). If the opening time or interval time has not elapsed (S421: No), the conditions for opening the special prize opening 65a have not yet been met, so S422 is skipped and processing moves to S423. On the other hand, if the opening time or interval time has elapsed (S421: Yes), the conditions for opening the special prize opening 65a have been met, so the special prize opening 65a opening setting process is performed (S422) and processing moves to S4223.

Now, referring to FIG. 28, the opening setting process (S422) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the opening setting process (S422). As described above, in this opening setting process (S422), various setting processes for opening the large prize opening 65a are executed.

In this opening setting process (S422), first, since it is the timing to open the large prize opening 65a of the variable prize device 65, the large prize opening opening setting is performed to open the large prize opening 65a of the variable prize device 65 (S431), and the process moves to S432. By performing this large prize opening opening setting, the large prize opening solenoid 65c is driven to open the opening/closing plate 65b, allowing balls to flow into the large prize opening 65a.

Next, in the process of S432, in order to count the balls that have entered the opened large prize opening 65a, the prize counter is set to "10" (S432), and the process proceeds to S433. In the first embodiment, the value of this prize counter is configured to be decremented by one each time a ball enters the large prize opening 65a, and the MPU 201 is configured to close the large prize opening 65a when a predetermined opening time has elapsed after the large prize opening 65a is opened, or when the value of the prize counter becomes "0".

Next, in the process of S433, the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 65a (for example, "30 seconds") is set (S433), an opening command indicating that the large prize opening 65a is open is set to the voice lamp control device 113 (S434), and the process proceeds to S435. The opening command set in the process of S434 is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process of the timer interrupt process that is executed next (see S101 in FIG. 17).

When the audio and lamp control device 113 receives the open command, it outputs an audio signal indicating that a round has started and controls the lamps, and also sends a display open command to the display control device 114. Based on the reception of the display open command, the display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display a round presentation (e.g., a round number announcement).

Next, in the process of S435, the right high probability variable effective flag 203g or the left high probability variable effective flag 203h for that round is set (S435) based on the high probability variable area effective table 202g set according to the type of jackpot in the jackpot process (see FIG. 26), and this opening setting process (S422) ends. After this opening setting process (S422) ends, the process proceeds to S423 of the jackpot opening/closing control process (see FIG. 27).

In the process of S435, specifically, with regard to the right high probability activation flag 203g, if the jackpot type is "Time-saving A", "Latent probability fluctuation B" or "Time-saving C" and the jackpot has started at the start of the second round, the high probability activation pattern is "A", so the right high probability activation flag 203g is set to ON.

In addition, in the process of S435, if the jackpot type is "Time-saving B", "Latent probability fluctuation A" or "Latent probability fluctuation C" and the 3rd round of the jackpot has started, the right high probability activation flag 203g is set to ON since the high probability activation pattern is "B".

Furthermore, in the process of S435, if the jackpot type is "Probability Variation A" and it is the start of the 4th round of the jackpot, the right probability variation effective flag 203g is set to ON since the probability variation area effective pattern is "C". Note that in all rounds other than the above-mentioned rounds of each jackpot type, the right probability variation effective flag 203g is set to OFF.

With regard to the left special probability effective flag 203h, if the jackpot type is "Time-saving A", "Latent probability fluctuation B" or "Time-saving C" and it is the start of the 5th round of the jackpot, the left special probability effective flag 203h is set to ON. If the jackpot type is "Time-saving B", "Latent probability fluctuation A" or "Latent probability fluctuation C" and it is the start of the 6th round of the jackpot, the left special probability effective flag 203h is set to ON. If the jackpot type is "Probability fluctuation A" and it is the start of the 9th round of the jackpot, the left special probability effective flag 203h is set to ON. In all rounds other than the above-mentioned rounds of each jackpot type, the left special probability effective flag 203h is set to OFF.

Returning to FIG. 27, the explanation continues. In the process of S423, it is determined whether the large prize opening 65a is open or not (S423). If the result of the determination is that the large prize opening 65a is not open (S423: No), the large prize opening 65a is not open, but is in the opening time, the interval time, or the ending time, so S424 is skipped, the large prize opening opening opening control process (S413) is terminated, and the process returns to the large prize opening process (see FIG. 26). On the other hand, if the large prize opening 65a is open (S423: Yes), an open process is performed (S424) to execute various processes associated with the opening of the large prize opening 65a, the large prize opening opening control process (S413) is terminated, and the process returns to the large prize opening process (see FIG. 26).

Now, referring to FIG. 29, the during-opening process (S424) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the during-opening process (S424). As described above, during-opening process (S424) executes processes for detecting the winning of a ball when the large prize opening 65a is opened, controls for opening and closing the right-side special probability area 73 and the left-side special probability area 74, and controls for detecting the passage of a ball into the opened right-side special probability area 73 or left-side special probability area 74.

In this open process (S424), first, it is determined whether the right variable probability area switch 73d is turned on (S441). If the right variable probability area switch 73d is turned on (S441: Yes), the ball has flowed into the right variable probability area 73, so it is next determined whether the right variable probability effective flag 203g is set on (S442). If the right variable probability effective flag 203g is set on (S442: Yes), the ball has flowed into the right variable probability area 73 in a situation where the right variable probability area 73 is set to be effective, so in order to generate a "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot, the variable probability transition flag 203i is set on (S443), and the process proceeds to S446. On the other hand, in the process of S442, if the right special chance active flag 203g is not set to on (S442: No), the ball is flowing into the right special chance area 73 when the right special chance area 73 is not set to active, so the process of S443 is skipped and the process proceeds to S446.

In addition, in the process of S441, if the right special rate area switch 73d is not turned on (S441: No), then it is determined whether the left special rate area switch 74d is turned on (S444). If the result of the determination is that the left special rate area switch 74d is turned on (S444: Yes), the ball has flowed into the left special rate area 74, so it is determined whether the left special rate effective flag 203h is set on (S445). If the result of the determination is that the left special rate effective flag 203h is set on (S445: Yes), the ball has flowed into the left special rate area 74 when the left special rate area 74 is set to be effective, so the process proceeds to S443, the special rate transition flag 203i is set on (S443), and the process proceeds to S446.

On the other hand, in the processing of S445, if the left special chance effective flag 203h is not set to on (S442: No), the ball is flowing into the left special chance area 74 when the left special chance area 74 is not set to active, so the processing of S443 is skipped and processing proceeds to S446. Note that in the processing of S444, if the left special chance area switch 74d is not on (S444: No), neither special chance area switch 73d, 74d has detected the ball, so processing proceeds to S446.

In the process of S446, it is determined whether or not the opening time of the large prize opening 65a set in the above-mentioned opening time setting process (see S433 in FIG. 28) has elapsed (S446). In the process of S446, if the opening time of the large prize opening 65a has elapsed (S446: Yes), the closing condition of the large prize opening 65a is met, and it is time to close the large prize opening 65a in that round, so the value of the winning counter is cleared to "0" (S447) and the process proceeds to S455 to close the large prize opening 65a. The closing process of the large prize opening 65a from S445 will be described later. On the other hand, in the process of S446, if the opening time of the large prize opening 65a has not elapsed (S446: No), it is next determined whether or not a ball has entered the large prize opening 65a and the large prize opening switch 71 has been turned on (S448).

In the process of S448, if the large prize opening switch 71 is on (S448: Yes), a ball has entered the large prize opening 65a, so the prize counter value is decremented by 1 (S449), and then it is determined whether this detection of the large prize opening switch 71 being on is the first count, i.e., whether the prize counter value is "9" (S450).

In the process of S450, if it is determined that the current on detection of the special prize opening switch 71 is not the first count (S450: No), the process proceeds to S452, whereas if it is determined that it is the first count (S450: Yes), the right special prize area solenoid 73b and the left special prize area solenoid 74b are set to on for "60 ms" (S451), and the right special prize area opening/closing plate 73a and the left special prize area opening/closing plate 74a are momentarily opened to the extent that balls do not flow in.

In this way, at the first count of each round, the right special probability area solenoid 73b and the left special probability area solenoid 74b are driven to the extent that balls do not flow in, making it possible to check whether the right special probability area opening/closing plate 73a and the left special probability area opening/closing plate 74a can be opened or not, making it possible to quickly identify situations in which the special probability areas 73, 74 cannot be opened due to an abnormality, etc.

Next, in the process of S452, it is determined whether the on detection of the big prize opening switch 71 this time is the third count or not, that is, whether the value of the winning counter is "7" or not (S452). If it is determined that the on detection of the big prize opening switch 71 this time is the third count (S452: Yes), the right special probability area solenoid 73b or the left special probability area solenoid 74b is set to on for "2000 ms" (S453) based on the special probability area opening and closing table 202f (see FIG. 11) set according to the type of big prize in the big prize process (see FIG. 26), and either the right special probability area opening and closing plate 73a or the left special probability area opening and closing plate 74a is opened to allow the ball to flow into the opened special probability area 73, 74. By configuring in this way, the ball can pass through either one of the special probability areas 73, 74 set in advance in each round. After S451 and S453 are executed, this open process (S424) ends and the process returns to the large prize opening opening control process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, in the process of S452, if it is determined that the current ON detection of the large prize opening switch 71 is not the third count (S452: No), then it is determined whether the value of the prize counter after subtracting 1 is greater than "0" (S454). If the value of the prize counter is not greater than "0" (S454: No), that is, if the value of the prize counter is "0" or less, 10 balls have entered the large prize opening 65a and the condition for closing the large prize opening 65a is met, so the process proceeds to S455 to close the large prize opening 65a.

If the special prize opening switch 71 is not turned on in the process of S448 (S448: No), or if the prize counter value is determined to be greater than "0" in the process of S454 (S454: Yes), the conditions for closing the special prize opening 65a are not met, and in order to keep the special prize opening 65a open, the processes of S449 to S453 are skipped and this open process (S424) is terminated. After this open process (S424) is terminated, the process returns to the special prize opening opening/closing control process (see FIG. 27).

In the closing process of the large prize opening 65a from S455, first, the large prize opening 65a is set to be closed (S455), and the large prize opening solenoid 65c is turned off to close the opening/closing plate 65b. Next, a closing command indicating that the large prize opening 65a has been closed is set to the voice lamp control device 113 (S456), and the process proceeds to S457. The closing command set in the process of S456 is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process of the timer interrupt process that is executed next (see S101 in FIG. 22).

When the audio and lamp control device 113 receives the close command, it outputs an audio and controls the lamps to indicate that one round has ended, and sends a display close command to the display control device 114. Then, based on receiving the display close command, the display control device 114 ends the round presentation (e.g., round number notification) currently being performed by the third pattern display device 81, and if the jackpot continues, controls to switch to an interval presentation indicating that it is the interval time, and if the jackpot ends, controls to end the jackpot.

Next, in the process of S457, when the large prize opening 65a is closed, i.e., the first round ends, in order to initialize the settings of the right special chance activation flag 203g and the left special chance activation flag 203h, as well as the right special chance activation area solenoid 73b and the left special chance activation area solenoid 74b, the right special chance activation flag 203g and the left special chance activation flag 203h are set to OFF (S457), and the right special chance activation area solenoid 73b and the left special chance activation area solenoid 74b are set to OFF (S458), and the process proceeds to S459.

Next, in the process of S459, since one round of the large prize opening 65a has been consumed, the round counter value is decremented by one (S459), and it is determined whether the round counter value after decrement is greater than "0" (S460). If the round counter value is greater than "0" (S460: Yes), there is still a number of rounds remaining in that large prize opening (the number of times the large prize opening 65a is left open), so an interval time (e.g., "2 seconds") until the next large prize opening 65a is opened is set (S461), this open process (S424) is terminated, and the process returns to the large prize process (see FIG. 26).

On the other hand, in the process of S460, if the round counter value is not greater than "0" (S460: No), i.e., if the round counter value is equal to or less than "0", all opening operations of the big prize opening 65a for this big win have been completed, so in order to end the big win state, the opening process (S424) is terminated and the process of S414 of the big win process (see FIG. 26) is performed.

Returning to FIG. 26, the explanation will continue. After the large prize opening control process (S413) is executed, it is determined whether the round counter value is greater than "0" (S414). In the open process (see FIG. 29) of the large prize opening/closing control process described above, the round counter value is subtracted as the large prize opening 65a is closed (see S459 in FIG. 29). Therefore, if the round counter value is greater than "0" (S510: Yes), S415 is skipped to continue the large prize, and the large prize process (S103) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

On the other hand, if the round counter value is not greater than "0", i.e., if the round counter value is equal to or less than "0" (S414: No), the jackpot end condition is met, so in order to end the jackpot, jackpot end processing is executed (S415), this jackpot processing (S103) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22).

Now, referring to FIG. 30, we will explain the jackpot end process (S415), which is one of the processes of the jackpot process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (S415). As described above, this jackpot end process (S415) executes jackpot end setting control, such as setting the ending time (e.g., "5 seconds"), and setting control of the game state after the jackpot based on the inflow of balls into the right-side variable probability area 73 or the left-side variable probability area 74 during the jackpot.

In this jackpot end process (S415), first, it is determined whether the probability change transition flag 203i is on (S471). If the result of the determination is that the probability change transition flag 203i is on (S471: Yes), the ball has passed through the right probability change area 73 or the left probability change area 74 that has been set validly during this jackpot, and the transition condition to the "probability change state" is established. Therefore, in order to make the game state at the end of the jackpot the "probability change state" until the dynamic display (changing performance) of the special pattern is executed 100 times, the ST counter value is set to "100" (S472), the probability change transition flag 203i is set to off (S473), and the process proceeds to S474.

On the other hand, if the probability change transition flag 203i is not turned on in the processing of S471 (s471: No), the ball did not pass through the right probability change area 73 or the left probability change area 74 that were set validly during this jackpot, so the conditions for transition to the "probability change state" are not met, and the processing of S472 and S473 is skipped and the processing transitions to S474.

In the process of S474, it is determined whether the type of the current jackpot is "Probability Fluctuation A", "Latent Probability Fluctuation C", or "Time-saving C" (S474). If it is determined that the type of the current jackpot is "Probability Fluctuation A", "Latent Probability Fluctuation C", or "Time-saving C" (S474: Yes), the time-saving counter is set to "100" (S475) in order to add a "time-saving function" to the game state after the end of the jackpot until the dynamic display (fluctuation performance) of the special pattern is executed 100 times, and the process proceeds to S477.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S474 that the type of the current jackpot is not "Probability Fluctuation A", "Latent Probability Fluctuation C", or "Time-saving C" (S474: Yes), in other words, if the type of the current jackpot is determined to be "Time-saving A", "Time-saving B", "Latent Probability Fluctuation A", or "Latent Probability Fluctuation B", the time-saving counter value is set to "50" (S476) in order to add a "time-saving function" to the game state after the end of the jackpot until the dynamic display (fluctuation performance) of the special pattern is executed 50 times, and processing proceeds to S477.

Next, in the process of S477, an ending command indicating the start of the ending performance of the jackpot is set to the audio lamp control device 113 (S477). Then, the jackpot end setting process is performed to set the ending time, etc. (S478), and this jackpot end process (S415) is terminated and the process returns to the jackpot process (see FIG. 26). The ending command set in the process of S477 is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in RAM 203, and is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 during the external output process of the timer interrupt process that is executed next (see S101 in FIG. 22).

When the audio and lamp control device 113 receives an ending command, it outputs an audio and controls the lamps to indicate that the jackpot has ended, and sends an ending command for display to the display control device 114. Based on the received ending command for display, the display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an ending effect (for example, an indication of the game state after the jackpot has ended).

In this way, the opening and closing of the big prize opening 65a is controlled during the jackpot process (see FIG. 26), and the opening and closing of the right-side and left-side probability change areas 73 and 74 are controlled, and the valid setting process or invalid setting process of the right-side and left-side probability change areas 73 and 74 is also performed. When the ball passes through the validly set probability change areas 73 and 74, a "probability change state" is generated after the jackpot ends. By configuring in this way, even if the ball passes through each probability change area 73 and 74, if the probability change area 73 and 74 is not internally set to valid, the "probability change state" does not occur after the jackpot ends, so that even if the player visually confirms the ball passing through each probability change area 73 and 74, the occurrence of the "probability change state" after the jackpot ends can be determined. Therefore, even when the "latent probability change performance mode" is being executed, it is possible to create a playability that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 31, we will explain the NMI interrupt processing executed by the main control unit 110 in the event of a power outage or the like. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The NMI interrupt processing is processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like.

By this NMI interrupt processing, the power outage occurrence information is stored in RAM 203. That is, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. When the power outage signal SG1 is input to the NMI terminal, the MPU 201 suspends the control being executed and starts NMI interrupt processing, stores the power outage occurrence information in RAM 203 as the setting of the power outage occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing.

The above-mentioned NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111, and this NMI interrupt processing causes information about the occurrence of a power outage to be stored in the RAM 213. In other words, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control currently being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing.

Next, referring to FIG. 32, the startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 when the power is turned on to the main control unit 110 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (1 second in the first embodiment) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the dispensing control device 111) to become operable (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

Then, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 2) provided on the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S911. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No), it is possible that the process at the time of the previous power outage did not end normally, so in this case too, the process proceeds to S911.

If information about the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (S905: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S907: No), that is, if the calculated RAM judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of the power outage, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case, the process also proceeds to S911.

As will be described in S926 of FIG. 33, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in a working area address of RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not a keyword written in a specified area of RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S911, a payout initialization command is sent to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S911). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the areas (working area) other than the stack area of RAM 213, sets initial values, and becomes ready to start ball payout control. After sending the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (S912, S913).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall opens for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM 203 initialization process (S912, S913) is executed. Similarly, if the power outage occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (S912, S913) is executed. In the RAM 203 initialization process (S912, S913), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to "0" (S912), and then the initial value is set in the RAM 203 (S913). After the RAM 203 initialization process is executed, the process proceeds to S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power outage information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S907: Yes), the power outage information is cleared (S908) while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203. Then, a payout return command upon power recovery is sent to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state when the drive power was cut off (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it is ready to start ball payout control while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S910, the interrupt is permitted (S910). Then, the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 33) described below.

Next, referring to FIG. 33, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned startup processing will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this main processing. This main processing is broadly divided into counter update processing and power-off processing.

In the main process, it is determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the RAM 203 (S921). If information on the occurrence of a power outage is not stored in the RAM 203 (S921: No), the power outage signal SG1 is not output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252, and the power supply is not interrupted. In such a case, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S922, S923).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S922). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (in the first embodiment, "899" and "99"), the counter is cleared to "0". The updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are then stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c areas of the RAM 203. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated in the same manner as in the processing of S107 (see FIG. 22) (S923), and the process proceeds to the processing of S921.

While this main process is being executed, the timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 22 is started and executed at a predetermined time interval (in the first embodiment, "4 milliseconds"). In the timer interrupt process, different processes are executed depending on the state of the game. For example, during a jackpot, the opening and closing of the big prize winning opening 65a is controlled, and if a ball passes through the normal pattern gate 67, display control is performed regarding the variable display of normal patterns by the normal pattern display device 83. In addition, in the jackpot lottery executed when starting dynamic display on the special pattern display device 37, the number of jackpot random numbers to be compared with the acquired jackpot random number counter C1 differs depending on whether the state is high probability or low probability. Therefore, the time required to execute one timer interrupt process changes depending on the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant, but changes depending on the state of the game at each time.

The above-mentioned processes of S922 and S923, which are part of the main process, are executed within the remaining time of this timer interrupt process. In other words, the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is repeatedly executed using this remaining time, so that the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e., the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the initial value of the regular random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated. In particular, by randomly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, it is possible to provide randomness to the update of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the regular random number counter C4, which use these as the initial values for update.

In addition, in the process of S921, if the power interruption information is stored in the RAM 203 (S921: Yes), the power is cut off due to a power outage or power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1, resulting in the execution of the NMI interrupt process in FIG. 31, so the process at the time of power interruption from S924 onwards is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S924), and a power off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113) (S925). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is saved (S926), and access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S927), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and working area backed up in the RAM 203.

The processing of S921 is executed at the end of one cycle of the processing of S922 and S923, which are performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22). As a result, in the main processing of the main control unit 110, various settings by the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) are completed, and the power outage occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when the updating of each counter CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 is completed. Therefore, when recovering from a power-off state, the processing can be started from the processing of S921 after the start-up processing (see FIG. 32) is completed. In other words, the processing can be started from the processing of S921, just as when initialization is performed during the start-up processing.

Therefore, in processing when the power is cut off, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 do not need to be saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer saved; the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value) in the initial setting process (S901), and processing can start from S921. As a result, the control burden on the main control unit 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control unit 110 malfunctioning or going out of control.

In the first embodiment, a case was described in which the processing to be executed periodically is executed by timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22), and in the main processing (see FIG. 33), the updating of each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 is executed during the remaining time of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22). However, it is also possible to configure the processing to be part or all of the processing executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) to be executed every predetermined time (e.g., "4 milliseconds") during the main processing (see FIG. 33). For example, in the first embodiment, some or all of the winning ball count signal, payout abnormality signal reading process (S102), big win process (S103), regular electric control process (S104), switch reading process (S105), start winning process (S108), gate passing process (S109), special chart change process (S110), regular chart change process (S111), and launch control process (S112) that were executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) may be configured to be executed every "4 milliseconds" in the main process (see FIG. 33) instead of in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

In this case, a step may be provided in the main processing (see FIG. 33) to determine whether a predetermined time ("4 milliseconds") has elapsed, and the processing to be performed at the predetermined time is executed only if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, with the updating of each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 being executed regardless of whether the predetermined time has elapsed. In this way, the updating of each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 is executed in the remaining time of the processing to be executed at the predetermined time, but since the time required to execute the processing to be executed at the predetermined time changes depending on the state of the game, even with this configuration, each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 can be updated randomly.

Next, the control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to Figs. 34 to 36. The processes of the MPU 221 can be broadly divided into start-up processes (see Fig. 34) that are started when the power is turned on, and main processes (see Fig. 35) that are executed after the start-up processes.

First, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the startup process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Then, depending on whether the power-off processing in progress flag is on, it is determined whether the current startup process was started during the power-off processing of S1115 (see FIG. 35) due to a momentary voltage drop (momentary power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage") (S1002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 35, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110, it executes the power-off processing of S1115. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off. Therefore, whether the power-off processing of S1115 is in progress can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1002: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the power-off processing of S1115 was completed, or the process was started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been corrupted (S1003).

The confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of RAM 223 by the processing of S1006. Therefore, by checking the data stored in that specific area, if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", data corruption in RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in RAM 223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), the process proceeds to S1004, and initialization of RAM 223 begins. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process proceeds to S1008.

If the current startup process is started after the power supply is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of RAM 223 (because the memory of RAM 223 is lost when the power supply is cut off), so it is determined that the data in RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1003: Yes) and the process proceeds to S1004. On the other hand, if the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the power cut process of S1115 is completed, or if the startup process is started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of RAM 223, so the data in RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1003: No) and the process proceeds to S1008.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S1002: Yes), this startup process was started after a momentary power outage occurred, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset while the power-off processing of S1115 was in progress. In this case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct, since the power-off processing is in progress. Therefore, in this case, control cannot continue, so the process proceeds to S1004 and initialization of the RAM 223 begins.

In the process of S1004, the entire storage area of RAM 223 is checked (S1004). The check method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, then read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of RAM 223 clears all storage areas of RAM 223 to "0".

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all memory areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether data destruction has occurred in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any memory area of the RAM 223 (S1005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1007) and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the abnormality in the RAM 223 may be notified by outputting a sound from the audio output device 226, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third pattern display device 81.

In the process of S1008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1116 is executed (see S1115 in FIG. 35). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1116 is executed, so the process of S1008 will be reached with the power-off flag on if the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the execution of the power-off process of S1116 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (S1009) to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1010), interrupt permission is set (S1011), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, when the power-off flag is off and the process reaches S1008, this occurs because, for example, the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, and so the process went from S1004 to S1006 and then to S1008, or because noise or the like caused only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 to be reset (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1008: No), S1009, which is the process of clearing the working area of RAM 223, is skipped and the process proceeds to S1010, where the initial values of RAM 223 are set (S1010), interrupt permission is set (S1011), and the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1009 is that when the process proceeds from S1004 to S1006 and then to S1008, all storage areas of RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1004, and when only MPU 221 of voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, control of voice lamp control device 113 can be continued by storing the data in the working area of RAM 223 without clearing it.

Next, referring to FIG. 35, we will explain the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the voice lamp control device 113. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this main processing.

When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not "1 millisecond" or more has passed since the last time the process of S1101 was executed (S1101). If "1 millisecond" or more has not passed (S1101: No), the process proceeds to S1110 without executing the processes of S1102 to S1109. The reason for determining whether or not "1 millisecond" has passed in the process of S1101 is that, while S1102 to S1109 do not need to be processed in a short cycle (within "1 millisecond"), the variable performance process of S1110 and the command determination process of S1111 are processes that are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent commands sent from the main control device 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S1110 in a short cycle, it is possible to perform settings related to the variable performance without delay based on the commands received by the command determination process.

If it is determined in the process of S1101 that "1 millisecond" or more has elapsed since the process of S1101 was last executed (S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to S1102. Note that if the process of S1101 is executed for the first time after the start-up process shown in FIG. 34, the process proceeds directly to S1102.

In the process of S1102, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1103 to S1112 are sent to the display control device 114 (S1102). Next, the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set and the output of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1107 described later is set (S1103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1104). The power-on notification process notifies the user that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, "30 seconds") when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. In addition, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify the user that power has been supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1105 without notifying the user by the power-on notification process.

Next, in the process of S1105, a jackpot presentation process is performed to execute the presentation related to the jackpot that is set by the command determination process of S1111 described below (S1105), and the process proceeds to S1106.

Next, in the process of S1106, a frame button input monitoring/effect process is executed (S1106). In this frame button input monitoring/effect process, during the valid period of the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the effect of the effect, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed is monitored, and if input of the frame button 22 is confirmed during the valid period, a corresponding effect is set to be performed.

When the frame button input monitoring and performance process (S1106) is completed, then the lamp editing process is executed (S1107), and then the sound editing and output process is executed (S1108). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81. In the sound editing and output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the settings.

After processing S1108, the LCD performance execution management process is executed (S1109), and processing proceeds to S1110. In the LCD performance execution management process, a time is set that is synchronized with the time required for the variable performance performed by the third pattern display device 81 based on the variable pattern command sent from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1107 is executed based on the time set in this LCD performance execution monitoring process, and the sound editing/output process of S1108 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable performance performed by the third pattern display device 81.

In the processing of S1110, in order to display a variable performance on the third pattern display device 81, a variable performance process is executed, which is a process for starting a variable performance based on the variable pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110. After the variable performance process, a command determination process is executed (S1111) in which processing is performed according to the command received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S1112. Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36.

At S1112, a counter update process is executed to update various counters provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1112). For example, the counters that determine the detailed variation patterns of the variation performance are updated during this counter update process. The counters are updated by incrementing them by one within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, "0 to 99") and resetting them to "0" after they reach the maximum value ("99").

After the processing of S1112 is completed, it is determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1113). Information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored when a power outage command is received from the main control unit 110. If information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the processing of S1113 (S1113: Yes), both the power outage flag and the power outage processing in progress flag are turned on (S1115), and the power outage processing is executed (S1116). After the power outage processing is executed, the power outage processing in progress flag is turned off (S1117), and the processing is then executed in an infinite loop. In the power outage processing, the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. The stored information on the occurrence of a power outage is also erased.

On the other hand, if no information about a power outage has been stored in the process of S1113 (S1113: No), a determination is made as to whether or not RAM 223 has been corrupted based on the keyword stored in RAM 223 (S1114), and if RAM 223 has not been corrupted (S1114: No), the process returns to S1101 and the main process is executed repeatedly. On the other hand, if RAM 223 has been corrupted (S1114: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop the execution of subsequent processes.

If it is determined that the RAM has been destroyed and an infinite loop occurs, the main process is not executed, and the display on the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. This allows the player to know that an abnormality has occurred, and he or she can call a hall attendant or the like and ask for repairs to the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, if it is confirmed that the RAM 223 has been destroyed, the sound output device 226 or lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the player of the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1111). This command determination process (S1111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110 or the display control device 114.

In the command determination process (S1111), first, it is determined whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 110 in the command storage area provided in the RAM 223 (S1201). If the result of the determination is that a command has not been received from the main control unit 110 (S1201: No), this command determination process (S1111) is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 35).

On the other hand, in the processing of S1201, if a command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1201: Yes), the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, and it is determined whether or not a probability change notification command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1202). Then, if it is determined that a probability change notification command has been received (S1202: Yes), a "probability change notification presentation mode" is set to notify the player that the game is in a "probability change state" (S1203).

Here, the "probability change notification display mode" refers to, in the event of a jackpot, displaying on the third pattern display device 81 a notification mode (such as the text display "SUPER LUCKY!") indicating that a "probability change state" will occur after the jackpot, and, in the event of a change display, displaying in text on the third pattern display device 81 that a "probability change state" is occurring, or changing the background color of the third pattern display device 81 to a different background color from normal (such as from blue to red), thereby making the player aware that it is a "probability change state". After that, this command determination process (S1111) is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 35).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if the audio lamp control device 113 does not receive a probability change notification command when the jackpot ends, the "time-shortened notification presentation mode" indicating a "time-shortened state" is executed without fail as a presentation after the jackpot ends. In other words, even if the jackpot is of the "latent probability change A", "latent probability change B" or "latent probability change C" type, the player is not notified that the "probability change state" is in effect, and a presentation equivalent to that of the jackpot type "time-shortened A", "time-shortened B" or "time-shortened C" is executed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1202, if a probability change notification command has not been received from the main control unit 110 (S1202: No), processing according to the other command is executed (S1204), this command determination processing (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 35).

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, two probability change areas (right probability change area 73 and left probability change area 74) are provided within the jackpot opening 65a, and depending on the type of jackpot, one of the opening and closing plates 73a, 74a provided for each probability change area 73, 74 is driven and controlled to open for each round of the jackpot, and the setting of each probability change area 73, 74 is controlled to be switched (internally) between valid and invalid in a state that cannot be recognized by the player. Then, if a ball passes through a probability change area 73, 74 that is set to valid during a jackpot, a "probability change state" is generated after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, even if a ball passes through a probability change area 73, 74 that is set to invalid, a "probability change state" is not generated after the jackpot ends.

By configuring in this way, even if the ball passes through each probability change area 73, 74, if the probability change area 73, 74 is not internally set to be valid, the "probability change state" will not occur after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, even if the player sees the ball passing through each probability change area 73, 74, the occurrence of the "probability change state" after the end of the jackpot is not confirmed. In addition, the "latent probability change performance mode" and the "time-saving notification performance mode" or "normal notification mode" are configured to be equivalent performances. By configuring in this way, even when the "latent probability change performance mode" is being executed, it is made difficult for the player to recognize whether it is a "probability change state", a "time-saving state", or a "normal game state", and it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, if a jackpot type that generates a "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot is won, the ball is configured to be able to pass through the variable probability areas 73, 74 that are set validly in multiple rounds of the jackpot. Therefore, even if the ball cannot pass through the variable probability areas 73, 74 that are set validly in one of the rounds in which the variable probability areas 73, 74 are set validly, it is possible to pass the ball through the variable probability areas 73, 74 that are set validly in the other round. Therefore, even if a sudden trouble (for example, a game abnormality such as a firing abnormality or a player's poor physical condition) prevents the ball from passing through the variable probability areas 73, 74 in one of the rounds that are set validly, by providing the possibility of passing the ball through the variable probability areas 73, 74 that are set validly in the other round that is set valid, the player can enjoy a comfortable game without suffering any disadvantage due to an unforeseen situation.

Furthermore, different probability change areas 73, 74 are configured to be set as valid in multiple rounds during a jackpot. By configuring in this way, even if one of the probability change areas 73, 74 set as valid in one round is in a state where it cannot normally detect the passage of the ball due to an abnormality such as a malfunction, it is possible to generate a "probability change state" by the ball passing through the other probability change area 74, 73 set as valid in another round. Therefore, even if a sudden trouble (e.g., a malfunction, etc.) prevents the ball from passing through the probability change area 73, 74 in one of the valid rounds, by providing the possibility of passing the ball through the probability change area 73, 74 set as valid in the other valid round, the player can enjoy a comfortable game without suffering any disadvantage due to an unforeseen event.

In addition, at the first count of each round, the right special probability area solenoid 73b and the left special probability area solenoid 74b are driven to the extent that balls do not flow in, making it possible to check whether the right special probability area opening/closing plate 73a and the left special probability area opening/closing plate 74a can be opened or not, making it possible to quickly identify situations in which the special probability areas 73, 74 cannot be opened due to an abnormality, etc.

Furthermore, when a jackpot type that generates a "probability variable state" after the end of a jackpot is won, the right-side probability variable region 73 located upstream in the large prize opening 65a is set to be valid in the round in which the probability variable regions 73, 74 are set to be valid, in relation to the multiple rounds in which the probability variable regions 73, 74 are set to be valid. By configuring in this way, even if an abnormality such as ball clogging occurs in the large prize opening 65a, particularly if an abnormality such as ball clogging occurs downstream of the right-side probability variable region 73 and upstream of the left-side probability variable region 74, the right-side probability variable region 73 located upstream of the large prize opening 65a is set to be valid first, and balls can flow into the right-side probability variable region 73, making it easier to grant the right to the "probability variable state" to the player.

Second Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 37 to 41. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, a right-side probability variable area 73 and a left-side probability variable area 74 are provided in the large prize opening 65a of one variable prize device 65, and a "probability variable state" is given after the end of the big win based on the passage of the ball into the valid probability variable areas 73, 74.

However, because the jackpot game is completed by opening or closing the jackpot opening 65a of one variable winning device 65, it is necessary to provide an interval time associated with the closing of the jackpot opening 65a, which means that it takes time to complete the jackpot game, which can drag on and discourage the player. In particular, in situations where a player wins consecutive jackpots within a certain period of time (a so-called winning streak), the player wants to play quickly, and if the interval time between jackpot games takes time in such a situation, the player is likely to lose interest in the game.

In addition, since the granting of the "probability variable state" is determined by a combination of two elements: the opening or closing of the probability variable areas 73, 74 in one variable winning device 65, and the validity or invalidity of the probability variable areas 73, 74, even when a "latent probability variable performance mode" is being executed, there is a risk that the player may be able to predict that the "probability variable state" will be granted by recognizing (inferring) the opening and closing pattern of the probability variable areas 73, 74 and the valid pattern of the probability variable areas 73, 74.

In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment is provided with a second variable winning device 76 in addition to the variable winning device 65, and is configured so that the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 are opened alternately in each round of a predetermined jackpot game ("Probability Variation A", "Time Reduction C" and "Latent Probability Variation C"), and one of the variable winning devices 65, 76 is opened continuously during the predetermined jackpot game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to eliminate the interval time during the predetermined jackpot game, allowing the jackpot game to be played quickly, and since the game does not drag on, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the inside of the variable winning device 65 and the inside of the second variable winning device 76 are connected by a communication passage 77, and a right-side variable winning area 73 and a left-side variable winning area 74 are arranged in the flow path of the connected device. By configuring it in this way, it is not necessary to provide multiple variable winning areas 73, 74 for each of the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 (hereinafter, the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 may be collectively referred to as "variable winning devices 65, 76"), so the number of parts in the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, and manufacturing costs can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the granting of the "probability variable state" is determined by a combination of three elements: the opening or closing of the probability variable areas 73, 74 and the activation or deactivation of the probability variable areas 73, 74, plus the opening or closing of the variable winning devices 65, 76, making it difficult to predict whether the "probability variable state" will be granted. Therefore, even when the "latent probability variable performance mode" is being executed, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess in which game state they are playing, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 are alternately opened without interruption for the types of jackpots that can be won during a so-called consecutive win (i.e., the jackpot types "Probability Variable A", "Time Reduction C" and "Latent Probability Variable C"), realizing the quick play desired by the player during a so-called consecutive win, preventing the player from losing interest in the game and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The following describes the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. In the following description, the same elements as in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and descriptions of those elements are omitted.

First, the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 of the second embodiment as viewed from the front.

As shown in Figure 37, the second variable winning device 76 is provided at a position above the variable winning device 65, and is provided with a second opening/closing plate 76b in the shape of a horizontal rectangle that covers the second large winning opening 76a, a second large winning opening solenoid 76c (see Figure 38) for driving the second opening/closing plate 76b to open and close forward around the lower edge of the second opening/closing plate 76b as an axis, a second large winning opening switch 71a that detects a ball that has entered the second large winning opening 76a, and a communication passage 77 through which the ball detected by the second large winning opening switch 71a flows down.

The second large prize opening switch 71a is embedded in the passageway near the second large prize opening 76a, and 15 prize balls are paid out when the second large prize opening switch 71a detects a ball. In addition, when the second opening/closing plate 76b is opened and 10 balls are detected by the second large prize opening switch 71a, the second opening/closing plate 76b is closed, ending one round.

The communication passage 77 is a passage through which balls that flow into the second large winning opening 76a flow down, and is connected to the guide passage 72 of the variable winning device 65 via a junction 77a. The right-side probability change area 73 and the left-side probability change area 74 are provided downstream of the junction 77a between the guide passage 72 of the variable winning device 65 and the communication passage 77 of the second variable winning device 76, and the discharge passage 75 is provided downstream of the right-side probability change area 73 and the left-side probability change area 74. Therefore, balls that flow into the second large winning opening 76a and flow down the communication passage 77 will pass through the right-side probability change area 73, the left-side probability change area 74, or the discharge passage 75, just like balls that flow into the large winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, after a ball that has flowed into the second large prize opening 76a is detected by the second large prize opening switch 71a, it is configured to take approximately "1.7 seconds" to travel through the connecting passage 77 to reach above the right-side special probability area 73, and after a ball that has flowed into the second large prize opening 76a is detected by the second large prize opening switch 71a, it is configured to take approximately "1.8" seconds to travel through the connecting passage 77 to reach above the left-side special probability area 74. Therefore, a ball detected by the second large prize opening switch 71a is configured to be able to flow into the right-side special probability area 73 or the left-side special probability area 74 within "2 seconds".

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the inside of the variable winning device 65 and the inside of the second variable winning device 76 are connected by a communication passage 77, and the right side probability variable area 73 and the left side probability variable area 74 are arranged in the flow path of the communication destination. By configuring it in this way, there is no need to provide multiple probability variable areas 73, 74 for each variable winning device 65, 76, respectively, so the number of parts in the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, and manufacturing costs can be reduced.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment.

The ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment stores a big prize opening/closing table 202h.

Here, referring to FIG. 39, the large prize opening opening table 202h will be described. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of the large prize opening opening table 202h. In the large prize opening opening table 202h shown in FIG. 39, the variable prize winning device 65 or the second variable prize winning device 76 that is opened for each round for each big win type in each special pattern is shown, and when the variable prize winning device 65 is opened for each round, it is expressed as "down" and when the second variable prize winning device 76 is opened, it is expressed as "up". In addition, in the second embodiment, when one of the variable prize winning devices 65, 76 (for example, the variable prize winning device 65) is opened, the other variable prize winning device 65, 76 (for example, the second variable prize winning device 76) is configured to be closed.

As shown in FIG. 39, the opening and closing pattern "top only" of each variable winning device 65, 76 corresponding to the jackpot types "Time-saving A" and "Latent Probability Variation A" of the first special symbol is configured so that only the second variable winning device 76 is open in all rounds (i.e., rounds 1 to 7), and the variable winning device 65 remains closed during the jackpot play.

Therefore, in the jackpot types "Time-saving A" and "Variable Latent Probability A," the second large prize opening 76a of the second variable prize-winning device 76 is repeatedly opened and closed during the jackpot game, and an interval time is generated during the closure.

In addition, because the opening and closing patterns of the variable winning devices 65, 76 are the same for the jackpot types "Time-saving A" and "Latent Probability Variable A," the jackpot type cannot be determined from the opening and closing patterns of the variable winning devices 65, 76 alone. This makes it difficult (impossible) for the player to know which jackpot type he or she has won, creating a gameplay experience that allows the player to guess which game state they are in, thereby increasing the fun of the game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 39, the opening and closing pattern "bottom only" of each variable winning device 65, 76 corresponding to the jackpot type "time-saving B" and "latent probability fluctuation B" of the first special symbol is configured so that only the variable winning device 65 is open in all rounds (i.e., rounds 1 to 7), and the second variable winning device 76 remains closed during the jackpot play.

Therefore, in the jackpot types "Time-saving B" and "Variable Latent Probability B," the large prize opening 65a of the variable prize-winning device 65 is repeatedly opened and closed during the jackpot game, and an interval time is generated during the closure.

In addition, since the opening and closing patterns of the variable winning devices 65, 76 are the same for the jackpot types "Time-saving B" and "Latent Probability Variable B," the jackpot type cannot be determined based on the opening and closing patterns of the variable winning devices 65, 76 alone. This makes it difficult (impossible) for the player to know which jackpot type he or she has won, creating a gameplay experience that allows the player to guess which game state they are playing in, thereby increasing the fun of the game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 39, the opening and closing pattern "alternate up and down" of each variable winning device 65, 76 corresponding to the jackpot type "Probability Variation A" of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is configured so that only the second variable winning device 76 opens in the odd rounds (i.e., 1st round, 3rd round, 5th round, 7th round, 9th round, 11th round, 13th round, and 15th round), and the variable winning device 65 is closed during the odd rounds.

The "alternate up and down" opening and closing pattern is configured so that only the variable winning device 65 is open in the even rounds (i.e., 2nd round, 4th round, 6th round, 8th round, 10th round, 12th round, and 14th round), and the second variable winning device 76 is closed during the even rounds.

Therefore, in the jackpot type "Probability Variable A", one of the variable winning devices 65, 76 is configured to be opened without interruption. With this configuration, it is possible to eliminate the interval time during the jackpot game, allowing the jackpot game to be played quickly, and since the game does not drag on, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest. In particular, the jackpot type "Probability Variable A" notifies the player that a "probability variable state" will be granted after the jackpot game, and the player hopes that the "probability variable state" will arrive quickly in order to aim for the next jackpot. In this state, the jackpot game can be played quickly, thereby realizing the game that the player expects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 39, the opening and closing pattern "alternate up and down" of each variable winning device 65, 76 corresponding to the jackpot types of the second special symbols "Time-saving C" and "Latent Probability Variation C" is configured so that only the variable winning device 65 opens in the odd rounds (i.e., 1st round, 3rd round, 5th round, 7th round, 9th round, 11th round, 13th round, and 15th round), and the second variable winning device 76 is closed during the odd rounds.

The "alternate bottom-top" opening and closing pattern is configured so that only the second variable winning device 76 is open in the even rounds (i.e., rounds 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 and 14), and the variable winning device 65 is closed during the even rounds.

Therefore, in the jackpot types "Time-saving C" and "Latent Probability Variation C," one of the variable winning devices 65, 76 is configured to open continuously, just like the jackpot type "Probability Variation A." By configuring it in this way, it is possible to eliminate the interval time during the jackpot game, allowing the jackpot game to be played quickly, and the game does not drag on, preventing the player from losing interest.

In addition, since the opening and closing patterns of the variable winning devices 65, 76 are the same for the jackpot types "Time-saving C" and "Latent Probability Variable C," the jackpot type cannot be determined from the opening and closing patterns of the variable winning devices 65, 76 alone. This makes it difficult (impossible) for the player to know which jackpot type he or she has won, creating a gameplay experience that allows the player to guess in which game state they are playing, thereby increasing the fun of the game.

Returning to FIG. 38, the explanation will continue. The input/output port 205 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment is connected to a second large prize opening solenoid 76c provided in the second variable prize winning device 76 for driving the second large prize opening 76a to open and close forward around the lower edge of the second opening/closing plate 76b of the second large prize opening 76a as an axis, and the MPU 201 transmits a control signal via the input/output port 205.

In addition, the input/output port 205 in the second embodiment is connected to a second large prize opening switch 71a that is provided in the second large prize opening 76a and detects a ball that has entered the second large prize opening 76a, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signal output from the second large prize opening switch 71a.

Next, referring to FIG. 40, the ball detection state in each round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C" of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 40 is a timing chart that shows the operation timing of the large prize opening solenoid 65c, the second large prize opening solenoid 76c, the right special probability area solenoid 73b, and the left special probability area solenoid 74b in the first to third rounds of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C" of the second embodiment, the ball detection timing of the large prize opening switch 71, the second large prize opening switch 71a, the right special probability area switch 73d, and the left special probability area switch 74d, and the setting timing of the right special probability effective flag 203g, the left special probability effective flag 203h, and the special probability transition flag 203i.

As described above, in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C", a total of 15 rounds of jackpot games are played, and at the start of an odd-numbered round, the large prize opening solenoid 65c is turned on to open the opening plate 65b, and at the start of an even-numbered round, the second large prize opening solenoid 76c is turned on to open the second opening plate 76b. Then, when a predetermined condition (in the second embodiment, either a maximum of "30 seconds" has elapsed since the opening of each opening plate 65b, 76b (see Max t1 in FIG. 40. Max t1 < "30000 ms"), or 10 balls have been detected by the large prize opening switch 71 or the second large prize opening switch 71a) is met, the opened large prize opening solenoid 65c or the second large prize opening solenoid 76c is turned off to close the opening plate 65b or the second opening plate 76b, and one round ends.

When the first round ends and the jackpot continues, the other variable winning device 76, 65, which is not the first variable winning device 65, 76 that was opened in the previous round, is configured to open immediately after the previously opened variable winning device 65, 76 is closed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to reduce (eliminate) the interval time during a jackpot.

In addition, in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C", the opening and closing pattern of the right side probability change area 73 and the left side probability change area 74 is "Y2", the same as in the jackpot type "time reduction C". Therefore, in the first round, when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot entry switch 71, both the right probability change area solenoid 73b and the left probability change area solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms" (see t2 in FIG. 40. t2 = "60 ms"). This makes it possible to recognize whether the right probability change area solenoid 73b and the left probability change area solenoid 74b can be operated normally.

When the third count ball is detected by the special prize opening switch 71, only the right special prize area solenoid 73b is turned on for 2000 ms (see t3 in FIG. 40. t3 = "2000 ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the right special prize area 73 after being detected by the special prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the second embodiment, "1.5 seconds." See t4 in FIG. 40. t4 < "2000 ms"). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open right special prize area 73, and is detected by the right special prize area switch 73d.

At this time, the valid pattern for the special probability areas 73, 74 of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C" is "B", and the right special probability area 73 in the third round and the left special probability area 74 in the sixth round are set to valid. Therefore, in the first round, both special probability areas 73, 74 are invalid, and the right special probability area valid flag 203g and the left special probability area valid flag 203h are set to off. Therefore, even if the ball passes through the right special probability area 73 in the first round and is detected by the right special probability area switch 73d, the right special probability area 73 is not set to valid, so the special probability transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off.

In addition, in the odd rounds of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C" (i.e., rounds 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, and 15), the drive mode of the right probability fluctuation area solenoid 73b and the left probability fluctuation area solenoid 74b is the same as in the first round (not shown).

Next, in the second round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C", when the second jackpot opening switch 71a detects the first count ball, the right probability change area solenoid 73b and the left probability change area solenoid 74b are both turned on for "60 ms" (see t5 in Figure 40. t5 = "60 ms"), just like in the first round, and it is configured to be possible to recognize whether the right probability change area solenoid 73b and the left probability change area solenoid 74b can be operated normally.

When the second large prize opening switch 71a detects the third count ball, only the left special probability area solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000 ms" (see t6 in FIG. 40. t6 = "2000 ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the left special probability area 74 after being detected by the second large prize opening switch 71a is within "2 seconds" (i.e., "1.8 seconds". See t7 in FIG. 40. t7 < "2000 ms"). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open left special probability area 74, and is detected by the left special probability area switch 74d.

At this time, the valid pattern for the special probability areas 73, 74 of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C" is "B", and in the second round, both special probability areas 73, 74 are invalid, and the right special probability area valid flag 203g and the left special probability area valid flag 203h are set to OFF. Therefore, even if the ball passes through the left special probability area 74 in the second round and is detected by the left special probability area switch 74d, the left special probability area 74 is not set to valid, so the special probability transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains OFF.

In addition, in the even rounds of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C" (i.e., rounds 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, and 14), the drive mode of the right probability fluctuation area solenoid 73b and the left probability fluctuation area solenoid 74b is the same as in the second round (not shown).

Next, in the third round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C", when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot entry switch 71, the right probability change area solenoid 73b and the left probability change area solenoid 74b are both turned on for "60 ms" (see t8 in Figure 40. t8 = "60 ms"), just like in the first and second rounds, and it is configured to recognize whether the right probability change area solenoid 73b and the left probability change area solenoid 74b can be operated normally.

In the third round, when the third count ball is detected by the special prize opening switch 71, only the right special prize area solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000 ms" (see t9 in FIG. 40. t9 = "2000 ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the right special prize area 73 after being detected by the special prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (i.e., "1.5 seconds". See t10 in FIG. 40. t10 < "2000 ms"). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open right special prize area 73, and is detected by the right special prize area switch 73d.

At this time, the valid pattern for the probability change areas 73, 74 of the jackpot type "latent probability change C" is "B", and only the right-side probability change area 73 is valid in the third round, with the right probability change valid flag 203g set to ON and the left probability change valid flag 203h set to OFF. Therefore, in the third round, when the ball passes through the right-side probability change area 73 and is detected by the right probability change area switch 73d, the right-side probability change area 73 is set to valid, and therefore the probability change transition flag 203i is set to ON.

Although not shown, in the sixth round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C", only the left side probability variable area 74 is active, the left probability variable active flag 203h is set to on, and the right probability variable active flag 203g is set to off. Therefore, even if the probability variable transition flag 203i is not on in the third round, the ball can flow into the left side probability variable area 74 located downstream of the right side probability variable area 73 in the sixth round, and when the ball passes through the left side probability variable area 74 and is detected by the left probability variable area switch 74d, the probability variable transition flag 203i is set to on.

Therefore, in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C", when the ball passes through the probability fluctuation area 73, 74 and is detected by the probability fluctuation area switch 73d, 74d, the probability fluctuation area 73, 74 corresponding to the probability fluctuation area switch 73d, 74d that detected the ball in the third and sixth rounds is set to active, so the probability fluctuation transition flag 203i is set to ON. Then, at the end of the jackpot, the "probability fluctuation state" is set by referring to this probability fluctuation transition flag 203i.

In this way, in the second embodiment, the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 are opened alternately in each round of a predetermined jackpot game ("Probability Fluctuation A", "Time Reduction C" and "Latent Probability Fluctuation C"), and one of the variable winning devices 65, 76 is opened continuously during the predetermined jackpot game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to eliminate the interval time during the predetermined jackpot game, allowing the jackpot game to be played quickly, and since the game does not drag on, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest.

In particular, for the types of jackpots that can be won during a winning streak (i.e., jackpot types "Probability Variable A", "Time-saving C" and "Latent Probability Variable C"), the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 are alternately opened without interruption, allowing players during a winning streak to enjoy the game as quickly as they desire, preventing players from losing interest in the game and increasing the fun of the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the granting of the "probability variable state" is determined by a combination of three elements: the opening or closing of the probability variable areas 73, 74 and the activation or deactivation of the probability variable areas 73, 74, plus the opening or closing of the variable winning devices 65, 76, making it difficult to predict whether the "probability variable state" will be granted. Therefore, even when the "latent probability variable performance mode" is being executed, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Furthermore, by shortening the interval time of the variable winning devices 65, 76 and by making the opening pattern and effective pattern of the probability change areas 73, 74 different between "Time-saving C" and "Latent Probability Change C", the time it takes the player to consider which of the variable winning devices 65, 76 is open and which of the probability change areas 73, 74 is active can be shortened, making it difficult to predict that the "probability change state" will be granted. Therefore, even when the "latent probability change performance mode" is being executed, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess in which game state they are playing, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 41, the jackpot processing (S103) of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing the jackpot processing (S103) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the second embodiment. In the jackpot processing (S103) of the second embodiment, at the start of the jackpot, in addition to setting the high probability region opening/closing table 202f (see FIG. 11) and the high probability region effective table 202g (see FIG. 12) according to the type of jackpot, the high probability region opening/closing table 202h (see FIG. 39) is also set.

In the jackpot processing (S103) of the second embodiment, if it is determined that a jackpot has been won (S403: Yes), similar to the jackpot processing of the first embodiment (see FIG. 26), the processing of S404 to S410 is executed, and the round counter is set (S404 to S406), the opening command is set (S407), the opening time is set (S408), the special probability area opening/closing table 202f (see FIG. 11) is set (S409), and the special probability area effective table 202g (see FIG. 12) is set (S410).

Next, the big prize opening opening table 202h (see FIG. 39) is set according to the type of big prize (big prize type) (S501), and the process proceeds to S411. Specifically, as described above, if the big prize type is "time-saving A" or "latency probability fluctuation A", the opening and closing pattern of the variable prize winning devices 65, 76 is set to "upper only", if the big prize type is "time-saving B" or "latency probability fluctuation B", the opening and closing pattern of the variable prize winning devices 65, 76 is set to "lower only", if the big prize type is "probability fluctuation A", the opening and closing pattern of the variable prize winning devices 65, 76 is set to "upper and lower alternating", and if the big prize type is "time-saving C" or "latency probability fluctuation C", the opening and closing pattern of the variable prize winning devices 65, 76 is set to "lower and upper alternating".

As explained above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, in addition to the variable winning device 65, a second variable winning device 76 is provided, and the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 are opened alternately in each round of a predetermined jackpot game ("Probability Variation A", "Time Reduction C" and "Latent Probability Variation C"), so that one of the variable winning devices 65, 76 is opened continuously during the predetermined jackpot game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to eliminate the interval time during the predetermined jackpot game. Therefore, the jackpot game can be played quickly and the game does not drag on, preventing the player from losing interest.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the inside of the variable winning device 65 and the inside of the second variable winning device 76 are connected by a communication passage 77, and a right-side probability variable area 73 and a left-side probability variable area 74 are arranged in the flow path of the communication destination. By configuring it in this way, there is no need to provide multiple probability variable areas 73, 74 for each of the variable winning devices 65, 76, respectively, so the number of parts in the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, and manufacturing costs can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the granting of the "probability variable state" is determined by a combination of three elements: the opening or closing of the probability variable areas 73, 74 and the activation or deactivation of the probability variable areas 73, 74, plus the opening or closing of the variable winning devices 65, 76, making it difficult to predict whether the "probability variable state" will be granted. Therefore, even when the "latent probability variable performance mode" is being executed, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess in which game state they are playing, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, since multiple jackpot types (for example, "Time Reduction C" and "Latent Probability Variation C") have the same opening and closing patterns of the variable winning devices 65, 76, the jackpot type cannot be determined based on the opening and closing patterns of the variable winning devices 65, 76 alone. By configuring it in this way, it is made difficult (impossible) for the player to recognize which jackpot type he has won, creating a gameplay experience that allows the player to guess in which game state he is playing, thereby increasing the fun of the game.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 are alternately opened without interruption for the types of jackpots that can be won during a so-called consecutive win (i.e., the jackpot types "Probability Variable A", "Time Reduction C" and "Latent Probability Variable C"), realizing the quick play desired by the player during a so-called consecutive win, preventing the player from losing interest in the game and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Otherwise, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment has the same configuration as the first embodiment and thus achieves the same effects.

Third Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 42 to 47. In the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, a plurality of variable winning devices 65, 76 are provided, and the variable winning devices 65, 76 share the variable winning areas 73, 74, and the opening and closing patterns and the effective patterns of the variable winning areas 73, 74 are switched in each round of the big win game, thereby controlling whether or not to generate a "probability variable state" after the big win ends.

Here, special probability zones 73 and 74 are provided inside the large prize opening 65a (second special probability zone 76a), and for each of the special probability zones 73 and 74, a right special probability zone opening/closing plate 73a and a left special probability zone opening/closing plate 74a (hereinafter, the right special probability zone opening/closing plate 73a and the left special probability zone opening/closing plate 74a may be collectively referred to as "special probability zone opening/closing plates 73a and 74a") and a right special probability zone solenoid 73b and a left special probability zone solenoid 74b (hereinafter, the right special probability zone solenoid 73b and the left special probability zone solenoid If the right and left special probability area switches 73a, 73b, 73d, 74a, 74b, 74b may be collectively referred to as "special probability area solenoids 73b, 74b") and the right special probability area switch 73d and the left special probability area switch 74d (hereinafter, the right special probability area switch 73d and the left special probability area switch 74d may be collectively referred to as "special probability area switches 73d, 74d") are provided, the above-mentioned components 73a, 73b, 73d, 74a, 74b, 74d must be installed in a small space, which may complicate the design of the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76.

Furthermore, since the above-mentioned parts 73a, 73b, 73d, 74a, 74b, and 74d are provided in addition to the opening/closing plate 65b, the large prize opening solenoid 65c, and the large prize opening switch 71 in the variable prize winning device 65, and the second opening/closing plate 76b, the second large prize opening solenoid 76c, and the second large prize opening switch 71a in the second variable prize winning device 76, the number of parts used in the pachinko machine 10 increases, which may increase manufacturing costs.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, as in the second embodiment, two variable winning devices 65, 76 are provided, and the communication passage 77 of the second variable winning device 76 is connected to the guide passage 72 of the variable winning device 65 via the junction 77a, but the position of the junction 77a is downstream of the right-side special probability area 73 and upstream of the left-side special probability area 74. And, without providing special probability area opening/closing plates 73a, 74a in the special probability areas 73, 74, balls are configured to be able to flow into each special probability area 73, 74 at all times. With this configuration, balls that win the variable winning device 65 will flow into the right-side special probability area 73, and balls that win the second variable winning device 76 will flow into the left-side special probability area 74.

In the case of a jackpot type that grants a "probability fluctuating state" (i.e., "latent probability fluctuating A-C" and "probability fluctuating A"), the ball is made to enter the variable winning devices 65, 76 that correspond to the validly set probability fluctuating areas 73, 74, and the "probability fluctuating state" is granted, whereas in the case of a jackpot type that does not grant a "probability fluctuating state" (i.e., "time-saving A-C"), the ball is made to enter the invalid probability fluctuating areas 73, 74, rather than the validly set probability fluctuating areas 73, 74, so that the "probability fluctuating state" is not granted.

By configuring it in this way, even if the ball passes through each probability variable area 73, 74, if the probability variable area 73, 74 is not internally set to be valid, a "probability variable state" will not occur after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, even if the player sees the ball passing through each probability variable area 73, 74, the occurrence of a "probability variable state" after the end of the jackpot is not confirmed, and there is no need to provide probability variable area opening/closing plates 73a, 74a and probability variable area solenoids 73b, 74b. This makes it possible to easily design the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 with a simple configuration without complicating the design of the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76.

In addition, since there is no need to provide the special probability area opening/closing plates 73a, 74a and the special probability area solenoids 73b, 74b, the number of parts in the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, thereby reducing manufacturing costs.

The following describes the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first and second embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as in the first and second embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and descriptions of those elements are omitted.

First, the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 of the third embodiment as viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 42, the communication passage 77 of the second variable winning device 76 is connected to the guide passage 72 of the variable winning device 65 via a junction 77a, and the junction 77a is located downstream of the right-side variable area 73 and upstream of the left-side variable area 74.

The third embodiment does not have the variable probability area opening/closing plates 73a, 74a and the variable probability area solenoids 73b, 74b as in the second embodiment. Therefore, the ball that reaches the top of each variable probability area 73, 74 is configured to flow into that area.

That is, in the third embodiment, the ball that wins the variable winning device 65 is configured to flow into the right-side variable winning area 73, and the ball that wins the second variable winning device 76 is configured to flow into the left-side variable winning area 74. The variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 are configured to share the discharge passage 75.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment.

The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is not provided with the special probability area opening/closing plates 73a, 74a and the special probability area solenoids 73b, 74b, so the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the third embodiment does not store the special probability area opening/closing table 202f (see FIG. 11) as in the first and second embodiments. On the other hand, as in the second embodiment, the special probability area opening/closing table 202h is stored.

Here, referring to FIG. 44, the large prize opening opening table 202h of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an example of the large prize opening opening table 202h of the third embodiment. In the large prize opening opening table 202h shown in FIG. 44, for each large prize type in each special pattern, the variable prize winning device 65 or the second variable prize winning device 76 that is opened for each round is shown, and when the variable prize winning device 65 is opened for each round, it is expressed as "down" and when the second variable prize winning device 76 is opened, it is expressed as "up". In addition, in the third embodiment, when one of the variable prize winning devices 65, 76 (for example, the variable prize winning device 65) is opened, the other variable prize winning device 65, 76 (for example, the second variable prize winning device 76) is configured to be closed.

As shown in FIG. 44, in the third embodiment, the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 are configured to alternately open and close for all jackpot types. Specifically, the opening and closing pattern "alternate bottom and top" of each variable winning device 65, 76 corresponding to the jackpot types "time-saving A" and "latency probability fluctuation A" of the first special symbol, and "time-saving C" and "latency probability fluctuation C" of the second special symbol is configured so that only the variable winning device 65 opens in the odd rounds (i.e., 1st round, 3rd round, 5th round, 7th round, 9th round, 11th round, 13th round, and 15th round), and the second variable winning device 76 is closed during the odd rounds.

The "alternate bottom-top" opening and closing pattern is configured so that only the second variable winning device 76 is open in the even rounds (i.e., rounds 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 and 14), and the variable winning device 65 is closed during the even rounds.

Next, the opening and closing pattern "alternate up and down" of each variable winning device 65, 76 corresponding to the jackpot types "Time-saving B", "Latent Probability Fluctuation B" and "Probability Fluctuation A" of the first or second special symbol is configured so that only the second variable winning device 76 opens in the odd rounds (i.e., 1st round, 3rd round, 5th round, 7th round, 9th round, 11th round, 13th round and 15th round), and the variable winning device 65 is closed during the odd rounds.

The "alternate up and down" opening and closing pattern is configured so that only the variable winning device 65 is open in the even rounds (i.e., 2nd round, 4th round, 6th round, 8th round, 10th round, 12th round, and 14th round), and the second variable winning device 76 is closed during the even rounds.

Therefore, in all jackpot types in the third embodiment, one of the variable winning devices 65, 76 is configured to open continuously. By configuring in this way, it is possible to eliminate the interval time during the jackpot game, and the jackpot game can be played quickly, and the game does not drag on, preventing the player from losing interest.

In addition, since the opening and closing patterns of the variable winning devices 65, 76 are the same for the jackpot types "Time-saving A" and "Latent Probability Variation A," "Time-saving B" and "Latent Probability Variation B," or "Time-saving C" and "Latent Probability Variation C," it is made difficult (impossible) for the player to recognize which jackpot type he or she has won by making it impossible to distinguish the jackpot type from the opening and closing pattern of the variable winning devices 65, 76 alone. This creates a gameplay experience that allows the player to guess in which game state they are playing, thereby increasing the fun of the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 45, the jackpot processing (S103) of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing the jackpot processing (S103) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the third embodiment. In the jackpot processing (S103) of the third embodiment, at the start of the jackpot, the special probability area effective table 202g (see FIG. 12) and the special probability area opening/closing table 202h (see FIG. 44) are set according to the type of jackpot, and the special probability area opening/closing table 202f as in the second embodiment is not set.

In the jackpot process (S103) of the third embodiment, if it is determined that a jackpot has been won (S403: Yes), similar to the jackpot process of the first and second embodiments (see FIG. 26), the process of S404 to S408 is executed, and the round counter is set (S404 to S406), the opening command is set (S407), and the opening time is set (S408).

Then, instead of setting the high probability region opening/closing table 202f (see FIG. 11) as in the first and second embodiments, the high probability region effective table 202g (see FIG. 12) is set (S410).

Next, the large prize opening opening table 202h (see FIG. 44) is set according to the type of the large prize (large prize type) (S501), and the process proceeds to S411. Specifically, as described above, if the large prize type is "Time-saving A", "Latent probability fluctuation A", "Time-saving C" or "Latent probability fluctuation C", the opening and closing pattern of the variable prize-winning devices 65, 76 is set to "Alternate up and down", and if the large prize type is "Time-saving B", "Latent probability fluctuation B" or "Probability fluctuation A", the opening and closing pattern of the variable prize-winning devices 65, 76 is set to "Alternate up and down".

Next, referring to FIG. 46, the opening setting process (S422) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing the opening setting process (S422) of the third embodiment. In the opening setting process (S422) of the third embodiment, the opening setting of either the variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 76 is performed by referring to the big prize opening opening table 202h (see FIG. 44) set at the start of the big win.

In the opening setting process (S422) of the third embodiment, first, since it is the timing to open the large prize opening 65a or the second large prize opening 76a, the opening setting of the variable prize opening device 65 or the second variable prize opening 76 is performed based on the set large prize opening opening table 202h in order to open either the large prize opening 65a or the second large prize opening 76a (S511), and the process proceeds to S432. By performing this opening setting, either the large prize opening solenoid 65c or the second large prize opening solenoid 76c is driven, and the opening/closing plate 65b or the second opening/closing plate 76b corresponding to the driven solenoid 65c, 76c is opened, allowing balls to flow into the large prize opening 65a or the second large prize opening 76a.

Next, the opening process (S424) of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing the opening process (S424) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the third embodiment. In the opening process (S424) of the third embodiment, the special bonus area opening/closing plates 73a, 74a are not provided, so when the large prize opening switch 71 or the second large prize opening switch 71a is detected, the process of checking the count number is not required, and the control burden can be reduced.

In the third embodiment, during opening process (S424), if it is determined in the process of S446 that the opening time of either of the large prize openings 65a, 76a has not elapsed (S446: No), it is then determined whether or not a ball has entered the large prize opening 65a and the large prize opening switch 71 has been turned on, or whether or not a ball has entered the second large prize opening 76a and the second large prize opening switch 71a has been turned on (S515).

In the process of S515, if the large prize opening switch 71 or the second large prize opening switch 71a is turned on (S515: Yes), a ball has entered the large prize opening 65a or the second large prize opening 76a, so the prize counter value is decremented by 1 (S449), and then it is determined whether the prize counter value decremented by 1 is greater than "0" (S454). If the prize counter value is not greater than "0" (S454: No), that is, if the prize counter value is "0" or less, 10 balls have entered the large prize opening 65a or the second large prize opening 76a, and the closing condition for the large prize opening 65a or the second large prize opening 76a is met, so the process proceeds to S455 to close the large prize opening 65a or the second large prize opening 76a.

As described above, according to the third embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, two variable winning devices 65, 76 are provided, and the communication passage 77 of the second variable winning device 76 is connected to the guide passage 72 of the variable winning device 65 via the junction 77a, but the position of the junction 77a is downstream of the right-side probability variable area 73 and upstream of the left-side probability variable area 74. And, without providing probability variable area opening and closing plates 73a, 74a in the probability variable areas 73, 74, balls are configured to be able to flow into each probability variable area 73, 74 at all times. By configuring in this way, balls that have won the variable winning device 65 will flow into the right-side probability variable area 73, and balls that have won the second variable winning device 76 will flow into the left-side probability variable area 74. In the case of a jackpot type that imparts a "probability-changing state" (i.e., "latent probability-changing A-C" and "probability-changing A"), the ball is made to enter the variable winning device 65, 76 corresponding to the validly set probability-changing area 73, 74, and the "probability-changing state" is imparted by passing the ball through the validly set probability-changing area 73, 74. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot type that does not impart a "probability-changing state" (i.e., "time-saving A-C"), the ball is made to enter the variable winning device 65, 76 corresponding to the invalidly set probability-changing area 73, 74, not the validly set probability-changing area 73, 74, and the ball is not made to pass through the validly set probability-changing area 73, 74, but is made to pass through the invalidly set probability-changing area 73, 74, so that the "probability-changing state" is not imparted.

By configuring it in this way, even if the ball passes through each probability variable area 73, 74, if the probability variable area 73, 74 is not internally set to be valid, a "probability variable state" will not occur after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, even if the player sees the ball passing through each probability variable area 73, 74, it is possible to ensure that a "probability variable state" will not occur after the end of the jackpot, and there is no need to provide probability variable area opening/closing plates 73a, 74a and probability variable area solenoids 73b, 74b. As a result, the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 can be easily designed with a simple configuration without complicating the design of the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76.

In addition, according to the third embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, there is no need to provide the special probability area opening and closing plates 73a, 74a and the special probability area solenoids 73b, 74b, which reduces the number of parts in the pachinko machine 10 and reduces manufacturing costs.

Furthermore, according to the third embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, since the special probability area opening/closing plates 73a, 74a are not provided, when the special probability area opening/closing plate 73a, 74a is detected, the process of checking the count number is not required, and the control burden can be reduced.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment has the same configuration as the first or second embodiment and thus achieves the same effects.

Fourth Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 48 to 52. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, a right-side probability variable area 73 and a left-side probability variable area 74 are provided in the large prize opening 65a of one variable prize device 65, and a "probability variable state" is given after the end of the big win based on the passage of the ball into the valid probability variable areas 73, 74.

Here, if special prize areas 73, 74 are provided inside the large prize opening 65a, and multiple drive mechanisms are provided for each special prize area 73, 74, each of which includes special prize area opening/closing plates 73a, 74a and special prize area solenoids 73b, 74b that drive the special prize area opening/closing plates 73a, 74a to open and close, each of the components 73a, 73b, 74a, 74b must be installed in a small space, which may complicate the design of the variable prize device 65.

Furthermore, since the above-mentioned parts 73a, 73b, 74a, and 74b are provided in addition to the opening/closing plate 65b, the large prize opening solenoid 65c, and the large prize opening switch 71 in the variable prize device 65, the number of parts used in the pachinko machine 10 increases, which may increase manufacturing costs.

Furthermore, since multiple drive mechanisms are arranged in the variable probability areas 73 and 74, maintenance work will be required for each drive mechanism, which may increase the amount of maintenance work required.

In addition, if multiple drive mechanisms are used to open and close each of the variable probability areas 73, 74, for example, a malfunction or the like may cause both variable probability areas 73, 74 to remain open or both variable probability areas 73, 74 to remain closed, which could destroy the gameplay that provides a "probability-changing state" after a jackpot ends based on the ball passing through the valid variable probability areas 73, 74.

In contrast, in the fourth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, the right side probability change area 73 and the left side probability change area 74 can be closed simultaneously by a single drive mechanism consisting of a probability change area opening/closing motor 78a, a drive gear 78b, and a probability change area opening/closing plate 78c, and the probability change area opening/closing motor 78a is driven in the forward or reverse direction to allow the probability change area opening/closing plate 78c to slide in a direction parallel to the guide passage 72.

Specifically, when the motor 78a for opening and closing the special probability area is driven in the forward direction, the special probability area opening and closing plate 78c slides downstream of the guide passage 72, opening the right special probability area 73 and allowing the ball to flow into the right special probability area 73. On the other hand, when the motor 78a for opening and closing the special probability area is driven in the reverse direction, the special probability area opening and closing plate 78c slides upstream of the guide passage 72, opening the left special probability area 74 and allowing the ball to flow into the left special probability area 74.

By configuring it in this way, two probability change areas (right probability change area 73 and left probability change area 74) are provided within the big prize opening 65a, and depending on the type of big prize, the probability change area opening and closing motor 78a is driven in forward or reverse for each round of the big prize to allow the ball to flow into one of the probability change areas 73, 74, and the setting of each probability change area 73, 74 is controlled to be switched (internally) between valid and invalid in a manner that is not recognizable to the player. Then, if a ball passes through a probability change area 73, 74 that is set to valid during a big prize, a "probability change state" is generated after the big prize ends. On the other hand, even if a ball passes through a probability change area 73, 74 that is set to invalid, a "probability change state" is not generated after the big prize ends.

By configuring it in this way, the opening and closing of the variable probability areas 73, 74 can be achieved with a single drive mechanism 78, so the overall configuration of the variable prize-winning device 65 can be simplified and easily designed without complicating the design of the variable prize-winning device 65.

In addition, because the probability change areas 73, 74 are opened, closed, or set by a single drive mechanism 78, and there is no need to open or close the probability change areas 73, 74 by multiple drive mechanisms, the number of parts in the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, and manufacturing costs can be reduced.

Furthermore, because the variable probability areas 73 and 74 are opened, closed, or closed by a single drive mechanism 78, maintenance work only needs to be performed on the single drive mechanism 78, reducing the amount of maintenance work required.

In addition, by opening and closing the variable probability areas 73, 74 with the driving mechanism 78, one, when one variable probability area 73, 74 is opened, the other variable probability area 74, 73 is always closed. This prevents the occurrence of an event that would destroy the gameplay of granting a "probability fluctuation state" after the end of a jackpot based on the ball passing through the valid variable probability areas 73, 74 due to a malfunction or the like, thereby realizing an innovative gameplay.

The following describes the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first to third embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to third embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and descriptions of those elements are omitted.

First, the variable prize-winning device 65 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable prize-winning device 65 of the fourth embodiment as seen from the front.

As shown in FIG. 48(a), in the fourth embodiment, one drive mechanism 78 is provided between the right-side variable area 73 and the left-side variable area 74 provided in the guide passage 72 of the variable winning device 65.

The drive mechanism 78 includes a motor 78a (see FIG. 49) for opening and closing the special probability area, which is built into the wall between the right special probability area 73 and the left special probability area 74 in the depth direction as viewed from the front, a drive gear 78b that is driven to rotate by the motor 78a for opening and closing the special probability area, and a plate 78c for opening and closing the special probability area that is provided with a transmission gear that meshes with the drive gear 78b.

The variable probability area opening and closing motor 78a (see FIG. 49) is composed of a stepping motor that can be driven in forward (counterclockwise) and reverse (clockwise) rotation. Therefore, when the variable probability area opening and closing motor 78a is driven in forward rotation, the drive gear 78b is also driven to rotate counterclockwise, and when it is driven in reverse, the drive gear 78b is also driven to rotate clockwise.

The drive gear 78b is connected to the motor 78a for opening and closing the special probability area, and the drive gear 78b is also rotated as the motor 78a for opening and closing the special probability area is driven. This drive gear 78b is meshed with a transmission gear provided on the underside of the special probability area opening and closing plate 78c, which will be described later.

In the initial state, the right side of the special chance area opening/closing plate 78c closes the right side special chance area 73, and the left side of the special chance area opening/closing plate 78c closes the left side special chance area 74. This special chance area opening/closing plate 78c is arranged so that its upper surface is flush with the bottom surface (the ball rolling surface) of the guide passage 72. In addition, a transmission gear that meshes with the drive gear 78b is provided on the lower surface of the special chance area opening/closing plate 78c, and this special chance area opening/closing plate 78c is configured to be able to slide as the drive gear 78b rotates.

In the fourth embodiment, when the motor 78a for opening and closing the special probability area is driven in the forward direction (counterclockwise) and the drive gear 78b is driven to rotate counterclockwise, the special probability area opening and closing plate 78c meshed with the drive gear 78b slides downstream of the guide passage 72, opening the right special probability area 73. On the other hand, when the motor 78a for opening and closing the special probability area is driven in the reverse direction (clockwise) and the drive gear 78b is driven to rotate clockwise, the special probability area opening and closing plate 78c meshed with the drive gear 78b slides upstream of the guide passage 72, opening the left special probability area 74.

Here, referring to Fig. 48(b) to Fig. 48(d), the inflow pattern of the balls flowing down the guide passage 72 will be described. Fig. 48(b) is a schematic enlarged cross-sectional view for explaining the behavior of the balls flowing down the guide passage 72 when the special rate area opening/closing plate 78c is slid downstream, the right special rate area 73 is open, and the left special rate area 74 is closed. Fig. 48(c) is a schematic enlarged cross-sectional view for explaining the behavior of the balls flowing down the guide passage 72 when the special rate area opening/closing plate 78c is slid upstream, the left special rate area 74 is open, and the right special rate area 73 is closed. Fig. 48(d) is a schematic enlarged cross-sectional view for explaining the behavior of the balls flowing down the guide passage 72 when the special rate area opening/closing plate 78c is in the initial state, and both the right special rate area 73 and the left special rate area 74 are closed.

As shown in FIG. 48(b), when a special game state occurs due to a big win, the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 is opened, allowing the ball to flow into the big winning port 65a. When the special winning area opening/closing plate 78c is slid downstream and the right special winning area 73 is open, the ball that flows into the big winning port 65a is first detected by the big winning port switch 71, and then flows down the guide passage 72. Since the special winning area opening/closing plate 78c is slid downstream by the special winning area opening/closing motor 78a (see FIG. 49), the right special winning area 73 is opened, and the ball flows into the right special winning area passage 73c. After that, the ball is detected by the right special winning area switch 73d embedded in the right special winning area passage 73c. The ball detected by the right special winning area switch 73d is discharged outside the variable winning device 65 (to the back side of the game board 13) through a discharge path (not shown).

Next, as shown in FIG. 48(c), when the special-variable-area opening/closing plate 78c is slid upstream and the left special-variable-area 74 is open, the ball that has flowed into the special-variable-area opening 65a is first detected by the special-variable-area opening switch 71, and then flows down the guide passage 72. Then, it rolls on the top surface of the special-variable-area opening/closing plate 78c that closes the right special-variable-area 73, and since the special-variable-area opening/closing plate 78c is slid upstream by the special-variable-area opening/closing motor 78a (see FIG. 49), the left special-variable-area 74 is opened, and the ball flows into the left special-variable-area passage 74c. After that, the ball is detected by the left special-variable-area switch 74d embedded in the left special-variable-area passage 74c. The ball detected by the left special-variable-area switch 74d is discharged outside the variable-variable-area device 65 (to the back side of the game board 13) through a discharge path (not shown).

Next, as shown in FIG. 48(d), when the special-variable-area opening/closing plate 78c is in the initial position and both the right-side special-variable-area 73 and the left-side special-variable-area 74 are closed, the ball that flows into the special-variable-area opening 65a is first detected by the special-variable-area opening switch 71, and then flows down the guide passage 72. It then rolls on the top surface of the special-variable-area opening/closing plate 78c, passes above the right-side special-variable-area 73 and the left-side special-variable-area 74, and is discharged from the discharge passage 75 provided downstream to the outside of the variable-variable-area device 65 (to the rear side of the game board 13).

By configuring in this way, the opening or closing of the variable probability areas 73, 74 can be realized with one drive mechanism 78, so the entire configuration of the variable probability area 65 can be simplified and easily designed without complicating the design of the variable probability area 65. In addition, the opening and closing of the variable probability area 73, 74 is performed with one drive mechanism 78, and there is no need to open or close the variable probability area 73, 74 with multiple drive mechanisms, so the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced and manufacturing costs can be reduced. Furthermore, since the variable probability area 73, 74 is opened or closed with one drive mechanism 78, maintenance work only needs to be performed on the one drive mechanism 78, and maintenance labor can be reduced. In addition, by opening and closing the variable probability area 73, 74 with one drive mechanism 78, when one variable probability area 73, 74 is opened, the other variable probability area 74, 73 can be closed without fail. This prevents the occurrence of an event that would destroy the gameplay, such as when both probability variable areas 73, 74 are opened due to a malfunction or the like, and a "probability variable state" is granted after the end of a jackpot based on the ball passing through the valid probability variable areas 73, 74, thereby realizing innovative gameplay.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment.

The ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment stores a probability change area opening/closing table 202f for setting the drive pattern of the probability change area opening/closing motor 78a.

The input/output port 205 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment is connected to a motor 78a for opening and closing the special probability area for sliding the opening and closing plate 78c, and the MPU 201 transmits a control signal via the input/output port 205. In the fourth embodiment, the special probability area opening and closing table 202f set based on the type of big win is referenced at the start of each round, and the motor 78a for opening and closing the special probability area is driven forward or reverse to open one of the special probability areas 73, 74. Then, when a predetermined time (6000 ms in the fourth embodiment) has elapsed since the motor 78a was driven forward or reverse, the motor 78a for opening and closing the special probability area is returned to its initial position, and both the special probability areas 73, 74 are closed.

Now, referring to FIG. 50, the opening and closing patterns of each of the probability change areas 73, 74 for each type of jackpot will be described. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an example of the probability change area opening and closing table 202f of the fourth embodiment. The probability change area opening and closing table 202f shown in FIG. 50 shows the driving pattern of the probability change area opening and closing motor 78a for each type of jackpot for each special pattern, and when the probability change area opening and closing motor 78a is driven forward (counterclockwise) for each round and the right side probability change area 73 is opened, it is expressed as "positive", and when the probability change area opening and closing motor 78a is driven reversely (clockwise) and the left side probability change area 74 is opened, it is expressed as "negative". Note that in the fourth embodiment, when one of the probability change areas 73, 74 (for example, the right side probability change area 73) is opened, the other probability change area 74, 73 (for example, the left side probability change area 74) is always closed.

As shown in FIG. 50, the opening and closing pattern "X3" of each probability change area 73, 74 corresponding to the jackpot types "Time-saving A" and "Latent Probability Fluctuation A", which are jackpots of up to 7 rounds of the first special pattern, is such that in odd-numbered rounds (i.e., 1st round, 3rd round, 5th round, and 7th round), the probability change area opening and closing motor 78a rotates forward and the probability change area opening and closing plate 78c slides downstream, opening the right-side probability change area 73, allowing the ball to pass through the right-side probability change area 73, and the left-side probability change area 74 is closed by the probability change area opening and closing plate 78c, making it impossible for the ball to pass through the left-side probability change area 74.

In addition, in the opening and closing pattern "X3", in even rounds (i.e., 2nd, 4th, and 6th rounds), the special chance area opening and closing motor 78a rotates in the reverse direction, causing the special chance area opening and closing plate 78c to slide upstream, opening the left special chance area 74, allowing the ball to pass through the left special chance area 74, while the right special chance area 73 is closed by the special chance area opening and closing plate 78c, making it impossible for the ball to pass through the right special chance area 73.

In other words, in the opening and closing pattern "X3", the ball can pass through the right side special probability area 73 in the first round of the jackpot, and the ball can pass through the left side special probability area 74 in the next round (i.e., the second round), and thereafter, the ball can pass through either the right side special probability area 73 or the left side special probability area 74 alternately each round until the end of the jackpot (i.e., the end of the seventh round). Therefore, the number of rounds that can be passed through to the right side special probability area 73 is "4", and the number of rounds that can be passed through to the left side special probability area 74 is "3".

Next, as shown in FIG. 50, the opening and closing pattern "X4" of each probability variable area 73, 74 corresponding to the jackpot types "Time-saving B" and "Latent Probability Fluctuation B", which are jackpots of up to 7 rounds of the first special pattern, is such that in odd-numbered rounds (i.e., 1st round, 3rd round, 5th round, and 7th round), the probability variable area opening and closing motor 78a rotates in the reverse direction, causing the probability variable area opening and closing plate 78c to slide upstream, opening the left-hand probability variable area 74, allowing the ball to pass through the left-hand probability variable area 74, and the right-hand probability variable area 73 is closed by the probability variable area opening and closing plate 78c, making it impossible for the ball to pass through the right-hand probability variable area 73.

In addition, in the opening and closing pattern "X4", in even rounds (i.e., 2nd, 4th, and 6th rounds), the special chance area opening and closing motor 78a rotates forward, causing the special chance area opening and closing plate 78c to slide downstream, opening the right side special chance area 73, allowing the ball to pass through the right side special chance area 73, while the left side special chance area 74 is closed by the special chance area opening and closing plate 78c, making it impossible for the ball to pass through the left side special chance area 74.

In other words, in the opening and closing pattern "X4", the ball can pass through the left side special probability area 74 in the first round of the jackpot, and the ball can pass through the right side special probability area 73 in the next round (i.e., the second round), and thereafter, the ball can pass through either the left side special probability area 74 or the right side special probability area 73 alternately each round until the end of the jackpot (i.e., the end of the seventh round). Therefore, the number of rounds that can be passed through to the left side special probability area 74 is "4", and the number of rounds that can be passed through to the right side special probability area 73 is "3".

Next, as shown in FIG. 50, the opening and closing pattern "Y3" of each probability change area 73, 74 corresponding to the jackpot type "probability change A", which is a maximum of 15 rounds of jackpots for the first and second special symbols, is such that in odd rounds (i.e., 1st round, 3rd round, 5th round, 7th round, 9th round, 11th round, 13th round, and 15th round), the probability change area opening and closing motor 78a rotates in the reverse direction, causing the probability change area opening and closing plate 78c to slide upstream, opening the left side probability change area 74, allowing the ball to pass through the left side probability change area 74, and the right side probability change area 73 is closed by the probability change area opening and closing plate 78c, making it impossible for the ball to pass through the right side probability change area 73.

In addition, in the opening and closing pattern "Y3", in even rounds (i.e., 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, 12th and 14th rounds), the special chance area opening and closing motor 78a rotates forward, causing the special chance area opening and closing plate 78c to slide downstream, opening the right side special chance area 73, allowing the ball to pass through the right side special chance area 73, and closing the left side special chance area 74 by the special chance area opening and closing plate 78c, making it impossible for the ball to pass through the left side special chance area 74.

In other words, in the opening and closing pattern "Y3", the ball can pass through the left side special probability area 74 in the first round of the jackpot, and the ball can pass through the right side special probability area 73 in the next round (i.e., the second round), and thereafter, the ball can pass through the left side special probability area 74 or the right side special probability area 73 alternately each round until the end of the jackpot (i.e., the end of the 15th round). Therefore, the number of rounds that can be passed through to the left side special probability area 74 is "8", and the number of rounds that can be passed through to the right side special probability area 73 is "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 50, the opening and closing pattern "Y4" of each probability change area 73, 74 corresponding to the jackpot types "Time-saving C" and "Latent Probability Fluctuation C", which are maximum 15 rounds of the second special pattern, is such that in odd rounds (i.e., 1st round, 3rd round, 5th round, 7th round, 9th round, 11th round, 13th round, and 15th round), the probability change area opening and closing motor 78a rotates forward and the probability change area opening and closing plate 78c slides downstream, opening the right-side probability change area 73, allowing the ball to pass through the right-side probability change area 73, and the left-side probability change area 74 is closed by the probability change area opening and closing plate 78c, making it impossible for the ball to pass through the left-side probability change area 74.

In addition, in the opening and closing pattern "Y4", in even rounds (i.e., 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, 12th and 14th rounds), the special chance area opening and closing motor 78a rotates in the reverse direction, causing the special chance area opening and closing plate 78c to slide upstream, opening the left special chance area 74, allowing the ball to pass through the left special chance area 74, and closing the right special chance area 73 with the special chance area opening and closing plate 78c, making it impossible for the ball to pass through the right special chance area 73.

In other words, in the opening and closing pattern "Y4", the ball can pass through the right-side special probability area 73 in the first round of the jackpot, and the ball can pass through the left-side special probability area 74 in the next round (i.e., the second round), and thereafter, the ball can pass through either the right-side special probability area 73 or the left-side special probability area 74 alternately each round until the end of the jackpot (i.e., the end of the 15th round). Therefore, the number of rounds that can be passed through to the right-side special probability area 73 is "8", and the number of rounds that can be passed through to the left-side special probability area 74 is "7".

In this way, by providing jackpot types in which the opening and closing patterns of the probability variable areas 73, 74 in accordance with the drive pattern of the probability variable area opening and closing motor 78a are equivalent (i.e., jackpot types "time-saving A" and "latent probability fluctuation A", jackpot types "time-saving B" and "latent probability fluctuation B", and jackpot types "time-saving C" and "latent probability fluctuation C") and making it impossible to determine the jackpot type based on the opening and closing pattern of each probability variable area 73, 74 alone, it is made difficult (impossible) for the player to recognize which jackpot type he or she has won, creating a gameplay experience that allows the player to guess in which game state they are playing, thereby increasing the fun of the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 51, the opening setting process (S422) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing the opening setting process (S422) of the fourth embodiment. In the opening setting process (S422) of the fourth embodiment, the high probability region opening/closing motor 78a is driven in the forward or reverse direction by referring to the high probability region opening/closing table 202f (see FIG. 50) set at the start of the jackpot.

In the opening setting process (S422) of the fourth embodiment, like the opening setting process (S422) of the first embodiment, the processes of S431 to S434 are carried out to set the opening of the large prize opening (S431), set the prize counter to "10" (S432), set the opening time (S433), and set the opening command (S434).

Next, depending on the type of jackpot (jackpot type), the motor 78a for opening and closing the special probability area is driven in forward or reverse rotation (S521) based on the special probability area opening and closing table 202f (see FIG. 50) that was set at the start of the jackpot, opening one of the special probability areas 73, 74 and closing the other special probability area 74, 73, and the process proceeds to S436.

Next, the open process (S424) of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing the open process (S424) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the fourth embodiment. In the open process (S424) of the fourth embodiment, it is determined whether a predetermined time (6000 ms in the fourth embodiment) has elapsed since the drive of the special rate area opening and closing motor 78a was started, and if the predetermined time has elapsed, the special rate area opening and closing motor 78a is returned to its initial position, and both special rate areas 73 and 74 are closed.

In the fourth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, during the open process (S424), first, the processes of S441 to S445 are carried out, and the special chance transition flag 203i is set based on the passage of the ball into the special chance areas 73 and 74, and the process proceeds to S531.

In the process of S531, it is determined whether or not "6000 ms" have passed since the motor 78a for opening and closing the special probability area started to operate by S521 of the opening setting process described above (see FIG. 51) (S531). If the result of the determination is that "6000 ms" have passed since the motor 78a for opening and closing the special probability area started to operate (S531: Yes), the motor 78a for opening and closing the special probability area is returned to its initial position (S532), both special probability areas 73 and 74 are closed, and the process proceeds to S446. On the other hand, if "6000 ms" have not passed since the motor 78a for opening and closing the special probability area started to operate (S531: No), the process of S532 is skipped and the process proceeds to S446.

As described above, according to the fourth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, the right-side and left-side probability change areas 73 and 74 can be closed simultaneously by one drive mechanism consisting of the probability change area opening/closing motor 78a and the probability change area opening/closing plate 78c, and the probability change area opening/closing plate 78c can be slid in a direction parallel to the guide passage 72 by driving the probability change area opening/closing motor 78a in the forward or reverse direction. In addition, two probability change areas (the right-side and left-side probability change areas 73 and 74) are provided in the big prize opening port 65a, and the probability change area opening/closing motor 78a is driven in the forward or reverse direction for each round of the big win according to the type of big win, so that the ball flows into one of the probability change areas 73 and 74, and the settings of each probability change area 73 and 74 are controlled to be switched (internally) in a state that cannot be recognized by the player. Then, when a ball passes through the probability change area 73 or 74 that is set to be valid during the big win, a "probability change state" is generated after the big win ends. On the other hand, even if the ball passes through the invalidated probability change areas 73 and 74, the system is configured not to generate a "probability change state" after the big win ends.

By configuring it in this way, the opening and closing of the variable probability areas 73, 74 can be achieved with a single drive mechanism 78, so the overall configuration of the variable prize-winning device 65 can be simplified and easily designed without complicating the design of the variable prize-winning device 65.

In addition, because the probability change areas 73, 74 are opened, closed, or set by a single drive mechanism 78, and there is no need to open or close the probability change areas 73, 74 by multiple drive mechanisms, the number of parts in the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, and manufacturing costs can be reduced.

Furthermore, because the variable probability areas 73, 74 are opened, closed, or both by a single drive mechanism 78, maintenance work only needs to be performed on the single drive mechanism 78, reducing the amount of maintenance work required for the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, by opening and closing the variable probability areas 73, 74 by sliding the variable probability area opening/closing plate 78c, when one variable probability area 73, 74 is opened, the other variable probability area 74, 73 is always closed. This prevents the occurrence of an event that would destroy the gameplay of granting a "probability fluctuation state" after the end of a jackpot based on the ball passing through the valid variable probability areas 73, 74 due to a malfunction or the like, thereby realizing an innovative gameplay.

Furthermore, by configuring both of the variable probability areas 73, 74 to be closed when the variable probability area opening/closing plate 78c is not driven (initial position), even if the variable probability area opening/closing motor 78a does not operate normally due to a malfunction or the like, both variable probability areas 73, 74 can be closed, and balls can be prevented from entering the variable probability areas 73, 74 even in an abnormal state. Therefore, even if the variable probability areas 73, 74 are set to active in an abnormal state, it is possible to prevent unexpected disadvantages from occurring to the gaming center.

Otherwise, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment has the same configuration as the first to third embodiments and thus achieves the same effects.

Fifth Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 53 to 56. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, a right-side probability variable area 73 and a left-side probability variable area 74 are provided in the large prize opening 65a of one variable prize device 65, and a "probability variable state" is given after the end of the big win based on the passage of the ball into the valid probability variable areas 73 and 74.

Here, there is a possibility that a ball that entered the jackpot opening 65a in the round immediately prior to the currently being played may remain (remain) in the guide passage 72. In particular, when playing a jackpot game with no (short) interval time between rounds using two variable winning devices 65, 76, as in the second embodiment, the above phenomenon occurs frequently.

However, if the above event occurs, because the activation of the probability change areas 73, 74 is performed simultaneously with the start of each round, even if a jackpot type that does not grant a "probability fluctuating state" is initially won, the winning ball from the previous round may pass through the probability change areas 73, 74 that are set as active and that the player would not normally be able to pass through. This may result in the awarding of a gaming value that was not anticipated in the game specifications, and may result in unexpected losses for the gaming facility.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the activation of the special probability areas 73 and 74 is performed not at the start of the round, but after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the special prize opening 65a is opened. Specifically, the special probability areas 73 and 74 are activated at the same time as the special probability area solenoids 73b and 74b are activated in response to the entry of the third ball after the special prize opening 65a is opened.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent an event from occurring in which a winning ball from a previous round passes through a validly set probability change area 73, 74 that it would not normally be able to pass through, even if the player has initially won a jackpot type that does not grant a "probability change state." This allows the player to be awarded the gaming value expected by the gaming specifications, and prevents unexpected losses from occurring to the gaming facility.

The following describes the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first to fourth embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to fourth embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and descriptions of those elements are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 53, the ball detection state and the like in each round of the jackpot type "Time-saving A" in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 53 is a timing chart that shows the operation timing of the jackpot opening solenoid 65c, the right special variable area solenoid 73b, and the left special variable area solenoid 74b in the first and second rounds of the jackpot type "Time-saving A" of the first special pattern in the fifth embodiment, the timing of ball detection in the jackpot opening switch 71, the right special variable area switch 73d, and the left special variable area switch 74d, and the setting timing of the right special variable effective flag 203g, the left special variable effective flag 203h, and the special variable transition flag 203i.

In the fifth embodiment, in the "Time-saving A" jackpot type, a total of seven rounds of jackpot play are played, as in the first embodiment, and at the start of each round, the jackpot opening solenoid 65c is turned on and the opening/closing plate 65b is opened. Then, when a predetermined condition (in the fifth embodiment, either a maximum of "30 seconds" has elapsed since opening (see Max t1 in FIG. 53; Max t1 < "30,000 ms") or 10 balls have been detected by the jackpot opening switch 71) is met, the jackpot opening solenoid 65c is turned off and the opening/closing plate 65b is closed, ending one round.

In addition, in the jackpot type "Time-saving A," the opening and closing pattern of the right-side probability change area 73 and the left-side probability change area 74 is "X1," so when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot opening switch 71 in the first round, both the right probability change area solenoid 73b and the left probability change area solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms" (see t2 in FIG. 53. t2 = "60 ms"), and it is configured to recognize whether the right probability change area solenoid 73b and the left probability change area solenoid 74b can be operated normally.

When the third count ball is detected by the special prize opening switch 71, only the right special prize area solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000 ms" (see t3 in FIG. 53. t3 = "2000 ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the right special prize area 73 after being detected by the special prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the fifth embodiment, "1.5 seconds." See t4 in FIG. 53. t4 < "2000 ms"). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open right special prize area 73, and is detected by the right special prize area switch 73d.

At this time, the valid pattern for the special probability areas 73, 74 of the jackpot type "Time-saving A" is "A", and the right special probability area 73 in the second round and the left special probability area 74 in the fifth round are set to valid. Therefore, in the first round, both special probability areas 73, 74 are invalid, and the right special probability area valid flag 203g and the left special probability area valid flag 203h are set to off. Therefore, even if the ball passes through the right special probability area 73 in the first round and is detected by the right special probability area switch 73d, the right special probability area 73 is not set to valid, so the special probability transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off.

In addition, in the odd rounds (i.e., 3rd, 5th, and 7th rounds) of the jackpot type "Time-saving A," the drive mode of the right variable probability area solenoid 73b and the left variable probability area solenoid 74b is the same as in the first round.

Next, in the second round of the jackpot type "Time-saving A", when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot entry switch 71, the right special probability area solenoid 73b and the left special probability area solenoid 74b are both turned on for "60 ms" (see t5 in FIG. 53. t5 = "60 ms"), just like in the first round, and it is configured to recognize whether the right special probability area solenoid 73b and the left special probability area solenoid 74b can be operated normally.

When the third count ball is detected by the special prize opening switch 71, only the left special prize area solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000 ms" (see t6 in FIG. 53. t6 = "2000 ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the left special prize area 74 after being detected by the special prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (i.e., "1.6 seconds." See t7 in FIG. 53. t7 < "2000 ms"). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open left special prize area 74, and is detected by the left special prize area switch 74d.

In the fifth embodiment, when the special probability area 73, 74 is set to be valid, the special probability effective flag 203g, 203h is set to ON when the third count ball is detected by the special prize opening switch 71. In other words, even in a round in which the special probability area 73, 74 is set to be valid, the special probability effective flag 203g, 203h is set to OFF during the period in which at least three balls flow into the special prize opening 65a after the start of the round (see t8 in FIG. 53). Therefore, since the ball launch interval in the pachinko machine 10 is "0.6 seconds," the special probability effective flag 203g, 203h can be kept OFF for at least "1.8 seconds" after the special prize opening 65a is opened.

In particular, when the first count ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 in each round, the special prize area opening and closing plates 73a, 74a are configured to open for "60 ms" to check operation. At this time, if balls from the previous round remain (are stuck) in the guide passage 72, there is a risk that the balls will flow into the opened special prize areas 73, 74.

Therefore, the probability change areas 73 and 74 are configured to be enabled not at the start of the round, but after a predetermined period has elapsed since the large prize opening 65a is opened. Specifically, the probability change areas 73 and 74 are enabled at the same time as the probability change area solenoids 73b and 74b are driven in response to the entry of the third ball after the large prize opening 65a is opened. By configuring in this way, it is possible to as much as possible eliminate the event that the ball that entered in the previous round (i.e., the first round) passes through the probability change areas 73 and 74 that are set to be enabled but that should not have passed through, even though the player has won the jackpot type "time-saving A" that does not initially grant a "probability fluctuation state". Therefore, while checking the operation of the probability change area opening and closing plates 73a and 74a, the game value expected in the game specifications can be granted to the player, and unexpected losses can be prevented from occurring in the game facility.

Next, referring to FIG. 54, the ball detection state and the like in each round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A" in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 54 is a timing chart that shows the operation timing of the jackpot opening solenoid 65c, the right special probability area solenoid 73b, and the left special probability area solenoid 74b in the first to third rounds of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", the ball detection timing in the jackpot opening switch 71, the right special probability area switch 73d, and the left special probability area switch 74d, and the setting timing of the right special probability area valid flag 203g, the left special probability area valid flag 203h, and the special probability area transition flag 203i.

In the fifth embodiment, the big win type "latency probability fluctuation A" is executed in a total of seven rounds of big win games, as in the first embodiment, and at the start of each round, the big win opening solenoid 65c is turned on and the opening and closing plate 65b is opened. Then, when a predetermined condition (in the fifth embodiment, either a maximum of "30 seconds" has elapsed since opening (see Max t1 in FIG. 54. Max t1 < "30000 ms") or 10 balls have been detected by the big win opening switch 71) is met, the big win opening solenoid 65c is turned off and the opening and closing plate 65b is closed, and one round ends.

In addition, in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", the opening and closing pattern of the right side probability change area 73 and the left side probability change area 74 is "X1", the same as in the jackpot type "time-saving A". Therefore, in the first round, when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot entry switch 71, both the right probability change area solenoid 73b and the left probability change area solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms" (see t2 in Figure 54. t2 = "60 ms"). This makes it possible to recognize whether the right probability change area solenoid 73b and the left probability change area solenoid 74b can be operated normally.

At this time, the high probability activation flags 203g and 203h are still set to OFF, so even if the ball flows into the high probability area 73 or 74 at this time, the ON condition of the high probability transition flag 203i is not met.

When the third count ball is detected by the special prize opening switch 71, only the right special prize area solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000 ms" (see t3 in FIG. 54. t3 = "2000 ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the right special prize area 73 after being detected by the special prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the fifth embodiment, "1.5 seconds." See t4 in FIG. 54. t4 < "2000 ms"). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open right special prize area 73, and is detected by the right special prize area switch 73d.

At this time, the valid pattern for the special probability areas 73, 74 of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A" is "B", and the right special probability area 73 in the third round and the left special probability area 74 in the sixth round are set to valid. Therefore, in the first round, both special probability areas 73, 74 are invalid, and the right special probability area valid flag 203g and the left special probability area valid flag 203h are set to OFF. Therefore, even if the ball passes through the right special probability area 73 in the first round and is detected by the right special probability area switch 73d, the right special probability area 73 is not set to valid, so the special probability transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains OFF.

In addition, in the odd rounds (i.e., rounds 3, 5, and 7) of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A," the drive mode of the right probability fluctuation area solenoid 73b and the left probability fluctuation area solenoid 74b is the same as in the first round.

Next, in the second round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot entry switch 71, the right probability change area solenoid 73b and the left probability change area solenoid 74b are both turned on for "60 ms" (see t5 in Figure 54. t5 = "60 ms"), just like in the first round, and it is configured to recognize whether the right probability change area solenoid 73b and the left probability change area solenoid 74b can be operated normally.

When the third count ball is detected by the special prize opening switch 71, only the left special prize area solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000 ms" (see t6 in FIG. 54. t6 = "2000 ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the left special prize area 74 after being detected by the special prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (i.e., "1.6 seconds". See t7 in FIG. 54. t7 < "2000 ms"). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open left special prize area 74, and is detected by the left special prize area switch 74d.

At this time, the valid pattern for the special probability areas 73, 74 of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A" is "B", and in the second round, both special probability areas 73, 74 are invalid, and the right special probability area valid flag 203g and the left special probability area valid flag 203h are set to OFF. Therefore, even if the ball passes through the left special probability area 74 in the second round and is detected by the left special probability area switch 74d, the left special probability area 74 is not set to valid, so the special probability transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains OFF.

In addition, in the even rounds (i.e., rounds 4 and 6) of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A," the drive mode of the right probability fluctuation area solenoid 73b and the left probability fluctuation area solenoid 74b is the same as in the second round.

Next, in the third round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot entry switch 71, the right probability change area solenoid 73b and the left probability change area solenoid 74b are both turned on for "60 ms" (see t8 in Figure 54. t8 = "60 ms"), just like in the first and second rounds, and it is configured to recognize whether the right probability change area solenoid 73b and the left probability change area solenoid 74b can be operated normally.

Then, in the third round, only the right special probability area solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000 ms" (see t9 in FIG. 54. t9 = "2000 ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the right special probability area 73 after it is detected by the special prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (i.e., "1.5 seconds." See t10 in FIG. 54. t10 < "2000 ms"). Therefore, the ball on the third count can flow into the open right special probability area 73, and is detected by the right special probability area switch 73d.

At this time, the valid pattern for the probability change areas 73, 74 of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A" is "B", and only the right-side probability change area 73 is valid in the third round. Also, when the third count ball is detected by the large prize opening switch 71 after the large prize opening 65a is opened (see t11 in FIG. 53), the right probability change valid flag 203g is set to ON. Therefore, in the third round, when the ball on the third count or later flows into the right-side probability change area 73 and is detected by the right probability change area switch 73d, the right-side probability change area 73 is set to valid, and therefore the probability change transition flag 203i is set to ON.

Therefore, in the fifth embodiment of the big win type "latent probability fluctuation A", even if the effective setting of the probability fluctuation areas 73, 74 starts from the third count of the big prize entrance switch 71, the ball can be passed through the probability fluctuation areas 73, 74 from the third count onwards. As a result, it becomes possible to pass the ball through the validly set probability fluctuation areas 73, 74, and as the ball passes through the validly set probability fluctuation areas 73, 74, the probability fluctuation transition flag 203i is set to ON, and at the end of the big win, the probability fluctuation transition flag 203i can be referenced to impart a "probability fluctuation state".

Next, the opening setting process (S422) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing the opening setting process (S422) of the fifth embodiment. The opening setting process (S422) of the fifth embodiment is configured so that the processing of the special chance effective flags 203g and 203h is not performed at the start of a round.

Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, the opening setting process (S422) is similar to the first embodiment, in which steps S431 to S434 are carried out to set the large prize opening to open (S431), the prize counter is set to "10" (S432), the opening time is set (S433), and the opening command is set (S434).

Then, in the fifth embodiment, the opening setting process (S422) does not refer to the special probability area validity table 202g at this stage, and ends the opening setting process (S422). Therefore, at the start of the round, the special probability area validity flags 203g and 203h remain set to off.

Next, referring to FIG. 56, the opening process (S424) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing the opening process (S424) of the fifth embodiment. In the opening process of the fifth embodiment, the ball winning detection process associated with the opening of the large winning opening 65a, the opening and closing control process of the right side special probability area 73 and the left side special probability area 74, the ball passing detection process into the opened right side special probability area 73 or left side special probability area 74, etc. are executed, and when a predetermined number of balls win, the special probability area 73, 74 is set as valid based on the set special probability area valid table 202g (see FIG. 12).

In the fifth embodiment, during opening process (S424), in the process of S452, it is determined whether the current on detection of the large prize opening switch 71 is the third count or not, i.e., whether the value of the winning counter is "7" or not (S452). If it is determined that the current on detection of the large prize opening switch 71 is the third count (S452: Yes), the right special probability area solenoid 73b or the left special probability area solenoid 74b is set to on for "2000 ms" (S453) based on the special probability area opening and closing table 202f (see FIG. 11) set according to the type of jackpot in the jackpot process (see FIG. 26), and either the right special probability area opening and closing plate 73a or the left special probability area opening and closing plate 74a is opened, allowing balls to flow into the opened special probability areas 73, 74.

After the processing of S453, the right high probability variable effective flag 203g or the left high probability variable effective flag 203h for the round is set (S491) based on the high probability variable area effective table 202g (see FIG. 12) set according to the type of jackpot in the jackpot processing (see FIG. 26), and this opening setting processing (S422) is terminated. After this opening setting processing (S422) is terminated, the process proceeds to S423 of the large prize opening opening/closing control processing (see FIG. 27). Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, the high probability variable effective flags 203g, 203h can be set to effective after a predetermined period has elapsed since the large prize opening 65a was opened.

As described above, according to the fifth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, the activation of the special probability areas 73 and 74 is performed not at the start of the round, but after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the special prize opening 65a is opened. Specifically, the special probability areas 73 and 74 are activated at the same time that the special probability area solenoids 73b and 74b are activated in response to the entry of the third ball after the special prize opening 65a is opened.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent an event from occurring in which a winning ball from a previous round passes through a validly set probability change area 73, 74 that it would not normally be able to pass through, even if the player has initially won a jackpot type that does not grant a "probability change state." This allows the player to be awarded the gaming value expected by the gaming specifications, and prevents unexpected losses from occurring to the gaming facility.

In addition, even if the effective setting of the special probability areas 73, 74 is started from the third count of the big prize entrance switch 71, the ball can be passed into the special probability areas 73, 74 from the third count onwards. As a result, it becomes possible to pass the ball into the special probability areas 73, 74 that are set to be effective, and as the ball passes into the special probability areas 73, 74 that are set to be effective, the special probability transition flag 203i is set to ON, and at the end of the big win, the special probability transition flag 203i can be referenced to impart a "probability fluctuation state".

Otherwise, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment has the same configuration as the first to fourth embodiments and thus achieves the same effects.

Sixth Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 57. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, one "round" is executed when "30 seconds" have elapsed since the opening of the big prize opening 65a or when 10 balls enter the big prize opening 65a while it is open. Thus, the player can grasp the current number of rounds by counting the number of times the big prize opening 65a has been opened.

In addition, during the intervals between rounds, the jackpot opening 65a is closed, so that the player can easily tell whether the jackpot opening 65a is open (i.e., during a round) or during an interval during a jackpot game.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, in a predetermined round (the second and third rounds in the sixth embodiment), the big prize opening 65a is opened multiple times (first and second openings) in one round, and the closing time of the pseudo-interval between the first and second openings in the round is executed so that the opening time of the first and second openings is the same as that of the first and second openings (hereinafter, the above opening mode is referred to as "special opening"). In addition, the interval time between rounds is also configured to be the same as the opening time and closing time. Then, in a part of the round in which the above special opening is executed, the special opening areas 73 and 74 are set to be valid, and if a ball passes through the valid special opening areas 73 and 74, a "probability variable state" is given after the big win ends.

By configuring it in this way, even if the player is aware of the number of rounds in the probability change areas 73, 74 that have been set to active status, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of rounds currently being played, and to prevent the player from clearly recognizing whether or not a "probability change state" will occur. Therefore, even when a "latent probability change performance mode" is being executed, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess in which game state they are playing, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

The following describes the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first to fifth embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to fifth embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and descriptions of those elements are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 57, this is a timing chart that shows the operation timing of the large prize opening solenoid 65c, the right special probability area solenoid 73b, and the left special probability area solenoid 74b in the first to third rounds of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A" in the sixth embodiment, the ball detection timing in the large prize opening switch 71, the right special probability area switch 73d, and the left special probability area switch 74d, and the setting timing of the right special probability area valid flag 203g, the left special probability area valid flag 203h, and the special probability area transition flag 203i.

In the sixth embodiment, the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A" is executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and a total of seven rounds of jackpot games are played, and at the start of each round, the jackpot opening solenoid 65c is turned on and the opening/closing plate 65b is opened. In the first round, the opening pattern of the jackpot opening 65a is normal opening, and when a maximum of "30 seconds" has elapsed since the opening of the jackpot opening 65a (see Max t1 in FIG. 57. Max t1 < "30000 ms"), or when 10 balls are detected by the jackpot opening switch 71, the jackpot opening solenoid 65c is turned off and the opening/closing plate 65b is closed, and the first round ends.

In addition, in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", the opening and closing pattern of the right side probability change area 73 and the left side probability change area 74 is "X1", the same as in the jackpot type "time-saving A". Therefore, in the first round, when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot entry switch 71, both the right probability change area solenoid 73b and the left probability change area solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms" (see t2 in FIG. 57. t2 = "60 ms"). It is configured to be possible to recognize whether the right probability change area solenoid 73b and the left probability change area solenoid 74b can be operated normally.

When the third count ball is detected by the special prize opening switch 71, only the right special prize area solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000 ms" (see t3 in FIG. 57. t3 = "2000 ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the right special prize area 73 after being detected by the special prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the sixth embodiment, "1.5 seconds." See t4 in FIG. 57. t4 < "2000 ms"). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open right special prize area 73, and is detected by the right special prize area switch 73d.

At this time, the valid pattern for the special probability areas 73, 74 of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A" is "B", and the right special probability area 73 in the third round and the left special probability area 74 in the sixth round are set to valid. Therefore, in the first round, both special probability areas 73, 74 are invalid, and the right special probability area valid flag 203g and the left special probability area valid flag 203h are set to OFF. Therefore, even if the ball passes through the right special probability area 73 in the first round and is detected by the right special probability area switch 73d, the right special probability area 73 is not set to valid, so the special probability transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains OFF.

Next, when the large prize opening 65a is closed in the first round of the large prize type "latent probability fluctuation A", there is a "3 second" interval (see t5 in FIG. 57; t5 = "3000 ms") until the next round (i.e., the second round) begins. When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 7) of the main control device 110 determines that this interval has elapsed, it begins opening the large prize opening 65a for the second round.

Next, in the second round of the sixth embodiment's jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A," the opening mode of the large prize opening 65a is a special opening, and the first opening of the multiple openings is performed. When "3 seconds" have passed since the opening of the large prize opening 65a (see t6 in FIG. 57; t6 = "3000 ms"), the large prize opening solenoid 65c is turned off and the opening/closing plate 65b is closed, and the first opening of the second round ends.

When the first ball is detected by the special prize opening switch 71 during the first opening of the second round, the right special prize area solenoid 73b and the left special prize area solenoid 74b are both turned on for "60 ms" (see t7 in Figure 57; t5 = "60 ms"), just like in the first round, and it is configured to be possible to recognize whether the right special prize area solenoid 73b and the left special prize area solenoid 74b can be operated normally.

Then, after the first opening of the second round, a pseudo interval is performed, and when "3 seconds" have passed since the closing of the large prize opening 65a (see t8 in FIG. 57; t8 = "3000 ms"), the large prize opening solenoid 65c is turned on, the opening/closing plate 65b is opened, and the pseudo interval of the second round ends.

After that, in the second round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", the second opening of the multiple openings is performed, and when "3 seconds" have passed since the opening of the large prize opening 65a (see t9 in FIG. 57; t9 = "3000 ms"), the large prize opening solenoid 65c is turned off and the opening plate 65b is closed, the second opening of the second round ends, and the second round ends.

When the third count ball is detected by the special prize opening switch 71 during the first or second opening of this second round, only the left special prize area solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000 ms" (see t10 in FIG. 57. t10 = "2000 ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the left special prize area 74 after being detected by the special prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the sixth embodiment, "1.6 seconds." See t11 in FIG. 57. t11 < "2000 ms"). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open left special prize area 74, and is detected by the left special prize area switch 74d.

At this time, the valid pattern for the special probability areas 73, 74 of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A" is "B", and in the second round, both special probability areas 73, 74 are invalid, and the right special probability area valid flag 203g and the left special probability area valid flag 203h are set to OFF. Therefore, even if the ball passes through the left special probability area 74 and is detected by the left special probability area switch 74d during the second opening of the second round, the left special probability area 74 is not set to valid, so the special probability transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains OFF.

In addition, in the even rounds (i.e., rounds 4 and 6) of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", the drive mode of the right probability change area solenoid 73b and the left probability change area solenoid 74b is the same as in the second round. Also, in the first and second openings of the jackpot opening 65a in the second round, if a total of 10 balls are detected by the jackpot opening switch 71 during the first and second openings, the second round is configured to end.

Next, when the large prize opening 65a is closed in the second round of the large prize type "latent probability fluctuation A", an interval of "3 seconds" (see t12 in FIG. 57; t12 = "3000 ms") is set up until the next round (i.e., the third round) starts, just like the interval time after the first round. When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 7) of the main control device 110 determines that this interval time has elapsed, it starts opening the large prize opening 65a for the third round.

Next, in the third round of the sixth embodiment's big win type "latent probability fluctuation A," as in the second round, the opening mode of the big win opening 65a is a special opening, and of the multiple openings, the first opening is performed. When "3 seconds" have passed since the opening of the big win opening 65a (see t13 in FIG. 57; t13 = "3000 ms"), the big win opening solenoid 65c is turned off and the opening/closing plate 65b is closed, and the first opening of the third round ends.

When the first ball is detected by the large prize opening switch 71 during the first opening of the third round, the right special probability area solenoid 73b and the left special probability area solenoid 74b are both turned on for "60 ms" (see t14 in FIG. 57. t14 = "60 ms"), just like in the first and second rounds, and it is configured to recognize whether the right special probability area solenoid 73b and the left special probability area solenoid 74b can be operated normally.

Then, after the first opening of the third round, a pseudo interval is performed, and when "3 seconds" have passed since the closing of the large prize opening 65a (see t15 in FIG. 57; t15 = "3000 ms"), the large prize opening solenoid 65c is turned on, the opening/closing plate 65b is opened, and the pseudo interval of the third round ends.

After that, in the third round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", the second opening of the multiple openings is performed, and when "3 seconds" have passed since the opening of the large prize opening 65a (see t16 in FIG. 57. t16 = "3000 ms"), the large prize opening solenoid 65c is turned off and the opening plate 65b is closed, the second opening of the third round ends, and the third round ends.

When the third count ball is detected by the special prize opening switch 71 during the first or second opening of this third round, only the right special prize area solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000 ms" (see t17 in FIG. 57. t17 = "2000 ms"). In the sixth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, the time required for the ball to reach the right special prize area 73 after being detected by the special prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the sixth embodiment, "1.5 seconds." See t18 in FIG. 57. t18 < "2000 ms"). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open right special prize area 73, and is detected by the right special prize area switch 73d.

At this time, the valid pattern for the probability change areas 73, 74 of the jackpot type "latent probability change A" is "B", and only the right-side probability change area 73 is valid in the third round, with the right probability change valid flag 203g set to ON and the left probability change valid flag 203h set to OFF. Therefore, in the third round, when the ball passes through the right-side probability change area 73 and is detected by the right probability change area switch 73d, the right-side probability change area 73 is set to valid, and therefore the probability change transition flag 203i is set to ON.

Therefore, in the case of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", the probability fluctuation areas 73, 74 corresponding to the probability fluctuation area switches 73d, 74d that detected the ball in the third round (sixth round) are set to active, and the probability fluctuation transition flag 203i is set to ON. Then, at the end of the jackpot, the "probability fluctuation state" is set by referring to this probability fluctuation transition flag 203i.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, in a predetermined round (the second and third rounds in the sixth embodiment), a special opening is executed in which the big prize opening 65a is opened multiple times (first and second openings) in one round, and the closing time of the pseudo interval executed between the first and second openings in the round is executed so as to be the same as the opening time of the first and second openings. In addition, the interval time between rounds is also configured to be the same as the opening time and closing time. Then, in the round in which the special opening is executed, the probability change areas 73 and 74 are enabled, and if a ball passes through the enabled probability change areas 73 and 74, a "probability change state" is granted after the big win ends.

By configuring it in this way, even if the player is aware of the number of rounds in the probability change areas 73, 74 that have been set to active status, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of rounds currently being played, and to prevent the player from clearly recognizing whether or not a "probability change state" will occur. Therefore, even when a "latent probability change performance mode" is being executed, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess in which game state they are playing, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Otherwise, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment has the same configuration as the first to fifth embodiments and thus achieves the same effects.

Seventh Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 58. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, a right side probability variable area 73 and a left side probability variable area 74 are provided as probability variable areas through which the ball flowing in from the variable winning device 65 can pass, and the right side probability variable area 73 is arranged on the upstream side, and the left side probability variable area 74 is arranged on the downstream side in the left direction when viewed from the front of the game board 13.

In contrast, in the seventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, a front side probability change area 73e is provided on the front side of the game board 13 as viewed from the front, and a back side probability change area 74e is provided downstream of the front side and on the back side as viewed from the front, as probability change areas through which the ball flowing in from the variable winning device 65 can pass. Then, the two probability change areas (the front side probability change area 73e and the back side probability change area 74e) are driven and controlled to open one of the opening and closing plates 73f, 74f provided for each probability change area 73e, 74e for each round of the jackpot according to the type of jackpot, and the setting of each probability change area 73e, 74e is controlled to be switched (internally) in a state that cannot be recognized by the player. Then, when a ball passes through the probability change area 73e, 74e that is set to be valid during the jackpot, a "probability change state" is generated after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, even if the ball passes through the invalidated probability change areas 73e and 74e, the system is configured not to generate a "probability change state" after the big win ends.

By configuring it in this way, each probability change area 73e, 74e overlaps in the front-to-back direction of the pachinko machine 10, making it difficult for a player viewing from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 to recognize which probability change area 73e, 74e they have entered. In particular, by configuring the probability change area opening and closing plates 73f, 74f from a transparent material, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize which probability change area 73e, 74e is open. Therefore, even when the "latent probability change performance mode" is being executed, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess in which game state they are playing, thereby increasing the fun of the game.

The following describes the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first to sixth embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to sixth embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and descriptions of those elements are omitted.

The seventh embodiment of the variable winning device 65 will be described with reference to Figure 58. Figure 58 shows the configuration of the seventh embodiment of the variable winning device 65, Figure 58(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the seventh embodiment of the variable winning device 65 as seen from the front, and Figure 58(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view (cross-sectional top view) of the variable winning device 65 taken along line A-A in Figure 58(a).

As shown in Figures 58(a) and 58(b), the seventh embodiment of the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate 65b that covers the large winning opening 65a, a large winning opening solenoid 65c (see Figure 7) for driving the opening/closing plate 65b to open and close in the forward direction with the lower side of the opening/closing plate 65b as an axis, a large winning opening switch 71 that detects a ball that has entered the large winning opening 65a, a guide passage 72 through which the ball detected by the large winning opening switch 71 flows down, a front side special variable area 73e that is located downstream of the guide passage 72 and in the direction toward the back side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, a back side special variable area 74e that is located downstream of the front side special variable area 73e and in the direction toward the back side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and an innermost discharge passage 75a that is located downstream of the back side special variable area 74e and in the direction toward the back side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front.

The guide passage 72 of the seventh embodiment is a passage formed in a crank shape in a cross-sectional top view of the game board 13 through which balls that flow into the large prize opening 65a flow down. In this guide passage 72, a front side special probability area 73e and a back side special probability area 74e are provided at a predetermined position on the passage downstream of the guide passage 72 and extending in the depth direction of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and an innermost discharge passage 75a is provided downstream of the front side special probability area 73e and the back side special probability area 74e and in the depth direction of the game board 13 when viewed from the front. Therefore, balls that flow into the large prize opening 65a and flow down the guide passage 72 will pass through the front side special probability area 73e, the back side special probability area 74e, or the innermost discharge passage 75a.

In the seventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, after a ball that has flowed into the large prize opening 65a is detected by the large prize opening switch 71, it is configured to take approximately "1.5 seconds" to travel through the guide passage 72 and reach above the front side special probability area 73e, and after a ball that has flowed into the large prize opening 65a is detected by the large prize opening switch 71, it is configured to take approximately "1.6 seconds" to travel through the guide passage 72 and reach above the back side special probability area 74e. Therefore, a ball detected by the large prize opening switch 71 is configured to be able to flow into the front side special probability area 73e or the back side special probability area 74e within "2 seconds".

The front special probability area 73e is arranged so that its top surface is flush with the bottom surface (ball rolling surface) of the guide passage 72 when in the closed state (protruding state) and is configured to be displaceable from the closed state to the open state (retracted state). It is composed of a front special probability area opening and closing plate 73f, a front special probability area solenoid 73g (not shown) that can drive the front special probability area opening and closing plate 73f to open and close, a front special probability area passage 73h that is provided vertically below the front special probability area opening and closing plate 73f and through which the ball can flow, and a front special probability area switch 73i that is embedded in the passage of the front special probability area passage 73h and can detect balls passing through the front special probability area passage 73h.

All of the components 73f-73i that make up the front probability change area 73e are made of transparent or semi-transparent materials (such as polycarbonate resin or acrylic resin). This allows the player to see from the front side of the game board 13 the balls that pass through the front probability change area 73e, as well as the balls that pass through the back probability change area 74e (and the backmost discharge passage 75a) that are positioned in the depth direction when viewed from the front of the game board 13.

The inner probability change area 74e is composed of an inner probability change area opening/closing plate 74f, the upper surface of which is flush with the bottom surface of the guide passage 72 when in the closed state (protruding state) and is configured to be displaceable from the closed state to the open state (retracted state), an inner probability change area solenoid 74g (not shown) that can drive the inner probability change area opening/closing plate 74f to open and close, an inner probability change area passage 74h that is provided vertically below the inner probability change area opening/closing plate 74f and through which balls can flow, and an inner probability change area switch 74i that is embedded in the passage of the inner probability change area passage 74h and can detect balls passing through the inner probability change area passage 74h.

The members 74f-74i that make up the rear variable probability area 74e are all made of transparent or semi-transparent materials (such as polycarbonate resin or acrylic resin), just like the members 73f-73i that make up the front variable probability area 73e. This allows the player to see the balls that pass through the rear variable probability area 74e, as well as the balls that pass through the innermost discharge passage 75a that is arranged in the depth direction when viewed from the front of the game board 13, from the front side of the game board 13.

In addition, when the front probability change area opening/closing plate 73f of the front side probability change area 73e and the back probability change area opening/closing plate 74f of the back side probability change area 74e open each probability change area 73e, 74e, they are driven by the front probability change area solenoid 73g and the back probability change area solenoid 74g so as to sink (be buried) in the left side wall of the game board 13 as viewed from the front of the guide passage 72. And, a concealing member (not shown) that conceals the immersion state of the front probability change area opening/closing plate 73f and the back probability change area opening/closing plate 74f so that it cannot be seen is arranged on the front side (player side) of the game board 13 as viewed from the front of the immersion position of the front probability change area opening/closing plate 73f and the back probability change area opening/closing plate 74f. Therefore, by making the state in which the front probability change area opening/closing plate 73f and the back probability change area opening/closing plate 74f are immersed in the side wall of the guide passage 72 invisible to the player sitting in front of the game board 13, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the operating state of the front probability change area opening/closing plate 73f and the back probability change area opening/closing plate 74f.

The innermost discharge passage 75a is a passage for discharging a ball that has flowed into the large prize opening 65a to the outside of the variable prize device 65 (to the back side of the game board 13) if the ball does not flow into either the front side special prize area 73e or the back side special prize area 74e.

The components that make up the innermost discharge passage 75a are all made of transparent or semi-transparent materials (such as polycarbonate resin or acrylic resin), just like the components 73f-73i that make up the front side probability change area 73e and the components 74f-74i that make up the back side probability change area 74e. This allows the player to see the balls passing through the innermost discharge passage 75a from the front side of the game board 13.

The front probability change area opening/closing plate 73f, the rear probability change area opening/closing plate 74f, and the innermost discharge passage 75a are made of a transparent or semi-transparent material. Therefore, by making it difficult for the player to recognize the position (driving mode) of each probability change area opening/closing plate 73f, 74f, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to tell whether the probability change area 73e, 74e is open or closed by each probability change area opening/closing plate 73f, 74f. The front probability change area opening/closing plate 73f and the rear probability change area opening/closing plate 74f may also be made of colored resin.

Here, the inflow pattern of the balls flowing into the large prize opening 65a of the variable prize-winning device 65 of the seventh embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, when a special game state occurs due to winning a jackpot, the opening and closing plate 65b of the variable prize-winning device 65 is opened, allowing the balls to flow into the large prize opening 65a. When the front probability change area opening and closing plate 73f is in an open state (submerged state) and the back probability change area opening and closing plate 74f is in a closed state (protruding state), the balls that flow into the large prize opening 65a are first detected by the large prize opening switch 71, and then flow down the guide passage 72. Then, they collide with the front side wall of the guide passage 72, and the flow direction changes to the depth direction when viewed from the front of the game board 13. After that, since the front probability change area opening and closing plate 73f is opened (submerged) by the front probability change area solenoid 73g (not shown), the above-mentioned balls flow into the front probability change area passage 73h. The ball is then detected by the front probability change area switch 73i embedded in the front probability change area passage 73h. The ball detected by the front probability change area switch 73i is discharged outside the variable winning device 65 (to the back side of the game board 13) via a discharge path (not shown).

In addition, when the front probability change area opening/closing plate 73f is in a closed state (protruding state) and the back probability change area opening/closing plate 74f is in an open state (sunken state), the ball that flows into the large prize opening 65a is first detected by the large prize opening switch 71, and then flows down the guide passage 72. Then, it collides with the front side wall of the guide passage 72, and the flow direction changes to the depth direction when viewed from the front of the game board 13. After that, it rolls on the upper surface of the front probability change area opening/closing plate 73f in the closed state (protruding state), and since the back probability change area opening/closing plate 74f, which is provided downstream of the front probability change area opening/closing plate 73f and on the back side when viewed from the front, is opened (sunken) by the back probability change area solenoid 74g (not shown), the above-mentioned ball flows into the back probability change area passage 74h. Then, the ball is detected by the back probability change area switch 74i embedded in the back probability change area passage 74h. In addition, the ball detected by the deep variable area switch 74i is discharged outside the variable winning device 65 (to the back side of the game board 13) via a discharge path (not shown).

Furthermore, when the front probability change area opening/closing plate 73f and the back probability change area opening/closing plate 74f are both in the closed state (protruding state), the ball that flows into the large prize opening 65a is first detected by the large prize opening switch 71, and then flows down the guide passage 72. Then, it collides with the front side wall of the guide passage 72, and the flow direction changes to the depth direction when viewed from the front of the game board 13. After that, it rolls on the top surface of the front probability change area opening/closing plate 73f and the top surface of the back probability change area opening/closing plate 74f in the closed state (protruding state), collides with the back wall of the guide passage 72, and the flow direction changes to the left side when viewed from the front of the game board 13. Then, it is discharged from the backmost discharge passage 75a provided downstream from that to the outside of the variable prize winning device 65 (to the back side of the game board 13).

By configuring in this way, the front side special probability area 73e and the back side special probability area 74e (and the innermost discharge passage 75a) overlap in the front-back direction (depth direction) when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Generally, human vision is more difficult to recognize differences in depth images than differences in planar images, so when the front side special probability area 73e and the back side special probability area 74e (and the innermost discharge passage 75a) are arranged in the front-back direction when viewed from the front, it is more difficult for a player who sees the front side special probability area 73e and the back side special probability area 74e (and the innermost discharge passage 75a) from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 to recognize which special probability area 73e, 74e (or the innermost discharge passage 75a) has flowed into, compared to when the front side special probability area 73e and the back side special probability area 74e (and the innermost discharge passage 75a) are arranged in the plane (horizontal direction when viewed from the front), it is possible to make it difficult for a player who sees the front side special probability area 73e and the back side special probability area 74e (and the innermost discharge passage 75a) from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 to recognize whether or not the ball has flowed into which of the special probability areas 73e, 74e (or the innermost discharge passage 75a). In particular, by constructing the front probability change area opening/closing plate 73f and the back probability change area opening/closing plate 74f from transparent materials, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not one of the probability change areas 73e, 74e is open. Therefore, even if the player recognizes the probability change area 73e, 74e that is set to be active, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish the probability change area 73e, 74e through which the ball has passed, and to make it difficult for the player to understand whether or not the "probability change state" has been granted. As a result, even when the "latent probability change performance mode" is being executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether it is in the "probability change state", the "time shortening state", or the "normal game state", thereby creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played, and improving the interest of the game.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-mentioned embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiments, and it can be easily imagined that various modifications and improvements are possible within the scope of the present invention. For example, the numerical values given in the above-mentioned embodiments are merely examples, and it is of course possible to adopt other numerical values.

Of course, it is also possible to combine the configurations of the above embodiments with any of the configurations of the modified examples shown below. Of course, it is also possible to combine the configurations of one or more other modified examples with any of the configurations of the modified examples shown below. In these cases, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

<Modification 1: One-sided continuous opening (non-alternate)>
In the above embodiment, the right side probability change area 73 and the left side probability change area 74 are alternately opened in each round at the time of the big win. Alternatively, either one of the probability change areas 73, 74 may be opened continuously, or only one of the probability change areas 73, 74 may be opened. By configuring in this way, the opening and closing patterns of the probability change areas 73, 74 are enriched according to the big win type, making it difficult (impossible) for the player to recognize which big win type he has won, creating a playability that allows the player to guess in which game state he is playing, and improving the interest of the game.

<Modification 2: Number of effective rounds: 3 or more, or only 1>
In the above embodiment, the probability change areas 73, 74 are set to be valid in any two rounds in one jackpot type. Instead of this, the probability change areas 73, 74 may be set to be valid in three or more rounds in a jackpot type, the probability change areas 73, 74 may be set to be valid in only one round in a jackpot type, or the probability change areas 73, 74 may not be set to be valid in a jackpot type. By configuring in this way, the variation of the valid patterns of the probability change areas 73, 74 is enriched according to the jackpot type, making it difficult or impossible for the player to recognize which jackpot type he has won, and creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess in which game state he is playing, thereby improving the interest of the game.

<Modification 3: Turning off valid flag before end of round>
In the above embodiment, the probability variable effective flags 203g, 203h are turned off at the end of one round, that is, when the large prize winning hole 65a is closed. In contrast, the probability variable effective flags 203g, 203h may be turned off at a timing before the closing of one round, that is, when the probability variable area solenoids 73b, 74b are turned off (when the probability variable areas 73, 74 are closed), when a predetermined number of balls are counted (for example, the 5th count, etc.), or when a predetermined time has passed (for example, "5 seconds" etc.) since the opening of the large prize winning hole 65a or the opening of the probability variable areas 73, 74. By configuring in this way, the period during which the probability change areas 73, 74 are set to be valid is shortened, and even if an event occurs in which a ball that won in another round is retained in the variable winning device 65 and passes through the probability change areas 73, 74 that it would not normally be able to pass through, the effective period of the probability change areas 73, 74 is shortened, and the probability change areas 73, 74 are set to be invalid at the stage when the retained ball passes through the probability change areas 73, 74, thereby preventing the granting of an unintended "probability change state". Therefore, it is possible to grant the player the game value as expected by the game specifications, and prevent the occurrence of unexpected losses in the game facility.

<Variation 4: One specific area for each double attacker>
In the second embodiment, the variable winning devices 65, 76 were configured to share the variable winning areas 73, 74. Alternatively, each of the variable winning devices 65, 76 may be configured to have one variable winning area 73, 74. By configuring in this way, the flow paths in each of the variable winning devices 65, 76 can be designed individually, and there is no need to design them based on the junction of the guide path 72 and the communication path 77, so that the design freedom of each of the variable winning devices 65, 76 can be increased.

<Variation 5: All hidden jackpots>
In the above embodiment, when the jackpot type "probability change A" is won, a "probability change notification performance mode" is executed to notify the player that the "probability change state" has been granted. In contrast, it may be configured not to notify the player that the "probability change state" has been granted for all jackpot types. By configuring in this way, it is possible to constantly create a gameplay that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played, and to increase the interest of the game.

<Variation 6: Sudden hit, small hit>
In each of the above embodiments, the lottery for each special symbol was configured to award one of the following jackpots: "15R probability jackpot", "15R latent probability jackpot", "7R latent probability jackpot", "15R time-saving jackpot", and "7R time-saving jackpot". In contrast, the lottery may be configured to award a jackpot different from the above jackpots (for example, a so-called "sudden probability jackpot (2R probability jackpot)") or a "small jackpot" different from the jackpot. By configuring in this way, the game value awarded to the player when the jackpot is won can be varied, providing variety to the game and realizing a variety of gameplay, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In particular, if a "small win" is provided in the lottery for the special symbol, when the small win is won, the opening and closing mode of the large prize opening 65a, etc. will be the same as or similar to the large prize that is awarded in the "latent probability variable state" (i.e., for a "7R latent variable jackpot", it will be a "7R small win" that executes the opening and closing operation of the large prize opening 65a 7 times in the same way as the "7R latent variable jackpot"), making it difficult for the player to distinguish between the "normal game state" and the "latent probability variable state". This configuration creates a gameplay that forces the player to guess which game state it is, which can increase the excitement of the game.

Note that a "small win" is a lottery result in which the large prize opening 65a etc. is opened and closed, but unlike a "15R sure-win jackpot" or a "7R latent sure-win jackpot", no transition in the game state is performed.

<Variation 7: Surefire suggestion performance>
In the above embodiment, the player is notified that the "probability change state" has been given only in the "probability change notification performance mode". Alternatively, the player may be informed that the "probability change state" has been given or will be given by a special performance. As a special performance, for example, in the third pattern display device 81, a special character that is more likely to be selected in a situation where the "probability change state" is given and is difficult to select when the "probability change state" is not given is made to appear at a predetermined timing (for example, during a jackpot, at the end of a jackpot, or during a variation performance), or a special sound effect that is more likely to be output when passing through the probability change areas 73 and 74 that are set to be valid and is difficult to be output when passing through the probability change areas 73 and 74 that are set to be invalid is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a playability that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Modification 8: Multiple Valid Settings>
In the above embodiment, the opening pattern that allows the ball to flow into either of the probability change areas 73, 74 is executed once in one round of the big win. Alternatively, the opening pattern that allows the ball to flow into either of the probability change areas 73, 74 may be executed two or more times in one round. By configuring in this way, the chances of the ball flowing into the validly set probability change areas 73, 74 can be increased, making it easier to grant the right to the "probability change state" to the player.

<Modification 9: Switching valid settings according to the number of counts during one round>
In the above embodiment, either one of the probability change areas 73, 74 is set to be valid in one round. Alternatively, the valid setting of the probability change areas 73, 74 may be switched within one round. Specifically, for example, when the big prize winning port 65a is opened in the second round, the right probability change area 73 is set to be valid, and then, after the fifth count in the second round, the right probability change area 73 is set to be invalid while the left probability change area 74 is set to be valid. By configuring in this way, the variation of the valid patterns of the probability change areas 73, 74 is enriched, making it difficult for the player to recognize which big prize type he has won, and creating a playability that allows the player to guess in which play state he is playing, thereby improving the interest of the game.

<Modification 10: Opening and closing member only on the upstream side of the 2 chance region>
In the first embodiment, the right and left special probability regions 73 and 74 are provided with opening and closing plates 73a and 74a, respectively, and the opening and closing of the opening and closing plates 73a and 74a is controlled to distribute the balls flowing into the special probability regions 73 and 74. Instead of this, the right special probability region opening and closing plate 73a is provided only in the upstream special probability region, i.e., the right special probability region 73, and when the right special probability region opening and closing plate 73a is open, the balls flow into the right special probability region 73, and when the right special probability region opening and closing plate 73a is closed, the balls flow into the left special probability region 74. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to provide a drive mechanism in the left special probability region 74, so the number of parts can be reduced and manufacturing costs can be reduced. In addition, the balls that have won the variable winning device 65 always pass through the left special probability region 74, and there is no need to provide a discharge passage 75 downstream of the left special probability region 74, so the design freedom of the variable winning device 65 can be improved.

<Modification 11: Non-electric sorting device>
In the above embodiment, the opening or closing of the variable probability areas 73, 74 is performed by an electric member (variable probability area solenoid 73b, 74b or a variable probability area opening/closing motor 78a) arranged near the variable probability areas 73, 74, and the variable probability areas 73, 74 into which the balls flow are changed. Alternatively, a non-electrical distribution device (for example, a distribution device that alternately distributes balls that enter a distribution ball entrance to the left path or the right path in the alternating distribution unit 64) may be used to distribute balls to the variable probability areas 73, 74. By configuring in this way, the number of parts in the variable winning device 65 can be reduced, and since control of each drive mechanism is not required, the control burden on the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

<Modification 12: Different times for rolling the upper surface of the opening/closing plate>
In the above embodiment, when the right-side and left-side probability change areas 73 and 74 are closed, there is no particular difference between the probability change area opening/closing plates 73a and 74a that close the probability change areas 73 and 74, and the time that the ball passes through the upper surface of the probability change areas 73 and 74 is not different. In contrast, the configuration of one of the probability change area opening/closing plates 73a and 74a may be made different from the configuration of the other probability change area opening/closing plate 73a and 74a, so that the time that the ball passes through the upper surface of the probability change areas 73 and 74 is different. Specifically, for example, the length of the right probability change area opening/closing plate 73a is made longer than the length of the left probability change area opening/closing plate 74a, and the time that the ball rolls on the upper surface of the right probability change area opening/closing plate 73a is made longer than the time that the ball rolls on the upper surface of the left probability change area opening/closing plate 74a. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to provide variation in the timing of opening and closing the special probability area opening/closing plates 73a, 74a, thereby providing a wide variety of special probability areas 73, 74 into which the balls flowing down the guide passage 72 flow.

<Modification 13: Loop Type>
In the above embodiments, the game is configured as a so-called ST type game specification in which the "probability fluctuation state" is given a predetermined number of times after the end of the jackpot regardless of which jackpot is won. In contrast, the game may be configured as a so-called loop type game specification in which the "probability fluctuation state" is maintained until the next jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot. By applying the configuration of the present invention to a so-called loop type pachinko machine in which the next jackpot is guaranteed, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by determining whether the ball will pass through the validly set probability fluctuation area 73, 74.

<Variation 14: 3 or more chance zones>
In the above embodiment, two probability change areas 73, 74 are provided in the guide passage 72, and a ball that enters the large prize opening 65a during a jackpot is configured to flow into one of the probability change areas 73, 74. Alternatively, three or more probability change areas may be provided in the guide passage 72, and a ball that enters the large prize opening 65a may be configured to flow into one of the probability change areas. By configuring in this way, the variation of the inflow pattern of the probability change areas 73, 74 is enriched, making it difficult (impossible) for the player to recognize which jackpot type he has won, creating a playability that allows the player to guess in which game state he is playing, and improving the interest of the game.

<Modification 15: Opening and closing according to driving amount>
In the fourth embodiment, the motor 78a for opening and closing the variable probability area is disposed between the right variable probability area 73 and the left variable probability area 74, and the motor 78a for opening and closing the variable probability area is driven forward or reverse to slide the variable probability area opening and closing plate 78c to the upstream or downstream side of the guide passage 72 in accordance with the drive. Alternatively, the motor 78a for opening and closing the variable probability area may be disposed upstream of the right variable probability area 73, and the motor 78a for opening and closing the variable probability area may be configured to be capable of only one direction (right rotation), and the motor 78a for opening and closing the variable probability area may be provided with a plurality of patterns of drive amount. Then, when the motor 78a for opening and closing the variable probability area is driven with a first drive amount (for example, 60 pulses), only the left variable probability area 74 is opened, and when the motor 78a for opening and closing the variable probability area is driven with a second drive amount (for example, 120 pulses) that is greater than the first drive amount, both the right variable probability area 73 and the left variable probability area 74 are opened. By configuring in this manner, the balls flowing into the probability change areas 73, 74 can be distributed depending on the driving amount of one driving mechanism 78, and the above distribution is possible even with a motor that can only drive in one direction, making it possible to realize the playability of the present invention at low cost.

<Modification 16: Movement of the bucket of the opening and closing plate>
In the fourth embodiment, the motor 78a for opening and closing the probability variable area is disposed between the right-side probability variable area 73 and the left-side probability variable area 74, and the motor 78a for opening and closing the probability variable area is driven forward or reverse to slide the probability variable area opening and closing plate 78c to the upstream or downstream side of the guide passage 72 in accordance with the drive. Alternatively, a drive solenoid (or a drive motor) and one opening and closing plate connected to the drive solenoid may be provided, and the opening and closing plate may be configured to open the right-side probability variable area 73 and close the left-side probability variable area 74 when the drive solenoid is off, and close the right-side probability variable area 73 and open the left-side probability variable area 74 when the drive solenoid is on. By configuring in this way, the balls flowing into the probability variable areas 73 and 74 can be distributed by the drive of one drive mechanism 78, and the playability of the present invention can be realized at a low cost.

<Variation 17: Multiple pseudo intervals in one round>
In the sixth embodiment, the pseudo interval time is set once in one round. Alternatively, the pseudo interval time may be set multiple times in one round. In other words, when the pseudo interval time is set multiple times in one round, the variable winning device 65 may be opened three or more times in the round. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to grasp the number of rounds currently being played.

<Modification 18: A variable winning device that wins with a left hit and a second variable winning device that wins with a right hit>
In the second embodiment, the two variable winning devices 65, 76 are disposed on the right side of the play area. Alternatively, one variable winning device may be disposed in the center of the play area and the other variable winning device may be disposed on the right side of the play area, and the variable winning devices that can win a prize by hitting from the left or right may be configured differently.

<Modification 1: A jackpot in which only one side opens with a 9:2 variable winning device>
In the second embodiment, the two variable winning devices 65, 76 are alternately opened according to the type of big win at the time of the big win. In contrast, even if two variable winning devices 65, 76 are arranged, a big win type may be provided in which only one of the variable winning devices 65, 76 is opened.

<Modification 20: Uniformity of Pseudo Interval Time>
In the sixth embodiment, the interval time between the rounds of the jackpot and the closing time of the pseudo-interval that closes during the round are configured to be the same time. In contrast, the interval time between the rounds of the jackpot and the closing time of the pseudo-interval that closes during the round may be any time (mode) as long as it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the two times. Specifically, when the interval time between the rounds of the jackpot is 2 seconds, the pseudo-interval time is set between 1 second and 3 seconds, or the interval time between the rounds of the jackpot is executed at a plurality of times (for example, 1 second or 2 seconds), and the pseudo-interval time is also executed at a period of time equal to the plurality of times (for example, 1 second or 2 seconds). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of rounds being executed, and even if the round in which the probability change area 73, 74 is set to be valid is recognized, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether the probability change state is given or not.

<Modification 21: One-sided continuous effective (non-alternating)>
In the above embodiment, the right side probability change area 73 and the left side probability change area 74 are alternately set as valid in each round during a jackpot. Alternatively, either one of the probability change areas 73, 74 may be set as valid continuously, or only one of the probability change areas 73, 74 may be set as valid. By configuring in this way, the variation of the valid patterns of the probability change areas 73, 74 is enriched according to the jackpot type, making it difficult (impossible) for the player to recognize which jackpot type he has won, creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess in which game state he is playing, thereby improving the interest of the game.

<Modification 22: Validity and invalidity of one specific area for one big prize slot>
In the first embodiment, two probability change areas 73, 74 are provided in one variable winning device 65, and one of the probability change areas 73, 74 is set to be valid for each round of the big win, and the other is set to be invalid. In contrast, one variable winning device 65 may be configured to have one probability change area, and the probability change area is set to be valid or set to be valid for each round of the big win, and a probability change state may be generated when the ball passes through the valid probability change area.

<Modification 23: Valid Rounds are Fixed>
In the first embodiment, two probability variable areas 73, 74 are provided in one variable winning device 65, and one of the probability variable areas 73, 74 is set to be valid for each round based on the type of big win, and the other is set to be invalid. In contrast, the rounds in which the probability variable areas 73, 74 are valid for all big wins may be fixed, and only the opening and closing patterns of the probability variable area opening and closing plates 73a, 74a may be changed to give a probability variable state.

<Modification 24: Multiple opening and closing patterns of Special Diagram 2>
In the first embodiment, the jackpot type for the second special symbol is configured with only one type of opening and closing pattern of the probability change areas 73, 74 (i.e., the opening and closing pattern "Y2" of "time reduction C" and "latent probability change C") to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the probability change state has been granted. In contrast, the second special symbol may also be configured with a jackpot type (e.g., "time reduction D" and "latent probability change D") with an opening and closing pattern different from the opening and closing pattern of "Y2" (e.g., "Y3" corresponding to "X2"), as in the case of the first special symbol, to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the ball has passed through the probability change areas 73, 74 that are set effectively.

<Variation 25: Pattern in which all probability change areas are closed>
In the first embodiment, in the case of a big win, one of the probability change areas 73, 74 is always opened. In contrast, an opening and closing pattern (closed pattern) in which both probability change areas 73, 74 are closed may be provided.

<Variation 26: Double attacker without connecting path>
In the second embodiment, two variable winning devices 65, 76 are provided, and the insides of the devices are connected by a communication passage 77. In contrast, an opening/closing plate for another variable winning device may be provided directly above (directly below) the opening/closing plate for one variable winning device, and two variable winning devices may be provided so that the balls flowing in from each opening/closing plate immediately join each other. By configuring in this way, the need for a communication passage is eliminated, and the installation space required when two variable winning devices are provided can be reduced, and manufacturing costs can be reduced.

<Variation 27: Electric Chew Attacker>
In the first embodiment, the variable winning device 65 is configured to provide the variable winning areas 73 and 74 in which the opening and closing plate 65b is closed during normal times so that the ball does not enter the large winning hole 65a provided therein, and the opening and closing plate 65b is opened based on a jackpot so that the ball enters the large winning hole 65a provided therein, and the probability variable state is provided when the ball passes through the validly set variable winning areas 73 and 74. In contrast, a so-called electric chute type variable winning device may be provided in which the ball is more likely to enter during rotation and is less likely to enter during non-rotation than during rotation, and the variable winning areas 73 and 74 may be provided inside the variable winning device. In addition, the variable winning areas 73 and 74 may be closed or disabled during normal times so that the ball does not pass through the validly set variable winning areas 73 and 74, and the probability variable state may not be provided even if the ball could enter during normal times.

<Modification 28: Variable winning device 65 and variable probability area are separate>
In the first embodiment, the variable winning device 65 is configured to have the variable winning areas 73, 74. In contrast, the variable winning areas 73, 74 may be arranged in a mechanism (for example, a collecting path plate that collects winning balls) on the back side of the game board 13 that is separate from the variable winning device 65. By configuring in this way, the design freedom of the variable winning device 65 and the variable winning areas 73, 74 can be improved.

<Modification 29: One variable area version of the seventh embodiment>
In the seventh embodiment, the variable winning device 65 is provided with a front side variable probability area 73e and a back side variable probability area 74e, and is configured so that the ball can pass through each of them, and one of the variable probability areas 73e, 74e is set to be valid while the other variable probability area 74e, 73e is set to be invalid, and a probability variable state is given when the ball passes through the valid variable probability area 73e, 74e. In contrast, the variable winning device 65 may be configured so that only the front side variable probability area 73e is arranged and the innermost discharge passage 75a is arranged on the inner side of the front side as viewed from the front. By configuring in this way, even with only one opening and closing plate 73f, the front side variable probability area 73e and the innermost discharge passage 75a overlap when viewed from the front of the game board 13, and the front side variable probability area 73e is opened, making it difficult for the player to recognize whether the ball has passed through the front side variable probability area 73e or the innermost discharge passage 75a.

<Modification 30: version of the seventh embodiment without an innermost discharge passage>
In the seventh embodiment, the variable winning device 65 is provided with a front side variable region 73e, a back side variable region 74e, and an innermost discharge passage 75a, and the balls that flow into the variable winning device 65 flow into one of the regions or passages. In contrast, the innermost discharge passage 75a may be eliminated, and the balls may flow into either the front side variable region 73e or the back side variable region 74e. In this case, it is preferable that the opening and closing plate that closes each variable region 73e, 74e is an opening and closing plate that opens the other variable region 74e, 73e when one of the variable regions 73e, 74e is closed. By configuring in this way, the balls that flow into the variable winning device 65 can be made to flow into one of the variable regions 73e, 74e, and can be configured to be always discharged from the large winning opening 65a via one of the variable regions 73e, 74e.

<Modification 31: Opening and closing the discharge passage>
In the above embodiment, the opening and closing plates 73a and 74a are provided in the probability change areas 73 and 74, respectively, and the opening and closing plates 73a and 74a are opened and closed to control whether or not the ball flows into the probability change areas 73e and 74e. In contrast, the discharge passage 75 may be provided upstream (nearby) of the probability change areas 73 and 74, and the opening and closing plate may be disposed in the discharge passage 75. In this case, when the opening and closing plate is in an open state, the ball flows down the discharge passage 75, while when the opening and closing plate is in a closed state, the ball does not flow down the discharge passage 75, but flows down the probability change areas 73 and 74 downstream of the discharge passage 75.

In the above embodiment, each command is sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to display, but the main control device 110 may send commands directly to the display control device 114. Also, the voice lamp control device 113 may be connected to the display control device 114, and commands instructing the display control device 114 to output each sound and turn on the lamp may be sent to the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 may be configured as a single control device. By configuring them as a single control device, the number of parts can be reduced, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, a case was described in which a "reserved change notice" was performed on the execution pattern and the reserved pattern to determine whether or not there is a variable performance that will be a jackpot during the variable performance of the third pattern (special pattern) that is reserved and executed in response to the ball entering the special pattern 1 winning port 64b or the special pattern 2 winning port 64c (start winning). In contrast, the player may be notified of whether or not there is a variable performance that will be a jackpot during the variable performance of the third pattern using the normal pattern reserved lamp 84 or the third pattern display device 81, etc., in addition to or instead of whether or not there is a variable performance that will be a jackpot during the variable performance of the third pattern. This allows the player to know whether or not there is a variable display that will be a hit among the variable displays of the reserved normal patterns, or among the variable displays of the normal patterns that are being executed and reserved. Therefore, it is possible to guess whether or not the normal pattern will be a hit before the variable display of the normal pattern is executed. Some gaming machines enhance playability by determining whether or not a normal symbol wins, and this is particularly effective for such gaming machines.

In the above embodiment, a case was described in which the demo performance displayed a stopped third pattern consisting of a main pattern without a number from "0" to "9", but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the demo performance may display a stopped third pattern consisting of a main pattern with a number or a main pattern without a number in a semi-transparent state. It may also be a performance in which only the back image changes without displaying the third pattern. It may also be a performance in which a character or back image that is completely different from the third pattern or back image used in the variable performance is displayed.

In the above embodiment, the third symbol display device 81, which performs the variable performance, is used to execute the "reserve change notice", which is one form of the continuous notice performance. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. A fourth symbol display device other than the third symbol display device 81 may be provided in the pachinko machine 10, and the fourth symbol may be displayed on the fourth symbol display device in conjunction with the variable performance performed by the third symbol display device 81, to execute a continuous notice performance (hereinafter, "reserve change notice" is included in the "continuous notice performance") that is executed across multiple variable performances, different from the "reserve change notice" or "reserve change notice". In this case, the fourth symbol display device may be controlled by the display control device 114 or the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, a role different from each movable role that operates in response to various performances may be provided in the pachinko machine 10, and the role may be operated in a predetermined manner in conjunction with the variable performance to execute the continuous notice performance. In addition, the continuous preview performance may be executed by outputting a sound for the continuous preview performance from the audio output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 under the control of the audio lamp control device 113, or the continuous preview performance may be executed by lighting or blinking the illumination units 29 to 33 of the pachinko machine 10 in conjunction with the variable performance.

As a result, each time a variable performance (dynamic display) is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (and the special symbol display device 37), the fourth symbol display device displays symbols in succession, the role device operates in a predetermined manner, a sound is output from the audio output device 226, or the illumination units 29 to 33 light up or flash, giving the player a sense of expectation of a big win. In addition, the player normally continues playing while gazing at the third symbol display device 81 where the variable performance is performed, but the continuous advance notice performance is performed by the display of symbols by the fourth symbol display device separate from the third symbol display device 81, the operation of the role device, the audio output from the audio output device 226, or the lighting or flashing of the illumination units 29 to 33, so the player can easily recognize that a different performance than usual has been performed. In addition, the continuous advance notice performance can be easily performed with simple control such as the display of symbols by the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the role device, the audio output from the audio output device 226, or the lighting or flashing of the illumination units 29 to 33.

In addition, if the continuous preview performance is performed by audio output from the audio output device 226 or by lighting or blinking the illumination units 29 to 33, the control of the continuous preview performance is performed by the audio lamp control device 113, so by having the main control device 110 perform the win/lose judgment at the time of the initial winning and the lottery processing at the start of the fluctuation, having the audio lamp control device 113 perform the continuous preview performance, and having the display control device 114 perform the fluctuation performance, when the continuous preview performance is performed by the pachinko machine 10, each control device can be assigned to each process. This prevents the load from being concentrated on one control device, and the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be kept low.

The continuous preview performance may be performed by combining at least two of the following: display of the symbols for the continuous preview performance on the third symbol display device 81, display of the symbols for the continuous preview performance on the fourth symbol display device, operation of the role in a predetermined mode, audio output from the audio output device 226, and lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33, and controlling them in conjunction with each other. This allows a more diverse continuous preview performance to be performed. In addition, by changing the method of performing the continuous preview performance (display by the third symbol display device 81, display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of the role, audio output from the audio output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33, or a combination thereof), multiple continuous preview performance modes may be prepared that are selected according to the game state after the continuous preview performance ends ("15R sure-win", "15R latent sure-win", "15R time-saving jackpot", "7R latent sure-win", "7R time-saving jackpot", miss).

In the above embodiment, when a win (start win) occurs in the special winning slot 64b or the special winning slot 64c, the main control unit 110 sends to the voice lamp control unit 113 the reserved ball count command that notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 of the reserved ball count that has been increased by "1", including each counter C1 to C3, CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c in response to the start win. However, the type of counter to be included in the reserved ball count command may be a part of the counters C1 to C3, CS1, or may include the values of other counters. In addition, when the main control unit 110 notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 of the values of each counter acquired in response to the start win, information indicating the value of each counter may not be included in the reserved ball count command, but information indicating the value of each counter may be included in a command other than the reserved ball count command, and these values may be notified to the voice lamp control unit 113. The separate command may be a dedicated command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the values of each counter acquired in association with the start winning, or may be a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of other information, such as a change pattern command or a stop pattern command, to which the values of each counter acquired in association with the start winning are added. When notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the values of each counter acquired in association with the start winning as a separate command, the command may include information indicating which of the pending counts the notified counter values relate to. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 can store the values of each counter included in the command in one of the pending information areas 1 to 4 corresponding to that pending count, based on the information on the pending count included in the command.

In the above embodiment, the winning of the special symbol 1 winning port 64b and the special symbol 2 winning port 64c, and the passage through the normal symbol gate 67 are each configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). In addition, the number of reserved balls for the variable performance based on the winning of the special symbol 1 winning port 64b or the special symbol 2 winning port 64c may be displayed in a part of the third symbol display device 81 as a number, or in four divided areas with different modes (e.g., colors or lighting patterns) according to the number of reserved balls, and a light-emitting element such as a lamp may be provided separately from the special symbol display device 37, and the light-emitting element may be used to notify the number of reserved balls.

As shown in the above embodiment, the change presentation, which is the change display of the third pattern, is not limited to vertical scrolling of the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, but may be performed by moving the pattern horizontally or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. The change display of the pattern is not limited to the change presentation of the pattern, but also includes, for example, a presentation display in which one or more characters are displayed in a variety of actions or changes together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third pattern.

In each of the above embodiments, when performing a variation effect, a high-speed variation is displayed in which all of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 scroll through the display at a high speed so that the player cannot see them. However, instead of displaying this high-speed variation, all of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size so that they are not visible to the player, or all of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are displayed randomly.

The present invention may be implemented in a type of pachinko machine that is different from the above embodiment. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly called a two-time right machine or a three-time right machine) in which the expected value of a jackpot is increased until a jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, two or three times) including the first jackpot. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which the player is given a predetermined game value after the jackpot pattern is displayed, with the necessary condition being that the ball enters a predetermined area. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has a winning device with a special area such as a V zone, and the special game state is entered with the necessary condition being that the ball enters the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Slot machines are well known in that, for example, after inserting a coin and determining the effective line of symbols, the operation lever is operated to change the symbols, and the stop button is operated to stop and finalize the symbols. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "a slot machine that has a display device that displays a variable display of a string of identification information consisting of multiple identification information and then displays the finalized identification information, in which the variable display of the identification information is started due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., an operation lever), the variable display of the identification information is stopped and finalized due to the operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated, provided that the combination of identification information at the time of the stop is a specific one." In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins, medals, etc.

An example of a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine is one that has a display device that displays a pattern sequence consisting of multiple patterns in a variable manner and then displays the pattern in a fixed manner, but does not have a handle for shooting balls. In this case, after a specified amount of balls are inserted based on a specified operation (button operation), the pattern starts to change due to, for example, the operation of an operating lever, and the pattern change is stopped due to, for example, the operation of a stop button or after a specified time has passed, and a special game is generated in which a specified gaming value is awarded to the player, provided that the fixed pattern at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot pattern, and a large number of balls are paid out to the player in a receiving tray at the bottom. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, the gaming hall can handle only the balls as the gaming value, which can eliminate problems seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities due to the separate handling of medals and balls as the gaming value, and the restrictions on the location of gaming machines.

The following describes the gaming machine of the present invention as well as various inventive concepts included in the above-described embodiments.
<Group A: Switch between enabling and disabling specific areas>
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a gaming medium such as a gaming ball is fired toward a gaming area provided on a gaming board, and a win/lose lottery is held based on whether the gaming ball enters one of a number of ball entry ports provided in the gaming area. If the win/lose lottery results in an advantageous state such as a win, a variable ball entry means which is normally closed is opened, and a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, there is a pachinko machine that provides a special area through which the gaming ball that has flowed into the variable ball entry means can pass, and that controls the opening and closing of the special area with an opening and closing member or the like, and when the gaming ball passes through the special area, generates a special gaming value based on a second advantageous state that is different from the predetermined gaming value based on the advantageous state.

In addition, some of the above pachinko machines execute a normal notification mode in which the second advantageous state will not occur, without informing the player of whether or not the second advantageous state will occur, even if the second advantageous state occurs. In other words, a presentation is executed as if the second advantageous state will not occur for the player, creating a gameplay that requires the player to guess whether or not the second advantageous state will be granted, thereby increasing the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

However, the above gaming machine is configured to always generate the second advantageous state when the gaming ball passes through the special area, so the player will recognize that the second advantageous state will occur when he or she visually confirms that the gaming ball has passed through the special area. For this reason, if the normal notification mode is executed after the player recognizes that the second advantageous state has occurred due to the gaming ball passing through the special area, the player will not be able to enjoy the game as expected, and may instead lose interest in the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The inventions in Group A were made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aim to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

A launching means (e.g., a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball;
A ball entry means (for example, a special winning hole 64b) into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter;
An information acquisition means (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 203d) for acquiring predetermined information due to a game ball entering the ball entry means;
A determination means (e.g., a jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A game state changing means (e.g., a big win end process (S415)) for changing the game state by using the judgment result of the judgment means;
When the game state is changed by the game state changing means, a notification means (e.g., a third symbol display device 81) executes a state suggestion notification (e.g., a "probability change notification performance mode") that suggests the game state to the player;
A variable ball entry means (e.g., a variable winning device 65) that can be changed between a first state in which it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter;
By using the judgment result by the judgment means, advantageous state means (e.g., jackpot processing (S103)) for changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot state);
In a gaming machine having a special area (for example, a right-side variable area 73 and a left-side variable area 74) through which the gaming ball flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass,
The game state changing means includes:
A second advantageous state means (e.g., a probability change transition flag 203i) capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state generated by the advantageous state means,
The advantageous state means includes:
A special area switching means for switching whether or not the special area is enabled (for example, turning on a right probability variable effective flag 203g or a left probability variable effective flag 203h),
The second advantageous state means includes:
When the game ball passes through the special area that is set to be effective by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is generated,
When the game ball passes through the special area that is not set to be effective by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is not generated,
The notification means includes:
A gaming machine A0 is characterized by being equipped with a suggestion notification non-execution means (for example, a "latent probability change presentation mode" based on winning "latent probability change A") that does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state when the gaming ball passes through the special area that has been enabled by the special area switching means.

According to the gaming machine A0, a game ball is launched by a launching means, and the game ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the ball entry means, and the information acquisition means acquires predetermined information due to the game ball entering the ball entry means. The predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means is then judged by a judging means, and the game state is changed by the game state changing means by using the judgment result of the judging means, and when the game state is changed by the game state changing means, a state suggestion announcement is executed by the notification means to inform the player of the game state. In addition, a variable ball entry means is provided that can be changed between a first state in which it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter, and the advantageous state means changes the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state by using the judgment result of the judging means. In addition, a special area is provided through which the game ball flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass. Here, the second advantageous state means provided in the game state changing means can generate a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means. Also, the special area switching means provided in the advantageous state means switches whether or not to enable the special area. Then, when the game ball passes through a special area that is set to be effective by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state means generates the second advantageous state, while when the game ball passes through a special area that is not set to be effective by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state means is configured not to generate the second advantageous state. Then, the suggestion notification non-execution means provided in the notification means does not execute a state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state at the timing when the game ball passes through the special area that is set to be effective by the special area switching means. That is, even if the game ball passes through a special area, if the special area is not effective, it is possible to prevent the second advantageous state from being generated, and even if the game ball passes through a special area that is set to be effective, the player is not suggested that the second advantageous state will be generated at that timing. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot occur even if the player recognizes that the gaming ball has passed through the special area. If the suggestion notification non-execution means does not execute a state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state at the time when the gaming ball passes through the enabled special area, preventing the player from recognizing that the second advantageous state is occurring, the player will not be able to recognize whether the second advantageous state will occur based on the gaming ball's passage through the special area alone. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not they are playing in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine A0,
The advantageous state means includes:
a unit game execution means (e.g., a big win process (S103)) for executing a unit game (e.g., one round) multiple times in the advantageous state of one, which changes the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state;
The special area switching means
A unit game activation means for activating the special area in at least one of the unit games (for example, the second round of "latent probability fluctuation B");
The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that it is provided with an effective suggestion non-execution means (for example, non-notification of the effective setting of the probability change areas 73, 74) that does not suggest that the special area is effective by the unit game effective means.

According to the gaming machine A1, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A0, the following effect is achieved. That is, the unit game execution means provided in the advantageous state means executes a unit game in which the variable ball entry means is changed from the first state to the second state multiple times in one advantageous state. Then, the unit game validity means provided in the special area switching means makes the special area valid in at least one unit game, and the validity suggestion non-execution means also provided in the special area switching means does not suggest that the special area is valid by the unit game validity means. As a result, the special area is valid in one of the unit games in the advantageous state, and the game ball is caused to flow into the special area during the unit game while the validity is not suggested, thereby generating a second advantageous state. Therefore, it is not possible to recognize whether the second advantageous state occurs or not just by the passage of the game ball through the special area. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine A1,
The special area is
The first special area (for example, the right special area 73),
A second special area (e.g., a left special area 74) different from the first special area,
The special area switching means
A gaming machine A2, characterized in that in a given unit game, either the first special area or the second special area is activated, and the other is not activated.

Gaming machine A2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine A1. That is, a first special area and a second special area different from the first special area are provided as special areas, and a special area switching means is configured to activate either the first special area or the second special area in a given unit game, and not the other. In this way, by providing multiple effective patterns of special areas, it is possible to make it difficult to tell which first special area or which second special area is set as effective, and as a result, it has the effect of creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he is playing in the second advantageous state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In any one of the gaming machines A0 to A2,
The second advantageous state means includes:
When the determining means determines that the first lottery result (for example, the lottery result of "latent probability fluctuation A") is capable of generating the second advantageous state, a passing means (for example, turning on the right probability fluctuation effective flag 203g and turning on the right probability fluctuation area solenoid 73b) that passes the game ball to the special area that is effective during the advantageous state based on the first lottery result;
The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that it is equipped with a passage prevention means (for example, turning on the right special probability activation flag 203g and turning off the right special probability activation area solenoid 73b) that prevents the game ball from passing through the special area that is valid during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result when the judgment means judges that the second lottery result (for example, the lottery result of ``time reduction A'') does not generate the second advantageous state.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A0 to A2, the following effect is achieved. That is, when the determination means determines that the first lottery result is capable of generating the second advantageous state, the effective time passing means provided in the second advantageous state means is configured to pass the gaming ball through the effective special area during the advantageous state based on the first lottery result. On the other hand, when the determination means determines that the second lottery result is not capable of generating the second advantageous state, the passing prevention means provided in the second advantageous state means is configured to prevent the gaming ball from passing through the effective special area during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result. That is, when the first lottery result is capable of generating the second advantageous state, the gaming ball is passed through the effective special area to generate the second advantageous state, while when the second lottery result is not capable of generating the second advantageous state, the gaming ball is prevented from passing through the effective special area to prevent the second advantageous state from being generated. This allows the second advantageous state to be generated depending on whether or not the game ball passes through a valid special area, but by configuring the game so that the second advantageous state does not occur even if the game ball passes through a special area if the special area is not valid, it is possible to create gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not they are playing in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine A3,
A first opening/closing means (e.g., a right special area opening/closing plate 73a) for opening and closing the first special area;
A second opening/closing means (for example, a left special area opening/closing plate 74a) for opening and closing the second special area,
The valid time passing means is
When the first special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the first opening/closing means is opened to allow the game balls to flow into the first special area;
A gaming machine A4, characterized in that when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is opened to allow gaming balls to flow into the second special area.

Gaming machine A4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine A3. That is, the first opening/closing means opens and closes the first special area, and the second opening/closing means opens and closes the second special area. Then, when the first special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the effective-time passing means opens the first opening/closing means to allow the gaming ball to flow into the first special area, and when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is opened to allow the gaming ball to flow into the second special area. This has the effect that when a second advantageous state is to be generated, the second advantageous state can be appropriately generated by passing the gaming ball through the enabled special area.

In the gaming machine A4,
The passage prevention means is
When the first special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the first opening/closing means is closed to prevent game balls from flowing into the first special area,
A gaming machine A5 characterized in that when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is closed to prevent game balls from flowing into the second special area.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A4, the following effect is achieved. That is, when the first special area is enabled by the special game switching means, the passage prevention means closes the first opening and closing means to prevent the game ball from flowing into the first special area. Similarly, when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the passage prevention means closes the second opening and closing means to prevent the game ball from flowing into the second special area. In this way, by not allowing the game ball to pass through the enabled special area when the second advantageous state is not generated, it is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot be generated even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball into the special area. Therefore, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be increased.

In gaming machine A4 or A5,
The passage prevention means is
When the first special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is opened to allow the game balls to flow into the second special area;
A gaming machine A6, characterized in that when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the first opening/closing means is opened to allow gaming balls to flow into the first special area.

Gaming machine A6 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine A4 or A5. That is, when the first special area is enabled by the special game switching means, the passage blocking means opens the second opening/closing means to allow the game ball to flow into the second special area. Similarly, when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the passage blocking means opens the first opening/closing means to allow the game ball to flow into the first special area. In this way, by allowing the game ball to pass through an ineffective special area when the second advantageous state is not to be generated, it is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot be generated even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball into the special area. Therefore, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In any one of gaming machines A3 to A6,
The second advantageous state means includes:
A valid pattern determination means (e.g., a probability variable area valid table 202g) for determining whether or not to activate the special area for each unit game using the determination result by the determination means;
An opening/closing pattern determination means (e.g., a probability change area opening/closing table 202f) for determining whether or not to allow a game ball to flow into the special area for each unit game using the determination result by the determination means;
an opening/closing pattern uniformity means (e.g., opening/closing pattern "X1") for uniformly setting the opening/closing pattern of the special area determined by the opening/closing pattern determination means between the first lottery result and the second lottery result;
A gaming machine A7 is characterized by comprising an effective pattern mismatch means (e.g., effective patterns "A" and "B") that causes the effective pattern of the special area determined by the effective pattern determination means to differ between the first lottery result and the second lottery result.

Gaming machine A7 has the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machines A3 to A6. That is, the effective pattern determination means provided in the second advantageous state means uses the judgment result by the judgment means to determine whether or not to activate the special area for each unit game. Also, the opening/closing pattern determination means also provided in the second advantageous state means uses the judgment result by the judgment means to determine whether or not to allow game balls to flow into the special area for each unit game. Then, the opening/closing pattern uniform means makes the opening/closing patterns of the special area determined by the opening/closing pattern determination means uniform between the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the effective pattern mismatch means makes the effective patterns of the special area determined by the effective pattern determination means different between the first lottery result and the second lottery result. This has the effect of making the opening and closing patterns of the special area the same for the first and second lottery results, making it impossible to distinguish the lottery results from the opening and closing patterns alone, while making the effective patterns of the special area different for the first and second lottery results, making it difficult to tell whether the second advantageous state will occur, creating a gameplay experience that allows the player to guess whether or not they are playing in the second advantageous state, thereby increasing the fun of the game.

In any one of gaming machines A3 to A7,
A display means (e.g., a special symbol display device 37) for displaying the first lottery result and the second lottery result;
A gaming machine A8 is characterized by comprising a result discrimination difficult means for making the first lottery result or the second lottery result difficult to discern based on the display result by the display means (for example, 127 display patterns for "Time Reduction C" and 127 display patterns for "Latent Probability Variation C", each of which is a random pattern with no regularity using 8 LEDs).

Gaming machine A8 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines A3 to A7. That is, the display means displays the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the result difficult to distinguish means makes it difficult to distinguish the first lottery result or the second lottery result based on the display result by the display means. As a result, even if the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed, by making it difficult to distinguish which lottery result it is, if the player is prevented from recognizing that the second advantageous state is occurring, it is not possible to recognize whether the second advantageous state will occur just from the passage of the gaming ball through the special area, and it is also not possible to recognize whether the second advantageous state will occur based on the display result by the display means. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not they are playing in the second advantageous state, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be increased.

In any one of gaming machines A0 to A8,
The special area is
A gaming machine A9 characterized by being arranged in a position visible to a player.

Gaming machine A9 has the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machines A0 to A8. That is, a special area is arranged in a position visible to the player. This has the effect of allowing the player to visually confirm that the gaming ball has passed through the special area, creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not the second advantageous state will occur, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In any one of gaming machines A4 to A9,
The first opening/closing means and/or the second opening/closing means are
The gaming machine A10 is characterized by being made of a transparent or translucent material.

Gaming machine A10 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines A4 to A9. That is, the first opening/closing means and/or the second opening/closing means are formed from a transparent or translucent material. This makes it difficult for the player to distinguish the operating state of the first opening/closing means and/or the second opening/closing means, making it difficult to recognize whether the first opening/closing means is open and allows flow into the first special area, or whether the second opening/closing means is open and allows flow into the second special area. As a result, it becomes difficult to recognize the flow pattern into each special area in advance, creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not they are playing in the second advantageous state, and increasing the interest in the game.

<Group B: Double attacker x chance zone>
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a gaming medium such as a gaming ball is fired toward a gaming area provided on a gaming board, and a win/lose lottery is held based on whether the gaming ball enters one of a number of ball entry ports provided in the gaming area. If the win/lose lottery results in an advantageous state such as a win, a variable ball entry means which is normally closed is opened, and a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, there is a pachinko machine that provides a special area through which gaming balls that have flowed into the variable ball entry means can pass, and that controls the opening and closing of the special area with an opening and closing member or the like, and when a gaming ball passes through the special area, generates a special gaming value based on a second advantageous state that is different from the predetermined gaming value based on the advantageous state.

In addition, some of the above pachinko machines execute a normal notification mode in which the second advantageous state will not occur, without informing the player of whether or not the second advantageous state will occur, even if the second advantageous state occurs. In other words, a presentation is executed as if the second advantageous state will not occur for the player, creating a gameplay that requires the player to guess whether or not the second advantageous state will be granted, thereby increasing the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

However, the above gaming machine is configured to always generate the second advantageous state when the gaming ball passes through the special area, so the player will recognize that the second advantageous state will occur when he or she visually confirms that the gaming ball has passed through the special area. For this reason, if the normal notification mode is executed after the player recognizes that the second advantageous state has occurred due to the gaming ball passing through the special area, it may not be possible to provide the player with the expected interest in the game, and may instead cause the player to lose interest in the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The inventions in Group B were made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aim to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

A launching means (e.g., a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball;
A ball entry means (for example, a special winning hole 64b) into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter;
An information acquisition means (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 203d) for acquiring predetermined information due to a game ball entering the ball entry means;
A determination means (e.g., a jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
a game state changing means for changing a game state by using the judgment result of the judgment means (for example, from a "normal game state" to a "latent probability changing state");
When the game state is changed by the game state changing means, a notification means (e.g., a third symbol display device 81) executes a state suggestion notification (e.g., a "probability change notification performance mode") to suggest the game state to the player;
a first variable ball entry means (e.g., a variable winning device 65) and a second variable ball entry means (e.g., a second variable winning device 76) that can be changed between a first state in which it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter;
By using the result of the judgment by the judgment means, advantageous state means for changing one or both of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state (for example, a jackpot state) (for example, opening the large prize opening 65a and the second large prize opening 76a at the time of a jackpot);
In a gaming machine having a special area (for example, a right side variable area 73 and a left side variable area 74) through which a gaming ball that has flowed into the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means can pass,
The game state changing means includes:
A second advantageous state means (e.g., generation of a "probability fluctuation state") capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state generated by the advantageous state means,
The advantageous state means includes:
A special area switching means for switching whether or not the special area is enabled (for example, turning on a right probability variable effective flag 203g or a left probability variable effective flag 203h),
The second advantageous state means includes:
When the game ball passes through the special area that is set to be effective by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is generated,
When the game ball passes through the special area that is not set to be effective by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is not generated.
The notification means includes:
The gaming machine B0 is characterized by being equipped with a suggestion notification non-execution means (for example, a "latent probability change presentation mode" based on winning "latent probability change A") that does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state when the gaming ball passes through the special area that has been enabled by the special area switching means.

According to the gaming machine B0, a game ball is launched by a launching means, and the game ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the ball entry means, and the information acquisition means acquires predetermined information due to the game ball entering the ball entry means. The predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means is then judged by a judging means, and the game state is changed by the game state changing means by using the judgment result of the judging means, and when the game state is changed by the game state changing means, a state suggestion announcement is executed by the notification means to inform the player of the game state. In addition, a first variable ball entry means and a second variable ball entry means are provided that can be changed between a first state in which it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter, and by using the judgment result of the judging means, one or both of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are set to an advantageous state from the first state to the second state by the advantageous state means. In addition, a special area is provided through which the game ball that has flowed into the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means can pass. Here, a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means can be generated by the second advantageous state means provided in the game state changing means. Here, the special area switching means provided in the advantageous state means switches whether or not to enable the special area. Then, when the game ball passes through the special area that is set to be enabled by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is generated by the second advantageous state means, while when the game ball passes through a special area that is not set to be enabled by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is not generated by the second advantageous state means. Then, the suggestive notification non-execution means provided in the notification means does not execute a state suggestive notification corresponding to the second advantageous state at the timing when the game ball passes through the special area that is set to be enabled by the special area switching means. That is, even if the game ball passes through the special area, the second advantageous state will not occur unless the special area is valid, and even if the game ball passes through a special area that is set to be valid, the player is not suggested that the second advantageous state will occur at that timing. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot occur even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball into the special area. Therefore, when the suggestion notification non-execution means does not execute a state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state and prevents the player from recognizing that the second advantageous state is occurring, the player cannot recognize whether the second advantageous state will occur or not just by the game ball passing through the special area. In addition, by granting the second advantageous state by a combination of the opening and closing of the variable ball entry means 2 and the validity or invalidity of the special area 2, the player cannot recognize that the second advantageous state will occur unless the variations of each combination are grasped in advance. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether the second advantageous state will occur, and it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine B0,
The advantageous state means includes:
A unit game execution means (e.g., a big win process (S103)) that executes a unit game (e.g., one round) multiple times to change the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state in the advantageous state of 1;
The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that it is equipped with an alternating ball entry means (for example, opening the variable ball entry device 65 and the second variable ball entry device 76 without any interval time) that alternately and seamlessly switches the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means to the second state each time the unit game is executed by the unit game execution means in a specified advantageous state.

Gaming machine B1 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine B0. That is, in one advantageous state, a unit game that changes the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state is executed multiple times by the unit game execution means provided in the advantageous state means. Then, each time a unit game is executed in a predetermined advantageous state by the unit game execution means, the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are alternately and uninterruptedly set to the second state by the alternating ball entry means provided in the advantageous state means.

Conventionally, when an advantageous state is eliminated by opening or closing one of the variable ball entry means, it is necessary to provide an interval time associated with the closing of the variable ball entry means, which takes time to eliminate the advantageous state, dragging out the game and risking the player losing interest, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine B1, the alternating ball entry means alternates between the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means for each unit game of a predetermined advantageous state, eliminating the interval time associated with the closing of the variable ball entry means. This has the effect of preventing the player from losing interest because the advantageous state can be quickly consumed and the game does not drag on. In addition, by granting the second advantageous state by a combination of the opening and closing of the variable ball entry means 2 and the activation or deactivation of the special area 2, it is impossible to recognize that the second advantageous state will occur unless the variations of each combination are understood in advance. As a result, in an advantageous state that occurs quickly, it is possible to reduce the player's thinking time while making it difficult to recognize whether the second advantageous state will occur, and it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not they are playing in the second advantageous state, and it has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine B0 or B1,
A first flow path (e.g., a guide passage 72) that allows the game balls that have flowed into the first variable ball entry means to flow down;
A second flow path (e.g., a communication passage 77) for allowing the game balls that have flowed into the second variable ball entry means to flow down;
The gaming machine B2 is characterized by comprising a merging means (e.g., a merging section 77a) that merges the first flow path and the second flow path upstream of the special area.

Gaming machine B2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine B0 or B1. That is, gaming balls that have flowed into the first variable ball entry means flow down through the first flow path, gaming balls that have flowed into the second variable ball entry means flow down through the second flow path, and the first and second flow paths are merged upstream of the special area by the merging means. This allows both gaming balls that have flowed into the first variable ball entry means and gaming balls that have flowed into the second variable ball entry means to flow into the special area. This configuration eliminates the need to provide a special area for each variable ball entry means, which has the effect of reducing the number of parts in the gaming machine and cutting manufacturing costs.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2,
The alternate ball insertion means includes:
A gaming machine B3 characterized in that when the first advantageous state appears and then a new advantageous state appears within a predetermined period of time (for example, during the ``probability changing state'' or ``time shortening state'', i.e., a jackpot with the second special pattern), the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are alternately and uninterruptedly brought into the second state each time the unit game is executed.

Gaming machine B3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines B1 and B2. That is, when an advantageous state is created by the alternating ball entry means, and then a new advantageous state is created within a predetermined period of time, the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are alternately and uninterruptedly set to the second state each time a unit game is executed.

Conventionally, in situations where advantageous states occur consecutively within a given period of time (so-called consecutive wins), players want to play quickly, and in such situations, if the interval time associated with closing the variable ball entry means during an advantageous state takes time, there is a risk that the player will lose interest in the game.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine B3, when a new advantageous state appears within a predetermined period, the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means alternately change to the second state without interruption each time a unit game is executed, and the advantageous state can be quickly consumed. Therefore, in a situation where advantageous states are occurring continuously, the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means alternately change to the second state without interruption, and the player can achieve the rapid game that he or she desires, preventing the player from losing interest in the game and improving the interest of the game. In addition, by granting the second advantageous state by a combination of the opening and closing of the variable ball entry means 2 and the validity or invalidity of the special area 2, it is not possible to recognize that the second advantageous state will occur unless the variations of each combination are grasped in advance. As a result, in an advantageous state that occurs quickly, it is possible to reduce the player's thinking time while making it difficult to recognize whether the second advantageous state will occur, and it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any one of gaming machines B1 to B3,
The special area switching means
A unit game activation means for activating the special area in at least one of the unit games (for example, the second round of "latent probability fluctuation B");
A gaming machine B4 is characterized in that it is provided with an effective suggestion non-execution means (for example, non-notification of the effective setting of the probability change areas 73, 74) that does not suggest that the special area is effective by the unit game effective means.

Gaming machine B4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines B1 to B3. That is, the special area is made effective in at least one unit game by the unit game effective means provided in the special area switching means, and the effective special area is not suggested by the unit game effective means by the effective suggestion non-execution means also provided in the special area switching means. As a result, the special area is made effective in one of the unit games in the advantageous state, and the second advantageous state can be generated by flowing the game ball into the special area during the unit game while the effective special area is not suggested. Therefore, it is not possible to recognize whether the second advantageous state will occur just by the passage of the game ball through the special area. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any one of gaming machines B1 to B4,
The special area is
The first special area (for example, the right special area 73),
A second special area (e.g., a left special area 74) different from the first special area,
The special area switching means
A gaming machine B5, characterized in that in a given unit game, either the first special area or the second special area is activated, and the other is not activated.

Gaming machine B5 has the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machines B1 to B4. That is, a first special area and a second special area different from the first special area are provided as special areas, and a special area switching means is configured to activate either the first special area or the second special area in a given unit game, and not the other. In this way, by providing multiple effective patterns of special areas, it is possible to make it difficult to tell which first special area or which second special area is set as effective, and as a result, it has the effect of creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he is playing in the second advantageous state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In any one of the gaming machines B0 to B5,
The second advantageous state means includes:
When the determining means determines that the first lottery result (for example, the lottery result of "latent probability fluctuation A") is capable of generating the second advantageous state, a passing means (for example, turning on the right probability fluctuation effective flag 203g and turning on the right probability fluctuation area solenoid 73b) that passes the game ball to the special area that is effective during the advantageous state based on the first lottery result;
Gaming machine B6 is characterized in that it is equipped with a passage prevention means (for example, turning on the right special probability activation flag 203g and turning off the right special probability activation area solenoid 73b) that prevents the game ball from passing through the special area that is valid during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result when the judgment means judges that the second lottery result (for example, the lottery result of ``time reduction A'') does not generate the second advantageous state.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B0 to B5, the following effect is achieved. That is, when the determination means determines that the first lottery result is capable of generating the second advantageous state, the effective time passing means provided in the second advantageous state means is configured to pass the gaming ball through the effective special area during the advantageous state based on the first lottery result. On the other hand, when the determination means determines that the second lottery result is not capable of generating the second advantageous state, the passing prevention means provided in the second advantageous state means is configured to prevent the gaming ball from passing through the effective special area during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result. That is, when the first lottery result is capable of generating the second advantageous state, the gaming ball is passed through the effective special area to generate the second advantageous state, while when the second lottery result is not capable of generating the second advantageous state, the gaming ball is prevented from passing through the effective special area to prevent the second advantageous state from being generated. This allows the second advantageous state to be generated depending on whether or not the game ball passes through a valid special area, but by configuring the game so that the second advantageous state does not occur even if the game ball passes through a special area if the special area is not valid, it is possible to create gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not they are playing in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In gaming machine B6,
A first opening/closing means (e.g., a right special area opening/closing plate 73a) for opening and closing the first special area;
A second opening/closing means (for example, a left special area opening/closing plate 74a) for opening and closing the second special area,
The valid time passing means is
When the first special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the first opening/closing means is opened to allow the game balls to flow into the first special area;
A gaming machine B7, characterized in that when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is opened to allow gaming balls to flow into the second special area.

Gaming machine B7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine B6. That is, the first opening/closing means opens and closes the first special area, and the second opening/closing means opens and closes the second special area. Then, when the first special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the effective-time passing means opens the first opening/closing means to allow the gaming ball to flow into the first special area, and when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is opened to allow the gaming ball to flow into the second special area. This has the effect that when a second advantageous state is to be generated, the second advantageous state can be appropriately generated by passing the gaming ball through the enabled special area.

In the gaming machine B7,
The passage prevention means is
When the first special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the first opening/closing means is closed to prevent game balls from flowing into the first special area,
A gaming machine B8 characterized in that when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is closed to prevent game balls from flowing into the second special area.

Gaming machine B8 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine B7. That is, when the first special area is enabled by the special game switching means, the passage blocking means closes the first opening/closing means to prevent the game ball from flowing into the first special area. Similarly, when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the passage blocking means closes the second opening/closing means to prevent the game ball from flowing into the second special area. In this way, by not allowing the game ball to pass through the enabled special area when the second advantageous state is not to be generated, it is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot be generated even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball into the special area. Therefore, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In gaming machine B7 or B8,
The passage prevention means is
When the first special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is opened to allow the game balls to flow into the second special area;
A gaming machine B9 characterized in that, when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the first opening/closing means is opened to allow gaming balls to flow into the first special area.

Gaming machine B9 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine B7 or B8. That is, when the first special area is enabled by the special game switching means, the passage blocking means opens the second opening/closing means to allow the game ball to flow into the second special area. Also, when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the passage blocking means also opens the first opening/closing means to allow the game ball to flow into the first special area. In this way, by allowing the game ball to pass through an ineffective special area when the second advantageous state is not to be generated, it is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot be generated even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball into the special area. Therefore, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In any one of gaming machines B6 to B9,
The second advantageous state means includes:
A valid pattern determination means (e.g., a probability change area valid table 202g) for determining whether or not to activate the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determination means;
An opening/closing pattern determination means (e.g., a probability change area opening/closing table 202f) for determining whether or not to allow a game ball to flow into the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determination means;
an opening/closing pattern uniformity means (e.g., opening/closing pattern "X1") for uniformly setting the opening/closing pattern of the special area determined by the opening/closing pattern determination means between the first lottery result and the second lottery result;
A gaming machine B10 characterized by comprising an effective pattern mismatch means (e.g., effective patterns "A" and "B") that causes the effective pattern of the special area determined by the effective pattern determination means to differ between the first lottery result and the second lottery result.

Gaming machine B10 achieves the following effects in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines B6 to B9. That is, the effective pattern determination means provided in the second advantageous state means uses the result of the determination by the determination means to determine whether or not to activate the special area for each unit game. Also, the opening/closing pattern determination means also provided in the second advantageous state means uses the result of the determination by the determination means to determine whether or not to allow game balls to flow into the special area for each unit game. Then, the opening/closing pattern uniform means makes the opening/closing patterns of the special area determined by the opening/closing pattern determination means uniform between the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the effective pattern mismatch means makes the effective patterns of the special area determined by the effective pattern determination means different between the first lottery result and the second lottery result. This has the effect of making the opening and closing patterns of the special area the same for the first and second lottery results, making it impossible to distinguish the lottery results from the opening and closing patterns alone, while making the effective patterns of the special area different for the first and second lottery results, making it difficult to tell whether the second advantageous state will occur, creating a gameplay experience that allows the player to guess whether or not they are playing in the second advantageous state, thereby increasing the fun of the game.

In any one of gaming machines B6 to B10,
A display means (e.g., a special symbol display device 37) for displaying the first lottery result and the second lottery result;
A gaming machine B11 is characterized by comprising a result discrimination difficult means for making the first lottery result or the second lottery result difficult to discern based on the display result by the display means (for example, 127 display patterns for "Time Reduction C" and 127 display patterns for "Latent Probability Variation C", each of which is a random pattern with no regularity using 8 LEDs).

Gaming machine B11 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines B6 to B10. That is, the display means displays the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the result difficult to distinguish means makes it difficult to distinguish the first lottery result or the second lottery result based on the display result by the display means. As a result, even if the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed, by making it difficult to distinguish which lottery result it is, if the player is prevented from recognizing that the second advantageous state is occurring, it is not possible to recognize whether the second advantageous state will occur just from the passage of the gaming ball through the special area, and it is also not possible to recognize whether the second advantageous state will occur based on the display result by the display means. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not they are playing in the second advantageous state, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be increased.

In any one of the gaming machines B0 to B11,
The special area is
A gaming machine B12 that is disposed in a position visible to a player.

Gaming machine B12 has the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machines B0 to B11. That is, a special area is disposed in a position visible to the player. This has the effect of allowing the player to visually confirm that the gaming ball has passed through the special area, creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not the second advantageous state will occur, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

<Group C: Allocation to two paths by one driving member>
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a gaming medium such as a gaming ball is fired toward a gaming area provided on a gaming board, and a win/lose lottery is held based on whether the gaming ball enters one of a number of ball entry ports provided in the gaming area. If the win/lose lottery results in an advantageous state such as a win, a variable ball entry means which is normally closed is opened, and a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, there is a pachinko machine that provides a special area through which gaming balls that have flowed into the variable ball entry means can pass, and that controls the opening and closing of the special area with an opening and closing member or the like, and when a gaming ball passes through the special area, generates a special gaming value based on a second advantageous state that is different from the predetermined gaming value based on the advantageous state.

In addition, some of the above pachinko machines execute a normal notification mode in which the second advantageous state will not occur, without informing the player of whether or not the second advantageous state will occur, even if the second advantageous state occurs. In other words, a presentation is executed as if the second advantageous state will not occur for the player, creating a gameplay that requires the player to guess whether or not the second advantageous state will be granted, thereby increasing the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

However, the above gaming machine is configured to always generate the second advantageous state when the gaming ball passes through the special area, so the player will recognize that the second advantageous state will occur when he or she visually confirms that the gaming ball has passed through the special area. For this reason, if the normal notification mode is executed after the player recognizes that the second advantageous state has occurred due to the gaming ball passing through the special area, it may not be possible to provide the player with the expected interest in the game, and may even cause the player to lose interest in the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The inventions in Group C were made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aim to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

A launching means (e.g., a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball;
A ball entry means (for example, a special winning hole 64b) into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter;
An information acquisition means (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 203d) for acquiring predetermined information due to a game ball entering the ball entry means;
A determination means (e.g., a jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A game state changing means (e.g., a big win end process (S415)) for changing the game state by using the judgment result of the judgment means;
When the game state is changed by the game state changing means, a notification means (e.g., a third symbol display device 81) executes a state suggestion notification (e.g., a "probability change notification performance mode") to suggest the game state to the player;
A variable ball entry means (e.g., a variable winning device 65) that can be changed between a first state in which it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter;
and an advantageous state means (e.g., a jackpot process (S103)) for changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state by using the result of the judgment by the judgment means,
The game state changing means includes:
In a gaming machine equipped with a second advantageous state means (e.g., a probability change transition flag 203i) capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state generated by the advantageous state means,
A first special area (e.g., a right-side variable area 73) and a second special area (e.g., a left-side variable area 74) through which the game ball flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass;
An opening/closing means (e.g., a special area opening/closing plate 78c) capable of opening and closing the first special area or the second special area;
A driving means (e.g., a motor 78a for opening and closing the variable probability area) for driving the opening and closing means;
A special area switching means (for example, turning on a right probability change effective flag 203g or a left probability change effective flag 203h) for switching between the validity and invalidity of the first special area or the second special area,
The second advantageous state means includes:
When the second advantageous state is generated, the opening/closing means is driven by the driving means to open the first special area or the second special area that has been activated;
When the second advantageous state is not generated, the opening/closing means is driven by the driving means to close the first special area or the second special area that has been activated;
The notification means includes:
The gaming machine C0 is characterized by comprising a suggestion notification non-execution means (for example, a "latent probability change presentation mode" based on winning "latent probability change A") that does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state when the gaming ball passes through the first special area or the second special area that is set effectively by the special area switching means.

According to the gaming machine C0, a game ball is launched by a launching means, and the game ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the ball entry means, and the information acquisition means acquires predetermined information due to the game ball entering the ball entry means. The predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means is then judged by the judgment means, and the game state is changed by the game state change means by using the judgment result of the judgment means, and when the game state is changed by the game state change means, a state suggestion announcement is executed by the notification means to inform the player of the game state. In addition, a variable ball entry means is provided that can be changed to a first state in which it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter, and a second state in which the game ball can enter, and by using the judgment result by the judgment means, the advantageous state means changes the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state. In addition, a second advantageous state means provided in the game state change means can generate a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means. Here, a first special area and a second special area through which the game ball that has flowed into the variable ball entry means can pass are provided, and the first special area or the second special area is configured to be openable and closable by the opening/closing means, and the opening/closing means is driven to open and close by the drive means. Also, the special area switching means switches between the validity and invalidity of the first special area or the second special area. Then, when the second advantageous state is generated, the second advantageous state means drives the opening/closing means by the drive means to open the first special area or the second special area that has been made valid. Also, when the second advantageous state is not generated, the second advantageous state means drives the opening/closing means by the drive means to close the first special area or the second special area that has been made valid. Then, the suggestion notification non-execution means provided in the notification means is configured to not execute a state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state at the timing when the game ball passes through the first special area or the second special area that has been set to be valid by the special area switching means. That is, even if the game ball passes through the first special area or the second special area, the second advantageous state will not occur unless the first special area or the second special area is valid, and even if the game ball passes through the first special area or the second special area that is set to be valid, the player is not suggested that the second advantageous state will occur at that timing. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot occur even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball into the first special area or the second special area. Therefore, when the suggestion notification non-execution means does not execute a state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state and prevents the player from recognizing that the second advantageous state is in place, the player cannot recognize whether the second advantageous state will occur or not just from the passage of the game ball through the first special area or the second special area. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and there is an effect of increasing the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine C0,
The second advantageous state means includes:
When the second advantageous state is generated, the opening/closing means is driven by the driving means to close the second special area or the first special area that is not enabled;
A gaming machine C1 characterized in that, when the second advantageous state is not generated, the opening/closing means is driven by the driving means to open the second special area or the first special area that is not activated.

The gaming machine C1 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C0. That is, when the second advantageous state is generated, the second advantageous state means drives the opening and closing means by the drive means to close the second special area or the first special area that is not set to be valid. Also, when the second advantageous state is not generated, the second advantageous state means similarly drives the opening and closing means by the drive means to open the second special area or the first special area that is not set to be valid. This makes it possible to close the first special area or the second special area that is not set to be valid and pass the ball through the first special area or the second special area that is set to be valid when it is desired to generate the second advantageous state. Therefore, there is an effect that the ball can be passed through the first special area or the second special area that is set to be valid when it is desired to generate the second advantageous state, and the second advantageous state can be reliably generated.

In the gaming machine C0 or C1,
The driving means is
a first direction driving means (e.g., forward driving) for driving the opening/closing means in a first direction to open the first special area and close the second special area;
Gaming machine C2 is characterized in that it is equipped with a second direction driving means (e.g., reverse driving) that drives the opening/closing means in a second direction different from the first direction, thereby opening the second special area and closing the first special area.

Gaming machine C2 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machines C0 or C1. That is, by driving the opening/closing means in a first direction by a first direction driving means provided in the driving means, the first special area is opened and the second special area is closed. Also, by driving the opening/closing means in a second direction different from the first direction by a second direction driving means also provided in the driving means, the second special area is opened and the first special area is closed.

Conventionally, when multiple special areas are provided inside the variable ball entry means and a drive mechanism is provided for each special area, the components of each drive mechanism must be installed in a small space, which can complicate the design of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, the inclusion of the above components increases the number of components used in the gaming machine, which may increase manufacturing costs.

Furthermore, since a drive mechanism is provided in each special area, maintenance work is required for each drive mechanism, which may increase the amount of maintenance work required.

In contrast, with gaming machine C2, the first special area and the second special area can be opened or closed by changing the driving direction of one drive mechanism, which has the effect of simplifying and easily designing the overall configuration of the variable ball entry means without complicating the design of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, since the first special area and the second special area are opened/closed or closed by a single drive mechanism, rather than by multiple drive mechanisms, the number of parts in the gaming machine can be reduced, which has the effect of reducing manufacturing costs.

Furthermore, because the first special area and the second special area are opened, closed, or both by a single drive mechanism, maintenance work only needs to be performed on the single drive mechanism, which has the effect of reducing the amount of maintenance work required for the gaming machine.

In the gaming machine C0 or C1,
The first special area is disposed upstream of the second special area,
The driving means is
Located upstream of the first special area and the second special area,
A first predetermined amount drive means (for example, a 60-pulse drive of the variable probability area opening/closing motor 78a) for opening the second special area and closing the first special area by driving the opening/closing means by a first predetermined amount;
Gaming machine C3 is characterized in that it is equipped with a second predetermined amount drive means (for example, driving the motor 78a for opening and closing the special area by 120 pulses) that drives the opening and closing means by a second predetermined amount that is greater than the first predetermined amount in the same direction as the drive direction based on the first predetermined amount of drive, thereby opening both the first special area and the second special area.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine C0 or C1, gaming machine C3 has the following effects. That is, the first special area is disposed upstream of the second special area, and the drive means is disposed upstream of the first special area and the second special area. Then, the opening/closing means is driven a first predetermined amount by a first predetermined amount drive means provided in the drive means, thereby opening the second special area and closing the first special area. In addition, the opening/closing means is driven a second predetermined amount, which is greater than the first predetermined amount, in the same direction as the drive based on the first predetermined amount by a second predetermined amount drive means also provided in the drive means, thereby opening both the first special area and the second special area. This makes it possible to distribute balls flowing into the first special area or the second special area by the drive amount of one drive mechanism, and the above distribution is possible by the drive amount in one direction of one drive means, which eliminates the need to provide multiple drive means and achieves the playability of the present invention at low cost.

In the gaming machine C0 or C1,
The driving means is
A first drive pattern means for opening the first special area and closing the second special area when the first drive pattern (including the initial position) is selected (for example, when the drive solenoid is turned off, the right side variable area 73 is opened and the left side variable area 74 is closed);
A gaming machine C4 is characterized in that it is equipped with a second drive pattern means for closing the first special area and opening the second special area when a second drive pattern different from the first drive pattern is present (for example, closing the right-side variable probability area 73 and opening the left-side variable probability area 74 when the drive solenoid is turned on).

Gaming machine C4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine C0 or C1. That is, when the first drive pattern is set by the first drive pattern means provided in the drive means, the first special area is opened and the second special area is closed. Also, when the second drive pattern, which is different from the first drive pattern, is set by the second drive pattern means provided in the drive means, the first special area is closed and the second special area is opened. This has the effect that gaming machine balls flowing into the first special area or the second special area can be sorted by each drive pattern of one drive mechanism, and the playability of the present invention can be realized at low cost.

In any one of gaming machines C0 to C4,
The opening and closing means is
A gaming machine C5 characterized in that the first special area and the second special area are closed when the opening/closing means is in the initial position.

Gaming machine C5 has the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machines C0 to C4. That is, the first special area and the second special area are closed by the opening/closing means when the opening/closing means is in its initial position. That is, by configuring the opening/closing means to close both the first special area and the second special area when in its initial position, both special areas can be closed even when the drive means does not operate normally due to a malfunction or the like. This makes it possible to prevent game balls from flowing into the first special area and the second special area even when an abnormality occurs. Therefore, even if the first special area or the second special area is effective when an abnormality occurs, it is possible to prevent the second advantageous state from occurring, and it is possible to prevent unexpected disadvantages from occurring in the gaming facility.

In any one of gaming machines C0 to C5,
The variable ball entry means is
Gaming machine C6 is characterized in that it is provided with an ejection means (e.g., an ejection passage 75) downstream of the first special area and the second special area for ejecting gaming balls outside the variable ball entry means.

Gaming machine C6 has the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machines C0 to C5. That is, the discharge means provided in the variable ball entry means discharges the game balls that flow downstream of the first special area and the second special area out of the variable ball entry means. This allows game balls that have not flowed into the first special area or the second special area to be discharged out of the variable ball entry means as appropriate, and prevents game balls from accumulating in the variable ball entry means. This has the effect of preventing game balls that have accumulated in the variable ball entry means from flowing into the first special area or the second special area, and preventing unexpected disadvantages in the game facility, such as the occurrence of an unintended second advantageous state caused by game balls that have accumulated in the variable ball entry means flowing into the first special area or the second special area.

In any one of gaming machines C0 to C6,
The advantageous state means includes:
a unit game execution means (e.g., a big win process (S103)) for executing a unit game (e.g., one round) multiple times in the advantageous state of one of the game modes, which changes the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state;
The special area switching means
A unit game activation means for activating the special area in at least one of the unit games (for example, the second round of "latent probability fluctuation B");
A gaming machine C7 is characterized in that it is equipped with an effective suggestion non-execution means (for example, non-notification of the effective setting of the probability change areas 73, 74) that does not suggest that the special area is effective by the unit game effective means.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C0 to C6, the following effect is achieved. That is, the unit game execution means provided in the advantageous state means executes a unit game in which the variable ball entry means is changed from the first state to the second state multiple times in one advantageous state. Then, the unit game validity means provided in the special area switching means makes the special area valid in at least one unit game, and the validity suggestion non-execution means also provided in the special area switching means does not suggest that the special area is valid by the unit game validity means. As a result, the special area is valid in one of the unit games in the advantageous state, and the game ball is allowed to flow into the special area during the unit game while the validity is not suggested, thereby generating a second advantageous state. Therefore, it is not possible to recognize whether the second advantageous state occurs or not just by the passage of the game ball through the special area. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of gaming machines C0 to C7,
The special area switching means
A gaming machine C8, characterized in that in a given unit game, either the first special area or the second special area is activated, and the other is not activated.

Gaming machine C8 has the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machines C0 to C7. That is, the special area switching means is configured so that in a given unit game, either the first special area or the second special area is made effective, and the other is not made effective. In this way, by providing multiple effective patterns of special areas, it is possible to make it difficult to tell which of the first special area or the second special area is set to be effective, which has the effect of creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he is playing in the second advantageous state, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In any one of gaming machines C0 to C8,
The second advantageous state means includes:
When the determining means determines that the first lottery result (for example, the lottery result of "latent probability fluctuation A") is capable of generating the second advantageous state, a passing means (for example, turning on the right probability variable effective flag 203g and turning on the right probability variable area solenoid 73b) that passes the game ball to the first special area or the second special area that is effective during the advantageous state based on the first lottery result;
Gaming machine C9 is characterized in that it is equipped with a passage prevention means (for example, turning on the right special chance valid flag 203g and turning off the right special chance area solenoid 73b) that prevents the game ball from passing through to the first special area or the second special area, which are valid, during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result when the judgment means judges that the second lottery result (for example, the lottery result of ``time reduction A'') does not generate the second advantageous state.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C0 to C8, the following effect is achieved. That is, when the determination means determines that the first lottery result is capable of generating the second advantageous state, the effective time passing means provided in the second advantageous state means is configured to pass the gaming ball through the effective first special area or second special area during the advantageous state based on the first lottery result. On the other hand, when the determination means determines that the second lottery result is not capable of generating the second advantageous state, the passing prevention means provided in the second advantageous state means is configured to prevent the gaming ball from passing through the effective first special area or second special area during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result. That is, when the first lottery result is capable of generating the second advantageous state, the gaming ball is passed through the effective first special area or second special area to generate the second advantageous state, while when the second lottery result is not capable of generating the second advantageous state, the gaming ball is prevented from passing through the effective first special area or second special area to prevent the second advantageous state from being generated. This allows the second advantageous state to be generated depending on whether or not the game ball passes through the first or second special area, which is valid, and by configuring the game ball to pass through the first or second special area and not generate the second advantageous state if the first or second special area is not valid, it is possible to create gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not they are playing in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine C9,
The second advantageous state means includes:
A valid pattern determination means (e.g., a probability change area validity table 202g) for determining whether or not to activate the first special area or the second special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determination means;
An opening/closing pattern determination means (e.g., a probability change area opening/closing table 202f) for determining whether or not to allow a game ball to flow into the first special area or the second special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determination means;
an opening/closing pattern uniformity means (e.g., opening/closing pattern "X1") for uniformly setting the opening/closing pattern of the first special area or the second special area by the opening/closing pattern determination means between the first lottery result and the second lottery result;
A gaming machine C10 characterized by comprising an effective pattern mismatch means (e.g., effective patterns "A" and "B") that causes the effective pattern of the first special area or the second special area determined by the effective pattern determination means to differ between the first lottery result and the second lottery result.

Gaming machine C10 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine C9. That is, the effective pattern determination means provided in the second advantageous state means uses the result of the determination by the determination means to determine whether or not to activate the first special area or the second special area for each unit game. Also, the opening/closing pattern determination means also provided in the second advantageous state means uses the result of the determination by the determination means to determine whether or not to allow the game ball to flow into the first special area or the second special area for each unit game. Then, the opening/closing pattern uniformity means makes the opening/closing patterns of the first special area or the second special area by the opening/closing pattern determination means uniform between the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the effective pattern mismatch means makes the effective patterns of the first special area or the second special area by the effective pattern determination means different between the first lottery result and the second lottery result. This has the effect of making the opening and closing patterns of the first special area or the second special area the same for the first lottery result and the second lottery result, making it impossible to identify the lottery result from the opening and closing pattern alone, while making the effective patterns of the first special area or the second special area different for the first lottery result and the second lottery result, making it difficult to tell whether the second advantageous state has occurred or not, creating a gameplay experience that allows the player to guess whether or not they are playing in the second advantageous state, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In gaming machine C9 or C10,
A display means (e.g., a special symbol display device 37) for displaying the first lottery result and the second lottery result;
and a result discrimination difficult means for making the first lottery result or the second lottery result difficult to discern based on the display result by the display means (for example, 127 display patterns for "Time Reduction C" and 127 display patterns for "Latent Probability Variation C", each of which is a random pattern with no regularity using 8 LEDs).

Gaming machine C11 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine C9 or C10. That is, the display means displays the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the result difficult to distinguish means makes it difficult to distinguish the first lottery result or the second lottery result based on the display result by the display means. As a result, even if the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed, by making it difficult to distinguish which lottery result it is, if the player is prevented from recognizing that the second advantageous state is occurring, the player cannot recognize whether the second advantageous state will occur just from the passage of the gaming ball through the first special area or the second special area, and cannot recognize whether the second advantageous state will occur based on the display result by the display means. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be increased.

In any one of gaming machines C0 to C11,
The special area is
A gaming machine C12 that is disposed in a position visible to a player.

Gaming machine C12 has the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machines C0 to C11. That is, a special area is disposed in a position visible to the player. This has the effect of allowing the player to visually confirm that the gaming ball has passed through the special area, creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not the second advantageous state will occur, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

<Group D: Multiple chances to win special bonuses during one big win>

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines are configured to launch gaming media such as gaming balls into a gaming area provided on a gaming board, and hold a lottery to see if the gaming ball enters one of a number of ball entry ports provided in the gaming area, and if the lottery results in a favorable state such as a win, a variable ball entry means that is normally closed is opened, and a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, there is a pachinko machine that provides a special area through which the gaming ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass, and that controls the opening and closing of the special area with an opening and closing member or the like, and when the gaming ball passes through the special area, generates a special gaming value based on a second advantageous state that is different from the predetermined gaming value based on the advantageous state (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

However, the timing at which the game ball can pass into the special area is configured to occur only once during one advantageous state. For this reason, if the game ball cannot be made to flow into the special area at the above-mentioned timing due to a game abnormality such as an abnormal launch of the game ball, or a sudden problem such as the player becoming ill, the second advantageous state cannot be generated, which may cause the player to suffer an unexpected disadvantage and lose interest in the game.

The inventions in Group D were made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aim to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

A launching means (e.g., a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball;
A ball entry means (for example, a special winning hole 64b) into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter;
An information acquisition means (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 203d) for acquiring predetermined information due to a game ball entering the ball entry means;
A determination means (e.g., a jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A variable ball entry means (e.g., a variable winning device 65) that can be changed between a first state in which it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter;
By using the judgment result by the judgment means, advantageous state means (e.g., jackpot processing (S103)) for changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot state);
A special area (for example, a right-side variable area 73 and a left-side variable area 74) through which the game ball flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass;
In a gaming machine equipped with a second advantageous state means (e.g., a probability change transition flag 203i) capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state generated by the advantageous state means,
The advantageous state means includes:
A special area switching means for switching whether or not the special area is enabled (for example, turning on a right probability variable effective flag 203g or a left probability variable effective flag 203h),
The second advantageous state means includes:
When the game ball passes through the special area that is set to be effective by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is generated,
When the game ball passes through the special area that is not set to be effective by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is not generated.
The gaming machine D0 is characterized in that it is provided with a multi-timing inflow means (for example, the third and sixth rounds in "latent probability fluctuation A") that, when generating the second advantageous state, causes gaming balls to flow into the special area that has been validly set at multiple timings during the advantageous state.

According to the gaming machine D0, a game ball is launched by a launching means, and the game ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the ball entry means, and the information acquisition means acquires predetermined information due to the game ball entering the ball entry means. Then, the judgment means judges the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means. Also, a variable ball entry means is provided that can change between a first state in which the game ball is difficult or impossible to enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter, and by using the judgment result by the judgment means, the advantageous state means changes the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state. Also, a special area through which the game ball that has flowed into the variable ball entry means can pass is provided. Then, the second advantageous state means can generate a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means. Here, a special area switching means provided in the advantageous state means switches whether or not to enable the special area. The second advantageous state is generated by the second advantageous state means when the game ball passes through a special area that is set to be valid by the special area switching means, while the second advantageous state is not generated by the second advantageous state means when the game ball passes through a special area that is not set to be valid by the special area switching means. In addition, when the second advantageous state is generated by the multiple timing inflow means provided in the second advantageous state means, the game ball flows into the valid special area at multiple timings during the advantageous state. That is, even if the game ball passes through a special area, if the special area is not valid, the second advantageous state cannot be generated, and even if the game ball passes through a special area that is set to be valid, the player is not suggested that the second advantageous state will be generated at that timing. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot be generated even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball into the special area. Therefore, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, when an advantageous state that generates the second advantageous state is selected, the game ball is configured to be able to pass through the special area that is set to be valid at multiple times during the advantageous state. As a result, even if the game ball cannot be passed through the special area at one time when the special area is valid, it is possible to pass the game ball through the special area that is valid at the other time. Therefore, even if a sudden trouble (for example, a game abnormality such as a launch abnormality or a player's poor physical condition) prevents the game ball from passing through the special area at one time when the special area is valid, by providing the possibility of passing the game ball through the special area that is valid at the other time, the player can enjoy a comfortable game without suffering any disadvantage due to an unforeseen situation. As a result, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from losing interest in the game and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine D0,
The special area is
The first special area (for example, the right special area 73),
A second special area (e.g., a left special area 74) different from the first special area,
The multiple timing inflow means includes:
A gaming machine D1 is characterized in that it allows game balls to flow into the first special area, which is valid, at one timing during the advantageous state, and allows game balls to flow into the second special area, which is valid, at another timing different from the one timing during the advantageous state.

The gaming machine D1 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D0. That is, a first special area and a second special area different from the first special area are provided as special areas. Then, the multiple timing inflow means allows the gaming ball to flow into the first special area, which is valid, at one timing during the advantageous state, and allows the gaming ball to flow into the second special area, which is valid, at another timing different from the one timing during the advantageous state. As a result, even if an abnormality occurs in either the first special area or the second special area, the second advantageous state can be generated when the gaming ball passes through the other second special area or the first special area. Therefore, there is an effect that a comfortable game can be realized without the player suffering a disadvantage due to an unforeseen event, and the interest in the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine D0 or D1,
The advantageous state means includes:
a unit game execution means (e.g., a big win process (S103)) for executing a unit game (e.g., one round) multiple times in the advantageous state of one, which changes the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state;
The special area switching means
A unit game activation means for activating the special area in at least two of the unit games (for example, the third and sixth rounds of "latent probability fluctuation A");
A gaming machine D2 is characterized in that it is provided with an effective suggestion non-execution means (for example, non-notification of the effective setting of the probability change areas 73, 74) that does not suggest that the special area is effective by the unit game effective means.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D0 or D1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the unit game execution means provided in the advantageous state means executes a unit game that changes the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state multiple times in one advantageous state. Then, the unit game validity means provided in the special area switching means validates the special area in at least any two unit games, and the validity suggestion non-execution means also provided in the special area switching means does not suggest that the special area is valid by the unit game validity means. As a result, the special area is valid in at least one of the two unit games of the unit games in the advantageous state, and while the validity is not suggested, the game ball can be made to flow into the special area in any one of the unit games to generate a second advantageous state. Therefore, it is not possible to recognize whether the second advantageous state occurs or not just by the passage of the game ball through the special area. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not they are playing in the second advantageous state while allowing the second advantageous state to occur at multiple times, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In any one of the gaming machines D0 to D2,
A game state changing means (e.g., a big win end process (S415)) for changing a game state by using the judgment result of the judgment means;
When the game state is changed by the game state changing means, a notification means (e.g., a third symbol display device 81) executes a state suggestion notification (e.g., a "probability change notification performance mode") to suggest the game state to the player;
The notification means includes:
Gaming machine D3 is characterized by being equipped with a suggestion notification non-execution means (for example, a "latent probability change presentation mode" based on winning "latent probability change A") that does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state when the gaming ball passes through the special area that has been enabled by the special area switching means.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D0 to D2, the following effect is achieved. That is, the gaming state change means changes the gaming state by using the judgment result of the judgment means, and when the gaming state change means changes the gaming state, the notification means executes a state suggestion notification to notify the player of the gaming state. Then, the suggestion notification non-execution means provided in the notification means does not execute a state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state at the timing when the gaming ball passes through the special area enabled by the special area switching means. As a result, when the suggestion notification non-execution means does not execute a state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state and prevents the player from recognizing that the second advantageous state is occurring, it is not possible to recognize whether the second advantageous state occurs or not just from the passage of the gaming ball through the special area, so that it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and there is an effect of increasing the interest in the game.

In any one of the gaming machines D0 to D3,
The special area switching means
A gaming machine D4, characterized in that in a given unit game, either the first special area or the second special area is activated, and the other is not activated.

Gaming machine D4 has the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machines D0 to D3. That is, the special area switching means is configured to activate either the first special area or the second special area in a given unit game, and deactivate the other. This has the effect of making it difficult to tell which of the first special area or the second special area is set as active by providing multiple active special area patterns, thereby creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not they are playing in the second advantageous state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In any one of the gaming machines D0 to D4,
The second advantageous state means includes:
When the determining means determines that the first lottery result (for example, the lottery result of "latent probability fluctuation A") is capable of generating the second advantageous state, a passing means (for example, turning on the right probability fluctuation effective flag 203g and turning on the right probability fluctuation area solenoid 73b) that passes the game ball to the special area that is effective during the advantageous state based on the first lottery result;
Gaming machine D5 is characterized in that it is equipped with a passage prevention means (for example, turning on the right special probability activation flag 203g and turning off the right special probability activation area solenoid 73b) that prevents the game ball from passing through the special area that is valid during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result when the judgment means judges that the second lottery result (for example, the lottery result of ``time reduction A'') does not generate the second advantageous state.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D0 to D4, the following effect is achieved. That is, when the determination means determines that the first lottery result is capable of generating the second advantageous state, the effective time passing means provided in the second advantageous state means is configured to pass the gaming ball through the effective special area during the advantageous state based on the first lottery result. On the other hand, when the determination means determines that the second lottery result is not capable of generating the second advantageous state, the passing prevention means provided in the second advantageous state means is configured to prevent the gaming ball from passing through the effective special area during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result. That is, when the first lottery result is capable of generating the second advantageous state, the gaming ball is passed through the effective special area to generate the second advantageous state, while when the second lottery result is not capable of generating the second advantageous state, the gaming ball is prevented from passing through the effective special area to prevent the second advantageous state from being generated. This allows the second advantageous state to be generated depending on whether or not the game ball passes through a valid special area, but by configuring the game so that the second advantageous state does not occur even if the game ball passes through a special area if the special area is not valid, it is possible to create gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not they are playing in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine D5,
A first opening/closing means (e.g., a right special area opening/closing plate 73a) for opening and closing the first special area;
A second opening/closing means (for example, a left special area opening/closing plate 74a) for opening and closing the second special area,
The valid time passing means is
When the first special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the first opening/closing means is opened to allow the game balls to flow into the first special area;
A gaming machine D6 characterized in that, when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is opened to allow gaming balls to flow into the second special area.

Gaming machine D6 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine D5. That is, the first opening/closing means opens and closes the first special area, and the second opening/closing means opens and closes the second special area. Then, when the first special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the effective-time passing means opens the first opening/closing means to allow the gaming ball to flow into the first special area, and when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is opened to allow the gaming ball to flow into the second special area. This has the effect that when a second advantageous state is to be generated, the second advantageous state can be appropriately generated by passing the gaming ball through the enabled special area.

In the gaming machine D6,
The passage prevention means is
A gaming machine D7 characterized in that, when the first special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the first opening/closing means is closed, and, when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is closed.

Gaming machine D7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine D6. That is, when the first special area is enabled by the special game switching means, the passage blocking means closes the first opening and closing means to prevent the game ball from flowing into the first special area. Similarly, when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the passage blocking means closes the second opening and closing means to prevent the game ball from flowing into the second special area. In this way, by not allowing the game ball to pass through the enabled special area when the second advantageous state is not to be generated, it is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot be generated even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball into the special area. Therefore, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In gaming machine D6 or D7,
The passage prevention means is
When the first special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is opened to allow the game balls to flow into the second special area;
A gaming machine D8 characterized in that, when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the first opening/closing means is opened to allow gaming balls to flow into the first special area.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machines D6 and D7, the gaming machine D8 has the following effects. That is, when the first special area is enabled by the special game switching means, the passage blocking means opens the second opening/closing means to allow the gaming ball to flow into the second special area. Also, when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the passage blocking means also opens the first opening/closing means to allow the gaming ball to flow into the first special area. In this way, by allowing the gaming ball to pass through an ineffective special area when the second advantageous state is not to be generated, it is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot be generated even if the player recognizes the passage of the gaming ball into the special area. Therefore, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In any of the gaming machines D5 to D8,
The second advantageous state means includes:
A valid pattern determination means (e.g., a probability change area valid table 202g) for determining whether or not to activate the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determination means;
An opening/closing pattern determination means (e.g., a probability change area opening/closing table 202f) for determining whether or not to allow a game ball to flow into the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determination means;
an opening/closing pattern uniformity means (e.g., opening/closing pattern "X1") for uniformly setting the opening/closing pattern of the special area determined by the opening/closing pattern determination means between the first lottery result and the second lottery result;
A gaming machine D9 is characterized by comprising an effective pattern mismatch means (e.g., effective patterns "A" and "B") that causes the effective pattern of the special area determined by the effective pattern determination means to differ between the first lottery result and the second lottery result.

Gaming machine D9 has the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machines D5 to D8. That is, the effective pattern determination means provided in the second advantageous state means uses the judgment result by the judgment means to determine whether or not to activate the special area for each unit game. Also, the opening/closing pattern determination means also provided in the second advantageous state means uses the judgment result by the judgment means to determine whether or not to allow game balls to flow into the special area for each unit game. Then, the opening/closing pattern uniform means makes the opening/closing patterns of the special area determined by the opening/closing pattern determination means uniform between the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the effective pattern mismatch means makes the effective patterns of the special area determined by the effective pattern determination means different between the first lottery result and the second lottery result. This has the effect of making the opening and closing patterns of the special area the same for the first and second lottery results, making it impossible to distinguish the lottery results from the opening and closing patterns alone, while making the effective patterns of the special area different for the first and second lottery results, making it difficult to tell whether the second advantageous state will occur, creating a gameplay experience that allows the player to guess whether or not they are playing in the second advantageous state, thereby increasing the fun of the game.

In any of the gaming machines D5 to D9,
A display means (e.g., a special symbol display device 37) for displaying the first lottery result and the second lottery result;
and a result discrimination difficult means for making the first lottery result or the second lottery result difficult to discern based on the display result by the display means (for example, 127 display patterns for "Time Reduction C" and 127 display patterns for "Latent Probability Variation C", each of which is a random pattern with no regularity using 8 LEDs).

Gaming machine D10 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines D5 to D9. That is, the display means displays the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the result difficult to distinguish means makes it difficult to distinguish the first lottery result or the second lottery result based on the display result by the display means. As a result, even if the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed, by making it difficult to distinguish which lottery result it is, if the player is prevented from recognizing that the second advantageous state is occurring, it is not possible to recognize whether the second advantageous state will occur just from the passage of the gaming ball through the special area, and it is also not possible to recognize whether the second advantageous state will occur based on the display result by the display means. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not they are playing in the second advantageous state, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be increased.

In any one of the gaming machines D0 to D10,
The special area is
A gaming machine D11 that is arranged in a position visible to a player.

Gaming machine D11 has the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machines D0 to D10. That is, a special area is arranged in a position visible to the player. This has the effect of allowing the player to visually confirm that the gaming ball has passed through the special area, creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not the second advantageous state will occur, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

<Group E: Valid setting period for the special bonus flag>

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines are configured to launch gaming media such as gaming balls into a gaming area provided on a gaming board, and hold a lottery to see if the gaming ball enters one of multiple ball entry ports provided in the gaming area, and if the lottery results in a favorable state such as a win, a unit game is executed multiple times to open a variable ball entry means that is normally closed, and a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, there is a pachinko machine that provides a special area through which gaming balls that have flowed into the variable ball entry means can pass, and that controls the opening and closing of the special area with an opening and closing member or the like, and that generates a special gaming value based on a second advantageous state that is different from the predetermined gaming value based on the above advantageous state when the gaming ball passes through the special area by opening the opening and closing member during a predetermined unit game.

The above pachinko machine is configured such that in an advantageous state in which the second advantageous state can occur, the opening and closing member is opened in a predetermined unit game so that a gaming ball that has flowed into the variable ball entry means can flow into the special area, while in an advantageous state in which the second advantageous state cannot occur, the opening and closing member is opened in such a manner that a gaming ball that has flowed into the variable ball entry means cannot flow into the special area in the unit game (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

However, in the unit game immediately preceding the unit game that opens the special area, a game ball that flowed into the variable ball entry means may remain (remain) in the variable ball entry means. In such a case, even if the game is initially in an advantageous state that does not generate the second advantageous state, the game ball that flowed in during the previous unit game may remain in the variable ball entry means, causing the game ball to pass through a special area that it would not normally be able to pass through. This may result in the awarding of a game value that was not anticipated in the game specifications, and may cause unexpected losses to the game facility.

The inventions in Group E were made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aim to provide an amusement machine that can prevent unexpected losses from occurring in an amusement arcade.

A launching means (e.g., a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball;
A ball entry means (for example, a special winning hole 64b) into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter;
An information acquisition means (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 203d) for acquiring predetermined information due to a game ball entering the ball entry means;
A determination means (e.g., a jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A variable ball entry means (e.g., a variable winning device 65) that can be changed between a first state in which it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter;
By using the judgment result by the judgment means, advantageous state means (e.g., jackpot processing (S103)) for changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot state);
In a gaming machine equipped with a second advantageous state means (e.g., a probability change transition flag 203i) capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state generated by the advantageous state means,
A unit game execution means (e.g., a big win process (S103)) that executes a unit game (e.g., one round) multiple times in which the variable ball entry means changes from the first state to the second state in the advantageous state of one;
A special area (for example, a right-side variable area 73 and a left-side variable area 74) through which the game ball flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass;
Among the unit games executed by the unit game execution means, in a predetermined first unit game, a special area switching means (for example, turning on a right probability variable effective flag 203g or a left probability variable effective flag 203h) for switching whether or not the special area is enabled,
The second advantageous state means includes:
When the game ball passes through the special area that is set to be effective by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is generated,
When the game ball passes through the special area that is not set to be effective by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is not generated.
The special area switching means
In the first unit game, when the variable ball entry means changes from the first state to the second state, an effective delay means (for example, the first and second counts of a round) that does not make the special area effective for a predetermined period of time;
and a post-period activation means for activating the special area after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, after the third count of a round).

According to the gaming machine E0, a game ball is launched by a launching means, and the game ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the ball entry means, and the information acquisition means acquires predetermined information due to the game ball entering the ball entry means. Then, the judgment means judges the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means. Also, a variable ball entry means is provided that can change between a first state in which the game ball is difficult or impossible to enter, and a second state in which the game ball can enter, and by using the judgment result by the judgment means, the advantageous state means changes the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state. Also, the second advantageous state means can generate a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means. Here, a unit game execution means provided in the advantageous state means executes a unit game that changes the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state in one advantageous state multiple times. A special area through which the game ball that has flowed into the variable ball entry means can pass is provided, and in a predetermined first unit game among the unit games executed by the unit game execution means, the special area switching means switches whether or not to enable the special area. When the game ball passes through the special area that has been set to be enabled by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is generated by the second advantageous state means, while when the game ball passes through a special area that has not been set to be enabled by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is not generated by the second advantageous state means. Here, in the first unit game, when the variable ball entry means changes from the first state to the second state, the special area is not enabled for a predetermined period by the enablement delay means provided in the special area switching means, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the special area is enabled by the period-elapsed enablement means. That is, the special area is configured to be enabled not at the start of the first unit game, but after a predetermined period has elapsed since the variable ball entry means changed from the first state to the second state. This has the effect of making it difficult for an event to occur in which a game ball that entered in a unit game before the first unit game remains in the variable ball entry means and passes through a valid special area that it should not have been able to pass through, even if an advantageous state that does not generate the second advantageous state is initially won, thereby providing the player with the game value expected in the game specifications and preventing unexpected losses from occurring to the gaming facility.

In the gaming machine E0,
The launching means includes:
A specific interval launching means for launching game balls at specific intervals (for example, launching game balls at "0.6 second" intervals),
The predetermined period is:
A gaming machine E1 characterized in that the period during the first unit game is until a predetermined number of gaming balls (e.g., 2 or more) flow in.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E0, gaming machine E1 provides the following effects. That is, gaming balls are launched at specific intervals by a specific interval launching means provided in the launching means, and the specific period is the period until a specific number of gaming balls flow in during the first unit game. That is, the special area is not activated during the first unit game until at least two or more specific numbers of gaming balls flow in. This makes it difficult for the special area to be activated for a period of at least twice the specific interval at which gaming balls are launched, making it possible to prevent an event in which a gaming ball that flowed in during a unit game prior to the first unit game passes through a special area that is activated but that it would not normally be able to pass through, thereby providing the player with the gaming value expected in the game specifications and preventing unexpected losses from occurring in the gaming facility.

In the gaming machine E0,
The variable ball entry means is
A flow path (for example, a guide passage 72) is provided for allowing the game balls flowing into the variable ball entry means to flow down;
The special area is
The device is disposed at a predetermined position of the flow path,
The predetermined period is:
A gaming machine E2 characterized in that the period is longer than the period from when the gaming ball flows into the variable ball entry means to when it flows down the flow path to the specified position.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E0, the following effects are achieved. That is, the gaming ball that has flowed into the variable ball entry means flows down a flow path provided in the variable ball entry means, and a special area is arranged at a predetermined position on the flow path. The predetermined period is a period equal to or longer than the period during which the gaming ball flows down the flow path to the predetermined position after it has entered the variable ball entry means. That is, the special area is not made effective at least from the time the gaming ball flows into the variable ball entry means until it flows down to the predetermined position where the special area is arranged. This allows the special area to be made effective after the gaming ball that flowed in the unit game before the first unit game flows down downstream from the special area, and makes it difficult for an event to occur in which the gaming ball that flowed in the unit game before the first unit game passes through the effective special area that it should not have passed through, even though it has initially won an advantageous state that does not generate the second advantageous state. As a result, players are given the gaming value expected from the gaming specifications, and unforeseen losses at the gaming center can be prevented.

In any one of the gaming machines E0 to E2,
The variable ball entry means is
A first variable ball entry means (for example, a variable winning device 65);
and a second variable winning means (e.g., a second variable winning device 76) different from the variable winning means,
The advantageous state means includes:
In the predetermined advantageous state, an alternating ball entry means (e.g., opening the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 without an interval time) is provided for alternately and continuously changing the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means to the second state each time the unit game is executed; a first flow path (e.g., a guide passage 72) for allowing game balls that have flowed into the first variable ball entry means to flow down;
A second flow path (e.g., a communication passage 77) for allowing the game balls that have flowed into the second variable ball entry means to flow down;
A gaming machine E3 characterized by having a merging means (e.g., a merging section 77a) that merges the first flow path and the second flow path upstream of the special area.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E0 to E2, the following effects are achieved. That is, as the variable ball entry means, a first variable ball entry means and a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means are provided. Then, by the unit game execution means provided in the advantageous state means, a unit game that changes the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state is executed multiple times in one advantageous state. Then, by the alternating ball entry means also provided in the advantageous state means, in a predetermined advantageous state, each time a unit game is executed, the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are alternately and uninterruptedly set to the second state. Here, the first flow path allows the game balls that have flowed into the first variable ball entry means to flow down, the second flow path allows the game balls that have flowed into the second variable ball entry means to flow down, and the merging means allows the first flow path and the second flow path to merge upstream of the special area.

Conventionally, in a unit game preceding the unit game that opens the special area, a game ball that flowed into the variable ball entry means may remain (remain) in the variable ball entry means. In such a case, even if the game is initially in an advantageous state that does not generate the second advantageous state, the game ball that flowed in and remains in the previous unit game may pass through a special area that it should not be able to pass through, and a game value that was not anticipated in the game specifications may be awarded, which may cause unexpected losses to the game facility.

In particular, in the case of an advantageous state in which two variable ball entry means are used to alternately play unit games without interruption, and the two variable ball entry means share a special area, there is no (or very little) interval time between unit games, so when one of the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means is in the second state based on the first unit game, there is a high possibility that game balls that flowed into the other second variable ball entry means or the first variable ball entry means in the unit game prior to the first unit game will remain, making it easy for unexpected losses to occur in the gaming facility.

In response to this, gaming machine E3 is configured to activate the special area not at the start of the first unit game, but after a predetermined period of time has passed since the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means changes from the first state to the second state. This makes it less likely that a game ball that entered in a unit game before the first unit game will pass through a special area that is activated but that it should not have passed through, even if an advantageous state that does not generate the second advantageous state is initially selected, and has the effect of granting the player the gaming value expected in the game specifications and preventing unexpected losses from occurring to the gaming facility.

In any one of the gaming machines E0 to E3,
A game state changing means (e.g., a big win end process (S415)) for changing a game state by using the judgment result of the judgment means;
When the game state is changed by the game state changing means, a notification means (e.g., a third symbol display device 81) executes a state suggestion notification (e.g., a "probability change notification performance mode") that suggests the game state to the player;
The notification means includes:
A gaming machine E4 is characterized by comprising a suggestion notification non-execution means (for example, a "latent probability change presentation mode" based on winning "latent probability change A") that does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state when the gaming ball passes through the special area that has been enabled by the special area switching means.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E0 to E3, the following effect is achieved. That is, the gaming state change means changes the gaming state by using the judgment result of the judgment means, and when the gaming state change means changes the gaming state, the notification means executes a state suggestion notification to notify the player of the gaming state. Then, the suggestion notification non-execution means provided in the notification means does not execute a state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state at the timing when the gaming ball passes through the special area enabled by the special area switching means. As a result, when the suggestion notification non-execution means does not execute a state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state and prevents the player from recognizing that the second advantageous state is in place, it is not possible to recognize whether the second advantageous state occurs or not just from the passage of the gaming ball through the special area, so that it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In any one of the gaming machines E0 to E4,
The special area is
The first special area (for example, the right special area 73),
A second special area (e.g., a left special area 74) different from the first special area,
The special area switching means
A gaming machine E5, characterized in that in a given unit game, either the first special area or the second special area is activated, and the other is not activated.

Gaming machine E5 has the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machines E0 to E4. That is, a first special area and a second special area different from the first special area are provided as special areas, and a special area switching means is configured to activate either the first special area or the second special area for each unit game, and to deactivate the other. In this way, by providing multiple effective patterns for special areas, it is possible to make it difficult to tell which first special area or which second special area is set as effective, and as a result, it has the effect of creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he is playing in the second advantageous state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In any one of the gaming machines E0 to E5,
The second advantageous state means includes:
When the determining means determines that the first lottery result (for example, the lottery result of "latent probability fluctuation A") is capable of generating the second advantageous state, a passing means (for example, turning on the right probability fluctuation effective flag 203g and turning on the right probability fluctuation area solenoid 73b) that passes the game ball to the special area that is effective during the advantageous state based on the first lottery result;
A gaming machine E6 is characterized in that it is equipped with a passage prevention means (for example, turning on the right special probability activation flag 203g and turning off the right special probability activation area solenoid 73b) that prevents the game ball from passing through the special region that is valid during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result when the judgment means judges that the second lottery result (for example, the lottery result of "time reduction A") does not generate the second advantageous state.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E0 to E5, the following effect is achieved. That is, when the determination means determines that the first lottery result is one that can generate the second advantageous state, the effective time passing means provided in the second advantageous state means is configured to pass the gaming ball through the effective special area during the advantageous state based on the first lottery result. On the other hand, when the determination means determines that the second lottery result is one that does not generate the second advantageous state, the passing prevention means provided in the second advantageous state means is configured to not pass the gaming ball through the effective special area during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result. That is, when the first lottery result is one that can generate the second advantageous state, the gaming ball is passed through the effective special area to generate the second advantageous state, while when the second lottery result is one that does not generate the second advantageous state, the gaming ball is not passed through the effective special area to not generate the second advantageous state. This allows the second advantageous state to be generated depending on whether or not the game ball passes through a valid special area, but by configuring the game so that the second advantageous state does not occur even if the game ball passes through a special area if the special area is not valid, it is possible to create gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not they are playing in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine E6,
A first opening/closing means (e.g., a right special area opening/closing plate 73a) for opening and closing the first special area;
A second opening/closing means (for example, a left special area opening/closing plate 74a) for opening and closing the second special area,
The valid time passing means is
When the first special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the first opening/closing means is opened to allow the game balls to flow into the first special area;
A gaming machine E7 characterized in that, when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is opened to allow gaming balls to flow into the second special area.

Gaming machine E7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine E6. That is, the first opening/closing means opens and closes the first special area, and the second opening/closing means opens and closes the second special area. Then, when the first special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the effective-time passing means opens the first opening/closing means to allow the gaming ball to flow into the first special area, and when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is opened to allow the gaming ball to flow into the second special area. This has the effect that when a second advantageous state is to be generated, the second advantageous state can be appropriately generated by passing the gaming ball through the enabled special area.

In the gaming machine E7,
The passage prevention means is
When the first special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the first opening/closing means is closed to prevent game balls from flowing into the first special area;
A gaming machine E8 characterized in that, when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is closed to prevent game balls from flowing into the second special area.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E7, the following effect is achieved. That is, when the first special area is enabled by the special game switching means, the passage prevention means closes the first opening and closing means to prevent the game ball from flowing into the first special area. Also, when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the passage prevention means also closes the second opening and closing means to prevent the game ball from flowing into the second special area. In this way, by preventing the game ball from passing through the enabled special area when the second advantageous state is not generated, it is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot be generated even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball into the special area. Therefore, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be increased.

In gaming machine E7 or E8,
The passage prevention means is
When the first special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is opened to allow the game balls to flow into the second special area;
A gaming machine E9 characterized in that, when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the first opening/closing means is opened to allow gaming balls to flow into the first special area.

The gaming machine E9 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machines E7 and E8. That is, when the first special area is enabled by the special game switching means, the passage blocking means opens the second opening/closing means to allow the gaming ball to flow into the second special area. Also, when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the passage blocking means also opens the first opening/closing means to allow the gaming ball to flow into the first special area. In this way, by allowing the gaming ball to pass through an ineffective special area when the second advantageous state is not to be generated, it is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot be generated even if the player recognizes the passage of the gaming ball into the special area. Therefore, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be increased.

In any one of gaming machines E6 to E9,
The second advantageous state means includes:
A valid pattern determination means (e.g., a probability change area valid table 202g) for determining whether or not to activate the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determination means;
An opening/closing pattern determination means (e.g., a probability change area opening/closing table 202f) for determining whether or not to allow a game ball to flow into the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determination means;
an opening/closing pattern uniformity means (e.g., opening/closing pattern "X1") for uniformly setting the opening/closing pattern of the special area determined by the opening/closing pattern determination means between the first lottery result and the second lottery result;
A gaming machine E10 characterized by comprising an effective pattern mismatch means (e.g., effective patterns "A" and "B") that causes the effective pattern of the special area determined by the effective pattern determination means to differ between the first lottery result and the second lottery result.

Gaming machine E10 has the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machines E6 to E9. That is, the effective pattern determination means provided in the second advantageous state means uses the judgment result by the judgment means to determine whether or not to activate the special area for each unit game. Also, the opening/closing pattern determination means also provided in the second advantageous state means uses the judgment result by the judgment means to determine whether or not to allow game balls to flow into the special area for each unit game. Then, the opening/closing pattern uniform means makes the opening/closing patterns of the special area determined by the opening/closing pattern determination means uniform between the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the effective pattern mismatch means makes the effective patterns of the special area determined by the effective pattern determination means different between the first lottery result and the second lottery result. This has the effect of making the opening and closing patterns of the special area the same for the first and second lottery results, making it impossible to distinguish the lottery results from the opening and closing patterns alone, while making the effective patterns of the special area different for the first and second lottery results, making it difficult to tell whether the second advantageous state will occur, creating a gameplay experience that allows the player to guess whether or not they are playing in the second advantageous state, thereby increasing the fun of the game.

In any one of gaming machines E6 to E10,
A display means (e.g., a special symbol display device 37) for displaying the first lottery result and the second lottery result;
A gaming machine E11 is characterized by comprising a result discrimination difficult means for making the first lottery result or the second lottery result difficult to discern based on the display result by the display means (for example, there are 127 display patterns for "Time Reduction C" and 127 display patterns for "Latent Probability Variation C", each of which is a random pattern with no regularity using 8 LEDs).

Gaming machine E11 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines E6 to E10. That is, the display means displays the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the result difficult to distinguish means makes it difficult to distinguish the first lottery result or the second lottery result based on the display result by the display means. As a result, even if the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed, by making it difficult to distinguish which lottery result it is, if the player is prevented from recognizing that the second advantageous state is occurring, it is not possible to recognize whether the second advantageous state will occur just from the passage of the gaming ball through the special area, and it is also not possible to recognize whether the second advantageous state will occur based on the display result by the display means. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not they are playing in the second advantageous state, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be increased.

In any one of the gaming machines E0 to E11,
The special area is
A gaming machine E12 that is arranged in a position visible to a player.

Gaming machine E12 has the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machines E0 to E11. That is, a special area is disposed in a position visible to the player. This has the effect of allowing the player to visually confirm that the gaming ball has passed through the special area, creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not the second advantageous state will occur, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

<Group F: Synchronize interval time and open time>
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a gaming medium such as a gaming ball is fired toward a gaming area provided on a gaming board, and a win/lose lottery is held based on whether the gaming ball enters one of multiple ball entry ports provided in the gaming area.If a favorable state such as a win is selected in the win/lose lottery, a unit game is executed multiple times in which a variable ball entry means that is normally closed is opened, and a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, there is a pachinko machine that provides a special area through which gaming balls that have flowed into the variable ball entry means can pass, and that controls the opening and closing of the special area with an opening and closing member or the like, and that generates a special gaming value based on a second advantageous state that is different from the predetermined gaming value based on the above advantageous state when the gaming ball passes through the special area by opening the opening and closing member during a predetermined unit game.

In addition, some of the above pachinko machines execute a normal notification mode in which the second advantageous state does not occur, for example, even if the second advantageous state occurs, without informing the player of whether or not the second advantageous state will occur. In other words, a presentation is executed as if the second advantageous state will not occur for the player, creating a gameplay that requires the player to guess whether or not the second advantageous state will be granted, thereby increasing the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

However, the above gaming machine is configured to always create the second advantageous state when the gaming ball passes through the special area, so the player knows in advance which unit game the special area will be opened in, and becomes aware that the second advantageous state will occur when the player visually confirms that the gaming ball has passed through the special area in that unit game. For this reason, if the normal notification mode is executed after the player recognizes that the second advantageous state has occurred due to the gaming ball passing through the special area, it may not be possible to give the player the expected interest in the game, and instead it may cause him or her to lose interest in the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The inventions in Group F were made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aim to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

A launching means (e.g., a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball;
A ball entry means (for example, a special winning hole 64b) into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter;
An information acquisition means (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 203d) for acquiring predetermined information due to a game ball entering the ball entry means;
A determination means (e.g., a jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A game state changing means (e.g., a big win end process (S415)) for changing the game state by using the judgment result of the judgment means;
When the game state is changed by the game state changing means, a notification means (e.g., a third symbol display device 81) executes a state suggestion notification (e.g., a "probability change notification performance mode") to suggest the game state to the player;
A variable ball entry means (e.g., a variable winning device 65) that can be changed between a first state in which it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter;
and an advantageous state means (e.g., a jackpot process (S103)) for changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state by using the result of the judgment by the judgment means,
A unit game execution means (e.g., a big win process (S103)) that executes a unit game (e.g., one round) multiple times in which the variable ball entry means changes from the first state to the second state in the advantageous state of one;
In the advantageous state of 1, after the execution of the unit game, the variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state, and then a standby game (e.g., an interval time) is executed until the variable ball entry means is changed to the second state again (e.g., S461 of the opening process (S424)).
A special area (for example, a right-side variable area 73 and a left-side variable area 74) through which the game ball flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass;
A special area switching means for switching whether or not the special area is enabled (for example, turning on the right probability variable effective flag 203g or the left probability variable effective flag 203h),
The game state changing means includes:
A second advantageous state means (e.g., a probability change transition flag 203i) is provided for generating a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state generated by the advantageous state means when the game ball passes through the special area that is set effectively by the special area switching means,
The unit game execution means includes:
a pseudo-waiting execution means for executing a pseudo-waiting game (e.g., a pseudo interval time) in which the variable ball entry means is in the first state for a period equal to or substantially equal to the waiting game during a predetermined unit game,
The second advantageous state means includes:
When the game ball passes through the special area that is set to be effective by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is generated,
When the game ball passes through the special area that is not set to be effective by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is not generated.
The notification means includes:
The gaming machine F0 is characterized by being equipped with a suggestion notification non-execution means (for example, a "latent probability change presentation mode" based on winning "latent probability change A") that does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state when the gaming ball passes through the special area that has been enabled by the special area switching means.

According to the gaming machine F0, a game ball is launched by a launching means, and the game ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the ball entry means, and the information acquisition means acquires predetermined information due to the game ball entering the ball entry means. The predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means is then judged by a judging means, and the game state is changed by the game state changing means by using the judgment result of the judging means, and when the game state is changed by the game state changing means, a state suggestion announcement is executed by the notification means to inform the player of the game state. In addition, a variable ball entry means is provided that can be changed between a first state in which it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter, and by using the judgment result of the judging means, the advantageous state means changes the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state. Here, in one advantageous state, the unit game execution means executes a unit game for changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state multiple times, and in one advantageous state, the standby game execution means executes the unit game, changing the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state after execution of the unit game, and then executes the standby game until it is changed to the second state again. Then, a special area through which the game ball that has flowed into the variable ball entry means can pass is provided, and the special area switching means switches whether or not to enable the special area. Also, when the game ball passes through the special area that has been set to be enabled by the special area switching means, a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means can be generated by the second advantageous state means provided in the game state changing means. Here, the pseudo standby execution means provided in the unit game execution means executes a pseudo standby game in which the variable ball entry means is in the first state for a period equal to or approximately equal to the standby game during a predetermined unit game. The second advantageous state is generated by the second advantageous state means when the game ball passes through a special area that is set to be valid by the special area switching means, while the second advantageous state is not generated by the second advantageous state means when the game ball passes through a special area that is not set to be valid by the special area switching means. The indication notification non-execution means provided in the notification means is configured not to execute a state indication notification corresponding to the second advantageous state at the timing when the game ball passes through the special area that is set to be valid by the special area switching means. That is, even if the game ball passes through a special area, if the special area is not valid, the second advantageous state can be prevented from being generated, and even if the game ball passes through a special area that is set to be valid, the player is not suggested that the second advantageous state will be generated at that timing. In addition, by making it difficult for the player to distinguish between a standby game and a pseudo standby game, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the unit game being executed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp a unit game in which a special area is valid, and to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state will be generated. Therefore, when the suggestion notification non-execution means does not execute a state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state and prevents the player from recognizing that the player is in the second advantageous state, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he is playing in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

Note that a "period equal to or approximately equal to the waiting time" may be any period of time in which it is difficult for a player to distinguish between waiting time and pseudo-waiting time, such as a period in which the waiting time and pseudo-waiting time are completely the same, or a period in which there is a time difference between the waiting time and the pseudo-waiting time that is difficult for humans to discern (for example, about 0.2 seconds).

In the gaming machine F0,
The special area switching means
The gaming machine F1 is characterized by comprising a predetermined timing activation means for activating the special area at a predetermined timing other than the pseudo standby game by at least the pseudo standby execution means during the unit game.

Gaming machine F1 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine F0. That is, the special area is enabled at a predetermined timing during a unit game other than the pseudo standby game by the pseudo standby execution means, at least, by the predetermined timing enabling means provided in the special area switching means. This has the effect that by enabling the special area when the variable ball entry means is in the second state and configuring the special area to be passable by the gaming ball, it is possible to pass the gaming ball into the special area when it is desired to generate a second advantageous state, and the second advantageous state can be reliably generated.

In the gaming machine F0 or F1,
The unit game execution means includes:
A gaming machine F2 characterized in that the unit game is executed so that the length of the period of the pseudo-waiting game executed by the pseudo-waiting execution means is the same as the length of the second state period during the unit game in which the variable ball entry means is in the second state.

Gaming machine F2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines F0 or F1. That is, the unit game execution means executes the unit game so that the length of the period of the pseudo standby game executed by the pseudo standby execution means is the same as the length of the second state period during which the variable ball entry means is in the second state during the unit game. This has the effect of making it difficult to distinguish between the standby game and the pseudo standby game based on the period alone, making it even more difficult for the player to grasp the number of unit games being executed.

In the gaming machine F2,
The unit game execution means includes:
A gaming machine F3 characterized in that the second state period is executed multiple times during one unit game.

Gaming machine F3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine F2. That is, the unit game execution means executes the second state period multiple times during one unit game. This has the effect of making it even more difficult for the player to grasp the number of unit games being executed.

In gaming machine F2 or F3,
The pseudo-wait execution means
The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that the pseudo standby game is executed multiple times during one unit game.

Gaming machine F4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines F2 and F3. That is, the pseudo standby execution means executes multiple pseudo standby games during one unit game. This has the effect of making it difficult to distinguish between standby games and pseudo standby games, making it even more difficult for the player to grasp the number of unit games currently being executed.

In any one of the gaming machines F0 to F4,
The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that it is provided with an effective indication non-execution means (for example, non-notification of the effective setting of the probability change areas 73, 74) that does not suggest that the special area is effective by the predetermined timing effective means.

Gaming machine F5 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines F0 to F4. That is, the validity suggestion non-execution means does not suggest that the special area is valid at a predetermined timing by the game validity means. As a result, the special area becomes valid in one of the unit games in the advantageous state, and a second advantageous state can be generated by causing the game ball to flow into the special area during the unit game while the validity is not suggested. Therefore, it is not possible to recognize whether the second advantageous state will occur just by the passage of the game ball through the special area. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not they are playing in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

In any one of gaming machines F0 to F5,
The special area is
The first special area (for example, the right special area 73),
A second special area (e.g., a left special area 74) different from the first special area,
The special area switching means
A gaming machine F6, characterized in that in a given unit game, either the first special area or the second special area is activated, and the other is not activated.

Gaming machine F6 has the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machines F0 to F5. That is, a first special area and a second special area different from the first special area are provided as special areas, and a special area switching means is configured to activate either the first special area or the second special area in a given unit game, and not the other. In this way, by providing an effective pattern for multiple special areas, it is possible to make it difficult to tell which first special area or which second special area is set to be active, and as a result, it has the effect of creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he is playing in the second advantageous state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In any one of the gaming machines F0 to F6,
The second advantageous state means includes:
When the determining means determines that the first lottery result (for example, the lottery result of "latent probability fluctuation A") is capable of generating the second advantageous state, a passing means (for example, turning on the right probability fluctuation effective flag 203g and turning on the right probability fluctuation area solenoid 73b) that passes the game ball to the special area that is effective during the advantageous state based on the first lottery result;
A gaming machine F7 is characterized in that it is equipped with a passage prevention means (for example, turning on the right special probability activation flag 203g and turning off the right special probability activation area solenoid 73b) that prevents the game ball from passing through the special area that is valid during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result when the judgment means judges that the second lottery result (for example, the lottery result of ``time reduction A'') does not generate the second advantageous state.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F0 to F6, the following effect is achieved. That is, when the determination means determines that the first lottery result is capable of generating the second advantageous state, the effective time passing means provided in the second advantageous state means is configured to pass the gaming ball through the effective special area during the advantageous state based on the first lottery result. On the other hand, when the determination means determines that the second lottery result is not capable of generating the second advantageous state, the passing prevention means provided in the second advantageous state means is configured to prevent the gaming ball from passing through the effective special area during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result. That is, when the first lottery result is capable of generating the second advantageous state, the gaming ball is passed through the effective special area to generate the second advantageous state, while when the second lottery result is not capable of generating the second advantageous state, the gaming ball is prevented from passing through the effective special area to prevent the second advantageous state from being generated. This allows the second advantageous state to be generated depending on whether or not the game ball passes through a valid special area, but by configuring the game so that the second advantageous state does not occur even if the game ball passes through a special area if the special area is not valid, it is possible to create gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not they are playing in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine F7,
A first opening/closing means (e.g., a right special area opening/closing plate 73a) for opening and closing the first special area;
A second opening/closing means (for example, a left special area opening/closing plate 74a) for opening and closing the second special area,
The valid time passing means is
When the first special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the first opening/closing means is opened to allow the game balls to flow into the first special area;
A gaming machine F8 characterized in that, when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is opened to allow gaming balls to flow into the second special area.

Gaming machine F8 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine F7. That is, the first opening/closing means opens and closes the first special area, and the second opening/closing means opens and closes the second special area. Then, when the first special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the effective-time passing means opens the first opening/closing means to allow the gaming ball to flow into the first special area, and when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is opened to allow the gaming ball to flow into the second special area. This has the effect that when a second advantageous state is to be generated, the second advantageous state can be appropriately generated by passing the gaming ball through the enabled special area.

In the gaming machine F8,
The passage prevention means is
When the first special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the first opening/closing means is closed to prevent game balls from flowing into the first special area;
A gaming machine F9 characterized in that when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is closed to prevent game balls from flowing into the second special area.

Gaming machine F9 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine F8. That is, when the first special area is enabled by the special game switching means, the passage blocking means closes the first opening/closing means to prevent the game ball from flowing into the first special area. Also, when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the passage blocking means also closes the second opening/closing means to prevent the game ball from flowing into the second special area. In this way, by preventing the game ball from passing through the enabled special area when the second advantageous state is not to be generated, it is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot be generated even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball into the special area. Therefore, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In gaming machine F8 or F9,
The passage prevention means is
When the first special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is opened to allow the game balls to flow into the second special area;
A gaming machine F10 characterized in that, when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the first opening/closing means is opened to allow gaming balls to flow into the first special area.

The gaming machine F10 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F8 or F9. That is, when the first special area is enabled by the special game switching means, the passage blocking means opens the second opening/closing means to allow the gaming ball to flow into the second special area. Also, when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the passage blocking means also opens the first opening/closing means to allow the gaming ball to flow into the first special area. In this way, by allowing the gaming ball to pass through an ineffective special area when the second advantageous state is not to be generated, it is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot be generated even if the player recognizes the passage of the gaming ball into the special area. Therefore, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be increased.

In any one of gaming machines F7 to F10,
The second advantageous state means includes:
A valid pattern determination means (e.g., a probability change area valid table 202g) for determining whether or not to activate the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determination means;
An opening/closing pattern determination means (e.g., a probability change area opening/closing table 202f) for determining whether or not to allow a game ball to flow into the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determination means;
an opening/closing pattern uniformity means (e.g., opening/closing pattern "X1") for uniformly setting the opening/closing pattern of the special area determined by the opening/closing pattern determination means between the first lottery result and the second lottery result;
A gaming machine F11 characterized by comprising an effective pattern mismatch means (e.g., effective patterns "A" and "B") that causes the effective pattern of the special area determined by the effective pattern determination means to differ between the first lottery result and the second lottery result.

Gaming machine F11 has the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machines F7 to F10. That is, the effective pattern determination means provided in the second advantageous state means uses the judgment result by the judgment means to determine whether or not to activate the special area for each unit game. Also, the opening/closing pattern determination means also provided in the second advantageous state means uses the judgment result by the judgment means to determine whether or not to allow game balls to flow into the special area for each unit game. Then, the opening/closing pattern uniformity means makes the opening/closing patterns of the special area determined by the opening/closing pattern determination means uniform between the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the effective pattern mismatch means makes the effective patterns of the special area determined by the effective pattern determination means different between the first lottery result and the second lottery result. This has the effect of making the opening and closing patterns of the special area the same for the first and second lottery results, making it impossible to distinguish the lottery results from the opening and closing patterns alone, while making the effective patterns of the special area different for the first and second lottery results, making it difficult to tell whether the second advantageous state will occur, creating a gameplay experience that allows the player to guess whether or not they are playing in the second advantageous state, thereby increasing the fun of the game.

In any one of gaming machines F7 to F11,
A display means (e.g., a special symbol display device 37) for displaying the first lottery result and the second lottery result;
and a result discrimination difficult means for making the first lottery result or the second lottery result difficult to discern based on the display result by the display means (for example, 127 display patterns for "Time Reduction C" and 127 display patterns for "Latent Probability Variation C", each of which is a random pattern with no regularity using 8 LEDs).

Gaming machine F12 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines F7 to F11. That is, the display means displays the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the result difficult to distinguish means makes it difficult to distinguish the first lottery result or the second lottery result based on the display result by the display means. As a result, even if the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed, by making it difficult to distinguish which lottery result it is, if the player is prevented from recognizing that the second advantageous state is occurring, it is not possible to recognize whether the second advantageous state will occur just from the passage of the gaming ball through the special area, and it is also not possible to recognize whether the second advantageous state will occur based on the display result by the display means. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not they are playing in the second advantageous state, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be increased.

In any one of the gaming machines F0 to F12,
The special area is
A gaming machine F13 characterized by being arranged in a position visible to a player.

Gaming machine F13 has the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machines F0 to F12. That is, a special area is disposed in a position visible to the player. This has the effect of allowing the player to visually confirm that the gaming ball has passed through the special area, creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not the second advantageous state will occur, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In gaming machines F0 to F13,
The unit game is:
A pure unit game in which the variable ball entry means is changed from the first state to the second state, and then the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined ending condition, and one unit game is ended;
A gaming machine F14 characterized in that it is equipped with a pseudo-unit game in which, after the variable ball entry means is changed from the first state to the second state, it is set to the first state as the pseudo waiting game, and then it is further changed to the second state, and then, based on the establishment of the termination condition, it is set to the first state and one of the unit games is terminated.

Gaming machine F14 has the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machines F0 to F13. That is, as a unit game, a pure unit game is provided in which the variable ball entry means is changed from a first state to a second state, and then the first state is established based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition, and one unit game is ended. Also, as a unit game, a pseudo unit game is provided in which the variable ball entry means is changed from a first state to a second state, and then the first state is established as a pseudo waiting game, and then the second state is established, and then the first state is established based on the establishment of an end condition, and one unit game is ended. This has the effect of providing variation in the unit game and increasing the interest of the game.

<G group: Operation check opening before actual opening>
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a gaming medium such as a gaming ball is fired toward a gaming area provided on a gaming board, and a win/lose lottery is held based on whether the gaming ball enters one of a number of ball entry ports provided in the gaming area. If the win/lose lottery results in an advantageous state such as a win, a variable ball entry means which is normally closed is opened, and a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, there is a pachinko machine that provides a special area through which the gaming ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass, and that controls the opening and closing of the special area with an opening and closing member or the like, and when the gaming ball passes through the special area, generates a special gaming value based on a second advantageous state that is different from the predetermined gaming value based on the advantageous state (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

However, if some kind of abnormality occurs in the gaming machine and the opening and closing member does not open, the gaming balls cannot flow into the special area, and the player may suffer an unexpected disadvantage.

The inventions in Group G were made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aim to provide a gaming machine that prevents players from being disadvantaged.

A launching means (e.g., a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball;
A ball entry means (for example, a special winning hole 64b) into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter;
An information acquisition means (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 203d) for acquiring predetermined information due to a game ball entering the ball entry means;
A determination means (e.g., a jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A variable ball entry means (e.g., a variable winning device 65) that can be changed between a first state in which it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter;
By using the judgment result by the judgment means, advantageous state means (e.g., jackpot processing (S103)) for changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot state);
In a gaming machine equipped with a second advantageous state means (e.g., a probability change transition flag 203i) capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state generated by the advantageous state means,
A special area (for example, a right-side variable area 73 and a left-side variable area 74) through which the game ball flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass;
An opening/closing means for opening and closing the special area (for example, a right special area opening/closing plate 73a and a left special area opening/closing plate 74a);
and a drive means (for example, a right variable area solenoid 73b and a left variable area solenoid 74b) for driving the opening and closing means to open and close,
The driving means is
A main opening execution means for executing a main opening that allows game balls to flow into the special area (for example, a "2000 ms" opening based on the third winning count);
A provisional opening execution means for executing a provisional opening by opening the opening/closing means for a time shorter than the time of the formal opening before the formal opening is executed by the formal opening execution means (for example, an opening for "60 ms" based on the first winning of the count);
A provisional release determination means for determining whether the provisional release by the provisional release execution means has been normally executed (for example, determining whether the right probability change area solenoid 73b and the left probability change area solenoid 74b operate normally based on the first winning count);
The gaming machine G0 is characterized in that it is equipped with an abnormality notification means (e.g., an error notification) that notifies that an abnormality has occurred in the opening/closing means when the temporary opening judgment means determines that the temporary opening has not been performed normally.

According to the gaming machine G0, a game ball is launched by a launching means, and the game ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the ball entry means, and the information acquisition means acquires predetermined information due to the game ball entering the ball entry means. Then, the judgment means judges the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means. Also, a variable ball entry means is provided that can change between a first state in which the game ball has difficulty entering or is unable to enter, and a second state in which the game ball can enter, and by using the judgment result by the judgment means, the advantageous state means sets the variable ball entry means to an advantageous state from the first state to the second state. Also, the second advantageous state means can generate a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means. Here, a special area through which the game ball flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass is provided, the special area is opened and closed by the opening and closing means, and the opening and closing means is driven to open and close by the driving means. Further, the main opening is executed by the main opening execution means provided in the drive means so that the game balls can flow into the special area, and the temporary opening execution means also provided in the drive means executes a temporary opening in which the opening/closing means is opened for a time shorter than the main opening before the main opening is executed by the main opening execution means. Then, the temporary opening judgment means also provided in the drive means judges whether the temporary opening by the temporary opening execution means has been executed normally, and when the temporary opening judgment means judges that the temporary opening has not been executed normally, the abnormality notification means notifies that an abnormality has occurred in the opening/closing means. As a result, the temporary opening can be executed before the game balls flow into the special area to judge whether the special area is opened normally, and if the special area is not opened, the abnormality notification can be issued to recognize that fact early. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the game balls cannot flow into the special area early before the main opening, and to make the staff of the game arcade recognize that fact. As a result, the staff at the amusement facility will be able to respond to the player after understanding the abnormality in the opening and closing means, and this has the effect of preventing the player from being disadvantaged by not being granted the second advantageous state.

In the gaming machine G0,
The gaming machine G1 is characterized by comprising a game progress stopping means for stopping the progress of the game when the provisional release judgment means judges that the provisional release has not been executed normally.

Gaming machine G1 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine G0. That is, when the provisional opening determination means determines that the provisional opening has not been performed normally, the game progress stop means stops the game progress. This has the effect of preventing the game progress from stopping at the stage when an abnormality in which the special area is not opened normally is recognized, making it possible to prevent the occurrence of malfunctions that may occur thereafter, such as the game ball not passing through the special area, and suppressing disadvantages to the player.

In the gaming machine G1,
The gaming machine G2 is characterized by comprising a game restarting means for restarting the game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition when the game is stopped by the game progress stopping means.

Gaming machine G2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine G1. That is, when a game is stopped by the game progress stopping means, the game is resumed by the game restarting means when a predetermined condition is met. This has the effect of preventing the game progress from being stopped at the stage where an abnormality is recognized in which a special area is not normally opened, for example, and allowing the game to be resumed from the point where the game has been stopped after the abnormality is resolved, thereby preventing the player from being disadvantaged by not being granted the second advantageous state.

In any one of the gaming machines G0 to G2,
The provisional release execution means includes:
The gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the opening and closing means is driven to open so that it is difficult or impossible for gaming balls to flow into the special area.

Gaming machine G3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines G0 to G2. That is, the opening and closing means is driven to open by the provisional opening execution means so that it is difficult or impossible for gaming balls to flow into the special area. This has the effect of preventing gaming balls from flowing into the special area during provisional opening, thereby preventing unexpected events such as gaming balls that are stuck in the variable ball entry means flowing into the special area, granting players the gaming value expected in the gaming specifications, and preventing unexpected losses from occurring to the gaming facility.

In any one of the gaming machines G0 to G3,
The opening execution means includes:
A main opening determination means (e.g., a probability change area opening/closing table 202f) for determining whether or not to execute the main opening;
and an execution means for executing the main opening when the main opening is determined to be executed by the main opening determination means (for example, opening the right side probability change area 73 in the first round of "time reduction A");
The provisional release execution means includes:
A gaming machine G4 characterized in that the provisional opening is executed even when the actual opening is not executed by the execution means.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines G0 to G3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the full opening determination means provided in the full opening execution means determines whether or not to execute the full opening, and when the full opening determination means determines to execute the full opening, the execution means executes the full opening. Then, the provisional opening execution means executes the provisional opening even when the execution means does not execute the full opening. As a result, even if the full opening of the special area is not executed, it is possible to recognize whether the opening and closing means can open normally and allow the game balls to flow into the special area, and it is possible to recognize early that the game balls cannot flow into the special area and to make the store staff of the game arcade recognize that fact. As a result, the store staff of the game arcade can respond to the player after understanding the abnormality of the opening and closing means, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by not being granted the second advantageous state.

In any one of the gaming machines G0 to G4,
The special area is
The first special area (for example, the right special area 73),
A second special area (e.g., a left special area 74) different from the first special area,
The opening and closing means is
A first opening/closing means (e.g., a right special area opening/closing plate 73a) for opening and closing the first special area;
A second opening/closing means (for example, a left special area opening/closing plate 74a) for opening and closing the second special area,
The opening execution means includes:
The main opening is performed by opening either the first opening/closing means or the second opening/closing means,
The provisional release execution means includes:
A gaming machine G5 characterized in that the provisional opening is executed by opening both the first opening/closing means and the second opening/closing means.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines G0 to G4, the following effects are achieved. That is, a first special area and a second special area different from the first special area are provided in the special area, and the first special area is opened and closed by the first opening and closing means provided in the opening and closing means, and the second special area is opened and closed by the second opening and closing means provided in the opening and closing means. Then, the main opening execution means opens either the first opening and closing means or the second opening and closing means to execute the main opening, and the temporary opening execution means opens both the first opening and closing means and the second opening and closing means to execute the temporary opening. As a result, even if the main opening of the first special area or the second special area is not executed, the temporary opening can be executed by both the first opening and closing means and the second opening means, and it can be recognized whether or not it is possible to open both opening and closing means normally and to allow the game balls to flow into the special area. Therefore, it is possible to recognize early that the game balls cannot flow into the special area, and to make the staff of the game arcade, etc., recognize that. As a result, the staff at the amusement facility will be able to respond to the player after understanding the abnormality in the opening and closing means, and this has the effect of preventing the player from being disadvantaged by not being granted the second advantageous state.

In any one of gaming machines G0 to G5,
A special area switching means for switching whether or not the special area is enabled (for example, turning on a right probability variable effective flag 203g or a left probability variable effective flag 203h),
The second advantageous state means includes:
When the game ball passes through the special area that is set to be effective by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is generated,
A gaming machine G6 characterized in that it is configured so as not to cause the second advantageous state to occur when a gaming ball passes through a special area that is not set validly by the special area switching means.

Gaming machine G6 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines G0 to G5. That is, the special area switching means switches whether or not to enable the special area. Then, when the gaming ball passes through a special area that is set to be enabled by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state means generates the second advantageous state, while when the gaming ball passes through a special area that is not set to be enabled by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state means is configured not to generate the second advantageous state. This makes it possible to prevent the second advantageous state from occurring even if the gaming ball passes through a special area unless the special area is enabled. Therefore, even if the player recognizes the passage of the gaming ball into the special area, it is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot occur, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In any one of the gaming machines G0 to G6,
A game state changing means (e.g., a big win end process (S415)) for changing a game state by using the judgment result of the judgment means;
When the game state is changed by the game state changing means, a notification means (e.g., a third symbol display device 81) is provided for executing a state suggestion notification (e.g., a "probability change notification performance mode") to suggest the game state to the player,
The notification means includes:
A gaming machine G7 is characterized by comprising a suggestion notification non-execution means (for example, a "latent probability change presentation mode" based on winning "latent probability change A") that does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state when the gaming ball passes through the special area that has been enabled by the special area switching means.

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines G0 to G6, the following effects are achieved. That is, by using the judgment result of the judgment means, the gaming state is changed by the gaming state changing means, and when the gaming state is changed by the gaming state changing means, the notification means executes a state suggestion notification to notify the player of the gaming state. Then, the suggestion notification non-execution means provided in the notification means is configured not to execute a state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state at the timing when the gaming ball passes through the special area enabled by the special area switching means. As a result, when the suggestion notification non-execution means does not execute a state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state and prevents the player from recognizing that the second advantageous state is in place, it is not possible to recognize whether the second advantageous state occurs or not just by the passage of the gaming ball through the special area. As a result, it is possible to create a game that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G6 or G7,
The advantageous state means includes:
a unit game execution means (e.g., a big win process (S103)) for executing a unit game (e.g., one round) multiple times in the advantageous state of one of the game modes, which changes the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state;
The special area switching means
A unit game activation means for activating the special area in at least one of the unit games (for example, the second round of "latent probability fluctuation B");
The gaming machine G8 is characterized in that it is provided with an effective suggestion non-execution means (for example, non-notification of the effective setting of the probability change areas 73, 74) that does not suggest that the special area is effective by the unit game effective means.

According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines G6 and G7, the following effects are achieved. That is, the unit game execution means provided in the advantageous state means executes a unit game in which the variable ball entry means is changed from the first state to the second state multiple times in one advantageous state. Then, the unit game validity means provided in the special area switching means makes the special area valid in at least one unit game, and the validity suggestion non-execution means also provided in the special area switching means does not suggest that the special area is valid by the unit game validity means. As a result, the special area is valid in one of the unit games in the advantageous state, and the game ball is allowed to flow into the special area during the unit game while the validity is not suggested, thereby generating a second advantageous state. Therefore, it is not possible to recognize whether the second advantageous state occurs or not just by the passage of the game ball through the special area. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G8,
The special area switching means
A gaming machine G9 characterized in that, in a given unit game, either the first special area or the second special area is activated, and the other is not activated.

Gaming machine G9 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine G8. That is, the special area switching means is configured so that in a given unit game, either the first special area or the second special area is made effective, and the other is not made effective. In this way, by providing effective patterns of multiple special areas, it is possible to make it difficult to tell which of the first special area or the second special area is set to be effective, and as a result, it has the effect of creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he is playing in the second advantageous state, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In any one of the gaming machines G0 to G9,
The second advantageous state means includes:
When the determining means determines that the first lottery result (for example, the lottery result of "latent probability fluctuation A") is capable of generating the second advantageous state, a passing means (for example, turning on the right probability fluctuation effective flag 203g and turning on the right probability fluctuation area solenoid 73b) that passes the game ball to the special area that is effective during the advantageous state based on the first lottery result;
The gaming machine G10 is characterized in that it is equipped with a passage prevention means (for example, turning on the right special probability activation flag 203g and turning off the right special probability activation area solenoid 73b) that prevents the game ball from passing through the special area that is valid during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result when the judgment means judges that the second lottery result (for example, the lottery result of ``time reduction A'') does not generate the second advantageous state.

According to the gaming machine G10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines G0 to G9, the following effect is achieved. That is, when the determination means determines that the first lottery result is capable of generating the second advantageous state, the effective time passing means provided in the second advantageous state means is configured to pass the gaming ball through the effective special area during the advantageous state based on the first lottery result. On the other hand, when the determination means determines that the second lottery result is not capable of generating the second advantageous state, the passing prevention means provided in the second advantageous state means is configured to prevent the gaming ball from passing through the effective special area during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result. That is, when the first lottery result is capable of generating the second advantageous state, the gaming ball is passed through the effective special area to generate the second advantageous state, while when the second lottery result is not capable of generating the second advantageous state, the gaming ball is prevented from passing through the effective special area to prevent the second advantageous state from being generated. This allows the second advantageous state to be generated depending on whether or not the game ball passes through a valid special area, but by configuring the game so that the second advantageous state does not occur even if the game ball passes through a special area if the special area is not valid, it is possible to create gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not they are playing in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine G10,
The valid time passing means is
When the first special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the first opening/closing means is opened to allow the game balls to flow into the first special area;
A gaming machine G11 characterized in that, when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is opened to allow gaming balls to flow into the second special area.

Gaming machine G11 provides the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine G10. That is, when the first special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the effective time passing means opens the first opening/closing means to allow the gaming ball to flow into the first special area, and when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is opened to allow the gaming ball to flow into the second special area. This has the effect that when a second advantageous state is to be generated, the second advantageous state can be appropriately generated by passing the gaming ball through the enabled special area.

In the gaming machine G10 or G11,
The passage prevention means is
When the first special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the first opening/closing means is closed to prevent game balls from flowing into the first special area;
A gaming machine G12 characterized in that when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is closed to prevent game balls from flowing into the second special area.

The gaming machine G12 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G10 or G11. That is, when the first special area is enabled by the special game switching means, the passage blocking means closes the first opening and closing means to prevent the game ball from flowing into the first special area. Also, when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the passage blocking means also closes the second opening and closing means to prevent the game ball from flowing into the second special area. As a result, by not allowing the game ball to pass through the enabled special area when the second advantageous state is not generated, it is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot be generated even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball into the special area. Therefore, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine G11 or G12,
The passage prevention means is
When the first special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is opened to allow the game balls to flow into the second special area;
A gaming machine G13 characterized in that, when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the first opening/closing means is opened to allow gaming balls to flow into the first special area.

The gaming machine G13 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G11 or G12. That is, when the first special area is enabled by the special game switching means, the passage blocking means opens the second opening and closing means to allow the gaming ball to flow into the second special area. Also, when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the passage blocking means also opens the first opening and closing means to allow the gaming ball to flow into the first special area. In this way, when the second advantageous state is not generated, by allowing the gaming ball to pass through an ineffective special area, it is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot be generated even if the player recognizes the passage of the gaming ball into the special area. Therefore, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be increased.

In any of the gaming machines G8 to G13,
The second advantageous state means includes:
A valid pattern determination means (e.g., a probability variable area valid table 202g) for determining whether or not to activate the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determination means;
An opening/closing pattern determination means (e.g., a probability change area opening/closing table 202f) for determining whether or not to allow a game ball to flow into the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determination means;
an opening/closing pattern uniformity means (e.g., opening/closing pattern "X1") for uniformly setting the opening/closing pattern of the special area determined by the opening/closing pattern determination means between the first lottery result and the second lottery result;
The gaming machine G14 is characterized by comprising an effective pattern mismatch means (e.g., effective patterns "A" and "B") that causes the effective pattern of the special area determined by the effective pattern determination means to differ between the first lottery result and the second lottery result.

Gaming machine G14 has the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machines G8 to G13. That is, the effective pattern determination means provided in the second advantageous state means uses the judgment result by the judgment means to determine whether or not to activate the special area for each unit game. Also, the opening/closing pattern determination means also provided in the second advantageous state means uses the judgment result by the judgment means to determine whether or not to allow game balls to flow into the special area for each unit game. Then, the opening/closing pattern uniformity means makes the opening/closing patterns of the special area determined by the opening/closing pattern determination means uniform between the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the effective pattern mismatch means makes the effective patterns of the special area determined by the effective pattern determination means different between the first lottery result and the second lottery result. This has the effect of making the opening and closing patterns of the special area the same for the first and second lottery results, making it impossible to distinguish the lottery results from the opening and closing patterns alone, while making the effective patterns of the special area different for the first and second lottery results, making it difficult to tell whether the second advantageous state will occur, creating a gameplay experience that allows the player to guess whether or not they are playing in the second advantageous state, thereby increasing the fun of the game.

In any one of gaming machines G10 to G14,
A display means (e.g., a special symbol display device 37) for displaying the first lottery result and the second lottery result;
and a result discrimination difficult means for making the first lottery result or the second lottery result difficult to discern based on the display result by the display means (for example, 127 display patterns for "Time Reduction C" and 127 display patterns for "Latent Probability Variation C", each of which is a random pattern with no regularity using 8 LEDs).

Gaming machine G15 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines G10 to G14. That is, the display means displays the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the result difficult to distinguish means makes it difficult to distinguish the first lottery result or the second lottery result based on the display result by the display means. As a result, even if the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed, by making it difficult to distinguish which lottery result it is, if the player is prevented from recognizing that the second advantageous state is occurring, it is not possible to recognize whether the second advantageous state will occur just from the passage of the gaming ball through the special area, and it is also not possible to recognize whether the second advantageous state will occur based on the display result by the display means. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not they are playing in the second advantageous state, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be increased.

In any one of gaming machines G0 to G15,
The special area is
A gaming machine G16 characterized by being arranged in a position visible to a player.

Gaming machine G16 has the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machines G0 to G15. That is, a special area is arranged in a position visible to the player. This has the effect of allowing the player to visually confirm that the gaming ball has passed through the special area, creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not the second advantageous state will occur, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

<H group: Double attacker x individual variable area (no opening and closing board)>
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a gaming medium such as a gaming ball is fired toward a gaming area provided on a gaming board, and a win/lose lottery is held based on whether the gaming ball enters one of a number of ball entry ports provided in the gaming area. If the win/lose lottery results in an advantageous state such as a win, a variable ball entry means which is normally closed is opened, and a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, there is a pachinko machine that provides a special area through which the gaming ball that has flowed into the variable ball entry means can pass, and that controls the opening and closing of the special area with an opening and closing member or the like, and when the gaming ball passes through the special area, generates a special gaming value based on a second advantageous state that is different from the predetermined gaming value based on the advantageous state.

In addition, some of the above pachinko machines execute a normal notification mode in which the second advantageous state does not occur, for example, even if the second advantageous state occurs, without informing the player of whether or not the second advantageous state will occur. In other words, a presentation is executed as if the second advantageous state will not occur for the player, creating a gameplay that requires the player to guess whether or not the second advantageous state will be granted, thereby increasing the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

However, the above gaming machine is configured to always generate the second advantageous state when the gaming ball passes through the special area, so the player will recognize that the second advantageous state will occur when he or she visually confirms that the gaming ball has passed through the special area. For this reason, if the normal notification mode is executed after the player recognizes that the second advantageous state has occurred due to the gaming ball passing through the special area, it may not be possible to provide the player with the expected interest in the game, and instead, it may cause the player to lose interest in the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The invention of Group H was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of the game.

A launching means (e.g., a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball;
A ball entry means (for example, a special winning hole 64b) into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter;
An information acquisition means (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 203d) for acquiring predetermined information due to a game ball entering the ball entry means;
A determination means (e.g., a jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
a game state changing means for changing a game state by using the judgment result of the judgment means (for example, from a "normal game state" to a "latent probability changing state");
When the game state is changed by the game state changing means, a notification means (e.g., a third symbol display device 81) executes a state suggestion notification (e.g., a "probability change notification performance mode") to suggest the game state to the player;
a first variable ball entry means (e.g., a variable winning device 65) and a second variable ball entry means (e.g., a second variable winning device 76) that can be changed between a first state in which it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter;
and a favorable state means for changing one or both of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state (e.g., a jackpot state) by using the result of the judgment by the judgment means (e.g., opening the large prize opening 65a and the second large prize opening 76a at the time of a jackpot),
A first special area (for example, the right special area 73) through which the game ball flowing into the first variable ball entry means can pass;
A second special area (for example, the left special area 74) through which the game ball flowing into the second variable ball entry means can pass;
A special area switching means (for example, turning on a right probability change effective flag 203g or a left probability change effective flag 203h) for switching between the validity and invalidity of the first special area or the second special area,
The game state changing means includes:
A second advantageous state means (e.g., generation of a "probability fluctuation state") capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state generated by the advantageous state means,
The second advantageous state means includes:
When the game ball passes through the first special area that is set by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is generated;
When the game ball passes through the second special area that is set to be effective by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is generated,
When the game ball passes through the first special area that is not set to be effective by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is not generated;
When the game ball passes through the second special area that is not set to be effective by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is not generated;
The notification means includes:
The gaming machine H0 is characterized by comprising a suggestion notification non-execution means (for example, a "latent probability change presentation mode" based on winning "latent probability change A") that does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state when the gaming ball passes through the first special area or the second special area that is enabled by the special area switching means.

According to the gaming machine H0, a game ball is launched by a launching means, and the game ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the ball entry means, and the information acquisition means acquires predetermined information due to the game ball entering the ball entry means. The predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means is then judged by a judging means, and the game state is changed by the game state changing means by using the judgment result of the judging means, and when the game state is changed by the game state changing means, a state suggestion announcement is executed by the notification means to inform the player of the game state. In addition, a first variable ball entry means and a second variable ball entry means are provided that can be changed between a first state in which it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter, and by using the judgment result by the judging means, one or both of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are set to an advantageous state from the first state to the second state by the advantageous state means. Here, the first variable ball entry means is configured to allow the game ball to pass through the first special area, the second variable ball entry means is configured to allow the game ball to pass through the second special area, and the special area switching means switches between the first special area or the second special area as enabled or disabled. Also, the second advantageous state means provided in the game state changing means can generate a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state generated by the advantageous state means. Then, when the game ball passes through the first special area set to be enabled by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is generated by the second advantageous state means, and when the game ball passes through the second special area set to be enabled by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is generated. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the first special area not set to be enabled by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is not generated by the second advantageous state means, and when the game ball passes through the second special area not set to be enabled by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is not generated by the second advantageous state means. Then, the suggestion notification non-execution means provided in the notification means does not execute a state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state at the timing when the game ball passes through the first special area or the second special area that is set to be valid by the special area switching means. That is, even if the game ball passes through the first special area or the second special area, if the first special area or the second special area is not valid, the second advantageous state is not generated, and even if the game ball passes through the first special area or the second special area that is set to be valid, the player is not suggested that the second advantageous state will be generated at that timing. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot be generated even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball into the first special area or the second special area. Therefore, when the suggestion notification non-execution means does not execute a state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state and does not allow the player to recognize that the second advantageous state is in place, the player cannot recognize whether the second advantageous state will be generated or not just by the passage of the game ball through the first special area or the second special area. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not they are playing in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine H0,
The advantageous state means includes:
A unit game execution means (e.g., a big win process (S103)) is provided for executing a unit game (e.g., one round) multiple times to change either the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state in the advantageous state of one.
The special area switching means
A unit game validating means for validating the first special area or the second special area in at least one of the unit games (for example, the second round of "latent probability fluctuation B");
The second advantageous state means includes:
When the determining means determines that the first lottery result (e.g., the lottery result of "latent probability fluctuation A") is capable of generating the second advantageous state, an effective time opening means (e.g., turning on the right probability variable effective flag 203g and turning on the large prize opening solenoid 65c) controls the opening and closing of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means so as to allow the game ball to pass through the first special area or the second special area that is effective during the advantageous state based on the first lottery result;
When the judgment means judges that the second lottery result (e.g., the lottery result of ``Time Reduction A'') does not generate the second advantageous state, a passage prevention opening means (e.g., turning on the right special bonus valid flag 203g and turning off the large prize opening solenoid 65c) controls the opening and closing of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means to prevent the game ball from passing through the first special area or the second special area, which are valid, during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result.

According to the gaming machine H1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H0, the following effects are achieved. That is, in one advantageous state, a unit game is executed multiple times by a unit game execution means provided in the advantageous state means, in which either the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means is changed from the first state to the second state. In addition, the first special area or the second special area is made effective in at least one unit game by a unit game activation means provided in the special area switching means. Then, when the determination means determines that the first lottery result is one that can generate the second advantageous state by an effective time opening means provided in the second advantageous state means, the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are controlled to open and close so as to pass the game ball through the effective first special area or second special area during the advantageous state based on the first lottery result. In addition, when the determination means determines that the second lottery result does not generate the second advantageous state, the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are controlled to open and close so as not to allow the game ball to pass through the first special area or the second special area that is valid during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result by the passage prevention means also provided in the second advantageous state means. This makes it possible to generate the second advantageous state according to the lottery result by controlling the opening and closing of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means and controlling whether the first special area or the second special area is valid, while eliminating the need to provide a member for opening and closing the special area in each special area, and without complicating the design of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means can be easily designed with a simple configuration. In addition, it is possible to reduce the number of parts of the game machine and reduce manufacturing costs. Furthermore, since there is no need to consider the merging of the first and second variable ball entry means, there is an advantage in that the design freedom of the first and second variable ball entry means can be improved.

In the gaming machine H0 or H1,
The advantageous state means includes:
A gaming machine H2 is characterized in that it is equipped with an alternating ball entry means (for example, opening the variable ball entry device 65 and the second variable ball entry device 76 without any interval time) that alternately and seamlessly switches the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means to the second state each time the unit game is executed in a specified advantageous state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines H0 and H1, gaming machine H2 has the following effect. That is, the alternating ball entry means provided in the advantageous state means alternately and uninterruptedly sets the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means to the second state each time a unit game is executed in a predetermined advantageous state.

Conventionally, when an advantageous state is eliminated by opening or closing one of the variable ball entry means, it is necessary to provide an interval time associated with the closing of the variable ball entry means, which takes time to eliminate the advantageous state, dragging out the game and risking the player losing interest, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine H2, the alternating ball entry means alternates between the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means for each unit game of a predetermined advantageous state, eliminating the interval time associated with the closing of the variable ball entry means. This has the effect of preventing the player from losing interest because the advantageous state can be quickly consumed and the game does not drag on. In addition, by granting the second advantageous state by combining the opening and closing of the variable ball entry means 2 and the activation or deactivation of the special area 2, it is impossible to recognize that the second advantageous state will occur unless the variations of each combination are understood in advance. As a result, in an advantageous state that occurs quickly, it is possible to reduce the player's thinking time while making it difficult to recognize whether the second advantageous state will occur, and it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he is playing in the second advantageous state, and it has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine H1 or H2,
The special area switching means
A gaming machine H3 is characterized in that it is equipped with an effective suggestion non-execution means (for example, non-notification of the effective setting of the probability change areas 73, 74) that does not suggest that the first special area or the second special area is effective by the unit game effective means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines H1 and H2, gaming machine H3 provides the following effects. That is, the special area is not suggested to be active by the unit game active means due to the effective indication non-execution means provided in the special area switching means. As a result, the first special area or the second special area becomes active in one of the unit games in the advantageous state, and the second advantageous state can be generated by causing the game ball to flow into the first special area or the second special area that is active during the unit game while the effective state is not suggested. Therefore, it is not possible to recognize whether the second advantageous state will occur just by the passage of the game ball through the first special area or the second special area. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be increased.

In any one of the gaming machines H0 to H3,
The special area switching means
A gaming machine H4, characterized in that in a given unit game, either the first special area or the second special area is activated, and the other is not activated.

Gaming machine H4 provides the following effect in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines H0 to H3. That is, the special area switching means is configured so that in a given unit game, either the first special area or the second special area is made effective, and the other is not made effective. This has the effect of making it difficult to tell which of the first special area or the second special area is set effective by providing effective patterns for multiple special areas, thereby creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not they are playing in the second advantageous state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In any one of the gaming machines H0 to H4,
The second advantageous state means includes:
A valid pattern determination means (e.g., a probability change area validity table 202g) for determining whether or not to activate the first special area or the second special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determination means;
An opening/closing pattern determination means (e.g., a large prize opening opening/closing table 202h) that uses the determination result by the determination means to determine whether or not to open the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means for each unit game to allow game balls to flow into the first special area or the second special area;
An opening/closing pattern uniformity means (for example, an opening/closing pattern "alternate bottom and top") for uniformly opening/closing the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means by the opening/closing pattern determination means between the first lottery result and the second lottery result;
A gaming machine H5, characterized in that it is provided with an effective pattern mismatch means (e.g., effective patterns "A" and "B") that causes the effective pattern of the special area determined by the effective pattern determination means to differ between the first lottery result and the second lottery result.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines H0 to H4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the effective pattern determination means provided in the second advantageous state means uses the judgment result by the judgment means to determine whether or not to activate the first special area or the second special area for each unit game. Also, the opening and closing pattern determination means also provided in the second advantageous state means uses the judgment result by the judgment means to determine whether or not to open the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means to allow game balls to flow into the first special area or the second special area for each unit game. Then, the opening and closing pattern uniformity means makes the opening and closing patterns of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means uniform between the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the effective pattern mismatch means makes the effective patterns of the special areas determined by the effective pattern determination means different between the first lottery result and the second lottery result. This has the effect of making the opening and closing patterns of the first and second variable ball entry means the same for the first and second lottery results, making it impossible to identify the lottery results from the opening and closing patterns alone, while making the effective patterns of the first and second special areas different for the first and second lottery results, making it difficult to tell whether or not the second advantageous state will occur, creating a gameplay experience that allows the player to guess whether or not they are playing in the second advantageous state, thereby increasing the fun of the game.

In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5,
A display means (e.g., a special symbol display device 37) for displaying the first lottery result and the second lottery result;
and a result discrimination difficult means for making the first lottery result or the second lottery result difficult to discern based on the display result by the display means (for example, 127 types of display patterns for "time reduction C" and 127 types of display patterns for "latent probability fluctuation C", each of which is a random pattern with no regularity using 8 LEDs).

Gaming machine H6 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines H1 to H5. That is, the display means displays the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the result difficult to distinguish means makes it difficult to distinguish the first lottery result or the second lottery result based on the display result by the display means. As a result, even if the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed, by making it difficult to distinguish which lottery result it is, if the player is prevented from recognizing that the second advantageous state is occurring, it is not possible to recognize whether the second advantageous state will occur just from the passage of the gaming ball through the special area, and it is also not possible to recognize whether the second advantageous state will occur based on the display result by the display means. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not they are playing in the second advantageous state, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be increased.

In any one of the gaming machines H0 to H6,
The first special area and the second special area are
A gaming machine H7 that is arranged in a position visible to the player.

Gaming machine H7 provides the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machines H0 to H6. That is, a first special area and a second special area are arranged in positions visible to the player. This allows the player to visually confirm that the gaming ball has passed through the first special area or the second special area, creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not the second advantageous state will occur, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

<Group I: Specific area 2 (specific area 1 and the discharge passage are also acceptable) overlap in the depth direction>
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a gaming medium such as a gaming ball is fired toward a gaming area provided on a gaming board, and a win/lose lottery is held based on whether the gaming ball enters one of a number of ball entry ports provided in the gaming area. If the win/lose lottery results in an advantageous state such as a win, a variable ball entry means which is normally closed is opened, and a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, there is a pachinko machine that provides a special area through which the gaming ball that has flowed into the variable ball entry means can pass, and that controls the opening and closing of the special area with an opening and closing member or the like, and when the gaming ball passes through the special area, generates a special gaming value based on a second advantageous state that is different from the predetermined gaming value based on the advantageous state.

In addition, some of the above pachinko machines execute a normal notification mode in which the second advantageous state does not occur, for example, even if the second advantageous state occurs, without informing the player of whether or not the second advantageous state will occur. In other words, a presentation is executed as if the second advantageous state will not occur for the player, creating a gameplay that requires the player to guess whether or not the second advantageous state will be granted, thereby increasing the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

However, the above gaming machine is configured to always generate the second advantageous state when the gaming ball passes through the special area, so the player will recognize that the second advantageous state will occur when he or she visually confirms that the gaming ball has passed through the special area. For this reason, if the normal notification mode is executed after the player recognizes that the second advantageous state has occurred due to the gaming ball passing through the special area, it may not be possible to provide the player with the expected interest in the game, and instead, it may cause the player to lose interest in the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The inventions in Group I were made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aim to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

A launching means (e.g., a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball;
A ball entry means (for example, a special winning hole 64b) into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter;
An information acquisition means (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 203d) for acquiring predetermined information due to a game ball entering the ball entry means;
A determination means (e.g., a jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A variable ball entry means (e.g., a variable winning device 65) that can be changed between a first state in which it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter;
By using the judgment result by the judgment means, advantageous state means (e.g., jackpot processing (S103)) for changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot state);
In a gaming machine having a special area (for example, a front side variable probability area 73e and a back side variable probability area 74e) through which the gaming ball flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass,
A second passage means (e.g., an innermost discharge passage 75a) is formed at a position overlapping the special area in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and through which the gaming balls that have flowed into the variable ball entry means can pass;
and a second advantageous state means (e.g., a probability change transition flag 203i) capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state generated by the advantageous state means when the game ball passes through the special area,
The second passing means is
A gaming machine I0 characterized in that among the gaming balls that flow into the variable ball entry means, those that do not pass through the special area pass through.

According to the gaming machine I0, a gaming ball is launched by a launching means, and the gaming ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the ball entry means, and the information acquisition means acquires predetermined information due to the game ball entering the ball entry means. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means. Also, a variable ball entry means is provided that can change between a first state in which the game ball is difficult or impossible to enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter, and by using the determination result by the determination means, the advantageous state means changes the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state. Also, a special area through which the gaming ball that has flowed into the variable ball entry means can pass is provided. Here, the second passing means formed at a position overlapping the special area in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine as viewed from the front is configured to be able to pass the gaming ball that has flowed into the variable ball entry means. Then, when the game ball passes through the special area, a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means can be generated by the second advantageous state means. Among the game balls that flow into the variable ball entry means, those that do not pass through the special area are configured to pass through the second passing means. That is, the game ball that flows into the variable ball entry means passes through either the special area or the second passing means that are arranged so as to overlap when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and when the game ball passes through the special area, the second advantageous state can be generated. As a result, since human vision generally has a harder time recognizing the difference in depth images than the difference in planar images, the special area and the second passing means overlap in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, making it more difficult for a player who sees the special area and the second passing means from the front side of the gaming machine to recognize which flow path (special area) the game ball has flowed into, compared to when the special area is arranged planarly from the player. Therefore, by configuring it so that it is difficult to distinguish whether the game ball has passed through the special area, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether the second advantageous state can be generated. As a result, it is possible to create a game that allows the player to guess whether the second advantageous state will be granted, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine I0,
The advantageous state means includes:
A special area switching means for switching whether or not the special area is enabled (for example, turning on a right probability variable effective flag 203g or a left probability variable effective flag 203h),
The second advantageous state means includes:
When the game ball passes through the special area that is set to be effective by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is generated,
A gaming machine I1 characterized in that it is configured so as not to generate the second advantageous state when a gaming ball passes through a special area that is not set validly by the special area switching means.

According to the gaming machine I1, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I0, the following effect is achieved. That is, the special area switching means provided in the advantageous state means switches whether or not the special area is enabled. Then, when the gaming ball passes through a special area that is set to be enabled by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state means generates the second advantageous state, while when the gaming ball passes through a special area that is not set to be enabled by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state means is configured not to generate the second advantageous state. That is, even if the gaming ball passes through a special area, if the special area is not enabled, the second advantageous state can be prevented from being generated. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot be generated even if the player recognizes the passage of the gaming ball into the special area. Therefore, since it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state will occur just by the passage of the gaming ball through the special area, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine I0 or I1,
The special area and/or the second passage means are
A gaming machine I2 characterized by being formed from a transparent or translucent material.

Gaming machine I2 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine I0 or I1. That is, the special area and/or the second passing means are formed from a transparent or translucent material. As a result, since the special area and/or the second passing means overlap when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine which flow path (special area) the gaming ball is passing through. As a result, it becomes difficult to recognize in advance the flow pattern into the special area or the second passing means, and it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not they are playing in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2,
A game state changing means (e.g., a big win end process (S415)) for changing a game state by using the judgment result of the judgment means;
When the game state is changed by the game state changing means, a notification means (e.g., a third symbol display device 81) is provided for executing a state suggestion notification (e.g., a "probability change notification performance mode") to suggest the game state to the player,
The notification means includes:
Gaming machine I3 is characterized in that it is equipped with a suggestion notification non-execution means (for example, a ``latent probability change presentation mode'' based on winning ``latent probability change A'') that does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state when the gaming ball passes through the special area that has been enabled by the special area switching means.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines I1 or I2, the following effects are achieved. That is, by using the judgment result of the judgment means, the gaming state is changed by the gaming state changing means, and when the gaming state is changed by the gaming state changing means, the notification means executes a state suggestion notification to notify the player of the gaming state. Then, the suggestion notification non-execution means provided in the notification means does not execute a state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state at the timing when the gaming ball passes through the special area set to be valid by the special area switching means. That is, even if the gaming ball passes through the special area, it is possible to prevent the second advantageous state from occurring if the special area is not valid, and even if the gaming ball passes through the special area set to be valid, the player is not suggested that the second advantageous state will occur at that timing. As a result, even if the player recognizes the passage of the gaming ball into the special area, it is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot occur. Then, when the indication notification non-execution means does not execute a state indication notification corresponding to the second advantageous state when the gaming ball passes through the enabled special area, and prevents the player from recognizing that the second advantageous state is occurring, the player cannot recognize whether the second advantageous state will occur or not just from the gaming ball passing through the special area. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not they are playing in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In any one of gaming machines I1 to I3,
The advantageous state means includes:
a unit game execution means (e.g., a big win process (S103)) for executing a unit game (e.g., one round) multiple times in the advantageous state of one of the game modes, which changes the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state;
The special area switching means
A unit game activation means for activating the special area in at least one of the unit games (for example, the second round of "latent probability fluctuation B");
A gaming machine I4 is characterized in that it is equipped with an effective suggestion non-execution means (for example, non-notification of the effective setting of the special area 73e, 74e) that does not suggest that the special area is effective by the unit game effective means.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the following effect is achieved. That is, the unit game execution means provided in the advantageous state means executes a unit game in which the variable ball entry means is changed from the first state to the second state multiple times in one advantageous state. Then, the unit game validity means provided in the special area switching means makes the special area valid in at least one unit game, and the validity suggestion non-execution means also provided in the special area switching means does not suggest that the special area is valid by the unit game validity means. As a result, the special area is valid in one of the unit games in the advantageous state, and the game ball is allowed to flow into the special area during the unit game while the validity is not suggested, thereby generating a second advantageous state. Therefore, it is not possible to recognize whether the second advantageous state occurs or not just by the passage of the game ball through the special area. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine I4,
The special area is
The first special area (for example, the near side probability change area 73e),
A second special area (for example, a deep side variable area 74e) different from the first special area,
The special area switching means
A gaming machine I5 characterized in that, in a given unit game, either the first special area or the second special area is activated, and the other is not activated.

Gaming machine I5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine I4. That is, a first special area and a second special area different from the first special area are provided as special areas, and a special area switching means is configured to activate either the first special area or the second special area in a given unit game, and not the other. In this way, by providing an effective pattern for multiple special areas, it is possible to make it difficult to tell which first special area or which second special area is set as active, and as a result, it has the effect of creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he is playing in the second advantageous state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In any one of gaming machines I1 to I5,
The second advantageous state means includes:
When the determining means determines that the first lottery result (for example, the lottery result of "latent probability fluctuation A") is capable of generating the second advantageous state, a passing means (for example, turning on a right (front) probability variable effective flag 203g and turning on a front probability variable area solenoid 73g) that passes a game ball to the special area that is effective during the advantageous state based on the first lottery result;
Gaming machine I6 is characterized in that it is equipped with a passage prevention means (for example, turning on the right (front) special probability activation flag 203g and turning off the front special probability activation area solenoid 73g) that prevents the game ball from passing through the special area that is valid during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result when the judgment means judges that the second lottery result (for example, the lottery result of ``time reduction A'') does not generate the second advantageous state.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the following effect is achieved. That is, when the determination means determines that the first lottery result is capable of generating the second advantageous state, the effective time passing means provided in the second advantageous state means is configured to pass the gaming ball through the effective special area during the advantageous state based on the first lottery result. On the other hand, when the determination means determines that the second lottery result is not capable of generating the second advantageous state, the passing prevention means provided in the second advantageous state means is configured to prevent the gaming ball from passing through the effective special area during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result. That is, when the first lottery result is capable of generating the second advantageous state, the gaming ball is passed through the effective special area to generate the second advantageous state, while when the second lottery result is not capable of generating the second advantageous state, the gaming ball is prevented from passing through the effective special area to prevent the second advantageous state from being generated. This allows the second advantageous state to be generated depending on whether or not the game ball passes through a valid special area, but by configuring the game so that the second advantageous state does not occur even if the game ball passes through a special area if the special area is not valid, it is possible to create gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not they are playing in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine I6,
An opening/closing means for opening and closing the special area (for example, a front probability change area opening/closing plate 73f and a back probability change area opening/closing plate 74f),
The valid time passing means is
A gaming machine I7 characterized in that, when the special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the opening and closing means is opened to allow gaming balls to flow into the special area.

Gaming machine I7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine I6. That is, the opening and closing means opens and closes the special area. Then, when the special area is activated by the special area switching means, the opening and closing means is opened by the effective time passing means to allow the gaming ball to flow into the special area. This has the effect that when a second advantageous state is to be generated, the second advantageous state can be appropriately generated by passing the gaming ball through the activated special area.

In the gaming machine I7,
The opening and closing means is
A gaming machine I8 characterized in that it is made of a transparent or translucent material.

Gaming machine I8 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine I7. That is, the opening and closing means is made of a transparent or translucent material. This makes it difficult for the player to distinguish the operating state of the opening and closing means, making it difficult to recognize whether the opening and closing means is open and allows flow into the special area, or whether the opening and closing means is closed and allows flow into the second flow path. As a result, it becomes difficult to recognize in advance the flow pattern into the special area or the second flow path, creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not they are playing in the second advantageous state, and increasing the interest in the game.

In gaming machine I7 or I8,
The passage prevention means is
A gaming machine I9 characterized in that, when the special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the opening and closing means is closed to prevent game balls from flowing into the special area.

Gaming machine I9 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines I7 or I8. That is, when the special area is enabled by the special game switching means, the passage prevention means closes the opening and closing means to prevent the game ball from flowing into the special area. This creates a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot occur, even if the player recognizes that the game ball has flowed into the variable ball entry means, by not allowing the game ball to pass through the enabled special area when the second advantageous state is not to be generated. This has the effect of creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not they are playing in the second advantageous state, and increasing the interest in the game.

In any one of gaming machines I7 to I9,
The opening and closing means is
A first opening/closing means (for example, a front probability change area opening/closing plate 73f) for opening and closing the first special area;
A second opening/closing means (e.g., a deep special area opening/closing plate 74f) for opening and closing the second special area,
The passage prevention means is
When the first special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is opened to allow the game balls to flow into the second special area;
A gaming machine I10 characterized in that, when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the first opening/closing means is opened to allow gaming balls to flow into the first special area.

According to the gaming machine I10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines I7 to I9, the following effect is achieved. That is, the first special area is opened and closed by the first opening and closing means provided in the opening and closing means, and the second special area is opened and closed by the second opening and closing means also provided in the opening and closing means. Then, when the first special area is enabled by the special game switching means, the passage blocking means opens the second opening and closing means to allow the game ball to flow into the second special area. Also, when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the passage blocking means opens the first opening and closing means to allow the game ball to flow into the first special area. As a result, by allowing the game ball to pass through an ineffective special area when the second advantageous state is not generated, even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball into the special area, it is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot be generated. Therefore, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of gaming machines I7 to I10,
The second advantageous state means includes:
A valid pattern determination means (e.g., a probability variable area valid table 202g) for determining whether or not to activate the special area for each unit game using the determination result by the determination means;
An opening/closing pattern determination means (e.g., a probability change area opening/closing table 202f) for determining whether or not to allow a game ball to flow into the special area for each unit game using the determination result by the determination means;
an opening/closing pattern uniformity means (e.g., opening/closing pattern "X1") for uniformly setting the opening/closing pattern of the special area determined by the opening/closing pattern determination means between the first lottery result and the second lottery result;
A gaming machine I11 is characterized in that it is equipped with an effective pattern mismatch means (e.g., effective patterns "A" and "B") that causes the effective pattern of the special area determined by the effective pattern determination means to differ between the first lottery result and the second lottery result.

Gaming machine I11 has the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machines I7 to I10. That is, the effective pattern determination means provided in the second advantageous state means uses the judgment result by the judgment means to determine whether or not to activate the special area for each unit game. Also, the opening and closing pattern determination means also provided in the second advantageous state means uses the judgment result by the judgment means to determine whether or not to allow game balls to flow into the special area for each unit game. Then, the opening and closing pattern uniformity means makes the opening and closing patterns of the special area determined by the opening and closing pattern determination means uniform between the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the effective pattern mismatch means makes the effective patterns of the special area determined by the effective pattern determination means different between the first lottery result and the second lottery result. This has the effect of making the opening and closing patterns of the special area the same for the first and second lottery results, making it impossible to distinguish the lottery results from the opening and closing patterns alone, while making the effective patterns of the special area different for the first and second lottery results, making it difficult to tell whether the second advantageous state will occur, creating a gameplay experience that allows the player to guess whether or not they are playing in the second advantageous state, thereby increasing the fun of the game.

In any one of gaming machines I7 to I11,
A display means (e.g., a special symbol display device 37) for displaying the first lottery result and the second lottery result;
and a result discrimination difficult means for making the first lottery result or the second lottery result difficult to discern based on the display result by the display means (for example, 127 display patterns for "Time Reduction C" and 127 display patterns for "Latent Probability Variation C", each of which is a random pattern with no regularity using 8 LEDs).

Gaming machine I12 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines I7 to I11. That is, the display means displays the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the result difficult to distinguish means makes it difficult to distinguish the first lottery result or the second lottery result based on the display result by the display means. As a result, even if the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed, by making it difficult to distinguish which lottery result it is, if the player is prevented from recognizing that the second advantageous state is occurring, it is not possible to recognize whether the second advantageous state will occur just from the passage of the gaming ball through the special area, and it is also not possible to recognize whether the second advantageous state will occur based on the display result by the display means. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not they are playing in the second advantageous state, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be increased.

In addition, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines B0 to B12, C0 to C12, D0 to D11, E0 to E12, F0 to F14, G0 to G16, H0 to H7, and I0 to I12 may be applied to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A10.

In addition, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A10, C0 to C12, D0 to D11, E0 to E12, F0 to F14, G0 to G16, H0 to H7, and I0 to I12 may be applied to any one of the gaming machines B0 to B12.

In addition, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B12, D0 to D11, E0 to E12, F0 to F14, G0 to G16, H0 to H7, and I0 to I12 may be applied to any one of the gaming machines C0 to C12.

In addition, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B12, C0 to C12, E0 to E12, F0 to F14, G0 to G16, H0 to H7, and I0 to I12 may be applied to any one of the gaming machines D0 to D11.

In addition, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0-A10, B0-B12, C0-C12, D0-D11, F0-F14, G0-G16, H0-H7, and I0-I12 may be applied to any one of the gaming machines E0-E12.

In addition, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B12, C0 to C12, D0 to D11, E0 to E12, G0 to G16, H0 to H7, and I0 to I12 may be applied to any one of the gaming machines F0 to F14.

In addition, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B12, C0 to C12, D0 to D11, E0 to E12, F0 to F14, H0 to H7, and I0 to I12 may be applied to any one of the gaming machines G0 to G16.

In addition, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0-A10, B0-B12, C0-C12, D0-D11, E0-E12, F0-F14, G0-G16, and I0-I12 may be applied to any one of the gaming machines H0-H7.

In addition, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B12, C0 to C12, D0 to D11, E0 to E12, F0 to F14, G0 to G16, and H0 to H7 may be applied to any one of the gaming machines I0 to I12.

In these cases, further benefits can be achieved by applying each configuration.

Gaming machine J1 is a slot machine in any one of gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B12, C0 to C12, D0 to D11, E0 to E12, F0 to F14, G0 to G16, H0 to H7, and I0 to I12. Among them, the basic configuration of a slot machine is "a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for dynamically displaying a sequence of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, and equipped with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to a player, the dynamic display of the identification information being started due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., an operation lever), the dynamic display of the identification information being stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (a stop button) or by the passage of a predetermined time, and the necessary condition being that the definitive identification information at the time of the stop is a specific identification information." In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins, medals, etc.

A gaming machine J2 is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B12, C0 to C12, D0 to D11, E0 to E12, F0 to F14, G0 to G16, H0 to H7, and I0 to I12. Among them, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine includes a control handle, which is operated to launch a ball into a predetermined gaming area, and the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined time, as a necessary condition that the ball enters (or passes through) an operating port arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (a large winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the ball to win, and a value (including not only prize balls but also data written to a magnetic card) according to the number of winning balls is given.

Gaming machine J3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine in any one of gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B12, C0 to C12, D0 to D11, E0 to E12, F0 to F14, G0 to G16, H0 to H7, and I0 to I12. Among them, the basic configuration of the combined gaming machine is "a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for dynamically displaying a sequence of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then displaying the identification information in a definite manner, in which the variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., an operation lever), the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button) or by the passage of a predetermined time, and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is a specific identification information, using balls as a gaming medium, and requiring a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the identification information, and configured to pay out a large number of balls when the special gaming state is generated."

10. Pachinko machines (amusement machines)
37 Special symbol display device (part of the display means)
37b Second LED group (part of the result discrimination means)
64b Special Figure 1 winning hole (part of the ball entry means)
65 Variable winning device (part of the variable winning means, part of the first variable winning means)
72 Guide flow path (part of the first flow path, part of the flow path)
73 Right side probability change area (part of special area, part of first special area)
73a Right variable area opening and closing plate (part of the first opening and closing means, part of the opening and closing means)
73b Right variable area solenoid (part of the effective time passing means, part of the passing prevention means, part of the driving means, part of the main opening execution means)
73e Front side probability change area (part of special area, part of first special area)
73f Front probability change area opening and closing plate (part of the opening and closing means, part of the first opening and closing means)
73g Front variable area solenoid (part of the pass means when active, part of the pass blocking means)
74 Left side special area (part of special area, part of first special area)
74a Left variable area opening and closing plate (part of the second opening and closing means, part of the opening and closing means)
74b Left variable area solenoid (part of the effective time passing means, part of the passing prevention means, part of the driving means, part of the main opening execution means)
74e Back side probability change area (part of special area, part of second special area)
74f Deep probability change area opening and closing plate (part of the opening and closing means, part of the second opening and closing means)
74g Deep probability change area solenoid (part of the effective time passing means, part of the passing prevention means)
75 Discharge passage (part of discharge means)
75a: innermost discharge passage (part of the second passing means, part of the discharge means)
76 Second variable winning device (part of the second variable winning means)
77 Communication passage (part of second flow path)
77a Junction (part of junction means)
78a Motor for opening and closing the variable area (part of the drive means)
78c Variable area opening and closing plate (part of the opening and closing means)
81 Third pattern display device (part of the notification means, part of the abnormality notification means)
110 Main control device (part of the determination means)
112 Launch control device (part of specific interval launch means)
112a Ball launch unit (part of launch means)
201 MPU (part of game progress stopping means, part of game restarting means)
202a Jackpot random number table (part of the determination means)
202g: Probability change area effective table (part of effective pattern determination means, part of effective pattern mismatch means, part of multiple timing inflow means, part of predetermined timing effective means)
202f probability change area opening and closing table (part of opening and closing pattern determination means, part of opening and closing pattern same means, part of multiple timing inflow means, part of pseudo waiting execution means, part of main opening execution means, part of provisional opening execution means, part of provisional opening judgment means, part of main opening determination means)
203d First reserved ball storage area (part of information acquisition means)
203g Right probability change effective flag (part of special area switching means, part of unit game effective means)
203h Left probability change effective flag (part of special area switching means, part of unit game effective means)
203i probability change transition flag (part of the second advantageous state means)
S103 Big win processing (part of advantageous state means, part of unit game execution means)
S415 Big win end process (part of game state change means)
S436 (part of the first drive pattern means, part of the second drive pattern means)
S452 (part of effective delay means)
S461 (standby game execution means)
S491 (Part of effective means after the expiration of the period)
S511 (part of alternating ball entry means)
S521 (Part of the first direction driving means, part of the second direction driving means)
S1204 (part of the suggestion notification non-execution means, part of the effective suggestion non-execution means)

Claims (1)

A launching means for launching a game ball;
A ball entry means capable of entering the balls launched by the launching means;
An information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information resulting from the game ball entering the ball entry means;
A determination means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter;
an advantageous state means for changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state by using a result of the judgment by the judgment means;
A special area through which the game ball that has flowed into the variable ball entry means can pass;
A gaming machine including a second advantageous state means capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state generated by the advantageous state means,
The advantageous state means includes:
A special area switching means for switching whether or not the special area is enabled,
The second advantageous state means includes:
When the game ball passes through the special area that is set to be effective by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is generated,
When the game ball passes through the special area that is not set to be effective by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is not generated.
A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a multiple timing inflow means for causing gaming balls to flow into the special area that has been validly set at multiple timings during the advantageous state when the second advantageous state is generated.

Images